
rf- 

/ 



,0 o 


5 N ° ? f 0 ' , , 0 \ \^ V , * , , \. * •■» NO ’ v . 0 %. 

0 *■ a c> V «, s V.^^ ^ .9 *°/- c* 

‘V * *i> „<V * iv^/>.% ^ 



w/y --» -* v .* x * 
f/0>? * Kp t ^ 

n 

\ u °^. 

> _ 6 

*\<0° *• 


'^, v * 
\°9, 


A®’ ♦.,!•^ »., N 0» ^ C C 

A 0‘ +''*°*_^ \> s^VU > .0^* * v<r °/- 




vV 






'p 

~ ^ VW 9 ^ ^ ', W,‘ 

»**»/<'•*'V\.> , ,%'°'> y x ^°. 






■X V 
* ^0 N 



$°<. 


.y> V 

o o' 







A -&' 

i\> ^ ^^ ^ , ft /j- ■/ , 5.> 

P " /wjK; " 9 - ' V ' • C ^ ^ 

,x 


0 o \ 


4 \ C^V '/ ''■ •’"■ 'V 

.\\ f 0 N c , * * S 





7 

a* aO- 



.O 

,V* * v 1 8 K 'O, v \ 

0 **mc* ■% ^ * 

* w :$&%&« +*■ >* 



\° °^. 


*9'- *'••, \ r'” /!'';;'*% 4 ’ 14 0 ' q* 0 ’, 

\ P v- <a <5, « ></ ■/ ■> ~. * -A - ■ ' __. 

<;• » '/\ "' lo n & .V- ^ -'^ « .>> 4y f .fi. 1 ^ 

xf* \\' *- - *>• 

,r> V 

y </*, 



,9 <: 





o ^, 

r, <f> 7 ^ * *» 




P‘ ^ 


0” .V 


< y o a V ■* . 9 o 

V 1 8 <■ ”9p A' ( 0 M C . ^ 

s' 1 * j* * 

“ 1 * A*, .-i N ' 

., : 9 v : ■ ,-■!. &*. "oo' .'- 















» « ^ * o n 0 n.^ 0 . * a i a * \^ ^ * g o o <C 

v'*^/, > A* * ' * O , %> 81 v> ' S 7 ❖ O^ 

<* ~ a"v t- <? 55 * -70 ^ y -X' 

* 'K<u o * j{\% a "■ V n ,v * ^ :j icm * „-v 

cl^ . i\W,? ,; K //h c </> *\V 




y O » A "* /\ 




>* V 

SH^L ♦ O 0 

■0 & 

7 /lLW "' cC^ / c^ 

—rJJr'2* ❖ \' ©?„ •'' 

C'_ ^ u "S Cl <~£> V 

* „ . 1 » cv^ V* 

Cb V <^ ' X>» * ^ 

«“®* v ^ .v * fS®»\ «X ,^ v .Wa; > 

</> 


^SM, / V ' < y 4 
* ^ ^ % 


* ,v v ^ 

% ,* V 



0 V * ^ * 0 /■ 'o 


> </> 


z. 


.fc‘ ° 

, ,s’ , 0 ' <* y o * X * A o s S * ,0 ^ 

•0 V t * v * . <?U ,-a^ c» N 0_ , 0 " v * l,, < y* 



0 V 



r G A " ^>- ®jSpl0^ -> b Jt • *• 

O V) * Jfsjgfi?TBKN2#' 1 4 . y..- :>T /l <1 0(3 0 . 

X 0 °X. ' S ^ 

J, x A J^sV- * Q O *- O' ci- y * 

‘••'*^>* a " 0 ’/ *"'V’ o"^' e >* s » # ’/ 

.O. ^ ^f\' ,» v 1 /) ^ +<' ,V, **• a •>*. 

g—i r- ^ C.^ ^ \ ^ - ' • > O ^ ,AV 0 

^ « ^SWW/7/1 y ^ ’\' 

_V> ^ 

•* v» 



A? ^ 
-V J ^> 



* '>io (*■'! 

^ <X S 


- ,^ v % : 

' o, ., * A '' j ^'f^.:' y : < 1 t» .A ^3 

^ y' G */°-, c<y .' l "’-^ A^ x c» N<; *. Y ' 

■ o ^ c^SN\ . ^ O b v 


■^aA :«i- ^ V* ^ 

\ '»\“ ^ * 

K i' r ~ * S) r~» i- -<— A. 

o. « „. a * ,s; 



•ON® »l v ' 17 8 1 A \\ 

* %.<a> *^\Va^ , 

* v 


^ A 
r- \X' 

^ ^ ’ V z ^ 

> o' 

* ^ <*> O 

* . s s ^ y 0, .1 ^ A "o,' s ' .G v 

-*0> v* v H^ ^ C 0 V v * v 





0 * * 



*/- » 

^ v : 

y v r. '© V •* • ’.*/. v.. ,\*' 1 ' * ■ v< V v / S **>•» 




y ,c 



J. A- 

' ^ 1 } CsfSjs r 

>. A \ N • ' ' •% - 

^ ** ? •,s«-4 


0" s' 


'I--- * <<■ -x' 

sX V " -Ir- mjigs' ^ ^ <*V 

••• ^ / te.- ^ , * / ‘ • 

A A.: 1- LJ -'/>A ^ ^ _ 


>' <s 













































































































































































% 


I 























































» 

































*■ 




















- 















































































































































































































































STORIES 


OF 

ADVENTURE 


BY 

JULES VERNE. 


WITH 6 8 FULL-PAGE ILLUSTRATIONS. 


I. 

MERIDIANA ; The Adventures of Three Englishmen and Three 
Russians in South Africa. 


II. 

A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


V 


NEW YORK: 

SCRIBNER, ARMSTRONG & COV 

1874. 





'Nrs-n^ 


* 


Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1874, by 
SCRIBNER, ARMSTRONG & CO., 

In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 


John F. Trow & Son, 
Printers and Bookbinders, 
205-213 East iith St., 
NEW YORK. 




MERIDIANA 


THE ADVENTURES 

OF 

Thbke Englishmen and Three Russians 


SOUTH AFRICA. 

B Y 

JULES VERNE. 


Translated from the French. With numerous Illustrations . 


NEW YORK: 

SCRIBNER, ARMSTRONG & CO., 

654 BROADWAY. 

1874. 


Works of Jules Verne , 

PUBLISHED BY 

Scribner, Armstrong & Co. 

THE COMPLETE AND AUTHORIZED EDITIONS. 
CAUTION. 

The public are cautioned against any editions of the works named below 
which do not bear the imprint of SCRIBNER, ARMSTRONG & CO. 
Any edition of these particular works published under other imprints are 
pirated, and cannot fail to be inferior in every particular . Editions 
bearing our imprint are issued under a direct arrangement with the 
French and English publishers of JULES VERNE, and are authorized 
in text and complete in illustration * 


MERIDIANA: 

The Adventures of Three Englishmen and Three Rus¬ 
sians in South Africa. By Jules Verne. Translated from the 
French. With 48 illustrations. One vol. i2mo, cloth, gilt side and 
back. Price, 75 cents. The only edition authorized in text and 
complete in illustrations. 

FROM THE EARTH TO THE MOON 

In 97 Hours and 20 Minutes and a Trip Around It. Eighty 
full-page illustrations, beautifully bound in cloth, black and gilt. 
Price, $3.00. 

A JOURNEY to the CENTRE of the EARTH. 
Translated from the French of Jules Verne, author of “ From the 
Earth to the Moon Direct ,” “ The Mysterious Island &c., &c. 
With fifty-two illustrations by Riou. 

Popular edition , 20 illustrations , 75 c. Complete edition , 53 illustra¬ 
tions, on super-calendered paper , handsomely bound in cloth , black and 
gilt, beveled boards , $3.00. 

SCRIBNER, ARMSTRONG & CO., 

654 BROADWAY, NEW YORK 





CONTENTS. 

* 

CHAPTER I. 

PAGB 

On the Banks of the Orange River. . 

CHAPTER II. 

Official Presentations. . 3 

CHAPTER III. 

The Land Journey. . 

CHAPTER IV. 

A Few Words about the “ Metre”.. 

CHAPTER V. 

A Hottentot Village .. 39 

CHAPTER VI. 

Better Acquaintance ••••••••.49 

CHAPTER VII. 

The Base of the Triangle.59 

CHAPTER VIII. 

The Twenty-fourth Meridian . . • . . . • 69 








IV 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER IX. 


FAGB 


The Kraal. •••76 

CHAPTER X. 


The Rapid 


. 89 


CHAPTER XI. 

A Missing Companion. 96 

CHAPTER XII. 

A Station to Sir John’s liking.. . 106 


CHAPTER XIII. 


Pacification by Fire 


117 


CHAPTER XIV. 

A Declaration of War.. . . 127 


CHAPTER XV. 


A Geometric Progression 


CHAPTER XVI. 


Danger in Disguise 


CHAPTER XVII. 


An Unexpected Blight 


CHAPTER XVIII. 


The Desert • 


136 


146 


154 


167 


CHAPTER XIX. 


Science Undaunted 


179 














CONTENTS. 


V 


Standing a Siege 

CHAPTER XX. 

#AGB 

Suspense . 

CHAPTER XXI. 

Hide and Seek . 

CHAPTER XXII. 

Homewaed Bound 

CHAPTER XXIIL 


. 225 












“ *, - 










•j 


X 






•••- - . ■ • 














* 








■t 






















\ 














. 



















. 

* lA 




' 











































































































LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Frontispiece. 

William Emery and the Bushman . , , . # . .8 

At length an exclamation of the Bushman made his heart beat • • 18 

Meeting of Members of the Expedition.20 


u The Hunter Mokoum,” said William Emery, presenting his Com* 


panion.. 

All these Objects were deposited on the Beach . • • . . 26 

The Mission Home Establishment.44 

Chief Moulibahan..46 

William Emery and Michael Zorn in advance of the Expedition • *53 

The Bushman pointing to the Plain.58 

Commencement of the Geodesic Operations . • . . . .61 

Measuring the Arc of the Meridian.69 

Taking the Measurements. •...69 

The Astronomers at Work. ..72 

Encampment under an immense Baobab ...... 74 

The Hunters. ...80 

The Elephant and the Dog.86 

“ He is ours ! he is ours ! ”.87 

The Hippopotamus did not quit his hold, but shook the Boat as a Dog 

would a Hare.95 

‘‘There he is,” cried Mokoum. 103 

A missing Companion.. , 104 

It was a deep Grotto, strewn with Bones and stained with Blood • .112 

The Entrance to the Lion’s Den.112 

A Ball from the Bushman arrested the Lioness . . . . .113 

“ Well,” said Mokoum, “ I hope you like our African Partridges” . 116 
















viil LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 

rAGB 

Sir John was soon asleep.• 124 

The Forest on Fire.125 

4 ‘ War is declared between England and Russia”.133 

The Parting of Emery and Zorn.. 135 

“ The Rhinoceros !” exclaimed Sir John.141 

The Advance of the Caravan.148 

The Hunters glided through the Creepers and Brushwood • . .151 

The empty Oryx Skin. .152 

Emery and two Natives struck by Lightning.158 

A strange Cloud.161 

Crossing the Desert.169 

“ The Ngami! the Ngami !”.172 

The English come to the relief of the Russians.178 

On Guard on Mount Scorzef.189 

An Attack on Mount Scorzef.193 

The Rice of the Bochjesmen. .196 

Watching for the Signal from Mount Volquiria.204 

The Steamboat leaving Mount Scorzef.210 

Palander robbed by the Chacma.217 

Palander’s Combat with the Chacma.. 

Descending the Zambesi.229 

Adieu to Mokoum.. 

The Natives regarded with superstitious admiration the smoking vessel . 230 





















MERIDIANA • 

THE ADVENTURES OF THREE ENGLISHMEN 
AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


CHAPTER I. 

ON THE BANKS OF THE ORANGE RIVER. 

On the 27th of January, 1854, two men lay stretched at 
the foot of an immense weeping willow, chatting, and at 
the same time watching most attentively the waters of the 
Orange River. This river, the Groote of the Dutch, and 
the Gariep of the Hottentots, may well vie with the other 
three great arteries of Africa—the Nile, the Niger, and the 
Zambesi. Like those, it has its periodical risings, its rapids 
and cataracts. Travellers whose names are known over 
part of its course, Thompson, Alexander, and Burchell, 
have each in their turn praised the clearness of its waters, 
and the beauty of its shores. 

At this point the river, as it approached the Duke of 



MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


3 


York Mountains, offered a magnificent spectacle to the 
view. Insurmountable rocks, imposing masses of stone, 
and trunks of trees that had become mineralized by the 
action of the weather, deep caverns, impenetrable forests, 
not yet disturbed by the settler’s axe, all these, shut in by 
a background formed by the mountains of the Gariep, made 
up a scene matchless in its magnificence. There, too, the 
waters of the river, on account of the extreme narrowness 
of their bed, and the sudden falling away of the soil, rushed 
down from a height of 400 feet. Above the fall there were 
only surging sheets of water, broken here and there by 
points of rock wreathed with green boughs; below, there 
was only a dark whirlpool of tumultuous waters, crowned 
with a thick cloud of damp vapour, and striped with all 
the colours of the rainbow. From this gulf there arose a 
deafening roar, increased and varied by the echoes of the 
valley. 

Of these two men, who had evidently been brought into 
this part of South Africa by the chances of an exploration, 
one lent only a vague attention to the beauties of nature 
that were opened to his view. This indifferent traveller was 
a hunting bushman, a fine type of that brave, bright-eyed, 
rapidly-gesticulating race of men, who lead a wandering life 
in the woods. Bushman, a word derived from the Dutch 
“ Bochjesman,” is literally “ a man of the bushes,” and is 
applied to the wandering tribes that scour the country in 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


3 


the N.W. of Cape Colony. Not a family of these bushmen 
is sedentary; they pass their lives in roaming over the re¬ 
gion lying between the Orange River and the mountains of 
the East, in pillaging farms, and in destroying the crops of 
the overbearing colonists, by whom they have been driven 
back towards the interior of the country, where more rocks 
than plants abound. 

This bushman, a man of about forty years of age, was 
very tall, and evidently possessed great muscular strength, 
for even when at rest his body presented the attitude of 
action. The clearness, ease, and freedom of his movements 
stamped him as an energetic character, a man cast in the 
same mould as the celebrated “ Leather-stocking,” the hero 
of the Canadian prairies, though perhaps possessing less 
calmness than Cooper’s favourite hunter, as could be seen 
by the transient deepening of colour in his face, whenever he 
was animated by any unusual emotion. 

The bushman was no longer a savage like the rest of his 
race, the ancient Laquas ; for, born of an English father 
and a Hottentot mother, the half-breed, through his associa¬ 
tion with strangers, had gained more than he had lost, and 
spoke the paternal tongue fluently. His costume, half- 
Hottentot, half-Eui opean, consisted of a red flannel shirt, 
a loose coat and breeches of antelope hide, and leggings 
made of the skin of a wild cat; from his neck hung a little 
bag containing a knife, a pipe, and some tobacco j he wore 





4 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


on his head a kind of skull-cap of sheep-skin ; a belt, made 
from the thick thong of some wild animal, encircled his 
waist; and on his naked wrists were rings of ivory, 
wrought with remarkable skill. From his shoulders flowed 
a “ kross,” a kind of hanging mantle, cut out of a tiger’s 
skin, and falling as low as the knees. A dog of native 
breed was sleeping near him, while he himself was smoking 
a bone pipe in quick puffs, giving unequivocal signs of im¬ 
patience. 

“Come, let’s be calm, Mokoum,” said his interlocutor. 
“ You are truly the most impatient of mortals whenever 
you are not hunting ; but do understand, my worthy com¬ 
panion, that we can’t change what is. Those whom we 
are expecting will come sooner or later—to-morrow, it 
not to-day.” 

The bushman S’companion was a young man, from twenty- 
five to twenty-six years of age, and quite a contrast to him. 
His calm temperament was shown in every action; and it 
could be decided without a moment’s hesitation that he 
was an Englishman. His much too homely costume proved 
him to be unaccustomed to travelling. He gave one the 
idea of a clerk who had wandered into a savage country, 
and one looked involuntarily to see if he carried a pen 
behind his ear, like a cashier, clerk, accountant, or some 
other variety of the great family of the bureaucracy. 

In truth, this young man was not a traveller, but a 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


5 


distinguished savant , William Emery, an astronomer at¬ 
tached to the Observatory at the Cape—a useful establish¬ 
ment, which has for a long time rendered true services to 
science. 

The scholar, rather out of his element, perhaps, in this 
uninhabited region of South Africa, several hundred miles 
from Cape Town, could hardly manage to curb the im¬ 
patience of his companion. 

“Mr. Emery,” replied the hunter in good English, 
“ here we have been for eight days at the place appointed 
on the Orange, the cataract of Morgheda. It is indeed 
a long time since it has befallen a member of my 
family to remain eight days in one place : you forget 
that we are rovers, and that our feet burn at lingering 
here.” 

“ My friend Mokoum,” replied the astronomer, “ those 
we are waiting for are coming from England, and surely 
we can allow them eight days of grace: we must take into 
account the length of the passage, and the hindrances 
which a steam-vessel must meet with in ascending the 
Orange; and, in short, the thousand difficulties belonging 
to such an undertaking. We have been told to make every 
preparation for a journey of exploration in South Africa, 
and that being done, to come here to the Falls of Morgheda 
and wait for my colleague, Colonel Everest of the Cam¬ 
bridge Observatory. Well, here are the Falls of Morgheda, 





6 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


we are at the place appointed, and we are waiting: what 
more do you want, my worthy bushman ?” 

The hunter doubtless did want more, for his fingers 
played feverishly with the lock of his rifle, an excellent 
Manton, a weapon of precision with conical shot, and 
which could bring down a wild cat or an antelope at a 
distance of eight or nine hundred yards. Thus it may be 
seen that the bushman had put aside the quiver of aloes 
and the poisoned darts of his fellow-countrymen for the use 
of European weapons. 

“ But are you not mistaken, Mr. Emery ? ” replied Mo- 
koum. “ Is it really at the Falls of Morgheda, and towards 
the end of this month of January, that they have appointed 
to meet you ?” 

“ Yes, my friend,” quietly answered William Emery, 
and here is the letter from Mr. Airy, the director of the 
Greenwich Observatory, which will show you that I am not 
mistaken.” 

The bushman took the letter that his companion gave 
him. He turned it over and over like a man not very 
familiar with the mysteries of penmanship ; then giving it 
back to William Emery, he said, “Tell me again what the 
blotted piece of paper says.” 

The young astronomer, endowed with a patience proof 
against every thing, began again, for the twentieth time, 
the story he had so often told to his friend the hunter. At 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 7 


the end of the foregoing year, William Emery had received 
a letter telling him of the approaching arrival of Colonel 
Everest, and an international scientific commission in South¬ 
ern Africa. What the plans of the commission were, and 
why it came to the extremity of the continent of Africa, 
Emery could not say, Mr. Airy’s letter being silent on that 
point; but following the instructions that he had received, 
he hastened to Lattakoo, one of the most northern stations 
in the Hottentot country, to prepare waggons, provisions, 
and, in short, every thing that could be wanted for the vic¬ 
tualling of a Bochjesman caravan. Then, as he knew the 
reputation of the native hunter, Mokoum, who had accom¬ 
panied Anderson in his hunting expeditions in Western 
Africa, and the intrepid David Livingstone on his first 
journey of exploration to Lake Ngami and the falls of 
the Zambesi, he offered him the command of this same 
caravan. 

This done, it was arranged that the bushman, who knew 
the country perfectly, should lead William Emery along 
the banks of the Orange to the Morgheda Falls, the place 
appointed for the scientific commission to join them. This 
commission was to take its passage in the British frigate 
“ Augusta,” to reach the mouth of the Orange on the 
western coast of Africa, as high as Cape Voltas, and to 
ascend the river as far as the cataracts. William Emery 
and Mokoum had therefore brought a waggon, which they 



8 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


had left at the bottom of the valley, to carry the strangers 
and their baggage to Lattakoo, unless they preferred 
getting there by the Orange and its affluents, after they 
had avoided the Falls of Morgheda by a land journey of 
some miles. 

This story ended, and at length really impressed on the 
bushman’s mind, he advanced to the edge of the gulf to 
whose bottom the foaming river threw itself with a crash : 
the astronomer followed, for there a projecting point com¬ 
manded a view of the river, below the cataract, for a distance 
of several miles. For some minutes Mokoum and his 
companion gazed attentively at the part of the river where 
it resumed its tranquillity about a quarter of a mile below 
them, but not an object, either boat or pirogue, disturbed 
its course. It was then three o’clock. The month of 
January here corresponds to the July of northern countries, 
and the sun, almost vertical in lat. 29° heated the atmo¬ 
sphere till the thermometer stood at 105° Fahrenheit in the 
shade. If it had not been for the westerly breeze, which 
moderated the heat a little, the temperature would have 
been unbearable for any but a bushman. Still, the young 
astronomer, with his cool temperament, all bone and all 
nerves, did not feel it too much : the thick foliage of the 
trees which overhung the abyss protected him from the 
direct attacks of the sun’s rays. Not a bird enlivened the 
solitude during these hot hours of the day; not an animal 





William Emery and the Bushman.— [Page 8.] 


"BUlI.'ilJ'U 









































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


9 


left the cool shade of the bushes to trust itself along the 
glades ; not a sound would have been heard in this deserted 
region, even if the cataract had not filled the whole air with 
its roar. 

After gazing for ten minutes, Mokoum turned to William 
Emery, stamping impatiently with his large foot; his pene¬ 
trating eyes had discovered nothing. 

“Supposing your people don’t come?” he asked the 
astronomer. 

“They’ll come, my brave hunter,” answered William 
Emery: “ they are men of their word, and punctual, like 
all astronomers. Besides, what fault do you find with 
them ? The letter says they are to arrive at the end of 
January; this is the 27th, and these gentlemen have still a 
right to four more days before they need to reach the 
Morgheda Falls.” 

“ And supposing they have not come at the end of those 
four days ? ” asked the bushman. 

“ Well! then, master hunter, there will be a chance for 
us to show our patience, for we will wait for them until I have 
certain proof that they are not coming at all.” 

“ By our god Ko ! ” cried the bushman in a sonorous 
voice, “ you are a man who would wait until the Gariep had 
emptied all its roaring waters into that abyss! ” 

“ No, hunter, no,” replied Emery in his ever quiet tone; 
“ but we must let reason govern our actions ; and what does 



IO 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


reason tell us ? This :—that if Colonel Everest and his com¬ 
panions, wearied with a tiresome journey, in want perhaps, 
and lost in this lonely country, were not to find us at the 
place of rendezvous, we should be to blame in every way. 
If any thing went wrong, the responsibility would rest on 
us; we ought, therefore, to stay at our post as long as it is 
our duty to do so. And besides, we want for nothing here : 
our waggon is waiting for us at the bottom of the valley, 
and gives us shelter at night; we have plenty of provisions ; 
4titure here is magnificent and worthy of our admiration; 
and it is quite a new pleasure to me to spend a few days in 
these splendid forests on the banks of this matchless river. 
As for you, Mokoum, what can you want more? Game, 
both hairy and feathered, abounds in the forests, and your 
rifle keeps us supplied with venison. Hunt, my brave hunter! 
kill time by killing deer and buffaloes ! Go, my good bush- 
man ; I 11 watch for the loiterers meanwhile, and your feet, 
at any rate, will run no risk of taking root.” 

The hunter thought the astronomer’s advice was good, 
and decided that he would go for a few hours and beat the 
neighbouring bushes and brushwood. Lions, hyenas, and 
leopards would not disturb such a Nimrod as he, so well 
accustomed to the African forests. He whistled to his dog 
Top, an animal of the hyena breed from the desert of 
Kalahari, and a descendant of that race of which the 
Balabas formerly made pointers. The intelligent creature, 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND 


THREE RUSSIANS. 


II 


as impatient, seemingly, as his master, bounded up, and 
showed by his joyous barking how much he was gratified 
at the bushman’s intention. Soon both man and dog dis¬ 
appeared among the thick masses of wood which crowned the 
background of the cataract. William Emeiy, now alone, 
again stretched himself at the foot of the willow, and while 
he was waiting for the heat to send him to sleep, began to 
think over his actual position. Here he was, far away from 
any inhabited spot, on the banks of the Orange river, 
a river as yet but little explored. He was waiting for 
Europeans, fellow-countrymen who had left their homes to 
run the risks of a distant expedition. But what was the 
expedition for? What scientific problem could it want to 
solve in the deserts of South Africa? What observation 
could it be trying to take in lat. 30° S.? That was just 
what Mr. Airy, the director of the Greenwich Observatory, 
did not tell in his letter. As for Emery himself, they asked 
for his co-operation as for that of a scientific man who was 
familiar with the climate of those southern latitudes, and as 
he was openly engaged in scientific labours, he was quite at 
the disposal of his colleagues in the United Kingdom. 

As the young astronomer lay musing over all these things, 
and asking himself a thousand questions which he could not 
answer, his eyelids became heavy, and at length he slept 
soundly. When he awoke, the sun was already hidden 
behind the western hills, whose picturesque outline stood 






12 


meridiana; the adventures of 


out sharply against the bright horizon. Some gnawings of 
hunger told him that supper-time was near ; it was, in fact, 
six o’clock, and just the hour for returning to the waggon 
at the bottom of the valley. At that very moment a report 
resounded from a grove of arborescent heaths, from twelve 
to fifteen feet high, which was growing along the slope of 
the hills on the right. Almost immediately the bushman 
and Top made their appearance at the edge of the wood, 
the former dragging behind him the animal that he had 
just shot. “ Come, come, master purveyor ! ” cried Emery, 
“ what have you got for supper ? ” 

“A springbok, Mr. William,” replied the hunter, throwing 
down an animal with horns curved like a lyre. It was a 
kind of antelope, more generally known by the name of 
“ leaping buck,” and which is to be met with in every part 
of South Africa. It is a charming animal, with its cinna¬ 
mon-coloured back, and its croup covered with tufts of silky 
hair of a dazzling whiteness, whilst its under part is in 
shades of chestnut brown ; its flesh, always excellent eating, 
was on this occasion to form the evening repast. 

The hunter and the astronomer, lifting the beast by 
means of a pole placed across their shoulders, now left the 
head of the cataract, and in half an hour reached their 
encampment in a narrow gorge of the valley, where the 
waggon, guarded by two Bochjesman drivers, was waiting 
for them. 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


13 


CHAPTER II. 

OFFICIAL PRESENTATIONS. 

For the next three days, the 28th, 29th, and 30th of 
January, Mokoum and William Emery never left the place 
of rendezvous. While the bushman, carried away by his 
hunting instincts, pursued the game and deer in the wooded 
district lying near the cataract, the young astronomer 
watched the river. The sight of this grand, wild nature 
enchanted him, and filled his soul with new emotions. 
Accustomed as he was to bend over his figures and cata¬ 
logues day and night, hardly ever leaving the eye-piece 
of his telescope, watching the passage of stars across the 
meridian and their occupations, he delighted in the open- 
air life in the almost impenetrable woods which covered the 
slope of the hills, and on the lonely peaks that were sprin¬ 
kled by the spray from the Morgheda as with a damp dust. 
It was joy to him to take in the poetry of these vast soli¬ 
tudes, and to refresh his mind, so wearied with his mathe- 





meridiana; the adventures of 


14 


matical speculations; and so he beguiled the tediousness 
of his waiting, and became a new man, both in mind and 
body. Thus did the novelty of his situation explain his 
unvarying patience, which the bushman could not share in 
the least; so there were continually on the part of Mokoum 
the same recriminations, and on the part of Emery the 
same quiet answers, which, however, did not quiet the 
nervous hunter in the smallest degree. 

And now the 31st of January had come, the last day 
fixed in Airy’s letter. If the expected party did not then 
arrive, Emery would be in a very embarrassing position; 
the delay might be indefinitely prolonged. How long, 
then, ought he to wait ? 

“ Mr. William,” said the hunter, “ why shouldn’t we go 
to meet these strangers ? We cannot miss them; there is 
only one road, that by the river, and if they are coming up, 
as your bit of paper says they are, we are sure to meet 
them.” 

“ That is a capital idea of yours, Mokoum,” replied the 
astronomer: “ we will go on and look out below the falls. 
We can get back to the encampment by the side valleys 
in the south. But tell me, my good bushman, you know 
nearly the whole course of the river, do you not ? ” 

“Yes, sir,” answered the hunter, “I have ascended it 
twice from Cape Voltas to its juncture with the Hart on 
the frontier of the Transvaal Republic.” 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


!5 


“ And it is navigable all the way, except at the Falls of 
Morgheda ? ” 

“Just so, sir,” replied the bushman. “But I should add 
that at the end of the dry season the Orange has not much 
water till within five or six miles of its mouth ; there is then 
a bar, where the swell from the west breaks very violently.” 

“ That doesn’t matter,” answered the astronomer, “ be¬ 
cause at the time that our friends want to land it will be 
all right. There is nothing then to keep them back, so 
they will come.” 

The bushman said nothing, but shouldering his gun, and 
whistling to Top, he led the way down the narrow path 
which met the river again 400 feet lower. 

It was then nine o’clock in the morning, and the two 
explorers (for such they might truly be called) followed the 
river by its left bank. Their way did not offer the smooth 
and easy surface of an embankment or towing-path, for 
the river-banks were covered with brushwood, and quite 
hidden in a bower of every variety of plants; and the fes¬ 
toons of the " cynauchum filiform,” mentioned by Burchell, 
hanging from tree to tree, formed quite a network of ver¬ 
dure in their path; the bushman’s knife, however, did not 
long remain inactive, and he cut down the obstructive 
branches without mercy. William Emery drank in the 
fragrant air, here especially impregnated with the camphor¬ 
like odour of the countless blooms of the diosma. Happily 




meridiana; the adventures of 


i 6 


there were sometimes more open places along the bank 
devoid of vegetation, where the river flowed quietly, and 
abounded in fish, and these enabled the hunter and his 
companion to make better progress westward, so. .that by 
eleven o’clock they had gone about four miles. The wind 
being in the west, the roar of the cataract could not be 
heard at that distance, but on the other hand, all sounds 
below the falls were very distinct. William Emery and the 
hunter, as they stood, could see straight down the river for 
three or four miles. Chalk cliffs, 200 feet high, overhung 
and shut in its bed on either side. 

“ Let us stop and rest here,” said the astronomer; “ I 
haven’t your hunter’s legs, Mokoum, and am more used to 
the starry paths of the heavens than to those on terra firma ; 
so let us have a rest; we can see three or four miles down 
the river from here, and if the steamer should turn that last 
bend we are sure to see it.” 

The young astronomer seated himself against a giant 
euphorbia, forty feet high, and in that position looked down 
the river, while the hunter, little used to sitting, continued 
to walk along the bank, and Top roused up clouds of wild 
birds, to which, however, his master gave no heed. They 
had been here about half an hour, when William Emery 
noticed that Mokoum, who was standing about 100 feet 
below him, gave signs of a closer attention. Was it likely 
that he had seen the long-expected boat ? The astronomer, 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 17 


leaving his mossy couch, started for the spot where the 
hunter stood, and came up to him in a very few moments. 

“Do you see any thing, Mokoum ?” he asked. 

“ I see nothing, Mr. William,” answered the bushman, 
“ but it seems to me that there is an unusual murmur down 
the river, different to the natural sounds that are so familiar 
to my ears.” And then, telling his companion to be quiet, 
he lay down with his ear on the ground, and listened atten¬ 
tively. In a few minutes he got up, and shaking his head, 
said,— 

“ I was mistaken; the noise I thought I heard was 
nothing but the breeze among the leaves or the murmur 
of the water over the stones at the edge ; and yet-” 

The hunter listened again, but again heard nothing. 

“ Mokoum,” then said Mr. William Emery, “ if the noise 
you thought you heard is caused by the machinery of a 
steamboat, you would hear better by stooping to the level 
of the river; water always conducts sound more clearly 
and quickly than air.” 

“You are right, Mr. William,” answered Mokoum, “for 
more than once I have found out the passage of a hippo¬ 
potamus across the river in that way.” 

The bushman went nimbly down the bank, clinging to 
the creepers and tufts ot grass on his way. When he got 
to the level of the river, he went in to his knees, and stoop¬ 
ing down, laid his ear close to the water. 

C 




i8 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


“ Yes ! ” he exclaimed, in a few minutes, “I was not mis- 
taken ; there is a sound, some miles down, as if the waters 
were being violently beaten; it is a continual monotonous 
splashing which is introduced into the current.” 

Is it like a screw?” asked the astronomer. 

“ Perhaps it is, Mr. Emery; they are not far off.” 

William Emery did not hesitate to believe his com¬ 
panion’s assertion, for he knew that the hunter was en¬ 
dowed with great delicacy of sense, whether he used his 
eyes, nose, or ears. Mokoum climbed up the bank again, 
and they determined to wait in that place, as they could 
easily see down the river from there. Half an hour passed, 
which to Emery, in spite of his calmness, appeared inter¬ 
minable. Ever so many times he fancied he saw the dim 
outline of a boat gliding along the water, but he was always 
mistaken. At last an exclamation from the bushman made 
his heart leap. 

“Smoke !” cried Mokoum. 

Looking in the direction indicated by the bushman, 
Emery could just see a light streak rolling round the bend 
of the river : there was no longer any doubt. The vessel 
advanced rapidly, and he could soon make out the .funnel 
pouring forth a torrent of black smoke mingling with white 
steam. They had evidently made up their fires to increase 
their speed, so as to reach the appointed place bn the exact 
day. The vessel was still about seven miles from the Falls 





At length an exclamation of the Bushman made his heart beat.—[Page 18.J 




















































































































* 



























* 











I 



































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


J 9 


of Morgheda. It was then twelve o’clock, and as it was not 
a good place for landing, the astronomer determined to 
return to the foot of the cataract: he told his plan to the 
hunter, who only answered by turning back along the path 
he had just cleared along the left bank of the stream. 
Emery followed, and, turning round for the last time at a 
bend in the river, saw the British flag floating from the 
stern of the vessel. The return to the falls was soon ef¬ 
fected, and in an hour’s time the bushman and the astro¬ 
nomer halted a quarter of a mile below the cataract; for 
there the shore, hollowed into a semicircle, formed a little 
creek, and as the water was deep right up to the bank, the 
steamboat could easily land its passengers. The vessel 
could not be far off now, and it had certainly gained on the 
two pedestrians, although they had walked so fast; it was 
not yet in sight, for the lofty trees which hung quite 
over the river-banks into the water, and the slope of the 
banks themselves, did not allow of an extensive view. But 
although they could not hear the sound made by the steam, 
the shrill whistle of the machinery broke in distinctly on 
the monotonous roar of the cataract; and as this whistling 
continued, it was evident that it was a signal from the boat 
to announce its arrival near the falls. The hunter replied 
by letting off his gun, the report being repeated with a 
crash by the echoes of the shore. At last the vessel was in 
sight, and William Emery and his companion were seen by 

C 2 




20 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


those on board. At a sign from the astronomer the vessel 
turned, and glided quietly alongside the bank; a rope was 
thrown ashore, which the bushman seized and twisted round 
the broken stump of a tree, and immediately a tall man 
sprang lightly on to the bank, and went towards the astro¬ 
nomer, whilst his companions landed in their turn. William 
Emery also advanced to meet the stranger, saying in¬ 
quiringly, “ Colonel Everest ?” ‘ 

“Mr. William Emery?” answered the Colonel. 

The astronomer bowed and shook hands. 

Gentlemen,” then said Colonel Everest, “ let me intro¬ 
duce you to Mr. William Emery, of the Cape Town Obser¬ 
vatory, who has kindly come as far as the Morgheda Falls 
to meet us.” 

Four of the passengers who stood near Colonel Everest 
bowed to the young astronomer, who did the same; and 
then the Colonel, with his British self-possession, introduced 
them officially, saying,— 

“Mr. Emery, Sir John Murray, of the county of Devon, 
your fellow-countryman ; Mr. Matthew Strux, of the Poul- 
kowa Observatory; Mr. Nicholas Palander, of the Helsing¬ 
fors Observatory; and Mr. Michael Zorn, of the Kiew 
Observatory, three scientific gentlemen who represent the 
Russian government in our international commission.” 




Meeting of Members of the. Expedition. — [Page 20.] 
2 















































































































. 
























































. 






"■I •' 




















































• 












. ' 

* 















































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


21 


CHAPTER III. 

THE LAND JOURNEY. 

These introductions over, William Emery put himself 
at the disposal of the new arrivals, for in his position oi 
astronomer at the Cape, he was inferior in rank to Colonel 
Everest, a delegate of the English Government, and, with 
Matthew Strux, joint president of the commission. He 
knew, as well, that he was a distinguished man of science, 
famous for his reductions of the nebulae and his calculations 
of the occultations of the stars. He was a cold, methodical 
man, of about fifty years of age, every hour of his life being 
portioned out with mathematical accuracy. Nothing un¬ 
foreseen ever happened to him, and his punctuality in every 
thing was like that of the stars in passing the meridian, and 
it might be said that all his doings were regulated by the 
chronometer. William Emery knew all this, and had there¬ 
fore never doubted that the commission would arrive on 
the appointed day. During this time he was waiting for 
the Colonel to tell him the object of this mission to South 




22 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


Africa ; but as he was still silent on the point, Emery- 
thought it better not to ask any questions, as very likely 
the hour fixed in the Colonel’s mind for the subject had 
not yet come. 

Emery also knew by repute the wealthy Sir John Mur¬ 
ray, who (almost a rival to Sir James Ross and Lord Elgin) 
was, although without office, an honour to England by his 
scientific labours. His pecuniary sacrifices to science were 
likewise considerable, for he had devoted £20,000 to the 
establishment of a giant reflector, a match for the telescope 
at Parson Town, by whose means the elements of a number 
of double stars had just been determined. He was a man 
of about forty years of age, with an aristocratic bearing, 
but whose character it was impossible to discover through 
his imperturbable exterior. 

As to the three Russians, Strux, Palander, and Zorn, 
their names were also well known to William Emery, 
although he was not personally acquainted with them’ 
Nicholas Palander and Michael Zorn paid a certain 
amount of deference to Matthew Strux, as was due to 
his position, if it had not been to his merit. 

The only remark that Emery made was that they were 
in equal numbers, three English and three Russians • and 
the crew of the “Queen and Czar” (for that was the name 
of the steamboat) consisted of ten men, five English and 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 2 ^ 

“ Mr. Emery/’ said Colonel Everest, when the introduc¬ 
tions were over, “ we are now as well acquainted as if we 
had travelled together from London to Cape Voltas. Be¬ 
sides, your labours have already earned you a just renown, 
and on that account I hold you in high esteem; It was at 
my request that the English Government appointed you to 
assist in our operations in South Africa.’* 

William Emery bowed in acknowledgment, and thought 
that he was now going to hear the object of the scientific 
commission to the southern hemisphere; but still Colonel 
Everest did not explain it. 

“ Mr. Emery,” he went on, “ are your preparations com¬ 
plete ? ’* 

“ Quite, Colonel,” replied the astronomer, “According 
to the directions in Mr. Airy’s letter, I left Cape Town a 
month ago, and went to the station at Lattakoo, and there 
I collected all the materials for an expedition into the interior 
of Africa, provisions, waggons, horses, and bushmen. There 
is an escort of ioo armed men waiting for you at Lattakoo, 
and they will be under the command of a clever and cele¬ 
brated hunter, whom I now beg to present to you, the 
bushman Mokoum.” 

“The bushman Mokoum!” cried the Colonel (if his 
usual cold tone could justify such a verb), “the bushman 
Mokoum ! I know his name perfectly well.” 

“ It is the name of a clever, brave African.” added Sir 





H 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


John Murray, turning to the hunter, who was not at al 
discomposed by the grand airs of the Europeans. 

“ The hunter Mokoum,” said William Emery, as he intro¬ 
duced his companion. 

“ Your name is well known in the United Kingdom, 
bushman,” replied Colonel Everest. “ You were the friend 
of Anderson and the guide of David Livingstone, whose 
friend I have the honour of being. I thank you in the 
name of England, and I congratulate Mr. Emery on having 
chosen you as the chief of our caravan. Such a hunter as you 
must be a connoisseur of fire-arms, and as we have a very fair 
supply, I shall beg you to take your choice of the one which 
will suit you the best; we know that it will be in good hands.” 

A smile of satisfaction played round the bushman’s lips, 
for although he was no doubt gratified by the recognition 
of his services in England, yet the Colonel’s offer touched 
him the most: he then returned thanks in polite terms, and 
stepped aside, while Emery and the Europeans continued 
their conversation. 

The young astronomer went through all the details of 
the expedition he had prepared, and the Colonel seemed 
delighted. He was anxious to reach Lattakoo as quickly 
as possible, as the caravan ought to start at the beginning 
of March, after the rainy season. 

“Will you be kind enough to decide how you will get to 
the town, Colonel Everest?” said William Emery. 




“ The Hunter Mokoum,” said William Emery, presenting his Companion. 

[Page 24.] 


















































11 


-! . 





































































. 














1 P • ' - 






' 


‘ 























/ - • . • 
















t. • - 






































. 





















* " •';^t 












• - 












THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


^5 


“ B y the Orange River, and one of its affluents, the Kuru- 
man, which flows close to Lattakoo.” 

True, replied the astronomer, “ but however well your 
vessel may travel* it cannot possibly ascend the cataract 
of Morgheda,!” 

“ We will go round the cataract, Mr. Emery,” replied the 
Colonel, “and by making a land journey of a few miles, we 
can re-embark above the falls ; and from there to Lattakoo, 
if I am not mistaken, the rivers are navigable for a vessel 
that does not draw much water.” 

“No doubt, Colonel,” answered William Emery, “but 
this steamboat is too heavy . ... 

“ Mr. Emery,” interrupted the Colonel, “ this vessel is a 
masterpiece from Leard and Co’s manufactory in Liverpool. 
It takes to pieces, and is put together again with the great¬ 
est ease, a key and a few bolts being all that is required by 
men used to the work. You brought a waggon to the falls, 
did you not ? ” 

“Yes, Colonel,” answered Emery, “our encampment is 
not a mile away.” 

“Well, I must beg the bushman to have the waggon 
brought to the landing-place, and it will then be loaded 
with the portions of the vessel and its machinery, which 
also takes to pieces; and we shall then get up to the spot 
where the Orange becomes navigable.” 

Colonel Everest’s orders were obeyed. The bushman 





meridiana; the adventures of 


*6 


disappeared quickly in the underwood, promising to be 
back in less than an hour, and while he was gone, the 
steamboat was rapidly unloaded. The cargo was not very 
considerable; it consisted of some cases of philosophical 
instruments; a fair collection of guns of Purdey Moore’s 
manufacture, of Edinburgh; some kegs of brandy; some 
canisters of preserved meat; cases of ammunition; port¬ 
manteaus reduced to the smallest size; tent-cloths and all 
their utensils, looking as if they had come out of a travelling- 
bazaar ; a carefully packed gutta-percha canoe, which took 
up no more room than a well-folded counterpane ; some 
materials for encamping, &c., &c.; and lastly, a fan¬ 
shaped mitrailleuse, a machine not then brought to per¬ 
fection, but formidable enough to terrify any enemy 
who might come across their path. All these were 
placed on the bank; and the engine, of 8-horse power, was 
divided into three parts: the boiler and its tubes; the 
mechanism, which was parted from the boiler by a turn 
of a key; and the screw attached to the false stern-post. 
When these had been successively carried away, the inside 
of the vessel was left free. Besides the space reserved for 
the machinery and the stores, it was divided into a fore- 
cabin for the use of the crew, and an aft-cabin, occupied by 
Colonel Everest and his companions. In the twinkling of 
an eye the partitions vanished, all the chests and bedsteads 
were lifted out, and now the vessel was reduced to a mere 




All these Objects were deposited on the Beach. — [Page 26.] 



























































































































■ 























































- 


































i 
























♦ 


















































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


shell, thirty-five feet long, and composed of three parts, like 
the “ Ma-Robert,” the steam-vessel used by Dr. Livingstone 
in his first voyage up the Zambesi. It was made of gal¬ 
vanized steel, so that it was light, and at the same time 
resisting. The bolts, which fastened the plates over a 
framework of the same metal, kept them firm, and also 
prevented the possibility of a leakage. William Emery 
was truly astounded at the simplicity of the work and the 
rapidity with which it was executed. The waggon, under 
the guidance of Mokoum and the two Bochjesmen, had 
only arrived an hour when they were ready to load it. 
This waggon, rather a primitive vehicle, was mounted on 
four massive wheels, each couple being about twenty feet 
apart; it was a regular American “ car ” in length. This 
clumsy machine, with its creaking axles projecting a good 
foot beyond the wheels, was drawn by six tame buffaloes, 
two and two, who were extremely sensitive to the long 
goad carried by their driver. It required nothing less than 
such beasts as these to move the vehicle when heavily laden, 
for in spite of the adroitness of the “ leader,” it stuck in the 
mire more than once. The crew of the “ Queen and Czar ” 
now proceeded to load the waggon so as to balance it well 
every where. The dexterity of sailors is proverbial, and 
the lading of the vehicle was like play to the brave men. 
They laid the larger pieces of the boat on the strongest 
part of the waggon, immediately over the axles of the 



$8 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


wheels, so that the cases, chests, barrels, and the lighter 
and more fragile packages easily found room between 
them. As to the travellers themselves, a four miles’ walk 
was nothing to them. By three o’clock the loading was 
finished, and Colonel Everest gave the signal for starting. 
He and his companions, with William Emery as guide, 
took the lead, while the bushman, the crew, and the drivers 
of the waggon followed more slowly. Th,ey performed the 
journey without fatigue, for the slopes that led to the upper 
course of the Orange made their road easy, by making it 
longer, and this was a happy thing for the heavily-laden 
waggon, as it would thus reach its goal more surely, if 
more slowly. 

The different members of the commission clambered 
lightly up the side of the hill, and the conversation became 
general, but there was still no mention of the object of the 
expedition. The Europeans were admiring the splendid 
scenes that were opened to their view, for this grand nature, 
so beautiful in its wildness, charmed them as it had charmed 
the young astronomer, and their voyage had not yet sur¬ 
feited them with the natural beauties of this African region, 
though they admired every thing with a quiet admiration, 
and, English-like, would not do any thing that might seem 
“ improper.” However, the cataract drew forth some grace¬ 
ful applause, and although they clapped perhaps with only 
the tips of their fingers, yet it was enough to show that 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


29 


“ nil admirari ” was not quite their motto. Besides, Wil¬ 
liam Emery thought it his duty to do the honours of 
South Africa to his guests; for he was at home, and like 
certain over-enthusiastic citizens, he did not spare a detail 
of his African park. Towards half-past four they had 
passed the cataract of Morgheda, and being now on level 
ground, the upper part of the river lay before them as far 
as their eye could reach, and they encamped on the bank to 
await the arrival of the waggon. It appeared at the top of 
the hill about five o’clock, having accomplished the journey 
in safety, and Colonel Everest ordered it to be unloaded 
immediately, announcing that they were to start at day¬ 
break the next morning. All the night was passed in 
different occupations. The shell of the vessel was put 
together again in less than an hour; then the machinery 
of the screw was put into its place; the metal partitions 
were fixed between the cabins ; the store-rooms were re¬ 
furnished, and the different packages neatly arranged on 
board, and every thing done so quickly that it told a great 
deal in favour of the crew of the “ Queen and Czar.” 
These Englishmen and Russians were picked men, clever 
and well disciplined, and thoroughly to be depended on. 
The next day, the 1st of February, the boat was ready to 
receive its passengers at daybreak. Already there was a 
volume of black smoke pouring from the funnel, and the 
engineer, to put the machinery in motion, was causing jets 




30 


meridiana; the adventures of 


of white steam to fly across the smoke. The machine being 
at high pressure, without a condenser, the steam escaped at 
every stroke of the piston, according to the system applied 
to locomotives ; and as to the boiler, with its ingeniously 
contrived tubes, presenting a large surface to the furnace, 
it only required half an hour to furnish a sufficient quantity 
of steam. They had laid in a good stock of ebony and 
guiacum, which were plentiful in the neighbourhood, and 
they were now lighting the great fire with this valuable 
wood. 

At six o’clock Colonel Everest gave the signal for start¬ 
ing, and passengers and crew went on board the “ Queen 
and Czar.” The hunter, who was acquainted with the 
course of the river, followed, leaving the two Bochjesmen 
to take the waggon back to Lattakoo. Just as the vessel 
was slipping its cable, Colonel Everest turned to the astro¬ 
nomer, and said,— 

“ By-the-bye, Mr. Emery, you know why we have come 
here?” 

“ I have not the least idea, Colonel.” 

“ It is very simple, Mr. Emery: we have come to mea¬ 
sure an arc of meridian in South Africa.” 







THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


3 * 


\i 



CHAPTER IV. 

A FEW WORDS ABOUT THE “ M^TRE M 

i 

The idea of an invariable and constant system of mea¬ 
surement, of which nature herself should furnish the exact 
value, may be said to have existed in the mind of man from 
the earliest ages. It was of the highest importance, how¬ 
ever, that this measurement should be accurately deter- 
* mined, whatever had been the cataclysms of which our 
earth had been the scene, and it is certain that the ancients 
felt the same, though they failed in methods and appliances 
for carrying out the work with sufficient accuracy. The 
best way of obtaining a constant measurement was to con¬ 
nect it with the terrestrial sphere, whose circumference must 
be considered as invariable, and then to measure the whole 
or part of that circumference mathematically. The an¬ 
cients had tried to do this, and Aristotle, according to some 
contemporary philosophers, reckoned that the stadium, 01 - 
l Egyptian cubit, formed the hundred-thousandth part of the 
i distance between the pole and the equator, and Eratos- 





3 * 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


thenes, in the time of the Ptolemies, calculated the value 
of a degree along the Nile, between Syene and Alex¬ 
andria, pretty correctly; but Posidonius and Ptolemy 
were not sufficiently accurate in the same kind of geo¬ 
detic operations that they undertook; neither were their 
successors. 

Picard, for the first time in France, began to regulate the 
methods that were used for measuring a degree, and in 
1669, by measuring the celestial and terrestrial arcs be¬ 
tween Paris and Amiens, found that a degree was equal to 
57,060 toises, equivalent to 364,876 English feet, or about 
69-1 miles. Picard’s measurement was continued either 
way across the French territory as far as Dunkirk and 
Collioure by Dominic Cassini and Lahire (1683—1718), 
and it was verified in 1739, from Dunkirk to Perpignan, 
by Francis Cassini and Lacaille; and at length Mechain 
carried it as far as Barcelona in Spain ; but after his death 
(for he succumbed to the fatigue attending his operations) 
the measurement of the meridian in France was interrupted 
until it was subsequently taken up by Arago and Biot in 
1807. These two men prolonged it as far as the Balearic Isles, 
so that the arc now extended from Dunkirk to Formentera, 
being equally divided by the parallel of lat. 45 0 N., half j 
way between the pole and the equator; and under these j 
conditions it was not necessary to take the depression of ( 
the earth into account in order to find the value of the j 







THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 33 


quadrant of the meridian. This measurement gave 57,025 
toises as the mean value of an arc of a degree in France. 

It can be seen that up to that time Frenchmen especially 
had undertaken to determine that delicate point, and it was 
likewise the French Convention that, according to Talley¬ 
rand’s proposition, passed a resolution in 1790, charging 
the Academy of Sciences to invent an invariable system of 
weights and measures. Just at that time the statement 
signed by the illustrious names of Borda, Lagrange, La¬ 
place, Monge, and Condorcet, proposed that the unit of 
measure should be the mHre, the ten-millionth part of the 
quadrant of the meridian; and that the unit of weight 
should be th z gramme, a cubic centimetre of distilled water 
at the freezing-point; and that the multiples and subdivi¬ 
sions of every measure should be formed decimally. 

Later, the determinations of the value of a terrestrial 
degree were carried on in different parts of the world, for 
the earth being not spherical, but elliptic, it required much 
calculation to find the depression at the poles. 

In 1736, Maupertuis, Clairaut, Camus, Lemonnier, Ou- 
thier, and the Swedish Celsius measured a northern arc in 
Lapland, and found the length of an arc of a degree to 
be 57,419 toises. In 1745, La Condamine, Bouguer, and 
Godin, set sail for Peru, where they were joined by the 
Spanish officers Juan and Antonio Ulloa, and they then 
found that the Peruvian arc contained 56,737 toises. 

D 




34 


meridiana; the adventures of 


In 1752, Lacaille reported 57,037 toises as the length of 
the arc he had measured at the Cape of Good Hope. 

In 1754, Father Boscowitch and Father le Maire began 
a survey of the Papal States, and in the course of their 
operations found the arc between Rome and Rimini to be 
56,973 toises. 

In 1762 and 1763, Beccaria reckoned the degree in Pied¬ 
mont at 57,468 toises, and in 1768, the astronomers Mason 
and Dixon, in North America, on the confines of Maryland 
and Pennsylvania, found that the value of the degree in 
America was 56,888 toises. 

Since the beginningof the 19th century numbers of other 
arcs have been measured, in Bengal, the East Indies, Pied¬ 
mont, Finland, Courland, East Prussia, Denmark, &c., but 
the English and Russians were less active than other na¬ 
tions in trying to decide this delicate point, their principal 
geodetic operation being that undertaken by General Roy 
in T784, for the purpose of determining the difference of 
longitude between Paris and Greenwich. 

It may be concluded from all the above-mentioned mea¬ 
surements that the mean value of a degree is 57,000 toises, 
or 25 ancient French leagues, and by multiplying this mean 
value by the 360 degrees contained in the circumference, 
it is found that the earth measures 9000 leagues round. 
But, as may be seen from the figures above, the measure¬ 
ments of the different arcs in different parts of the world do 




* 

THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 35 

not quite agree. Nevertheless, by taking this average of 
1 57,000 toises for the value of a degree, the value of the 
< metre, that is to say, the ten-millionth part of the 
j quadrant of the meridian, may be deduced, and is found 
, to be 0.513074 of the whole line, or 39.37079 English 
inches. In reality, this value is rather too small, for 
later calculations (taking into account the depression of 
* the earth at the poles, which is and not ^ as was 

1 thou ght at first) now give nearly 10,000,856 metres instead 
of 10,000,000 for the length of the quadrant of the meridian. 
The difference of 856 metres is hardly noticeable in such 
a long distance ; but nevertheless, mathematically speak¬ 
ing, it cannot be said that the m£tre, as it is now used, 

' represents the ten-millionth part of the quadrant of the 
terrestrial meridian exactly; there is an error of about 
| v?mr of a line, i. e. 3-0V0 of the twelfth part of an inch. 

The metre, thus determined, was still not adopted by all 
the civilized nations. Belgium, Spain, Piedmont, Greece, 

* Holland, the old Spanish colonies, the republics of the 
Equator, New Granada, and Costa Rica, took a fancy to 
it immediately; but notwithstanding the evident supe¬ 
riority of this metrical system to every other, England 
had refused to use it. Perhaps if it had not been for the 
political disturbances which arose at the close of the 
18th century, the inhabitants of the United Kingdom 
would have accepted the system, for when the Con- 





3 6 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


stituent Assembly issued its decree on the 8th of May, 
1790, the members of the Royal Society in England were 
invited to co-operate with the French Academicians. They 
had to decide whether the measure of the metre should be 
founded on the length of the pendulum that beats the 
sexagesimal second, or whether they should take a frac¬ 
tion of one of the great circles of the earth for a unit of 1 
length ; but events prevented the proposed conference, and 
so it was not until the year 1854 that England, having long 
seen the advantage of the metrical system, and that scien¬ 
tific and commercial societies were being founded to spread 
the reform, resolved to adopt it. But still the English 
Government wished to keep their resolution a secret until 
the new geodetic operations that they had commenced , 
should enable them to assign a more correct value to the 
terrestrial degree, and they thought they had better act in 1 
concert with the Russian Government, who were also 
hesitating about adopting the system. A Commission of 
three Englishmen and three Russians was therefore chosen j 
from among the most eminent members of the scientific * 
societies, and we have seen that they were Colonel Everest, v 
Sir John Murray, and William Emery, for England ; and 
Matthew Strux, Nicholas Palander, and Michael Zorn, for 
Russia. The international Commission having met in 
London, decided first of all that the measure of an arc of 
meridian should be taken in the Southern hemisphere, and 








THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


37 


that another arc should subsequently be measured in the 
l Northern hemisphere, so that from the two operations 
j ‘'they might hope to deduce an exact value which should 
1 satis fy all the conditions of the programme. It now re- 
) ma ined to choose between the different English possessions 
in the Southern hemisphere, Cape Colony, Australia, and 
New Zealand. The two last, lying quite at the antipodes 
of Europe, would involve the Commission in a long 
f voyage, and, besides, the Maoris and Australians, who 
were often at war with their invaders, might render the 
proposed operation difficult; while Cape Colony, on the 
contrary, offered real advantages. In the first place, it 
was under the same meridian as parts of European Russia, 
/so that after measuring an arc of meridian in South Africa, 
they could measure a second one in the empire of the 
I Czar, and still keep their operations a secret; secondly, 
the voyage from England to South Africa was compara¬ 
tively short; and thirdly, these English and Russian 
J philosophers would find an excellent opportunity there 
of analyzing the labours of the French astronomer Lacaille, 
who had worked in the same place, and of proving whether 
1 he was correct in giving 57,037 toises as the measurement 
of a degree of meridian at the Cape of Good Hope. It 


V 

was therefore decided that the geodetic operation should 


1 be commenced at the Cape, and as the two Governments 


^approved of the decision, large credits were opened. 









3 » 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


and two sets of all the instruments required in a trian 
gulation were manufactured. The astronomer William 
Emery was asked to make preparations for an exploration 
in the interior of South Africa, and the frigate “ Augusta,” 
of the royal navy, received orders to convey the members 
of the Commission and their suite to the mouth of the 
Orange River. 

It should here be added, that besides the scientific 
question, there was also a question of national vainglory 
that excited these philosophers to join in a common labour; 
for, in reality, they were anxious to out-do France in her 
numerical calculations, and to surpass in precision the 
labours of her most illustrious astronomers, and that in 
the heart of a savage and almost unknown land. Thus 
the members of the Anglo-Russian Commission had re¬ 
solved to sacrifice every thing, even their lives, in order f 
to obtain a result that should be favourable to science, l< 
and at the same time glorious for their country. And 
this is how it came to pass that the astronomer William 
Emery found himself at the Morgheda Falls, on the banks e 
of the Orange River, at the end of January, 1854. 









THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


39 


CHAPTER V. 

A HOTTENTOT VILLAGE. 

The voyage along the upper course of the river was soon 
accomplished, and although the weather soon became rainy, 
the passengers, comfortably installed in the ship’s cabin, 
suffered no inconvenience from the torrents of rain which 
usually fall at that season. The “Queen and Czar” shot 
along rapidly, for' there were neither rapids nor shallows, 
and the current was not sufficiently strong to retard her 
progress. Every aspect of the river-banks was enchanting; 
forest followed upon forest, and quite a world of birds dwell 
among the leafy branches. Here and there were groups of 
trees belonging to the family of the “ proteacea;,” and 
especially the “ wagenboom ” with its reddish marbled-wood 
forming a curious contrast with its deep blue leaves and 
large pale yellow flowers: then there were the “ zwarte- 
basts” with their black bark, and the “karrees” with dark 
evergreen foliage. The banks were shaded every where by 
weeping willows, while the underwood extended beyond 
3 




4 o 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


for several miles. Every now and then vast open tracks 
presented themselves unexpectedly, large plains, covered 
with innumerable colocynths, mingled with “sugar-bushes,” 
out of which flew clouds of sweet-singing little birds, called 
“ suiker-vogels ” by the Cape colonists. The winged world 
offered many varieties, all of which were pointed out to Sir 
John Murray by the bushman. Sir John was a great lover 
of game, both hairy and feathered, and thus a sort of inti¬ 
macy arose between him and Mokoum, to whom, according 
to Colonel Everest’s promise, he had given an excellent long- 
range rifle, made on the Pauly system. It would be useless 
to attempt a description of the bushman’s delight when he 
found himself in possession of such a splendid weapon. 
The two hunters understood each other well, for though so 
learned, Sir John Murray passed for one of the most 
brilliant fox-hunters in old Caledonia, and he listened to 
the bushman’s stories with an interest amounting to envy. 
His eyes sparkled when Mokoum showed him the wild 
ruminants in the woods; here a herd of fifteen to twenty 
giraffes ; there, buffaloes six feet high, with towering black 
horns : farther on, fierce gnus with horses’ tails ; and again, 
herds of “ caamas,” a large kind of deer, with bright eyes, 
and horns forming a threatening-looking triangle; and 
every where, in the dense forests as well as in the open 
plains, the innumerable varieties of antelopes which abound 
in Southern Africa; the spurious chamois, the gems-bok, 





THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 41 


the gazelle, the duiker-bok, and the spring-bok. Was not 
all this something to tempt a hunter, and could the fox¬ 
hunts of the Scottish lowlands vie with the exploits of a 
Cumming, an Anderson, or a Baldwin ? It must be con¬ 
fessed that Sir John Murray’s companions were less excited 
than himself at these magnificent specimens of wild game. 
William Emery was watching his colleagues attentively, 
and trying to discover their character under their cold 
exterior. Colonel Everest and Matthew Strux, men of 
about the same age, were equally cold, reserved, and 
formal; they always spoke with a measured slowness, and 
from morning to night it seemed as if they had never met 
before. That any intimacy should ever be established be¬ 
tween two such important personages was a thing not to be 
hoped for; two icebergs, placed side by side would join in 
time, but two scientific men, each holding a high position, 
never. 

Nicholas Palander, a man of about fifty-five years of age, 
was one of those who have never been young, and who will 
never be old. The astronomer of Helsingfors, constantly 
absorbed in his calculations, might be a very admirably 
constructed machine, but still he was nothing but a machine, 
a kind of abacus, or universal reckoner. He was the cal¬ 
culator of the Anglo-Russian Commission, and one of those 
prodigies who work out multiplications to five figures in 
their head, like a fifty-year-old Mondeux. 




4 * 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


Michael Zorn more nearly resembled William Emery in 
age, enthusiasm, and good humour. His amiable qualities 
did not prevent his being an astronomer of great merit, 
having attained an early celebrity. The discoveries made 
by him at the Kiew Observatory concerning the nebula of 
Andromeda had attracted attention in scientific Europe; 
and yet with this undoubted merit he had a great deal of 
modesty, and was always in the background. William 
Emery and Michael Zorn were becoming great friends, 
united by the same tastes and aspirations; and most 
generally they were talking together, while Colonel Everest 
and Matthew Strux were coldly watching each other, and 
Palander was mentally extracting cube roots without 
noticing the lovely scenes on the banks, and Sir John 
Murray and the bushman were forming plans for hunting ; 
down whole hecatombs of victims. 

No incident marked the voyage along the upper course 
of the Orange. Sometimes the granite cliffs which shut in 
the winding bed of the river seemed to forbid further pro- ( 
gress, and often the wooded islands which dotted the cur¬ 
rent seemed to render the route uncertain ; but the bush- 
man never hesitated, and the ‘‘Queen and Czar" always 
chose the right route, and passed round the cliffs without 
hindrance. The helmsman never had to repent of having ( 
followed Mokoum’s directions. 

In four days the steamboat had passed over the 240 miles 







THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


43 


between the cataract of Morgheda and the Kuruman, an 
affluent which flowed exactly past the town of Lattakoo, 
I whither Colonel Everest’s expedition was bound. About 
thirty leagues above the falls the river bends from its 
general direction, which is east and west, and flows south¬ 
east as far as the acute angle which the territory of Cape 
Colony makes in the north, and then turning to the north¬ 
east, it loses itself in the wooded country of the Transvaal 
Republic. It was early in the morning of the 5th of 
February, in a driving rain, that the “ Queen and Czar” 
arrived at Klaarwater, a Hottentot village, close to the 
meeting of the Orange and Kuruman. Colonel Everest, 
unwilling to lose a moment, passed quickly by the few 
Bochjesmen cabins that form the village, and under the 
pressure of her screw, the vessel began to ascend the 
affluent. The rapid current was to be attributed, as the 
passengers remarked, to a peculiarity in the river, for the 
Kuruman being wide at its source, was lessened as it 
descended by the influence of the sun’s rays; but at this 
season, swollen by the rains, and further increased by the 
waters of a sub-affluent, the Moschona, it became very 
deep and rapid. The fires were therefore made up, and the 
vessel ascended the Kuruman at the rate of three miles an 
hour. 

During the voyage the bushman pointed out a good 
many hippopotami in the water; but these great pachy- 




44 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


derms, clumsy, thickset beasts, from eight to ten feet long, 
which the Dutch at the Cape call “ sea-cows,” were by no 
means of an aggressive nature, and the hissing of the steam 
and the panting of the screw quite frightened them, the 
boat appearing to them like some great monster which 
they ought to distrust, and in fact, the arsenal on board 
would have rendered approach very difficult. Sir John 
Murray would have very much liked to try his explosive 
bullets on the fleshy masses, but the bushman assured him 
that there would be no lack of hippopotami in the more 
northerly rivers, so he determined to wait for a more favour¬ 
able opportunity. 

The 150 miles which separated the mouth of the Kuru- 
man from the station of Lattakoo were traversed in fifty 
hours, and on the 7th of February the travellers had reached 
the end of their journey. As soon as the steamboat was 
moored to the bank which served as a quay, a man of fifty 
years of age, with a grave air but kind countenance, stepped 
on board, and offered his hand to William Emery. The 
astronomer introduced the new-comer to his travelling 
companions, as— 

“ The Rev. Thomas Dale, of the London Missionary 
Society, Governor of the station of Lattakoo.” 

The Europeans bowed to Mr. Dale, who gave them 
welcome, and put himself at their service. 

The town of Lattakoo, or rather the village of that name, 








The Mission Home Establishment.—[Page 44.] 



















































































« 




























































































































, .. 


















. 


































. 














- ■■ , > rus s • 

. 

































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


45 


is the most northerly of the Cape Missionary stations, and 
is divided into Old and New. The first, which the “ Queen 
.and Czar” now reached, had 12,000 inhabitants at the 
beginning of the century, but they have since emigrated to 
the north-east, and the town, now fallen into decay, has 
been replaced by New Lattakoo, which is built close by, on 
a plain which was formerly covered with acacias, and 
» thither Mr. Dale conducted the Europeans. It consisted 
of about forty groups of houses, and contained 5000 or 
6000 inhabitants of the tribe of the Bechuanas. Dr. Living¬ 
stone stayed in this town for three months before his first 
voyage up the Zambesi in 1840, previously to crossing the 
whole of Central Africa, from the bay of Loanda to the 
port of Kilmana on the coast of Mozambique. 

When they reached New Lattakoo, Colonel Everest 
presented a letter from Dr. Livingstone, which commended 
the Anglo-Russian Commission to his friends in South 
Africa. Mr. Dale read it with much pleasure, and returned 
it to the Colonel, saying that he might find it useful on his 
journey, as the name of David Livingstone was known and 
honoured throughout that part of Africa. 

The members of the Commission were lodged in the 
missionary establishment, a large house built bn an eminence 
and surrounded by an impenetrable hedge like a fortifica¬ 
tion. The Europeans could be more comfortably lodged 
here than with the Bechuanas; not that their dwellings 





4 6 


MERIDIANA, THE ADVENTURES OF 


were not kept properly in order; on the contrary, the 
smooth clay floors did not show a particle of dust, 
and the long-thatched roofs were quite rain-proof; but 
at best, their houses were little better than huts with 
a round hole for a door, hardly large enough to admit 
a man; moreover, they all lived in common, and close 
contact with the Bechuanas would scarcely have been 
agreeable. 

The chief of the tribe, one Moulibahan, lived at Lattakoo, 
and thought it right to come and pay his respects to the 
Europeans. He was rather a fine man, without the thick 
lips and flat nose of the negro, with a round face not so 
shrunken in its lower part as that of the other Hottentots. 
He was dressed in a cloak of skins, sewn together with 
considerable art, and an apron called a “ pujoke.” He wore 
a leather skull-cap, and sandals of ox-hide: ivory rings 
were wound round his arms, and from his ears hung brass 
plates about four inches long—a kind of ear-ring—which is 
also a charm ; an antelope’s tail stood up in his skull-cap, j 
and his hunting-stick was surmounted by a tuft of smallii 
black ostrich feathers. The natural colour of his body was 
quite invisible through the thick coating of ochre with 
which he was besmeared from head to foot, while some 
ineffaceable incisions in his legs denoted the number oi 
enemies he had slain. 

The chief, as grave as Matthew Strux himself, stepped 















t 


Chief Moulibahan.— [Page 46.] 
































































































































































































THREE 4 ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 47 


up to the Europeans, and took them in turn by the nose. 
The Russians permitted this to be done quite gravely, the 
\ t English rather more reluctantly, but still it had to be done, 
for according to African custom, it denoted a solemn 
engagement to fulfil the duties of hospitality to the Euro¬ 
peans. When the ceremony was over, Moulibahan retired 
without having uttered a word. 

“And now that we are naturalized Bechuanas,” said 
Colonel Everest, “let us begin our operations without 
losing a day or an hour.” 

And indeed no time was lost; still, such is the variety of 
detail required in the organization of an expedition of this 
character, the Commission was not ready to start until 
the beginning of March. That, however, was the time 
appointed by Colonel Everest; because then the rainy 
season just being over, the water, preserved in the fissures 
of the earth, would furnish a valuable resource to travellers 
in the desert. 

1 On the 2nd of March, then, the whole caravan, under 
Mokoum’s command, was ready. The Europeans took 
farewell of the missionaries at Lattakoo, and left the village 
at seven o’clock in the morning. 

“Where are we going, Colonel ?” asked William Emery, 
as the caravan passed the last house in the town. 

“ Straight on, Mr. Emery,” answered the Colonel, “ until 
we reach a suitable place for establishing a base.” 





4 8 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


At eight o’clock the caravan had passed over the low 
shrubby hills which skirt the town, and soon the desert, 
with its dangers, fatigues, and risks, lay unfolded before the 
travellers. 







THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


49 


CHAPTER VI. 

BETTER ACQUAINTANCE. 

The escort under the bushman’s command was composed 
of ioo men, all Bochjesmen—an industrious, good-tempered 
people, capable of enduring great physical fatigue. In 
former times, before the arrival of the missionaries, these 
Bochjesmen were a lying, inhospitable race, thinking of 
nothing but murder and pillage, and ever taking ad¬ 
vantage of an enemy’s sleep to massacre him. To a great 
extent the missionaries have modified these barbarous 
habits, but the natives are still more or less farm-pillagers 
and cattle-lifters. 

Ten waggons, like the vehicle which Mokoum had taken 
to the Morgheda Falls, formed the bulk of the expedition. 
Two of these were like moving houses, fitted up as they 
were with a certain amount of comfort, and served as an 
encampment for the Europeans; so that Colonel Everest 
and his companions were followed about by a wooden 
habitation with dry flooring, and well tilted with water- 





r } o MERIDIAN A; THE ADVENTURES OF 

proof cloth, and furnished with beds and toilet furniture. 
Thus, on arriving at each place of encampment, the tent 
was always ready pitched. Of these waggons, one was 
appropriated to Colonel Everest and his countrymen, Sir 
John Murray and William Emery: the other was used by 
the Russians, Matthew Strux, Nicholas Palander, and 
Michael Zorn. Two more, arranged in the same way, 
belonged, one to the five Englishmen and the other to the 
five Russians who composed the crew of the “ Queen and 
Czar.” 

The hull and machinery of the steamboat, taken to 
pieces and laid on one of the waggons, followed the travel¬ 
lers, in case the Commission might come across some of the 
numerous lakes which are found in the interior of the 
continent. 

The remaining waggons carried the tools, provisions, 
baggage, arms, and ammunition, as well as the instruments 
required for the proposed triangular survey. The pro¬ 
visions of the Bochjesmen consisted principally of antelope, 
buffalo, or elephant meat, preserved in long strips, being 
dried in the sun or by a slow fire: thus economizing the 
use of salt, here very scarce. In the place of bread, the 
Bochjesmen depended on the earth-nuts of the arachis, the 
bulbs of various species of mesembryanthemums, and other 
native productions. Animal food would be provided by 
the hunters of the party, who, adroitly employing their 



three ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


5 * 


f bows and lances, would scour the plains and revictual the 
caravan. 

f SiX nat ‘ Ve oxen - lo ng-le gg ed, high-shouldered, and with 
great horns, were attached to each waggon with harness 
L of buffalo hide. Thus the primitive vehicles moved slowly 
f though surel y on thei >- massive wheels, ready alike for 
heights or valleys. For the travellers to ride there were 

|f pr ° Vided Sma11 b,ack ^ grey Spanish horses, good- 
tempered, brave animals, imported from South America, 
| and much esteeme d at the Cape. Among the troops of 
quadrupeds were also half-a-dozen tame quaggas, a kind 
of ass with plump bodies and slender legs, who make a 
noise like the barking of a dog. They were to be used in 
f tlie smaI,er expeditions necessary to the geodetic opera¬ 
tions, and were adapted to carry the instruments where the 
^waggons could not venture. The only exception to the 
others was the bushman, who rode a splendid zebra with 
remarkable grace and dexterity. This animal (the beauty 
-of whose coat with its brown stripes especially excited the 
admiration of the connoisseur Sir John Murray) was 
^naturally defiant and suspicious, and would not have borne 
any other rider than Mokoum, who had broken it in for his 
own use. Some dogs of a half-savage breed, sometimes 
■•wrongly called “hyena-hunters,” ran by the side of the 
waggons, their shape and long ears reminding one of the 
European brach-hound. 

E 2 







5 * 


meridiana; the adventures of 


Such was the caravan which was about to bury itself in 
the deserts. The oxen advanced calmly under the guidance 
of their drivers, ever and again pricking them in the flank 
with their “jambox;” and it was strange to see the troop 
winding along the hills in marching order. After leaving 
Lattakoo, whither was the expedition going? Colonel 
Everest had said, “ Straight on and indeed he and 
Matthew Strux could not yet follow a fixed course. What 
they wanted, before commencing their trigonometrical 
operations, was a vast level plain, on which to establish the 
base of the first of the triangles, which, like a network, were 
to cover for several degrees the southern part of Africa. 
The Colonel explained to the bushman what he wanted, 
and with the calmness of one to whom scientific language 
is familiar, talked to him of triangles, adjacent angles, 
bases, meridians, zenith distances, and the like. Mokoum 
let him go on for a few moments, then interrupted him 
with an impatient movement, saying, “ Colonel, I don’t 
know any thing about your angles, bases, and meridians. 
I don’t understand even in the least what you are going to 
do in the desert: but that is your business. You are 
asking for a large level plain; oh well, I can find you 
that.” 

And at his orders, the caravan, having just ascended the 

+ 

Lattakoo hills, turned down again towards the south-west. 
This took them rather more to the south of the village 




















■ 

. 

' 

: 






.. 







William Emery and Michael Zorn in advance of the Expedition.—[Page 53.] 



























RUSSIANS. 


53 


THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE 


> towards the plain watered by the Kuruman, and here the 
bushman expected to find a suitable place for the Colonel’s 

i planS ' From that da y> he always took the head of the 
caravan. Sir John Murray, well mounted, never left him, 
and from time to time the report of a gun made his 
t co,lea S ues aware that he was making acquaintance with 
the African game. The Colonel, quite absorbed in con¬ 
templating the difficulties of the expedition, let his horse 
carry him on. Matthew Strux, sometimes on horseback, 
sometimes in the waggon, according to the nature of the 
ground, seldom opened his lips. Nicholas Palander, as bad 
a rider as could be, was generally on foot ■ at other times 
he shut himself up in his vehicle, and there lost himself in 
the profoundest mathematical abstractions. 

Although William Emery and Michael Zorn occupied 
separate waggons at night, they were always together 
' when the caravan was on the march. Every day and 
every incident of the journey bound them in a closer 
friendship. From one stage to another they rode, talked, 
and argued together. Sometimes they fell behind the 
train, and sometimes rode on several miles ahead of it, 
when the plain extended as far as they could see. They 
were free here and lost amidst the wildness of nature. 
How they forgot figures and problems, calculations and 
observations, and chatted of every thing but science! 
They were no longer astronomers contemplating the starry 





54 


MERIDIAN A; THE ADVENTURES OF 


firmament, but were more like two youths escaped from 
school, revelling in the dense forests and boundless plains. 
They laughed like ordinary mortals. Both of them had 
excellent dispositions, open, amiable, and devoted, forming 
a strange contrast to Colonel Everest and Matthew Strux, 
who were formal, not to say stiff. These two chiefs were 
often the subject of their conversation, and Emery learnt 
a good deal about them from his friend. 

“Yes,” said Michael Zorn, that day, “I watched them 
well on board the * Augusta,’ and I profess I think they are 
jealous of each other. And if Colonel Everest appears to 
be at the head of things, Matthew Strux is not less than his 
equal: the Russian Government has clearly established his 
position. One chief is as imperious as the other; and be¬ 
sides, I tell you again, there is the worst of all jealousy 
between them, the jealousy of the learned.” 

“ And that for which there is the least occasion,” answered 
Emery, “ because in discoveries every thing has its value, 
and each one derives equal benefit. But, my dear Zorn, if, 
as I believe, your observations are correct, it is unfortunate 
for our expedition : in such a work there ought to be a 
perfect understanding.” 

“No doubt,” replied Zorn, “and I fear that that under¬ 
standing does not exist. Think of our confusion, if every 
detail, the choice of a base, the method of calculating, the 
position of the stations, the verification oi the figures, opens 







THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 55 

a fresh discussion every time! Unless I am much mistaken 
I forbode a vast deal of quibbling when we come to compare 
our registers, and the observations we shall have made te 
the minutest fraction.” 

“You frighten me,” said Emery. “It would be sorrowful 
to carry an enterprise of this kind so far, and then to fail for 
want of concord. Let us hope that your fears may not be 
realized.” 

“ 1 ho P e the y ma y not,” answered the young Russian; 
U but I say again, I assisted at certain scientific discussions 
on the voyage, which showed me that both Colonel Everest 
and his rival are undeniably obstinate, and that at heart 
there is a miserable jealousy between them.” 

“ ^ ut these two gentlemen are never apart,” observed 
Emery. “ You never find one without the other; they are as 
inseparable as ourselves.” 

True, replied Zorn, “ they are never apart all day long, 
but then they never exchange ten words: they only keep 
watch on each other. If one doesn’t manage to annihilate 
the other, we shall indeed work under deplorable conditions.” 

“ And for yourself,” asked William, hesitatingly, “ which 

of the two would you wish-” 

“ My dear William,” replied Zorn with much frankness, 
"I shall loyally accept him as chief who can command 
respect as such. This is a question of science, and I have 
no prejudice in the matter. Matthew Strux and the Colonel 





5 6 


meridiana; the adventures of 


are both remarkable and worthy men : England and Russia,* 
should profit equally from their labours ; therefore it mat¬ 
ters little whether the work is directed by an Englishman ' 
or a Russian. Are you not of my opinion ? ” 

“ Quite,” answered Emery; “ therefore do not let us be j 
distracted by absurd prejudices, and let us as far as possibler 
use our efforts for the common good. Perhaps it will be 
possible to ward off the blows of the two adversaries; 
and besides there is your fellow countryman, Nicholas 1 


Palander- 


“ He !” laughed Zorn, “he will neither see, hear, nor com- i 
prehend any thing! He would make calculations to any 
extent ; but he is neither Russian, Prussian, English, or 
Chinese; he is not even an inhabitant of this sublunary 
sphere ; he is Nicholas Palander, that’s all.” 

“I cannot say the same for my countryman, Sir John i 
Murray,” said Emery. “He is a thorough Englishman^ 
and a most determined hunter, and he would sooner follow 
the traces of an elephant and giraffe than give himself any';! 
trouble about a scientific argument. We must therefore, 
depend upon ourselves, Zorn, to neutralize the antipathyj 


i 




between our chiefs. Whatever happens, we must hoi 
together.” 

“Ay, whatever happens,” replied Zorn, holding out his/ 
hand to his friend. 


The bushman still continued to guide the caravan downj 









THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE 


RUSSIANS. 


57 


towards the south-west. At midday, on the 4 th of March, 
it reached the base of the long wooded hills which extend 
from Lattakoo. Mokoum was not mistaken; he had led 
the expedition towards the plain, but it was still undulated, 
and therefore unfitted for an attempt at triangulation. The 
march continued uninterrupted, and Mokoum rode at the 
head of the riders and waggons, while Sir John Murray, 
Emery, and Zorn pushed on in advance. Towards the end 
of the day, they all arrived at a station occupied by one of 
the wandering “boers,” or farmers, who are induced by the 
richness of the pasture-land to make temporary abodes in 
various parts of the country. 

The colonist, a Dutchman, and head of a large family, 
received the Colonel and his companions most hospitably, 
and would take no remuneration in return. He was one of 
those brave, industrious men, whose slender capital, intelli¬ 
gently employed in the breeding of oxen, cows, and goats, 
soon produces a fortune. When the pasturage is exhausted,’ 
the farmer, like a patriarch of old, seeks for new springs 
and fertile prairies, pitching his camp afresh where the 
conditions seem favourable. 

The farmer opportunely told Colonel Everest of a wide 
plain, fifteen miles away, which would be found quite flat. 
The caravan started next morning at daybreak. The only 
incident that broke the monotony of the long morning 
march, was Sir John Murray’s taking a shot, at a distance 
4 








58 


meridiana; the adventures of 


of more than 1000 yards, at a gnu, a curious animal about 
five feet high, with the muzzle of an ox, a long white tail, 
and pointed horns. It fell with a heavy groan, much to 
the astonishment of the bushman, who was surprised at 
seeing the animal struck at such a distance. The gnu 
generally affords a considerable quantity of excellent meat, 
and was accordingly in high esteem among the hunters of 
the caravan. 

The site indicated by the farmer was reached about 
midday. It was a boundless prairie stretching to the 
north without the slightest undulation. No better spot for 
measuring a base could be imagined, and the bushman, 
after a short investigation, returned to Colonel Everest 
with the announcement that they had reached the place 
they were seeking. 





The Bushman pointing to the Plain. —[Page 58.J 

































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE 


RUSSIANS. 


59 


CHAPTER VII. 

the base of the triangle. 

The work undertaken by the Commission was a triangu- 
lation for the purpose of measuring an arc of meridian. 

ow the direct measurement of one or more degrees by 
means of metal rods would be impracticable. In no part 
of the world is there a region so vast and unbroken as to 
admit of so delicate an operation. Happily, there is an 
easier way of proceeding by dividing the region through 
which the meridian passes into a number of imaginary 
triangles, whose solution is comparatively easy. 

These triangles are obtained by observing signals, either 
natural or artificial, such as church-towers, posts, or rever¬ 
beratory lamps, by means of the theodolite or repeating- 
circle. Every signal is the vertex of a triangle, whose 
angles are exactly determined by the instruments, so that 
a good observer with a proper telescope can take the bear¬ 
ings of any object whatever, a tower by day, or a lamp by 
night. Sometimes the sides of the triangles are many 
miles in length, and when Arago connected the coast of 




6o 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


Valencia in Spain with the Balearic Islands, one of the 
sides measured 422,555 toises. When one side and two 
angles of any triangle are known, the other sides and angle 
may be found; by taking, therefore, a side of one of the 
known triangles for a new base, and by measuring the 
angles adjacent to the base, new triangles can be suc¬ 
cessively formed along the whole length of the arc; and 
since every straight line in the network of triangles is 
known, the length of the arc can be easily determined. 
The values of the sides and angles may be obtained by 
the theodolite and repeating circle, but the first side, the 
base of the whole system, must be actually measured on the 
ground, and this operation requires the utmost care. 

When Delambre and Mechain measured the meridian of 
France from Dunkirk to Barcelona, they took for their 
base a straight line, 12,150 metres in length, in the road 
from Melun to Lieusaint, and they were no less than 42 
days in measuring it. Colonel Everest and Matthew Strux 
designed proceeding in the same way, and it will be seen 
how much precision was necessary. 

The work was begun on the 5th of March, much to the 
astonishment of the Bochjesmen, who could not at all 
understand it. Mokoum thought it strange for these learned 
men to measure the earth with rods six feet long; but any 
way, he had done his duty; they had asked him for a level 
plain, and he had found it for them. 












Commencement of the Geodesic Operations. —[Page 6i-] 






































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 61 

The place was certainly well chosen. Covered with dry, 
short grass, the plain was perfectly level as far as the 
horizon. Behind lay a line of hills forming the southern 
boundary of the Kalahari desert; towards the north the 
plain seemed boundless. To the east, the sides of the table¬ 
land of Lattakoo disappeared in gentle slopes; and in the 
west, where the ground was lower, the soil became marshy, 
as it imbibed the stagnant water which fed the affluents of 
the Kuruman. 

“ I think, Colonel Everest,” said Strux, after he had 
surveyed the grassy level, “that when- our base is esta¬ 
blished, we shall be able here also to fix the extremity of 
our meridian.” 

“ Likely enough,” replied the Colonel. “We must find 
out too, whether the arc meets with any obstacles that may 
impede the survey. Let us measure the base, and we will 
decide afterwards whether it will be better to join it by a 
series of auxiliary triangles to those which the arc must 
cross.” 

They thus resolved to proceed to the measurement of 
the base. It would be a long operation, for they wanted 
to obtain even more correct results than those obtained by 
the French philosophers at Melun. This would be a matter 
of some difficulty : since when a new base was measured 
afterwards near Perpignan to verify the calculations, there 
was only an error of n inches in a distance of 330,000 toises. 







6s MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 

Orders were given for encamping, and a Bochjesman 
village, a kind of kraal, was formed on the plain. The 
waggons were arranged in a circle like the houses, the 
English and Russian flags floating over their respective 
quarters. The centre was common ground. The horses 
and buffaloes, which by day grazed outside, were driven 
in by night to the interior, to save them from attacks 
of the wild beasts around. 

Mokoum took upon himself to arrange the hunting 
expedition for revictualling; and Sir John Murray, whose 
presence was not indispensable in the measurement of the 
base, looked after the provisions, and served out the rations 
of preserved meat and fresh venison. Thanks to the skill 
and experience of Mokoum and his companions, game was 
never wanting. They scoured the district for miles round, 
and the report of their guns resounded at all hours. 

The survey began on the next day, Zorn and Emery 
being charged with the preliminaries. 

“ Come along,” said Zorn, “ and good luck be with us.” 

The primary operation consisted in tracing a line on 
the ground where it was especially level. This chanced to 
be from S.E. to N.W., and pickets being placed at short 
intervals to mark the direction, Zorn carefully verified the 
correctness of their position by means of the thread-wires of 
his telescope. For more than eight miles (the proposed 
length of the base) was the measurement continued, and 





THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 63 


the young men performed their work with scrupulous 
fidelity. 

The next step was to adjust the rods for the actual 
measurement, apparently a very simple operation, but 
which, in fact, demands the most continuous caution, as 
the success of a triangulation in a great measure is con¬ 
tingent on its preciseness. 

On the morning of the 10th, twelve wooden pedestals 
were planted along the line, securely fastened in their posi¬ 
tion, and prepared to support the rods. Colonel Everest and 
Matthew Strux, assisted by their young coadjutors, placed 
the rods in position, and Nicholas Palander stood ready, 
pencil in hand, to write down in a double register the 
figures transmitted to him. 

The rods employed were six in number, and exactly two 
toises in length. They were made of platinum, as being 
(under ordinary circumstances) unaffected by any condi¬ 
tion of the atmosphere. In order, however, to provide 
against any change of temperature, each was covered with 
a rod of copper somewhat shorter than itself, and a micro¬ 
scopic vernier was attached, to indicate any contraction or 
expansion that might occur. The rods were next placed 
lengthwise, with a small interval between each, in order to 
avoid the slight shock which might result from immediate 
contact. Colonel Everest and Matthew Strux with their 
own hands placed the first rod. About a hundred toises 








6 4 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


farther on, they had marked a point of sight, and as the 
rods were each provided with iron projections, it was not 
difficult to place them exactly in the proper direction. 
Emery and Zorn, lying on the ground, saw that the pro¬ 
jections stood exactly in the middle of the sight. 

“ Now,” said Colonel Everest, "we must define our exact 
starting-point. We will drop a line from the end of our first 
rod, and that will definitely mark the extremity of our base.” 

“Yes,” answered Strux, “but we must take into account 
the radius of the line. 

“ Of course,” said the Colonel. 

The starting-point determined, the work went on. The 
next proceeding was to determine the inclination of the 
base with the horizon. 

“We do not, I believe, pretend,” said Colonel Everest, 
“ to place the rod in a position which is perfectly horizontal. ,, 

“ No,” answered Strux, “ it is enough to find the angle 
which each rod makes with the horizon, and we can then 
deduce the true inclination.” 

Thus agreed, they proceeded with their observations, 
employing their spirit-level, and testing every result by the 
vernier. As Palander was about to inscribe the record, Strux 
requested that the level should be reversed, in order that 
by the division of the two registers a closer approxima¬ 
tion to truth might be attained. This mode of double 
observation was continued throughout the operations. 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 65 


Two important points were now obtained : the direction 
of the, rod with regard to the base, and the angle which it 
\ ma< ^ e with the horizon. The results were inscribed in two 
registers, and signed by the members of the Commission. 

There were still two further observations, no less impor¬ 
tant, to be made: the variation of the rod caused by 
differences of temperature, and the exact distance measured 
by it. The former was easily determined by comparing 
the difference in length between the platinum and copper 
rods. The microscope gave the variation of the platinum, 
and this was entered in the double register, to be after¬ 
wards reduced to 16° Centigrade. 

They had now to observe the distance actually measured. 
To obtain this result, it was necessary to place the second 
rod at the end of the first, leaving a small space between 
them. When the second rod was adjusted with the same 
care as the former, it only remained to measure the interval 
between the two. A small tongue of platinum, known as 
a slider, was attached to the end of the platinum bar that 
was not covered by the copper, and this Colonel Everest 
slipped gently along until it touched the next rod. The 
slider was marked off into io,oooths of a toise, and as a 
vernier with its microscope gave the ioo,oooths, the space 
could be very accurately determined. The result was 
immediately registered. 

Michael Zorn, considering that the covered platinum 

F 







66 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


might be sooner affected by heat than the uncovered 
copper, suggested another precaution: accordingly they 
erected a small awning to protect the rod from the sun’s 
rays. 

For more than a month were these minutiae patiently 
carried on. As soon as four bars were adjusted, and the 
requisite observations complete, the last of the rods was 
carried to the front. It was impossible to measure .more 
than 220 to 230 toises a day, and sometimes, when the 
wind was violent, operations were altogether suspended. 

Every evening, about three quarters of an hour before it 
became too dark to read the verniers, they left off work, 
after taking various anxious precautions. They brought 
forward temporarily the rod “ No. 1,” and marked the point 
of its termination. Here they made a hole, and drove in a 
stake with a leaden plate attached. They then replaced 
“No. 1 ” in its original position, after observing the inclina¬ 
tion, the thermometric variation, and the direction. They 
noted the prolongation measured by rod “ No. 4,” and then 
with a plumb-line touching the foremost end of rod 
“ No. 1,” they made a mark on the leaden plate. They 
carefully traced through this point two lines at right angles, 
one signifying the base, the other the perpendicular. The 
plate was then covered with a wooden lid, the hole filled 
in, and the stake left buried till the morning. Thus, if any 
accident had happened to their apparatus during the night 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 6j 


they would not be obliged to begin afresh. The next day, 
the plate was uncovered, and rod “ No. i ” replaced in the 
same position as on the evening before, by means of the 
plumb-line, whose point ought to fall exactly on the point 
intersected by the two straight lines. 

These operations were carried on for thirty-eight days 
along the plain, and every figure was registered doubly, 
and verified, compared, and approved, by each member 
of the Commission. 

Few discussions arose between Colonel Everest and his 
Russian colleague; and if sometimes the smallest fraction 
of a toise gave occasion for some polite cavillings, they 
always yielded to the opinion of the majority. One ques¬ 
tion alone called for the intervention of Sir John Murray. 
This was about the length of the base. It was certain that 
the longer the base, the easier would be the measurement 
of the opposite angle. Colonel Everest proposed 6000 
toises, nearly the same as the base measured at Melun; 
but Matthew Strux wished that it should be 10,000 toises, 
since the ground permitted. Colonel Everest, however, 
remained firm, and Strux seemed equally determined not 
to yield. After a few plausible arguments, personalities 
began: they were no longer two astronomers, but an 
Englishman and a Russian. Happily the debate was in¬ 
terrupted by some days of bad weather, which allowed 
their tempers to cool. It was subsequently decided by the 


F 2 







68 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


majority that they should “ split the difference,” and assign 
8000 toises as the measurement of the base. The work 
was at length completed. Any error which occurred, in 
spite of their extreme precision, might be afterwards cor¬ 
rected by measuring a new base from the northern ex¬ 
tremity of the meridian. 

The base measured exactly 8037.75 toises, and upon this 
they were now to place their series of triangles. 









































9 






















































































0 


























9 





















% 















Measuring the Arc of the Meridian. — [Page 69.] 








































































































































































































































































































































































» 






































































Taking the Measurements.— [Page 69. J 













































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 69 


v 


CHAPTER VIII. 

THE TWENTY-FOURTH MERIDIAN. 

; The measurement of 'the base occupied thirty-eight days, 
| from the 6th of March to the 13th of April, and without 
loss of time the chiefs decided to begin the triangles. The 
first operation was to find the southern extremity of the arc, 
and the same being done at the northern extremity, the 
difference would give the number of degrees measured. 

; On the 14th they began to find their latitude. Emery 
lt and Zorn had already on the preceding nights taken the 
I altitude of numerous stars, and their work was so accurate 
that the greatest error was not more than 2", and even this 
was probably owing to the refraction caused by the changes 
in the atmospheric strata. The latitude thus carefully 
sought was found to be 27.951789°. They then found the 
longitude, and marked the spot on an excellent large scale 
map of South Africa, which showed the most recent geo¬ 
graphical discoveries, and also the routes of travellers and 
naturalists, such as Livingstone, Anderson, Magyar, Baldwin, 








7o 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


Burchell, and Lichtenstein. They then had to choose on 
what meridian they would measure their arc. The longer 
this arc is the less influence have the errors in the deter¬ 
mination of latitude. The arc from Dunkirk to Formentera, 
on the meridian of Paris, was exactly 9 0 56'. They had to 
choose their meridian with great circumspection. An>l 
natural obstacles, such as mountains or large tracts oi 
water, would seriously impede their operations; but hap¬ 
pily, this part of Africa seemed well suited to their purpose, 
since the risings in the ground were inconsiderable, and the 
few watercourses easily traversed. Only dangers, and nol 
obstacles, need check their labours. 

This district is occupied by the Kalahari desert, a vast 
region extending from the Orange River to Lake Ngami, 
from lat. 20° S. to lat. 29° In width, it extends from the 
Atlantic on the west as far as long. 25° E. Dr. Livingstone 
followed its extreme eastern boundary when he travelled ad 
far as Lake Ngami and the Zambesi Falls. Properly 
speaking, it does not deserve the name of desert. It is not 
like the sands of Sahara, which are devoid of vegetation, 
and almost impassable on account of their aridity. The 
Kalahari produces many plants; its soil is covered with 
abundant grass; it contains dense groves and forests; 
animals abound, wild game and beasts of prey; and it is 
inhabited and traversed by sedentary and wandering tribes 
of Bushmen and Bakalaharis. But the true obstacle to id 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


71 


exploration is the dearth of water which prevails through 
the greater part of the year, when the rivers are dried'up. 
However, at this time, just at the end of the rainy season, 
they could depend upon considerable reservoirs o- stagnant 


water, preserved in pools and rivu¬ 
lets. Such were the particulars given 
by Mokoum. He had often visited 
the Kalahari, sometimes on his own 
account as a hunter, and sometimes 
as a guide to some geographical 
exploration. 

It had now to be actually con¬ 
sidered whether the meridian should 
be taken from one of the extremi¬ 
ties of the base, thus avoiding a 
series of auxiliary triangles \ 

1 By the aid of the accompanying figure, the 
work called a triangulation may be understood. 

! Let A B be the arc. Measure the base A C 
| very carefully from the extremity A to the first 
| station C. Take other stations, D, E, F, G, H, I, 
&c., on alternate sides of the meridian, and 
observe the angles of the triangles, A C D, 
C D E, D E F, E F G, &c. Then in the 
triangle A C D, the angles and the side A C 
being known, the side C D may be found. 
Likewise in the triangle C D E, C D and the 
angles being known, the side D E may be 
found; and so on through all the triangles. 
Now determine the direction of the meridian 
in the ordinary way, and observe the angle 
MAC which it makes with the base A C. 


24 


3 














72 


MERIDIANA: THE ADVENTURES OF 


After some discussion, it was decided that the southern 
extremity of the base would serve for a starting-point. It 
was the twenty-fourth meridian east from Greenwich, and 
extended over seven degrees of latitude, from 20 ° to 27°, 
without any apparent natural obstacle. Towards the north 
it certainly crossed the eastern end of Lake Ngami, but 
Arago had met with greater difficulties than this when he 
applied his geodesy to connect the coast of Spain with the 
Balearic Islands. It was accordingly decided that meridian 
24 0 should be measured, since, if it were afterwards pro¬ 
longed into Europe, a northern arc of the same meridian 
might be measured on Russian territory. 

The astronomers proceeded at once to choose a station 
which should form the vertex of the first triangle. This 
was a solitary tree to the right of the meridian, standing on 
a mound about ten miles away. It was distinctly visible 
from each extremity of the base, and its slender top facili¬ 
tated the taking of its bearings. The angle made by the 
tree with the south-east extremity of the base was first 


Then in the triangle ACM, because A C and the adjacent angles are known. 
A M, C M, and the angle ACM, may be found, and A M is the first por¬ 
tion of the arc. Then in the triangle D M N, since the side DM = CD- 
C M, and the adjacent angles are known, the sides M N, D N, and the angle 
M N D may be found, and M N is the next portion of the arc. Again, in 
the triangle N E P, because E N = D E - D N, and the adjacent angles are 
known, N P, the third portion of the arc, may be fourjd. By proceeding 
thus through all the triangles, piece by piece, the whole length of the arc A B 
may be determined. 























































































































































































































* 










* 










. 














































































































. 
















































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


73 


observed, with the help of one of Borda’s repeating 
circles. 

The two telescopes were adjusted so that their axes were 
exactly in the plane of the circle, in such a way that their 
position represented the angular distance between the tree 
and the north-west extremity of the base. This admirably- 
constructed instrument corrects nearly all the errors of ob¬ 
servation, and indeed, if the repetitions are numerous, the 
errors tend to counterbalance and correct each other. 

The Commission had four repeating circles: two for 
measuring angles, and two more with vertical circles for 
obtaining zenith distances, and so calculating in a single 
night, to the smallest fraction of a second, the latitude of 
any station. And indeed, in this important survey, it was 
not only necessary to obtain the value of the angles of the 
triangles, but also to measure the meridian altitude of the 
stars, that being equal to the latitude of each station. 

The work began on the 14th of April. Colonel Everest, 
Zorn, and Palander observed the angle at the south-east 
extremity of the base, while Strux, Emery, and Sir John 
Murray observed that at the north-west extremity. 

Meantime the camp was raised, and the bullocks har¬ 
nessed, and Mokoum conducted the caravan to the first 
station as a halting-place. Two caravans, with their drivers, 
accompanied the observers, to carry the instruments. The 
weather was bright, but had the atmosphere been unfavour- 





74 


meridiana; the adventures of 


able by day, the observations would have been made by 
night by means of reverberators or electric lamps. 

On the first day, the two angles were measured, and the 
result inscribed on the double register ; and the astronomers 
all met in the evening at the camp which had been formed 
round the tree which had served for their point of sight. It 
was an immense baobab, more than 80 feet in circumference. 
Its syenite-coloured bark gave it a peculiar appearance. 
The whole caravan found room beneath its wide branches, 
which were inhabited by crowds of squirrels, which greedily 
devoured the white pulp of its egg-shaped fruit. 

Supper was prepared for the Europeans by the ship’s 
cook. There was no lack of venison, for the hunters had 
scoured the neighbourhood, and killed some antelopes ; 
and soon the air was filled with an odour of broiled meat, 
which still further aroused the appetite of the hungry 
savants. 

After the comforting repast, the astronomers retired to 
their respective waggons, whilst Mokoum placed sentinels 
round the camp. Large fires of the dead branches of the 
baobab burnt throughout the night, and kept at a respectful 
distance the tawny beasts, who were attracted by the odour 
of the reeking flesh. 

After two hours’ sleep, however, Emery and Zorn got up, 
their observations not yet finished. They must find the 
altitudes of some stars to determine the latitude of the 




Encampment under an immense Baobab.—[Page 74.] 



















THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


75 


station, and both, regardless of the day’s fatigues, stood at 
their telescopes, and rigorously determined the change of 
zenith caused by the removal from the first station to the 
second, while the laugh of the hyena and the roar of the 
lion resounded over the sombre plain. 



7 6 


meridiana; the adventures of 


CHAPTER IX. 

THE kraal. 

The next day operations were continued. The angle 
made by the baobab with the extremities of the base was 
measured, and the first triangle solved. Two more stations 
were chosen to the right and left of the meridian ; one formed 
by a distinct mound, six miles away ; the other, marked out 
by a post about seven miles distant. 

The triangulation went on uninterruptedly for a month, 
and by the 15th of May the observers had advanced north¬ 
wards i°, having formed seven triangles. During this first 
series of operations, the Colonel and Strux were rarely to¬ 
gether. The division of labour separated them, and the 
circumstance of their daily work being several miles apart 
was a guarantee against any dispute. Each evening they 
returned to their several abodes, and although at intervals 
discussions arose about the choice of stations, there was no 
serious altercation. Hence Zorn and his friend were in 
hopes that the survey would proceed without any open 
rupture. 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 77 

After advancing 1 i° from the south, the observers found 
themselves in the same parallel with Lattakoo, from which 
they were distant 35 miles to the west. 

Here a large kraal had lately been formed, and as it was 
a marked halting-place, Sir John Murray proposed that 
they should stay for several days. Zorn and Emery could 
take advantage of the rest, to take the altitude of the sun ; 
and Palander would employ himself in reducing the mea¬ 
surements made at different points of sight to the uniform 
level of the sea. Sir John himself wanted to be free from 
scientific observations, that he might divert himself with his 
gun among the fauna of the country. A kraal, as it is 
termed by the natives of South Africa, is a kind of moving 
village, wandering from one pasturage to another. It is an 
enclosure composed ordinarily of about thirty habitations, 
and containing several hundred inhabitants. The kraal 
now reached was formed by a group of more than sixty huts, 
enclosed for protection from wild animals by a palisade of 
prickly aloes, and situated on the banks of a small affluent 
of the ICuruman. The huts, made of water-proof rush mats 
fastened to wooden beams, were like low hives. The door¬ 
way, protected by a skin, was so small that it could only 
be entered on hands and knees, and from this, the only 
aperture, issued such dense wreaths of smoke as would 
make existence in these abodes problematical to any but a 
Bochjesman or a Hottentot. 






73 


meridiana; the adventures of 


The whole population was roused by the arrival of the 
caravan. The dogs, of which there was one for the protec¬ 
tion of each cabin, barked furiously, and about 200 warriors, 
armed with assagais, knives, and clubs, and protected by 
their leathern shields, marched forward. 

A few words from Mokoum to one of the chiefs soon 
dispelled all hostile feeling, and the caravan obtained per¬ 
mission to encamp on the very banks of the stream. The 
Bochjesmen did not even refuse to share the pastures, 
which extended for miles away. 

Mokoum having first given orders for the waggons to be 
placed in a circle as usual, mounted his zebra, and set off 
in company with Sir John Murray, who rode his accustomed 
horse. The hunters took their dogs and rifles, showing 
their intention of attacking the wild beasts, and went 
towards the woods. 

“I hope, Mokoum,” said Sir John, “that you are going 
to keep the promise you made at the Morgheda Falls, that 
you would bring me into the best sporting country in the 
world. But understand, I have not come here for hares or 
foxes ; I can get them at home. Before another hour-” 

“Hour!” replied the bushman. “You are rather too 
fast. A little patience, please. For myself, I am never 
patient except when hunting, and then I make amends for 
all my impatience at other times. Don’t you know, Sir 
John, that the chase of large beasts is quite a science. 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 79 

• Here you must wait and watch. You must not step or 
.even look too quickly. For my part, I have laid in wait 
for days together for a buffalo or gemsbok, and if I have 

had success at last, I have not considered my trouble in 
'' vain.” 

} “ Very g° od >” rc P ,ied Sir John, “ I can show you as much 

patience as you can wish; but mind, the halt only lasts for 
three or four days, and we must lose no time.” 

“There is something in that,” said the bushman, so 
calmly that Emery would not have recognized his com¬ 
panion of the Orange River; “we will just kill that which 
comes first, Sir John, antelope or deer, gnu or gazelle, any 
thing must do for hunters in a hurry.” 

“Antelope or gazelle!” cried Sir John, "why, what 
more could I ask, my good fellow ? ” 

“ As lon £ as y° ur honour is satisfied I have nothing more 
to say,” said the bushman, somewhat ironically. “ I thought 
that you would not let me off with any thing less than a 
rhinoceros or two, or at least an elephant” 

“Any thing and any where,” said Sir John, “we only 
waste time in talking.” 

The horses were put to a hand-gallop, and the hunters 
•advanced quickly towards the forest. The plain rose with 
a gentle slope towards the north-east. It was dotted here 
and there with shrubs in full bloom, from which issued a 
viscous resin, transparent and odorous, of which the colonists 




8o 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


make a balm for wounds. In picturesque groups rose the 
“nwanas,” a kind of sycamore fig, whose trunks, leafless to 
the height of 30 or 40 feet, supported a spreading parasol 
of verdure. Among the foliage chattered swarms of scream¬ 
ing parrots, eagerly pecking the sour figs. Farther on were 
mimosas with their yellow clusters, “ silver trees, shaking 
their silky tufts, and aloes with spikes so red that they* 
might pass for coral plants torn from the depths of the sea. 
The ground, enamelled with amaryllis with their bluish 
foliage, was smooth and easy for the horses, and in less 
than an hour after leaving the kraal, the sportsmen reached 
the wood. For several miles extended a forest of acacias, 1 
the entangled branches scarcely allowing a ray of sunlight 
to penetrate to the ground below, which was encumbered 
by brambles and long grass. 

The hunters had little difficulty, however, in urging on 
both horse and zebra, in spite of every obstacle, resting at 
the recurring glades to examine the thickets around them. 
The first day was not very favourable. In vain was the 
forest scoured ; not a single beast stirred, and Sir John’s 
thoughts turned more than once to the plains of Scotland, 
where a shot is rarely long delayed. Mokoum evinced) 
neither surprise nor vexation ; to him it was not a hunt, but 
merely a rush across the forest. 

Towards six in the evening they had to think about 
returning. Sir John was more vexed than he would allow 









































































































































































% 


























































% . 
















t 







THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 8l 


Rather than that he, the renowned hunter, should return 
empty-handed, he resolved to shoot whatever first came 
within range, and fortune seemed to favour him. 

They were not more than three miles from the kraal 
when a hare (of the species called “ lepus rupestris ”) darted 
from a bush about 150 paces in front of them. Sir John 
f did not hesitate a moment, and sent his explosive ball after 
the poor little animal. 

The bushman gave a cry of indignation at such a ball 
being employed for such an aim; but the Englishman, 
eager for his prey, galloped to the spot where the victim 
fell. In vain ! the only vestiges of the hare were the bloody 
morsels on the ground. Whilst the dogs rummaged in the 
brushwood, Sir John looked keenly about, and cried,— 

“ I am sure I hit it!” 

“ Rather too well,” replied the bushman quietly. 

And sure enough, the hare had been blown into countless 
fragments. 

Sir John, greatly mortified, remounted his horse, and 
returned to camp, without uttering another word. 

The next day the bushman waited for Sir John Murray 
to propose another expedition ; but the Englishman applied 
himself for a time to his scientific instruments. For pastime 
he watched the occupants of the kraal as they practised 
with their bows, or played on the “gorah,” an instrument 
composed of a piece of catgut stretched on a bow, and kept 

G 





8a 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


in vibration by blowing through an ostrich feather. He 
remarked that the women, while occupied in their domestic 
duties, smoked “ matokouane,” that is, the unwholesome 
hemp-plant, a practice indulged in by most of the natives. 
According to some travellers, this inhaling of hemp increases 
physical strength to the damage of mental energy; and, 
indeed, many of the Bochjesmen appeared stupefied from 
its effects. 

At dawn, however, the following day, Sir John Murray 
was aroused by the appearance of Mokoum, who said, “ I 
think, sir, we may be fortunate enough to-day to find some¬ 
thing better than a hare.” 

Sir John, not heeding the satire, declared himself ready ; 
and the two hunters, accordingly, were off betimes. This 
time, Sir John, instead of his formidable rifle, carried a 
simple gun of Goldwin’s, as being a more suitable weapon. 
True, there was a chance of meeting some prowling beast 
from the forest ; but he had the hare on his mind, and would 
sooner use small shot against a lion than repeat an incident 
unprecedented in the annals of sport. 

Fortune, to-day, was more favourable to the hunters. 
They brought down a couple of harrisbucks, a rare kind of 
black antelope, very difficult to shoot. These were charm¬ 
ing animals, four feet high, with long diverging horns shaped 
like scimitars. The tips of their noses were narrow ; they 
had black hoofs, close soft hair, and pointed ears. Their 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 83 


face and belly, white as snow, contrasted well with their 
black back, over which fell a wavy mane. Hunters may 
well be proud of such shots, for the harrisbuck has 
always been the desideratum of the Delegorgues, Vahlbergs, 
Cummings, and Baldwins, and it is one of the finest speci¬ 
mens of the southern fauna. 

But what made the Englishman’s heart beat fastest, was 
Mokoum’s showing him certain marks on the edge of the 
thick underwood, not far from a deep pool, surrounded by 
giant euphorbias, and whose surface was dotted with sky- 
blue water-lilies. 

“Come and lie in ambush here to-morrow, sir,” said 
Mokoum, “ and this time you may bring your rifle. Look at 
these fresh footprints.” 

“ What are they ? Can they be an elephant’s?” asked 
Sir John. 

“Yes,” replied Mokoum, “and, unless I am mistaken, of 
a male full-grown.” 

Eagerly, then, was the engagement made for the following 
day. Sir John’s horse, as they returned, carried the harris- 
bucks. These fine creatures, so rarely captured, excited 
the admiration of the whole caravan, and all congratulated 
Sir John, except perhaps Matthew Strux, who knew little 
of animals, except the Great Bear, the Centaur, Pegasus, 
and other celestial fauna. 

At four o’clock the next morning, the hunters, attended 
G % 







8 4 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


by their dogs, were already hidden in the underwood. They 
had discovered by new footmarks that the elephants came 
in a troop to drink at the pool. Their grooved rifles carried 
explosive bullets. Silent and still, they watched for about 
half-an-hour, when they observed a movement in the grove, 
about fifty paces from the pool. Sir John seized his gun, 
but the bushman made him a sign to restrain his impatience. 
Soon large shadows appeared: the thickets rustled under 
the violence of some pressure ; the brushwood snapped and 
crackled, and the sound of a loud breathing was perceptible 
through the branches. It was the herd of elephants. Half- 
a-dozen gigantic creatures, almost as large as those of India, 
advanced slowly towards the pool. The increasing daylight 
allowed Sir John, struck with admiration, to notice espe¬ 
cially a male of enormous size. His colossal proportions 
appeared in the partial light even greater than they really 
were. While his trunk was extended above the underwood, 
with his curved tusks he struck the great stems, which 
groaned under the shock. The bushman leant down close 
to Sir John’s ear, and whispered,— 

“ Will he suit you ?” 

Sir John made a sign of affirmation. 

“ Then >” said Mokoum, “we will separate him from the 
rest.” 

At this instant, the elephants reached the edge of the | 
pool, and their spongy feet sank into the soft mud. They 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS, 85 


pumped up the water with their trunks, and poured it into 
;^heir throats with a loud gurgling. The great male looked 
uneasily about, him, and seemed to scent some approaching 
\danger. 

} Suddenly the bushman gave a peculiar cry. The dogs, 
barking furiously, darted from concealment, and rushed to¬ 
wards the herd. At the same moment, Mokoum, charging 
his companion to remain where he was, went off on his 
zebra to intercept the elephant’s retreat. The animal made 
no attempt to take flight, and Sir John, with his finger on 
the lock of his rifle, watched him closely. The brute beat 
the trees, and lashed his tail furiously, showing signs not of 
uneasiness, but of anger. Now, for the first time, catching 
sight of his enemy, he rushed upon him at once. 

Sir John was about sixty paces distant; and waiting till 
the elephant came within forty paces, he aimed at his flank 
and fired. But a movement of the horse made his aim 
1 unsteady, and the ball only entered the soft flesh without 
meeting any obstacle sufficient to make it explode. 

The enraged beast increased its pace, which was rather a 
rapid walk than a run, and would have soon distanced the 
horse. Sir John’s horse reared, and rushed from the thicket, 
Yiis master unable to hold him in. The elephant followed, 
ears erect, and bellowing like a trumpet. Sir John, thus 
carried away, held on to his horse tightly with his knees, 
and endeavoured to slip a cartridge into the chamber of his 







86 


MERIDIAN A ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


rifle. Still the elephant gained on him. They were soor 
beyond the wood, and out on the plain. Sir John vigo-| 
rously used his spurs, and the two dogs rushed panting in 
the rear. The elephant was not two lengths behind. Sir^ 
John could hear the hissing of his trunk, and almost feel j 
his strong breath. Every moment he expected to be/j 
dragged from his saddle by the living lasso. All at onc^jfi 
the horse sunk on his hind-quarters, struck by the elephant 
on his haunches. He neighed, and sprung to one side, tliusl 
saving Sir John. The elephant, unable to check his course,^ 
passed on, and sweeping the ground with his trunk, caught^ 
up one of the dogs, and shook it in the air with tremendous^ 
violence. No resource remained except to re-enter the ; 
wood, and the horse’s instinct carried him thither. The^ 
elephant continued to give chase, brandishing the unlucky! 
dog, whose head he smashed against a sycamore as he/ 
rushed into the forest. The horse darted into a dense* 
thicket entangled with prickly creepers, and stopped. 

Sir John, torn and bleeding, but not for an instant dis¬ 
composed, turned round, and shouldering his rifle, took aim! 
at the elephant close to the shoulder, through the net-workj 
of creepers. The ball exploded as it struck the bonej 
The animal staggered, and almost at the same moment 
a second shot from the edge of the wood struck his left: 
flank. He fell on his knees near a little pool, half-hidden 
in the grass. There, pumping up the water with his 






The Elephant and the Dog. — [Page S6. j 







































































> 
















































% 






















































































































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 87 


trunk, he began to wash his wounds, uttering plaintive 
cries. The bushman now appeared, shouting, “ He is ours, 
he is ours!” 

And in truth the animal was mortally wounded. He 
groaned piteously, and breathed hard. His tail moved 
feebly, and his trunk, fed from the pool of his blood, poured 
back a crimson stream on the surrounding brushwood. 
Gradually failed his strength, and the great beast was 
dead. 

Sir John Murray now emerged from the grove. He was 
half naked, little of his hunting costume remaining but 
rags. But he felt as though he could have given his very 
skin for this triumph. 

“ A glorious fellow !” he exclaimed, as he examined the 
carcase ; “ but rather too big to carry home.” 

“True, sir,” answered Mokoum ; “we will cut him up 
on the spot, and carry off the choice parts. Look at his 
magnificent tusks ! Twenty-five pounds a-piece at least! 
And ivory at five shillings a-pound will mount up.” 

Thus talking, the hunter proceeded to cut up the animal. 
He took off the tusks with his hatchet, and contented him¬ 
self with the feet and trunk, as choice morsels with 
which to regale the members of the Commission. This 
operation took some time, and he and his companion did 
not get back to camp before midday. The bushman had 
the elephant’s feet cooked according to the African method, 







88 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


that is, by burying them in a hole previously heated, like 
an oven, with hot coals. 

The delicacy was fully appreciated by all, not excepting 
the phlegmatic Palander, and Sir John Murray received a 
hearty round of compliments. 





THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 89 


CHAPTER X. 

THE RAPID. 

During their sojourn by the kraal, Colonel Everest and 
Matthew Strux had been absolutely strangers. On the 
eve of their departure for their divided labours, they had 
ceremoniously taken leave one of the other, and had not 
since met. The caravan continued its northward route, 
and the weather being favourable, during the next ten 
days two fresh triangles were measured. The vast verdant 
wilderness was intersected by streams flowing between rows 
of the willow-like “karree-hout,” from which theBochjesmen 
make their bows. Large tracts of desert land occurred, 
where every trace of moisture disappeared, leaving the soil 
utterly bare but for the cropping-up occasionally of those 
mucilaginous plants which no aridity can kill. For miles 
there was no natural object that could be used for a station, 
and consequently the astronomers were obliged to employ 
natural objects for their point of sight. This caused con¬ 
siderable loss of time, but was not attended with much real 






9 o 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


% 


difficulty. The crew of the “Queen and Czar” were em¬ 
ployed in this part of the work, and performed their task 
well and rapidly ; but the same jealousy that divided their 
chiefs crept in sometimes among the seamen. Zorn and 
Emery did all they could to neutralize any unpleasantness, 
but the discussions sometimes took a serious character. 
The Colonel and Strux continually interfered in behalf of 
their countrymen, whether they were right or wrong, but 
they only succeeded in making matters worse. After a 
while Zorn and Emery were the only members of the party 
who had preserved a perfect concord. Even Sir , John 
Murray and Nicholas Palander (generally absorbed as they 
were, the one in his calculations, the other in his hunting), 
began to join the fray. 

One day the dispute went so far that Strux said to the 
Colonel, “You must please to moderate your tone with 
astronomers from Poulkowa: remember it was their tele¬ 
scope that showed that the disc of Uranus is circular.” 

“Yes,” replied the Colonel; “but ours at Cambridge 
enabled us to classify the nebula of Andromeda.” 

The irritation was evident, and at times seemed to imperil 
the fate of the triangulation. Hitherto the discussions had 
had no injurious effect, but perhaps rather served to keep 
every operation more scrupulously exact. 

On the 30th the weather suddenly changed. In any 
other region a storm and torrents of rain might have been | 





THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


9 1 


expected: angry-looking clouds covered the sky, and 
lightning, unaccompanied by thunder, gleamed through the 
mass of vapour. But condensation did not ensue—not a 
drop of rain fell on to the thirsty soil. The sky remained 
overcast for some days, and the fog rendered the points of 
sight invisible at the distance of a mile. The astronomers, 
however, would not lose time, and determined to set up 
lighted signals and work at night. The bushman prudently 
advised caution, lest the electric lights should attract the 
wild beasts too closely to their quarters ; and in fact, during 
the night, the yelp of the jackal and the hoarse laugh of 
the hyena, like that of a drunken negro, could plainly be 
heard. 

In the midst of this clamour, in which the roar of a lion 
could sometimes be distinguished, the astronomers felt rather 
distracted, and the measurements were taken at least less 
rapidly, if not less accurately. To take zenith distances while 
gleaming eyes might be gazing at them through the darkness, 
required imperturbable composure and the utmost sang - 
froid. But these qualities were not wanting in the members 
of the Commission, and after a few days they regained their 
presence of mind, and worked away in the midst of the 
beasts as calmly as if they were in their own observatories. 
Armed hunters attended them at every station, and no 
inconsiderable number of hyenas fell by their balls. Sir 
John thought this way of surveying delightful, and whilst 





9* 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


his eye was at his telescope his hand was on his gun, and 
more than once he made a shot in the interval between two 
observations. 

Nothing occurred to check the steady progress of the 
survey, so that the astronomers hoped before the end of 
June to measure a second degree of the meridian. On the 
17th they found that their path was crossed by an affluent 
of the Kuruman. The Europeans could easily take their 
instruments across in their india-rubber canoe ; but Mokoum 
would have to take the caravan to a ford which he remem¬ 
bered some miles below. The river was about half-a-mile 
wide, and its rapid current, broken here and there by rocks 
and stems of trees embedded in the mud, offered consider¬ 
able danger to any light craft. Matthew Strux did not fail 
to represent this, but finding that his companions did not 
recoil from the attempt he gave way. 

Nicholas Palander alone was to accompany the caravan 
in its detour. He was too much absorbed in his calculations 
to give any thought to danger * but his presence was not 
indispensable to his companions, and the boat would only 
hold a limited number of passengers. Accordingly, he 
gave up his place to an Englishman of the crew of the 
“ Queen and Czar,” who would be more useful under the 
circumstances. 

After making an arrangement to meet to the north of the 
»apid, the caravan disappeared down the left bank of the 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 93 

stream, leaving Colonel Everest, Strux, Emery, Zorn, Sir 
John, two sailors, and a Bochjesman, who was the pioneer 
of the caravan, and had been recommended by Mokoum as 
having much experience in African rapids. 

“A pretty river,” observed Zorn to his friend, as the 
sailors were preparing the boat. 

Very so, but hard to cross,” answered Emery. “ These 
rapids have not long to live, and therefore enjoy life. With 
a few weeks of this dry season there will hardly remain 
enough of this swollen torrent to water a caravan. It is 
soon exhausted; such is the law of nature, moral and 
physical. But we must not waste time in moralizing. See, 
the boat is equipped, and I am all anxiety to see her per- 
formances.” 

In a few minutes the boat was launched beside a sloping 
bank of red granite. Here, sheltered by a projecting rock, 
the water quietly bathed the reeds and creepers. The 
instruments and provisions were put in the boat, and the 
passengers seated themselves so as not to interfere with the 
action of the oars. The Bochjesman took the helm; he 
spoke but a few words of English, and advised the travellers 
to keep a profound silence while they were crossing. The 
boat soon felt the influence of the current. The sailors 
carefully obeyed every order of the Bochjesman. Some¬ 
times they had to raise their oars to avoid some half- 
emerged stump; sometimes to row hard across a whirlpool. 








94 


meridiana; the adventures of 


When the current became too strong they could only guide 
the light boat as it drifted with the stream. The native, 
tiller in hand, sat watchful and motionless, prepared for 
every danger. The Europeans were half uneasy at their 
novel situation ; they seemed carried away by an irresistible 
force. The Colonel and Strux gazed at each other without 
a word ; Sir John, with his rifle between his knees, watched 
the numerous birds that skimmed the water; and the two 
younger astronomers gazed with admiration at the banks, 
past which they flew with dizzy speed. The light boat soon 
reached the true rapid, which it was necessary to cross 
obliquely. At a word from the Bochjesman, the sailors 
put forth their strength ; but, despite all their efforts, they 
were carried down parallel to the banks. The tiller and 
oars had no longer any effect, and the situation became 
really perilous ; a rock or stump of a tree would inevitably 
have overturned the boat. In spite of the manifest peril, 
no one uttered a word. The Bochjesman half rose, and 
watched the direction which he could not control. Two 
hundred yards distant rose an islet of stones and trees, 
which it was impossible to avoid. In a few seconds the 
boat apparently must be lost; but the shock came with less 
violence than had seemed inevitable. The boat lurched 
and shipped a little water, but the passengers kept their 
places. They were astonished to observe that what they 
had presumed to be rock had moved, and was plunging 































































































































































































*. 








































* 














































- r *. 











4 



The Hippopotamus did not quit his 

a Hare. 


hold, but shook the Boat as a Dog would 

— [Page 95-] 




































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


95 


about in the rush of the waters. It was an immense hippo¬ 
potamus, ten feet long, which had been carried by the 
current against the islet, and dared not venture out again 
into the rapid. Feeling the shock, he raised and shook his 
head, looking about him with his little dull eyes, and with 
his mouth wide open, showing his great canine teeth. He 
rushed furiously on the boat, which he threatened to bite to 
pieces. 

But Sir John Murray’s presence of mind did not forsake 
him. Quietly shouldering his rifle, he fired at the animal 
near the ear. The hippopotamus did not quit his hold, but 
shook the boat as a dog would a hare. A second shot was 
soon lodged in his head. The blow was mortal. After 
pushing the boat with a last effort off the islet, the fleshy 
mass sank in the deep water. Before the dismayed voyagers 
could collect their thoughts, they were whirled obliquely 
into the rapid. A hundred yards below, a sharp bend in the 
river broke the current; thither was the boat carried, and 
was arrested by a violent shock. Safe and sound the whole 
party leapt to the bank. They were about two miles below 
the spot where they had embarked. 







0 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


CHAPTER XL 

A MISSING COMPANION. 

In continuing the survey the astronomers had to be on 
their guard against the serpents that infested the region, 
venomous mambas, ten to twelve feet long, whose bite would 
have been fatal. 

Four days after the passage of the rapid, the observers 
found themselves in a wooded country. The trees, how¬ 
ever, were not so high as to interfere with their labours, and 
at all points rose eminences which afforded excellent sites 
for the posts and electric lamps. The district, lying consi¬ 
derably lower than the rest of the plain, was moist and fer¬ 
tile. Emery noticed thousands of Hottentot fig-trees, whose 
sour fruit is much relished by the Bochjesmen. From the 
ground arose a soft odour from the “ kucumakranti,” a 
yellow fruit two or three inches long, growing from bulbous 
roots like the colchicum, and eagerly devoured by the 
native children. Here, too, in this more watered country, 
reappeared the fields of colocynths and borders of the mint 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 97 

so successfully naturalized in England. Notwithstanding 
its fertility, the country appeared little frequented by the 
wandering tribes, and not a kraal or a camp-fire was to-be 
seen ; yet w^ter was abundant, forming some considerable 
streams and lagoons. 

The astronomers halted to await the caravan. The time 
fixed by Mokoum had just expired, and if he had reckoned 
well, he would join them to-day. The day, however, passed 
on, and no Bochjesman appeared. Sir John conjectured 
that the hunter had probably been obliged to ford farther 
south than he had expected, since the river was unusually 
swollen. Another day passed and the caravan had not 
appeared. The Colonel became uneasy; he could not 
go on, and the delay might affect the success of the 
operations. Matthew Strux said that it had always been his 
wish to accompany the caravan, and that if his advice 
had been followed they would not have found themselves 
in this predicament; but he would not admit that the 
responsibility rested on the Russians. Colonel Everest 
began to protest against these insinuations, but Sir John 
interposed, saying that what was done could not be undone, 
and that all the recriminations in the world would make no 
difference. 

It was then decided that if the caravan did not appear on 
the following day, Emery and Zorn, under the guidance of 
the Bochjesman, should start to ascertain the reason of the 


H 





9 8 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


delay. For the rest of the day the rivals kept apart, and 
Sir John passed his time in beating the surrounding woods. 
Ke failed in finding any game, but from a naturalist’s point of 
view he ought to have been satisfied, since he brought down 
two fine specimens of African birds. One was a kind of 
partridge, a francolin, thirteen inches long, with short legs, 
dark grey back, red beak and claws, and elegant wings, 
shaded with brown. The other bird, with a red throat and 
white tail, was a species of falcon. The Bochjesman pioneer 
cleverly took off the skins, in order that they should be 
preserved entire. 

The next day was half over, and the two young men 
were just about to start on their search, when a distant bark 
arrested them. Soon Molcoum, on his zebra, emerged at 
full speed from the thicket of aloes on the left, and advanced 
towards the camp. 

“Welcome,” cried Sir John joyfully, “we had almost 
given you up, and apart from you I should be inconsolable. 
I am only successful when you are with me. We will 
celebrate your return in a glass of usquebaugh.” 

Mokoum made no answer, but anxiously scanned and 
counted the Europeans. Colonel Everest perceived his 
perplexity, and as he was dismounting, said,— 

“ For whom are you looking, Mokoum ?” 

“ For Mr. Palander,” replied the bushman. 

“Is he not with you ?” said the Colonel. 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


99 


“Not now,” answered Mokoum. “I thought I should 
find him with you. He is lost!” 

At these words, Matthew Strux stepped forward. 
“Lost!” he cried. “He was confided to your care. 
You are responsible for his safety, and it is not enough to 
say he is lost.” 

Mokoum’s face flushed, and he answered impatiently,— 

“ Wh T sh ould you expect me to take care of one who 
can’t take care of himself? Why blame me? If Mr. 
Palander is lost, it is by his own folly. Twenty times I 
have found him absorbed in his figures, and have brought 
him back to the caravan. But the evening before last he 
disappeared, and I have not seen him since. Perhaps if 
you are so clever, you can spy him out with your telescope.” 

The bushman would doubtless have become more irri¬ 
table still, if Sir John had not pacified him. Matthew 
Strux had not been able to get in a word, but now turned 

round unexpectedly to the Colonel, saying,_ 

" I shall not abandon my countryman. I suppose that 
if Sir John Murray or Mr. Emery were lost, you would 
suspend operations ; and I don’t see why you should do 
less for a Russian than for an Englishman.” 

“ M- r - Strux, cried the Colonel, folding his arms, and 
fixing his eyes on his adversary, “ do you wish to insult 
me ? Why should you suppose that we will not seek this 
blundering calculator?” 


H a 






IOO 


meridiana; the adventures of 


“ Sir!” said Strux. 

“ Yes, blundering,” repeated the Colonel. “ And to return 
to what you said, I maintain that any embarrassment to 
the progress of the operations from this circumstance would 
be due to the Russians alone.” 

“ Colonel,” cried Strux, with gleaming eyes, “ your words 
are hasty.” 

“ My words, on the contrary, are well weighed. Let it 
be understood that operations are suspended until Mr. 
Palander is found. Are you ready to start ?” 

“ I was ready before you spoke a word,” answered Strux 
sharply. 

The caravan having now arrived, the disputants each 
went to his waggon. On the way Sir John could not help 
saying,— 

“ It is lucky that the stupid fellow has not carried off the 
double register.” 

“ Just what I was thinking,” said the Colonel. 

The Englishmen proceeded more strictly to interrogate 
Mokoum. He told them that Palander had been missingi 
for two days, and had last been seen alongside of the cara-, 
van about twelve miles from the encampment; that after] 
missing him, he at once set out to seek for him, but being! 
unsuccessful in all his search, had concluded that he must;) 
have made his way to his companions. 

Mokoum proposed that they should now explore the a 






THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


IOl 


woods to the north-east, adding that they must not lose an 

" h ° Ur if the ^ wanted to find him alive, knowing that no one 
0 could wander with impunity for two days in a country 
d infested like that with wild beasts. Where any one else 
could find a subsistence, Palander, ever engrossed by his 
Is figures, would inevitably die of starvation. At one o’clock, 
guided by the hunter, they mounted and left the camp, 
it The grotesque attitudes of Strux, as he clung uneasily to 
r. his steed, caused considerable diversion to his companions, 
who, however, were polite enough to pass no remark, 
x Before leaving the camp, Mokoum asked the pioneer to 
lend him his keen-scented dog. The sagacious animal, 
li after scenting a hat belonging to Palander, darted off in a 
pi north-easterly direction, whilst his master urged him on by 
a peculiar whistle. The little troop followed, and soon dis- 
d appeared in the underwood. 

All the day the Colonel and his companions followed 
the dog, who seemed instinctively to know what was re- 
1 quired of him. They shouted, they fired their guns, but 
■ ni ght came on when they had scoured the woods for five 
miles round, and they were at length obliged to rest until 
the following day. They spent the night in a grove, before 
which the bushman had prudently kindled a wood firb. 
Some wild howls were heard, by no means reassuring. 
Hours passed in arguing about Palander, and discussing 
plans for his assistance. The English showed as much 








102 


meridiana; the adventures of 


devotion as Strux could desire; and it was decided that all 
work should be adjourned till the Russian was found, alive 
or dead. 

After a weary night the day dawned. The horses 
were saddled, and the little troop again followed the dog. 
Towards the north-east they arrived at a district almost 
swampy in its character. The small water-courses increased 
in number, but they were easily forded, care being taken to 
avoid the crocodiles, of which Sir John, for the first time in 
his life, now saw some specimens. The bushman would 
not permit that time should be wasted in any attack upon 
the reptiles, and restrained Sir John, who was always on the 
qui-vive to discharge a ball. Whenever a crocodile, snap¬ 
ping its prey with its formidable jaw, put its head out of 
water, the horses set off at a gallop to escape. 

The troop of riders went on over woods, plains, and 
marshes, noting the most insignificant tokens : here a broken 
bough; there a freshly-trodden tuft of grass; or farther 
on some inexplicable mark ; but no trace of Palander. 

When they had advanced ten miles north of the last en¬ 
campment, and were about to turn south-east, the dog 
suddenly gave signs of agitation. He barked, and in an 
excited way wagged his tail. Sniffing the dry grass, he ran 
on a few steps, and returned to the same spot. 

“ The dog scents something,” exclaimed the bushman. 

“It seems,” said Sir John, “he is on a right trade. 






1 





























■ 

























































































' 










































































11 There he is,” cried Mokoum.—[Page 103.] 






































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 103 

Listen to his yelping : he seems to be talking to him¬ 
self. He will be an invaluable creature if he scents out 
Palander.” 

Strux did not quite relish the way in which his country¬ 
man was treated as a head of game ; but the important 
thing now was to find him, and they all waited to follow 
the dog, as soon as he should be sure of the scent. 

Very soon the animal, with a loud yelp, bounded over 
the thicket and disappeared. The horses could not follow 
through the dense forest, but were obliged to take a cir 
cuitous path. The dog was certainly on the right track 
now, the only question was whether Palander was alive n r 
dead. 

In a few minutes the yelping ceased, and the bushman 
and Sir John, who were in advance, were becoming uneasy, 
when suddenly the barking began again outside the forest, 
about half a mile away. The horses were spurred in that 
direction, and soon reached the confines of the marsh. The 
dog* could distinctly be heard, but, on account of the lofty 
reeds, could not be seen. The riders dismounted, and tied 
their horses to a tree. With difficulty they made their way 
through the reeds, and reached a large space covered with 
water and aquatic plants. In the lowest part lay the 
brown waters of a lagoon half a mile square. The dog 
stopped at the muddy edge, and barked furiously. 

“ There he is !” cried Mokoum. 








MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


IO4 


And sure enough, on a stump at the extremity of a sort 
of peninsula, sat Nicholas Palander, pencil in hand, and a 
note-book on his knees, wrapt in calculations. His friends 
could not suppress a cry. About twenty paces off a num¬ 
ber of crocodiles, quite unknown to him, lay watching, and 
evidently designing an attack. 

“ Make haste,” said Mokoum, in a low voice ; “ I don’t 
understand why these animals don’t rush on him.” 

“ They are waiting till he is gamey,” said Sir John, 
alluding to the idea common among the natives that these 
reptiles never touch fresh meat. 

The bushman and Sir John, telling their companions to 
wait for them, passed round the lagoon, and reached the 
narrow isthmus by which alone they could get near Palander. 
They had not gone two hundred steps, when the crocodiles, 
leaving the water, made straight towards their prey. Palan¬ 
der saw nothing, but went on writing. 

“ Be quick and calm,” whispered Mokoum, “ or all is • 
lost.” 

Both, kneeling down, aimed at the nearest reptiles, and 
fired. Two monsters rolled into the water with broken 
backs, and the rest simultaneously disappeared beneath the 
surface. 

At the sound of the guns Palander raised his head. He 
recognized his companions, and ran towards them waving 

% b 







A missing Companion.—[Page 104.] 


























































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


105 


his note-book, and like the philosopher of old exclaiming 
Eureka! he cried, «I have found it!" § 

j “ What have you found ?” asked Sir John 

W ^r r in the last decimai ° f a iogarfthm J ames 

It was a fact. The worthy man-had discovered the error 
and had secured a right to the prize offered by Wolston's 
editor For four days had the astronomer wandered in 
so dude. Truly Ampere, with his unrivalled gift of ab¬ 
straction, could not have done better! 

7 







io 6 


meridiana; the adventures of 


CHAPTER XII. 

A STATION TO SIR JOHN’S LIKING. 

So the Russian mathematician was found! When they 
asked him how he had passed those four days, he could not 
tell; he thought the whole story of the crocodiles was a 
joke, and did not believe it. He had not been hungry ; he 
had lived upon figures. Matthew Strux would not reproach 
his countryman before his colleagues, but there was every 
reason to believe that in private he gave him a severe 
reprimand. 

The geodetic operations were now resumed, and went on 
as usual till the 28th of June, when they had measured the 
base of the 15th triangle, which would conclude the second 
and commence the third degree of the meridian. Here a 
physical difficulty arose. The country was so thickly 
covered with underwood, that although the artificial signals 
could be erected, they could not be discerned at any dis¬ 
tance. One station was recognized as available for an 
electric lamp. This was a mountain 1200 feet high, aboutj 






THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE 


RUSSIANS. 107 


thirty miles to the north-west. The choice of this would 
make the sides of this triangle considerably longer than any 
of the former, but it was at length determined to adopt it 

Colonel Everest, Emery, Zorn, three sailors, and two Boch- 


jesmen, were appointed to establish the lighted signal, the 
distance being too great to work otherwise than at night. 

The little troop, accompanied by mules laden with the 
instruments and provisions, set off in the morning. The 
Colonel did not expect to reach the base of the mountain 
till the following day, and however few might be the diffi¬ 
culties of the ascent, the observers in the camp would not 
see the lighted signal till the night of the 29th or 30th. 

In the interval of waiting, Strux and Palander went to 
their usual occupations, while Sir John and the bushman 
shot arftelopes. They found opportunity of hunting a 
giraffe, which is considered fine sport. Coming acrost a 
herd of twenty, but so wild that they could not approacli 
within 500 yards, they succeeded in detaching a female 
from the herd. The animal set off at first at a slow trot, 
allowing the horsemen to gain upon her ; but when she 


found them near, she twisted her tail, and started at full 
speed. The hunters followed for about two miles, when a 
ball from Sir John’s rifle threw her on to her side, and made 


her an easy victim. 

In the course of the next night the two Russians took 
some altitudes of the stars, which enabled them to deter- 








io8 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


mine the latitude of the encampment. The following night 
was clear and dry, without moon and stars, and the 
observers impatiently watched for the appearance of the 
electric light. Strux, Palander, and Sir John relieved 
guard at the telescope, but no light appeared. They con¬ 
cluded that the ascent of the mountain had offered serious 
difficulty, and again postponed their observations till the 
next night. Great, however, was their surprise, when, 
about two o’clock in the afternoon, Colonel Everest and 
his companions suddenly reappeared in camp. 

In answer to inquiries whether he had found the moun¬ 
tain inaccessible, Colonel Everest replied that although in 
itself the mountain was entirely accessible, it was so guarded 
that they had found it necessary to come back for rein¬ 
forcements. # 

“ Do you mean,” said Sir John, “that the natives were 
assembled in force ?” 

“Yes, natives with four paws and black manes, who have 
eaten up one of our horses.” 

The Colonel went on to say that the mountain was only 
to be approached by a spur on the south-west side. In the 
narrow defile leading to the spur a troop of lions had taken 
up their abode. These he had endeavoured to dislodge, 
but, insufficiently armed, he was compelled to beat a retreat, 
after losing one of his horses by a single blow of a lion’s paw. 

The recital kindled the interest of Sir John and the bush- 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 109 

man. Clearly it was a station worth conquering, and an 
expedition was at once arranged. All the'Europeans, with¬ 
out exception, were eager to join, but it was necessary that 
some should remain at the camp to measure the angles at 
the base of the triangle, therefore the Colonel resolved to 
stay behind with Strux and Palander, while Sir John, 
Emery, and Zorn (to whose entreaties their chiefs had been 
obliged to yield), Mokoum, and three natives on whose 
courage he could rely, made up the party for the attack. 

They started at four in the afternoon, and by nine were 
within two miles of the mountain. Here they dismounted, 
and made their arrangements for the night. No fire was 
kindled, Mokoum being unwilling to provoke a nocturnal 
attack from the animals, which he wished to meet by day¬ 
light. 

Throughout the night the roar of the lions could almost 
incessantly be heard. Not one of the hunters slept for so 
much as an hour, and Mokoum took advantage of their 
wakefulness to give them some advice from his own expe¬ 
rience. 

“ From Colonel Everest tells us,” he said calmly, 

“ these are black-maned lions, the fiercest and most danger¬ 
ous species of any. They leap for a distance of sixteen to 
twenty paces, and I should advise you to avoid their first 
bound. Should the first fail, they rarely take a second. 
We will attack them as they re-enter their den at day- 









£10 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


break; they are always less fierce when they are well 
filled. But they will defend themselves well, for here, 
in this uninhabited district, they are unusually ferocious. 
Measure your distance well before you fire ; let the animal 
approach, and take a sure aim near the shoulder. We 
must leave our horses behind; the sight of a lion terrifies 
them, and therefore the safety of their rider is imperilled. 
We must fight on foot, and I rely on your calmness.” 

All listened with silent attention : Mokoum was now the 
patient hunter. Although the lion seldom attacks a man 
without provocation, yet his fury, when once aroused, is 
terrible; and therefore the bushman enjoined composure 
on his companions, especially on Sir John, who was often 
carried away by his boldness. 

“ Shoot at a lion,” said Mokoum, “ as calmly as if you 
were shooting a partridge.” 

At four o’clock, only a few red streaks being visible in 
the far east, the hunters tied up their horses securely and 
left their halting-place. 

“ Examine your guns, and be careful that your car¬ 
tridges are in good trim,” continued Mokoum, to those who 
carried rifles; for the three natives were armed otherwise, 
satisfied with their bows of aloe, which already had 
rendered them good service. 

The party, in a compact group, turned towards the defile, 
which had been partially reconnoitred the evening before. 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. Ill 


They crept, like Red Indians, silently between the trees, 
and soon reached the narrow gorge which formed the 
entrance. Here, winding between piles of granite, began 
the path leading to the first slopes of the spur. Midway 
the path had been widened by a landslip, and here was the 
cave tenanted by the lions. 

It was then arranged that Sir John, one of the natives, 
and Mokoum, should creep along the upper edge of the 
defile, with the intention of driving out the animals to the 
lower extremity of the gorge. There the two young 
Europeans and the other two Bochjesmen should be in 
ambush to receive the fugitive beasts with shot and 
arrows. 

No spot could be better adapted for the manoeuvres. 
The forked branches of a gigantic sycamore afforded a safe 
position, since lions do not climb ; and the hunters, perched 
at a considerable height, could escape their bounds and 
aim at them under favourable conditions. 

William Emery objected to the plan as being dangerous 
for Sir John and the bushman, but the latter would hear 
of no modification, and Emery reluctantly acquiesced. 

Day now began to dawn, and the mountain-top was 
glowing in the sun. Mokoum, after seeing his four com¬ 
panions installed in the sycamore, started off with Sir 
John and the Bochjesman, and soon mounted the devious 
path which lay on the right edge of the defile. Cautiously 






113 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


examining their path, they continued to advance. In the 
event of the lions having returned to their den and being 
at repose, it would be possible to make short work of 
them. 

After about a quarter of an hour the hunters, reaching 
the landslip before the cave to which Zorn had directed 
them, crouched down and examined the spot. It seemed 
a wide excavation, though at present they could hardly 
estimate the size. The entrance was marked by piles of 
bones and remains of animals, demonstrating, beyond 
doubt, that it was the lions’ retreat. 

Contrary to the hunter’s expectation, the cave seemed 
deserted. He crept to the entrance and satisfied himself 
that it was really empty. Calling his companions, who 
joined him immediately, he said,— 

“ 0ur S ame has not returned, Sir John, but it will not be 
long: I think we had better install ourselves in its place. 
Better to be besieged than besiegers, especially as we have 
an armed succour at hand. What do you think ?” 

“ 1 am at your orders, Mokoum,” replied Sir John. 

All three accordingly entered. It was a deep grotto, 
strewn with bones and stained with blood. Repeating their 
scrutiny, lest they should be mistaken as to the cave being 
empty, they hastened to barricade the entrance by piling 
up stones, the intervening spaces being filled with 
boughs and dry brushwood. This only occupied a few 






It was a deep Grotto, strewn with Bones and stained with Blood. —[Page 112 ] 






































% 






































































\ 



The Entrance to the Lion’s I^en. — [Page 112. J 











































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 113 

minutes, the mouth of the cave being comparatively nar¬ 
row. They then went behind their loop-holes, and awaited 
their prey, which was not long in coming. A lion and two 
lionesses approached within a hundred yards of the cave. 
The lion, tossing his mane and sweeping the ground with 
his tail, carried in his teeth an entire antelope, which he 
shook with as much ease as a cat would a mouse. The two 
lionesses frisked along at his side. 

Sir John afterwards confessed that it was a moment of 
no little trepidation ; he felt his pulses beat fast, and was 
conscious of something like fear; but he was soon himself 
again. His two companions retained their composure 
undisturbed. 

At the sight of the barricade, the beasts paused. They 
were within sixty paces. With a harsh roar from the lion, 
they all three rushed into a thicket on the right, a little 
below the spot where the hunters had first stopped. Their 
tawny backs and gleaming eyes were distinctly visible 
through the foliage. 

“ The partridges are there,” whispered Sir John ; “let us 
each take one.”~ 

“No,” answered Mokoum softly, “the brood is not all 
here, and the report of a gun would frighten the rest. 
Bochjesman, are you sure of your arrow at this dis¬ 
tance ?” 

“ Yes, Mokoum,” said the native. 


I 







“4 


meridiana; the adventures of 


“ Then aim at the male’s left flank, and pierce his heart.** 

The Bochjesman bent his bow, and the arrow whistled 
through the brushwood. With a loud roar, the lion made 
a bound and fell. He lay motionless, and his sharp teeth 
stood out in strong relief against his blood-stained lips. 

“ Well done, Bochjesman! ” said Mokoum. 

At this moment the lionesses, leaving the thicket, flung 
themselves on the lion’s body. Attracted by their roar, 
two other lions and a third lioness appeared round the 
corner of the defile. Bristling with anger, they looked 
twice their ordinary size, and bounded forward with terrific 
roars. 

" Now for the rifles,” cried the bushman, “ we must 
shoot them on the wing, since they will not perch.” 

The bushman took deliberate aim, and one lion fell, as it 
were paralyzed. The other, his paw broken by Sir John’s! 
bullet, rushed towards the barricade, followed by the infu¬ 
riated lionesses. Unless the rifles could now be brought 
successfully to bear, the three animals would succeed in 
entering their den. The hunters retired ; their guns were 
quickly reloaded ; two or three lucky shots, and all would 
be well; but an unforeseen circumstance occurred which 
rendered the hunters’ situation to the last degree alarming. 

All at once a dense smoke filled the cave. One of the 
wads, falling on the dry brushwood, had set it alight, and 
soon a sheet of flames, fanned by the wind, lay between the 















t 










- 


. 
















. 




' • ■ : - 






















f 










i 



V \ 















ft 









































































* 





































































































































































































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 115 

men and the beasts. The lions recoiled, but the hunters 
would be suffocated if they remained where they were. It 
was a terrible moment, but they dared not hesitate. 

“ Come out! come out! ” cried Mdkoum. 

They pushed aside the brushwood with the butt ends of 
their guns, knocked down the stones, and, half choked, 
leaped out of the cloud of smoke. 

The native and Sir John had hardly time to collect their 
senses when they were both knocked over. The African, 
struck on the chest by one of the lionesses, lay motionless 
on the ground ; Sir John, who received a blow from the tail 
of the other, thought his leg was broken, and fell on his 
knees. But just as the animal turned upon him, a ball 
from the bushman arrested her, and, meeting a bone, 
exploded in her body. At this instant Zorn, Emery, and 
the two Bochjesmen appeared opportunely, although un¬ 
summoned, hastening up the defile. Two lions and one 
lioness were dead; but two lionesses and the lion with the 
broken paw were still sufficiently formidable. The rifles, 
however, performed their duty. A second lioness fell, 
struck in both head and flank. The third lioness and the 
wounded lion bounded over the young men’s heads, and 
amid a last salute of balls and arrows disappeared round 
the corner of the defile. 

Sir John uttered a loud hurrah. The lions were con¬ 
quered, four carcasses measured the ground. 








ii 6 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


With his friend’s assistance, Sir John was soon on his 
feet again ; his leg was not broken. The native soon reco¬ 
vered his consciousness, being merely stunned by the blow 
from the animal’s head. An hour later, the little troop, 
without further trace of the fugitive couple, regained the 
thicket where they had left their horses. 

“ Well,” said Mokoum to Sir John, "I hope you like our 
African partridges.” 

“ Delightful! delightful! ” said Sir John, rubbing his 
leg, “ but what tails they have, to be sure ! ” 




Well,” said Mokoum, “ I Hope you like our African Partridges.”—[Page iiS.] 


































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 117 


CHAPTER XIII. 

PACIFICATION BY FIRE. 

At the camp Colonel Everest and his colleagues, with a 
natural impatience, anxiously abided the result of the lion- 
hunt. If the chase proved successful, the light would 
appear in the course of the night. The Colonel and Strux 
passed the day uneasily; Palander, always engrossed, 

; forgot that any danger menaced his friends. It might be 
said of him, as of the mathematician Bouvard, “ He will 
continue to calculate while he continues to live;” for 
apart from his calculations life for him would have lost its 
purpose. 

The two chiefs certainly thought quite as much of the 
accomplishment of their survey as of any danger incurred 
by their companions ; they would themselves have braved 
any peril rather than have a physical obstacle to arrest 
their operations. 

At length, after a day that seemed interminable, the 
night arrived. Punctually every half-hour the Colonel and 





n8 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


Matthew Strux silently relieved guard at the telescope, 
each desiring to be the first to discover the light. But 
hours passed on, and no light appeared. At last, at a 
quarter to three, Colonel Everest arose, and calmly said. 
“ The signal! ” 

The Russian, although he did not utter a word, could 
scarcely conceal the chagrin which he felt at chance favour¬ 
ing the Colonel. 

The angle was then carefully measured, and was found: 
to be exactly 73 0 58' 42".413. 

Colonel Everest being anxious to join his companions as | 
soon as possible, the camp was raised at dawn, and by mid- - 
day all the members of the Commission had met once more, j 
The incidents of the lion-hunt were recounted, and the 
victors heartily congratulated. 

During the morning Sir John, Emery, and Zorn had 
proceeded to the summit of the mountain, and had thence 
measured the angular distance of a new station situated a 
few miles to the west of the meridian. Palander also an- j 
nounced that the measurement of the second degree was j 
now complete. 

For five weeks all went on well. The weather was fine, 
and the country, being only slightly undulated, offered fair 
sites for the stations. Provisions were abundant, and Sir 
John s revictualling expeditions provided full many a va¬ 
riety of antelopes and buffaloes. The general health was 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 119 


1 good, and water could always be found. Even the discus- 
sions between the Colonel and Strux were less violent, and 
a each seemed to vie with the other in zeal for success, when 
L a local difficulty occurred which for a while hindered the 
work and revived hostilities. 

It was the nth of August. During the night the 
caravan had passed through a wooded country, and in the 
morning halted before an immense forest extending beyond 
1 the horizon. Imposing masses of foliage formed a verdant 
curtain which was of indescribable beauty. There were the 
i “gounda,” the “ mosokoso,” and the “ mokoumdon,” a 
■ wood much sought for ship-building; great ebony trees, 

' their bark covering a perfectly black wood ; “ bauhinias,” 
* with fibre of iron ; “ buchneras,” with their orange-coloured 
flowers ; magnificent “ roodeblatts,” with whitish trunks, 
i crowned with crimson foliage, and thousands of “guaia- 
cums,” measuring fifteen feet in circumference. There 
was ever a murmur like that of the surf on a sandy coast; 
it was the wind, which, passing across the branches, was 
calmed on the skirts of the forest. In answer to a question 
from the Colonel, Mokoum said,— 

“ It is the forest of Rovouma/* 

“ What is its size ? ” 

“ It is about forty-five miles wide, and ten long/* 

“ How shall we cross it ? ” 

u Cross it we cannot/* said Mokoum. “ There is but 







120 


meridiana; the adventures of 


one resource: we must go round either to the east or to 
the west.” 

At this intelligence the chiefs were much perplexed. In 
the forest they could not establish stations; to pass round 
would involve them in an additional series of perhaps ten 
auxiliary triangles. 

Here was a difficulty of no little magnitude. Encamping 
in the shade of a magnificent grove about half a mile from 
the forest, the astronomers assembled in council. The 
question of surveying across the mass of trees was at once 
set aside, and it now remained to determine whether they 
should make the circuit to the east or the west, since the 
meridian passed as nearly as possible through the centre of 
the forest. On this point arose a violent discussion be¬ 
tween the Colonel and Strux. The two rivals recovered 
their old animosity, and the discussion ended in a serious 
altercation. Their colleagues attempted to interfere, but to 
no purpose. The Englishman wished to turn to the right, 
since that direction approached the route taken by Dr. 
Livingstone in his expedition to the Zambesi Falls, and 
the country would on that account be more known and 
frequented. The Russian, on the contrary, insisted on 
going to the left, but apparently for no other reason than 
to thwart the Colonel. The quarrel went so far that a 
separation between the members of the Commission seemed 
imminent. Zorn, Emery, Sir John, and Palander with- 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE 


RUSSIANS. I2i 


drew and left their chiefs to themselves. Such was their 
obstinacy that it seemed as if the survey must continue 
from this point in two oblique series of triangles. 

The day passed away without any reconciliation, and the 
next morning Sir John, finding matters still in the same 
condition, proposed to Mokoum to beat the neighbourhood. 
Perhaps meanwhile the astronomers would come to an 
understanding: any way, some fresh venison would not be 
despised. 

Mokoum, always ready, whistled to his dog Top, and the 
two hunters ventured several miles from the encampment. 
The conversation naturally turned on the subject of the 
difficulty. 

I expect, said the bushman, “ we shall be encamped 
| some tin,e here - Our two chiefs are like ill-paired oxen, 
one pulls one way and the other another, and the conse¬ 
quence is that the waggon makes no headway.” 

“It is all very sad,” answered Sir John, “and looks like 
a separation. The interests of science are compromised, 
otherwise I should be indifferent to it all. I should amuse 
myself with my gun until the rivals made it up.” 

“ Do you think they -will make it up ? For my part, I 
am almost afraid that our halt will be indefinitely pro- 
longed.” 

“ 1 fear so > Mokoum,” replied Sir John. “ The matter is 

so trivial, and it is no question of science. Our chiefs would 

8 








122 


meridiana; the adventures of 


doubtless have yielded to a scientific argument, but they 
will never make concession in a pure matter of opinion. 
How unfortunate that the meridian happens to cross this 
forest!” 

“ Hang the forests !” exclaimed the bushman, “ don’t let 
them stop your measuring, if you want to measure. But I 
can’t see the good of your getting at the length and breadth 
of the earth ? Who will be any better off when every thing 
is reduced to feet and inches ? I should just like to think 
of the globe as infinite ; to measure it is to make it small. 
No, Sir John, if I were to live for ever, I could never under¬ 
stand the use of your operations.” 

Sir John could not help smiling. They had often debated 
the subject, and the ignorant child of nature could evidently 
not enter into the interest attached to the survey. When¬ 
ever Sir John attempted to convince him, he answered 
eloquently with arguments stamped with a genuine natural¬ 
ness, of which Sir John, hali-savant and half-hunter, could 
fully appreciate the charm. 

Thus conversing, the hunters pursued the rock-hares, the 
shrill-toned plovers, the partridges (with brown, yellow, and 
black plumage), and other small game. But Sir John had 
all the sport to himself. The bushman seldom fired; he 
was pre-occupied. The quarrel between the two astro- j 
nomers seemed to trouble him more than it did his com¬ 
panion, and the variety of game hardly attracted his notice. 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


12 3 


In truth there was an idea floating through his brain, 
which, httle by little, took more definite form. Sir John 
heard him talking to himself, and watched him as he quietly 
let the game pass by, as engrossed as Palander himself. 
Two or three times in the course of the day he drew near 
Sir John and said,— 

“So you really think that Colonel Everest and Mr. 
Strux will not come to terms ?” 

Sir John invariably replied that agreement seemed un¬ 
likely, and that he feared there would be a separation 
between Englishmen and Russians. The last time Mokoum 
i received this answer he added,— 

“Well, you may be easy; I have found a means 
to satisfy both the chiefs. Before to-morrow, if the 
wind is favourable, they will have nothing to quarrel 
| about.” 

“ What do you mean to do, Mokoum ?” 

“ Never mind, Sir John.” 

“ Very well, I will leave it to you. You deserve to have 
your name preserved in the annals of science.” 

“ That would be too great an honour for me, Sir John,” 
answered the bushman, and then continued silently to 
ponder over his project. Sir John made no further inquiries, 
but could not at all guess how the bushman proposed to 
re-unite the two adversaries. 

Towards evening the hunters returned to camp, and 








124 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENT u RES OF 


found matters even worse than before. The oft-repeated 
intervention of Zorn and Emery had been of no avail, and 
the quarrel had now reached such a height that reconcilia¬ 
tion seemed impossible. It appeared only too probable 
that the survey would be continued in two separate direc¬ 
tions. The thought of this was sorrowful to Emery and 
Zorn, who were now so nearly bound by mutual sympathy. 
Sir John guessed their thoughts, and was eager to reassure 
them ; but however much he was secretly disposed to trust 
to the bushman, he abstained from raising any hopes which 
might be fallacious. 

Throughout the evening Mokoum did not leave his 
ordinary occupations. He arranged the sentinels, and took 
the usual precautions. Sir John began to think that he 
had forgotten his promise. Before going to rest he tried 
to sound Colonel Everest, whom he found immovably re¬ 
solved that, unless Strux yielded, the English and Russians 
must part. “There are things/’ added the Colonel, in 
a tone of decision, “that cannot be borne, even from a 
colleague.” 

Sir John, very uneasy, retired to his bed, and being 
fatigued with his day’s sport, was soon asleep. Towards 
eleven o’clock he was suddenly aroused by the natives 
running to and fro in the camp. He quickly rose, and 
found every one on their feet. The forest was on fire. In 
the dark night, against the black sky, the curtain of flame 












Sir John was soon 


asleep. — [Page 124.J 






























































































































































































































































































































































































I 
























1 



























































































































. 














I is IP 


















■ ' 

































































The Forest on Fire.—[Page 125.J 



































































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. T25 

seemed to rise to the zenith; and in this incredibly short 
time the fire had extended for several miles. 

Sir John looked at Mokoum, who, standing near, made 
no answer to his glance; but he at once understood. The 
fire was designed to open a road through that forest which 
had stood impervious for ages. The wind, from the south, 
was favourable. The air, rushing as from a ventilator, 
accelerated the conflagration, and furnished an ever fresh 
supply of oxygen. It animated the flames, and kept the 
kindled branches burning like a myriad brands. The scat¬ 
tered fragments became new centres for fresh outbreaks of 
flame; the scene of the fire became larger, and the heat 
grew intense. The dead wood piled under the dark foliage 
crackled, and ever and anon louder reports and a brighter 
light told that the resinous trees were burning like torches. 
Then followed explosions like cannonades, as the -great 
trunks of ironwood burst asunder with a reverberation as 
of bombs. The sky reflected the glow, and the clouds 
carried the rosy glare high aloft. Showers of sparks 
emitted from the wreaths of smoke studded the heavens 
like red-hot stars. 

Then, on every side, were heard the howls, shrieks, and 
bellowings of herds of bewildered hyenas, buffaloes, and 
lions; elephants rushed in every direction, like huge dark 
spectres, and disappeared beyond the horizon. 

The fire continued throughout the following day and 






126 


meridiana; the adventures of 


night; and when day broke on the 14th a vast space, 
several miles wide, had been opened across the forest. A 
passage was now free for the meridian. The daring genius 
of Mokoum had arrested the disaster which threatened the 


survey. 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 12J 


CHAPTER XIV. 

A DECLARATION OF WAR. 

All pretext for quarrelling being now removed, the 
Colonel and Strux, somewhat rancorous at heart, recom¬ 
menced their joint labours. About five miles to the left of 
: the gap made by the conflagration, rose an eminence which 
I would serve as the vertex of a new triangle. When the 
requisite observations were complete, the caravan set off 
across the burnt forest. 

The road was paved with embers. The soil was still 
burning, and here and there smouldered stumps of trees, 
while a hot steam rose around. In many places lay the 
blackened carcases of animals which had been unable to 
make their escape. Wreaths of smoke gave evidence that 
the fire was not yet extinct, and might still be rekindled 
by the wind. Had the flames burst out again the cara¬ 
van must inevitably have been destroyed. Towards the 
middle of the day, however, it was safely encamped at the 
foot of the hill. Here was a mass of rock which seemed to 










MERIDIAN A ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


138 


have been arranged by the hand of man. It was a kind of 
cromlech—a surprising erection to find in that locality- 
resembling the structures attributed to the Druids, and 
which ever furnish fresh interest to the archaeologist. The 
most credible suggestion was that it must be the remains 
of some primitive African altar. 

The two young astronomers and Sir John Murray wished 
to visit the fantastic construction, and, accompanied by the 
bushman, they ascended the slope. They were not above 
twenty paces from the cromlech when a man, hitherto 
concealed behind one of the massy stones at the base, 
appeared fora moment, and, descending the hill, stole quickly 
away into a thicket that had been untouched by the fire. 
The momentary glance was enough for the bushman. “ A 
Makololo! ” he cried, and rushed after the native. Sir 
John followed, and both in vain searched the wood. The 
native, knowing the short paths, had escaped where the 
most experienced hunter could not have traced him. 
When the incident was related to Colonel Everest he sent 
for Mokoum, and asked him who the man was ? what he 
was doing ? and why he had followed him ? 

‘ -^ e a Makololo, Colonel,” replied Mokoum. " He 
belongs to one of the northern tribes that haunt the 
affluents of the Zambesi. Not only is he an enemy of us 
Bochjesmen, but he is a plunderer of all who venture into 
the country; he was spying us, and we shall be lucky 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 129 

if we have not cause to regret that we couldn’t get hold ol 
him” 

But what have we to fear from a band of robbers ? ” 
asked the Colonel; “are not our numbers sufficient to 
resist them ?” 

At present, yes,” replied the bushman; “ but in the 
north these tribes are more frequent, and it is difficult to 
avoid them. If this Makololo is a spy, as I suspect, he will 
not fail in putting several hundred of these robbers on our 
track, and then, Colonel, I would not give a farthing for all 
your triangles.” 

The Colonel was vexed. He knew that the bushman 
was not the man to exaggerate danger, and that all he said 
ought to be duly weighed. The intentions of the native 
were certainly suspicious; his sudden appearance and 
immediate flight showed that he was caught deliberately 
spying. No doubt he would announce the approach of the 
Commission to the tribes of the north. There was, how¬ 
ever, no help for it now; the caravan must continue its 
march with extra precautions. 

On the 17th of August the astronomers completed their 
twenty-second triangle, and with it the third degree of the 
meridian. Finding by the map that the village of 
IColobeng was about 100 miles to the north-east, they 
resolved to turn thither for a few days’ rest. For nearly 
six months they had had no communication with the 


K 









130 


meridiana; the adventures of 


civilized world, and at Kolobeng, an important village and 
missionary station, they would probably hear news from 
Europe, besides being able to re-provision the caravan. 

The remarkable cromlech was at once chosen as the 
landmark whence subsequent operations should com¬ 
mence, and the Colonel gave the signal for departure. 
With no further incident the caravan reached Kolobeng on 
the 22nd. The village was merely a mass of native huts, 
the uniformity of which was relieved by the depot of the 
missionaries who had settled there. Formerly called 
Lepelole, it is marked on some maps Litoubarouka. Here 
Dr. Livingstone stayed for some months in 1843, to learn 
the habits of the Bechuanas, or Bakouins, as they are more 
generally termed in this part of the country. 

With all hospitality the missionaries received the 
Europeans, and put every available resource at their 
disposal. Livingstone’s house was still to be seen, sacked 
and ruined, as when visited by Baldwin ; the Boers had not 
spared it in their incursion of 1852. 

All eagerly asked for news from Europe; but their 
curiosity could not be immediately satisfied, as no courier 
had reached the mission in the last six months; but in 
about a week the principal said they expected journals and 
despatches, since they had already heard of the arrival of a 
carrier on the banks of the Upper Zambesi. A week was 
just the period that the astror^mcrs desired for their rest, 





THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 131 

and all except Palander, who constantly revised his calcu¬ 
lations, passed the time in a complete far niente. The 
stern Matthew Strtix held himself aloof from his English 
colleagues, and Emery and Zorn took many walks in the 
neighbourhood. The firmest friendship united these two, 
and they believed that nothing could break the closeness of 
their sympathy. 

On the 30th the eagerly-expected messenger arrived. He 
was a native of Kilmaine, a town by the delta of the 
Zambesi. A merchantman from the Mauritius, trading in 
gum and ivory, had landed on that coast early in July, and 
delivered the despatches for the missionaries. The papers 
were dated two months back, for the native had taken 
four weeks to ascend the Zambesi. 

On the arrival of the messenger, the principal of the 
mission had handed to Colonel Everest a bundle of 
European newspapers, chiefly the Times , the Daily News , 
and the Journal des Debats. The intelligence they con¬ 
tained had, under the circumstances, a special importance, 
and produced an unexpected emotion among the entire 
party. 

The members of the Commission were altogether in the 
chief room of the mission. Colonel Everest drew out the 
Daily News for the 13th of May, with the intention of 
reading aloud to his colleagues. Scarcely had he glanced 
at the first leading article, when his brow contracted, and 


K 2 






132 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


the paper trembled in his hand. In a few moments he 
recovered his usual composure. 

“What does the paper say, Colonel?” asked Sir John. 
“It is grave news, gentlemen,” said the Colonel, “that 
I have to communicate.” 

He kept the paper in his hand, and his colleagues waited 
eagerly for him to speak. To the surprise of all he rose, 
and, advancing to Matthew Strux, said,— 

“Before communicating the intelligence conveyed in 
this paper, I should wish to make an observation to you.” 

“ 1 am rea dy to hear any thing you may say,” said 
Strux, much astonished. 

The Colonel then said solemnly,— 

“ Mr. Strux, hitherto there has been between us a rivalry 
more personal than scientific, which has rendered our co¬ 
operation in the common cause somewhat difficult. This 
I believe, is to be attributed to the fact of there being two 
of us at the head of this expedition. To avoid antagonism, 
there should be only one chief to every enterprise. You 
agree with me, do you not ?” 

Strux bowed in assent. The Colonel went on,— 

“ Thls position, unpleasant for each of us, must, through 
recent circumstances, now be changed. First, sir, let me 
say that I esteem you highly, as your position in the 
scientific world demands. I beg you to believe that I 
regret all that has passed between us.” 
















































» 



















lUJIMxMfiteuuiUJ ,,, 




“ War is declared between England and Russia.” —[Page 133.] 






















































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 133 

These words were uttered with great dignity, even with 
piide. There was no humiliation in the voluntary apology, 
so nobly expressed, and neither Strux nor his colleague*' 
could guess his motive. Perhaps the Russian, not having 
the same incentive, was not equally disposed to forget any 
personal resentment. However, mastering his ill-feeling, 
he replied,— 

With you, Colonel, I think that no rivalry on our part 
should be permitted to injure the scientific work with 
which we are entrusted. I likewise hold you in the esteem 
that your talents deserve, and in future I will do all in my 
power to efface any personality from our relations. But 

you spoke of a change ; I do not understand_” 

“You will soon be made to understand, Mr. Strux,” 
replied the Colonel, with a touch of sadness in his tone, 

“ but first give me your hand.” 

Here it is, rejoined Strux, with a slight hesitation. 
Without another word the astronomers joined hands. 

“ Now you are friends,” cried Sir John. 

“ Alas ! no,” said the Colonel, dropping the Russian’s 
hand ; “ henceforth we are enemies, separated by an abyss 
which must keep us apart even on the territory of science.” 
Then turning to his colleagues, he added,— 

“Gentlemen, war is declared between England and 
Russia. See, the news is conveyed by these English, 
French, and Russian newspapers. 







J 34 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


And, in truth, the war of 1854 had begun. The English, 
with their allies the French and Turks, were fighting before 
Sebastopol, and the Eastern question was being submitted 
to the ordeal of a naval conflict on the Black Sea. 

The Colonels words fell like a thunderbolt. The English 
and Russians, with their strong sentiment of nationality, 
started to their feet. Those three words, “ War is declared,” 
were enough. They were no longer companions united in 
a common labour, but already eyed one another as avowed 
antagonists. Such is the influence of these national duels 
on the heart of man. An instinctive impulse had divided ! 
the Europeans—Nicholas Palander himself yielding to the 
feeling: Emery and Zorn alone regarded each other with 
more of sadness than animosity, and regretted that they 
had not shaken hands before Colonel Everest’s commu¬ 
nication. No further conversation ensued; exchanging 
bows, English and Russians retired. 

This novel situation, although it would not interrupt the 
survey, would render its continuation more difficult. For 
the interest of its country, each party desired to pursue 
the operations; but the measurements must be carried 
along two different meridians. In a formal interview sub¬ 
sequently arranged between the chiefs, it was decided by j 
lot that the Russians should continue the meridian already j 
begun, while the English should choose an arc 60 or 80 
miles to the west, and unite it to the first by a series of j 






































































The Parting of Emery and Zorn. —[Page 135.] 


































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


135 


I auxiliary triangles ; they would then continue their survey 
| as far as lat. 20°. 

I All these arrangements were made without any out- 
| break : personal rivalry was swallowed up by national 
| feeling, and the Colonel and Strux did not exchange an 
| uncivil word, but kept within the strictest limits of 
ij politeness. 

I The caravan was equally divided, each party preserving 
j its own stores. The steam-boat fell by lot to the Russians. 

Mokoum, especially attached to Sir John, followed the 
I English caravan. The pioneer, equally experienced, 
j headed the Russians. Each party retained its instru- 
I ments and one of the registers. 

I On the 31st of August the Commission divided. The 
j English cordially thanked the missionaries for their kind 
1 hospitality, and started first to connect their last station 
j with their new meridian. 

If, before their departure, any one had entered the 
privacy of the inner room, he would have seen Emery 
grasping the hand of Zorn, once his friend, but now, by 
the will of their Majesties the Queen of England and the 
Czar of Russia, no longer friend, but foe. 










136 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


CHAPTER XV. 

A GEOMETRIC PROGRESSION. 

After the separation the English astronomers continued 
their labours with the same care and precision as hitherto. 
Three had now to do the work of six, and consequently 
the survey advanced more slowly, and was attended with 
more fatigue; but they were not the men to spare them¬ 
selves; the desire that the Russians should not surpass 
them in any way sustained them in their task, to which 
they gave all their time and thoughts. Emery had to 
indulge in fewer reveries, and Sir John could not so often 
spare his time for hunting. A new programme was drawn 
up, assigning to each astronomer his proper share of the 
labour. Sir John and the Colonel undertook all obser¬ 
vations both in the sky and in the field ; while Emery 
replaced Palander as calculator. All questions were 
decided in common, and there was no longer any fear 
that disagreement should arise. Mokoum was still the 
guide and hunter to the caravan. The English sailors, 
who formed half the crew of the “ Queen and Czar," had, 





THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


*37 


of course, followed their countrymen ; and although the 
Russians were in possession of the steam-vessel, the India- 
rubber boat, which was large enough for ordinary purposes, 
was the property of theJEnglish. The provision-waggons 
were divided, thus impartially ensuring the revictualling of 
each caravan. The natives likewise had to be severed into 
two equal troops, not without some natural signs of dis¬ 
pleasure on their part; far from their own pasturages and 
water-courses, in a region inhabited by wandering tribes 
hostile to the tribes of the south, they could scarcely be 
reconciled to the prospect of separation. But at length, 
by the help of the bushman and the pioneer, who told 
them that the two detachments would be comparatively 
a short distance apart, they consented to the arrange¬ 
ment. 

On leaving Kolobeng the English caravan re-entered 
the burnt forest and arrived at the cromlech which had 
served for their last station. Operations were resumed, 
and a large triangle carried the observers at once ten or 
twelve miles to the west of the old meridian. 

Six days later the auxiliary series of triangles was 
finished, and Colonel Everest and his colleagues, after 
consulting the maps, chose the new arc one degree west of 
the other, being 23 0 east of the meridian of Greenwich. 
They were not more than sixty miles from the Russians, 
but this distance put any collision between the two parties 
9 








i3 8 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


out of the question, as it was improbable that their 
triangles would cross. 

All through September the weather was fine and clear. 
The country was fertile and varied, but scantily populated. 
The forests, which were few, being broken by wide, open 
tracts, and with occasional mounds occurring in the prairies, 
made the district extremely favourable for the observations. 
The region was well provided with natural productions. 
The sweet scent of many of the flowers attracted swarms 
of scarabaei, and more especially a kind of bee as nearly 
as possible like the European, depositing in clefts of rocks 
and holes of trees a white liquid honey with a delicious 
flavour. Occasionally at night large animals ventured near 
the camp; there were giraffes, varieties of antelopes, 
hyenas, rhinoceroses, and elephants. But Sir John would 
not be distracted, he resolutely discarded his rifle for his 
telescope. 

Under these circumstances, Mokoum and some of the 
natives became purveyors to the caravan, and Sir John had 
some difficulty in restraining his excitement when he heard 
the report of their guns. The bushman shot three prairie- 
buhaloes, the Bokolokolos of the Bechuanas, formidable 
animals, with glossy black skins, short strong legs, fierce 
eyes, and small heads crowned with thick black horns. 
They were a welcome addition to the fresh venison which 
formed the ordinary fare. 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND 


THREE RUSSIANS. 


J 39 


The natives prepared the buffalo-meat as the Indians of 
e north do their pemmican. The Europeans watched 
their proceedings with interest, though at first with some 
repugnance. The flesh, after being cut into thin slices and 
ned in the sun, was wrapped in a tanned skin, and beaten 
with flails till it was reduced to a powder. It was then 
pressed tightly into leathern sacks, and moistened with 
boiling tallowy suet collected from the animal itself. To 
this they added some marrow and berries, whose saccharine 
matter modified the nitrous elements of the meat. This 
compound, after being mixed and beaten, formed, when 
cold, a cake as hard as a stone. Mokoum, who considered 
his pemmican a national delicacy, begged the astronomers 
to taste the preparation. At first they found it extremely 
unpalatable, but, becoming accustomed to the flavour, they 
soon learnt to partake of it with great relish. Highly 
nourishing, and not at all likely to be tainted, containing, 
moreover, its nutritive elements closely compacted, this 
pemmican was exactly suited to meet the wants of a cara¬ 
van travelling in an unknown country. The bushman soon 
had several hundred pounds in reserve, and they were thus 
secure from any immediate want. 

Days and nights passed away in observations. Emery 
was always thinking of his friend, and deploring the fate 
which had so suddenly severed the bond of their friend¬ 
ship. He had no one to sympathize with his admiration 









140 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


of the wild characteristics of the scenery, and, with some¬ 
thing of Palander’s enthusiasm, found refuge in his calcu¬ 
lations. Colonel Everest was cold and calm as ever, 
exhibiting no interest in any thing beyond his professional 
pursuits. As for Sir John, he suppressed his murmurs, but 
sighed over the loss of his freedom. Fortune, however, 
sometimes made amends; for although he had no leisure 
for hunting, the wild beasts occasionally took the initiative, 
and came near, interrupting his observations. He then 
considered defence legitimate, and rejoiced to be able to 
make the duties of the astronomer and of the hunter to be 
compatible. 

One day he had a serious rencontre with an old rhino¬ 
ceros, which cost him “ rather dear.” For some time the 
animal had been prowling about the flanks of the caravan. 
By the blackness of his skin Mokoum had recognized the 
“chucuroo” (such is the native for this animal) as a 
dangerous beast, and one which, more agile than the white 
species, often attacks man and beast without any provoca¬ 
tion. 

On this day Sir John and Mokoum had set off to 
reconnoitre a hill six miles away, on which the Colonel 
wished to establish an indicating-post. With a certain 
foreboding, Sir John had brought his rifle with conical shot 
instead of his ordinary gun; for although the rhinoceros 
had not been seen for two days, yet he did not consider it 



































































































- 




































































































, I 








































t 

























































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 141 


advisable to traverse unarmed an unknown country. 
Mokoum and his companions had already unsuccessfully 
chased the beast, which probably now had abandoned its 
designs. There was no reason to regret the precaution. 
The adventurers had reached the summit of the hill, when 
at the base, close to a thicket, of no large extent, appeared 
the chucuroo. He was a formidable animal; his small 
eyes sparkled, and his horns, planted firmly one over the 
other on his bony nose, furnished a most powerful weapon 
of attack. 

The bushman caught sight of him first, as he crouched 
about half a mile distant in a grove of lentisk. 

“Sir John,” he cried, “fortune favours you : here is your 
chucuroo!” 

“The rhinoceros!” exclaimed Sir John, with kindling 
eyes, for he had never before been so near the animal. 

“ Yes ; a magnificent beast, and he seems inclined to cut 
off our retreat,” said the bushman. “Why he should 
attack us, I can hardly say; his tribe is not carnivorous: 
but any way, there he is, and we must hunt him out.” 

“ Is it possible for him to get up here to us ?” asked Sir 
John. 

“ No ; his legs are too short and thick, but he will wait.” 

“Well, let him wait,” said Sir John ; “and when we have 
examined this station, we will try and get him out” 

. They then proceeded with their reconnoitring, and chose 





143 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


a spot on which to erect the indicating-post. They also 
noticed other eminences to the north-west which would be 
of use in constructing a subsequent triangle. 

Their work ended. Sir John turned to the bushman, 
saying, “ When you like, Mokoum.” 

“I am at your orders, Sir John: the rhinoceros is still 
waiting.” 

44 Well, let us go down, a ball from my rifle will soon 
settle matters.” 

A ball! cried Mokoum ; “ you don’t know a rhino- 

eros. He won’t fall with one ball, however well it may be 
aimed.” 

“Nonsense!” began Sir John, "that is because people 
don’t use conical shot.” 

“ Conical or round,” rejoined the bushman, “ the first will 
not bring down such an animal as that.” 

“ Well,” said Sir John, carried away by his self-confi¬ 
dence, “ as you have your doubts, I will show you what our 
European weapons can do.” 

And he loaded his rifle, to be ready to take aim as soon 
as he should be at a convenient distance. 

“One moment, Sir John,” said the bushman, rather 
piqued, “will you bet with me?” 

“ Certainly,” said Sir John. 

“ 1 am on ty a P oor man,” continued Mokoum, “ but I 
will willingly bet you half-a-crown against your first ball.” 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 143 

“ Done! ” replied Sir John instantly. « Half-a-crown to 
you if the rhinoceros doesn’t fall to my first shot.” 

The hunters descended the steep slope, and were soon 
posted within range of the rhinoceros. The beast was 

perfectly motionless, and on that account presented an 
easy aim. 

Sir John thought his chance so good, that at the last 
moment he turned to Mokoum and said,— 

Do you keep to your bargain ?” 

‘‘Yes/’ replied the bushman. 

The rhinoceros still being as motionless as a target, Sir 
John could aim wherever he thought the blow would be 
mortal. He chose the muzzle, and, his pride being roused, 
he aimed with the utmost care, and fired. The ball failed 
in reaching the flesh ; it had merely shattered to fragments 
the extremity of one of the horns. The animal did not 
appear to experience the slightest shock. 

That counts nothing,” said the bushman, “you didn’t 
touch the flesh.” 

“ Yes, it counts,” replied Sir John, rather vexed ; “I have 
lost my wager. But come now, double or quits ? ” 

“As you please, Sir John, but you will lose.” 

“ We shall see.” 

The rifle was carefully re-loaded, and Sir John, taking 
rather a random aim, fired a second time ; but meeting the 
horny skin of the haunch, the ball, notwithstanding its 







144 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


force, fell to the ground. The rhinoceros moved a few 
steps. 

“ A crown to me,” said Mokoum. 

“Will you stake it again?” asked Sir John, “double or 
quits.” 

“ By all means,” said Mokoum. 

This time Sir John, who had begun to get angry, re¬ 
gained his composure, and aimed at the animal’s forehead. 
The ball rebounded, as if it had struck a metal plate. 

“ Half-a-sovereign,” said the bushman calmly. 

“Yes, and another,” cried Sir John, exasperated. 

The shot penetrated the skin, and the rhinoceros made 
a tremendous bound ; but instead of falling, he rushed 
furiously upon the bushes, which he tore and crushed 
violently. 

“ I think he still moves,” said the bushman quietly. 

Sir John was beside himself; his composure again 
deserted him, and he risked the sovereign he owed the 
bushman on-a fifth ball. He continued to lose again and 
again, but persisted in doubling the stake at every shot. 
At length the animal, pierced to the heart, fell, impotent to 
rise to its feet. 

Sir John uttered a loud hurrah; he had killed his 
rhinoceros. He had forgotten his disappointment, but he 
did not forget his bets. It was startling to find that the 
perpetually redoubled stakes had mounted at the ninth 






THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 145 


shot to 32 1 . Sir John congratulated himself on his escape 
from such a debt of honour; but in his enthusiasm he pre¬ 
sented Mokoum with several gold pieces which the bush- 
man received with his usual equanimity. 







146 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OP' 


CHAPTER XVI. 

DANGER IN DISGUISE. 

By the end of September the astronomers had accom¬ 
plished half their task. Their diminished numbers added 
to their fatigue, so that, notwithstanding their zeal, they 
occasionally had to recruit themselves byresting for several 
days. The heat was very overpowering. October in lat. 
24 0 S. corresponds to April in Algeria, and for some 
hours after mid-day work was impossible. The bushman 
was alone uneasy at the delay, for he was aware that the 
arc was about to pass through a singular region called a 
“karroo,” similar to that at the foot of the Roggeveld 
mountains in Cape Colony. In the damp season this dis¬ 
trict presents signs of the greatest fertility; after a few 
days of rain the soil is covered with a dense verdure ; in a 
very short time flowers and plants spring up every where ; 
pasturage increases, and water-courses are formed ; troops 
of antelopes descend from the heights and take possession 
of these unexpected prairies. But this strange effort of 
nature is of short duration. In a month, or six weeks 





THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


*47 


at most, all the moisture is absorbed by the sun ; the soil 
becomes hardened, and chokes the fresh germs ; vegetation 
disappears in a few days ; the animals fly the region; and 
where for a while there was a rich fertility, the desert again 
asserts its dominion. 

This karroo had to be crossed before reaching the perma¬ 
nent desert bordering on Lake Ngami. The bushman was 
naturally eager to traverse this region before the extreme 
aridity should have exhausted the springs. He explained 
his reasons to the Colonel, who perfectly understood, and 
promised to hurry on the work, without suffering its pre¬ 
cision to be affected. Since, on account of the state of the 
atmosphere, measuring was not always practicable, the 
operations were not unfrequently retarded, and the bush- 
man became seriously concerned lest when they reached 
the karroo its character of fertility should have dis¬ 
appeared. 

Meanwhile the astronomers could not fail to appreciate 
the magnificence around. Never had they been in finer 
country. In spite of the high temperature, the streams 
kept up a constant freshness, and thousands of flocks would 
have found inexhaustible pasturage. Clumps of luxuriant 
trees rose here and there, giving the prospect at times the 
appearance of an English park. 

Colonel Everest was comparatively indifferent to these 
beauties, but the others were fully alive to the romantic 


L 2 







148 


meridiana: the adventures of 


aspect of this temporary relief to the African deserts. 
Emery now especially regretted the alienation of his friend 
Zorn, and often thought how they would have mutually 
delighted in the charming scenery around them. 

The advance of the caravan was enlivened by the move* 
ments as well as by the song-notes of a variety of birds. 
Some of these were edible, and the hunters shot some 
brace of “ korans,” a sort of bustard peculiar to the South 
African plains, and some “dikkops,” whose flesh is very 
delicate eating. They were frequently followed by vora¬ 
cious crows, instinctively seeking to avert attention from 
their eggs in their nests of sand. In addition to these, 
blue cranes with white throats, red flamingoes, like flamer 
in the thinly scattered brushwood, herons, curlews, snipes, 
“kalas,” often perching on a buffalo’s neck, plovers, ibises, 
which might have flown from some hieroglyphic obelisk, 
hundreds of enormous pelicans marching in file,—all were 
observed to find congenial habitats in this district, where 
man alone is the stranger. But of all the varieties of the 
feathered race, the most noticeable was the ingenious 
weaver-bird, whose green nests, woven with rushes and 
blades of grass, hung like immense pears from the branches 
of the willows. Emery, taking them for a new species of 
fruit, gathered one or two, and was much surprised to hear 
them twitter like sparrows. There seemed some excuse 
for the ancient travellers in Africa, who reported that 















The Advance of the Caravan.— {Page 148 ] 
















THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


149 


certain trees in the country bore fruit producing living 
birds. 

The karroo was reached while still it was lovely in its 
verdure. Gnus, with their pointed hoofs, caamas, elks, 
chamois, and gazelles abounded. Sir John could not resist 
the temptation to obtain two days' leave from the Colonel, 
which he devoted with all his energy to his favourite 
pastime. Under the guidance of the bushman, while 
Emery accompanied as an amateur, he obtained many a 
success to inscribe in his journal, and many a trophy to 
carry back to his Highland home. His hand, skilful with 
the delicate instruments of the survey, was at home still 
more on his gun ; and his eye, keen to discern the remotest 
of stars, was quick to detect the merest movement of a 
gazelle. It was ever with something of self-denial that he 
laid aside the character of the hunter to resume the duties 
of the astronomer. The bushman’s uneasiness was ere 
long renewed. On the second day of Sir John’s interval of 
recreation, Mokoum had espied, nearly two miles to the 
right, a herd of about twenty of the species of antelope 
known as the oryx. He told Sir John at once, and advised 
him to take advantage of the fortune that awaited him, 
adding that the oryx was extremely difficult to capture, 
and could outstrip the fleetest horse, and that Cumming 
himself had not brought down more than four. 

This was more than enough to arouse the Englishman. 











150 MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 

He chose his best gun, his best horse, and his best dogs, 
and, in his impatience preceding the bushman, he turned 
towards the copse bordering the plain where the antelopes 
had been seen. In an hour they reined in their horses, 
and Mokoum, concealed by a grove of sycamores, pointed 
out to his companion the herd grazing several hundred 
paces to leeward. He remarked that one oryx kept 
apart. 

u He is a sentinel,” he said, “and doubtless cunning 
enough. At the slightest danger, he will give his signal, 
and the whole troop will make their escape. We must fire 
from a long distance, and hit at the first shot.” 

Sir John nodded in reply, and sought for a favourable 
position. 

The oryxes continued quietly grazing. The sentinel, as 
though the breeze had brought suspicions of danger, often 
raised his head, and looked warily around. But he was 
too far away for the hunters to fire at him with success, 
and to chase the herd over the plain was out of the ques¬ 
tion. The only hope of a lucky issue was that the herd 
might approach the copse. 

Fortune seemed propitious. Gradually following the lead 
of the sentinel male, the herd drew near the wood, their in¬ 
stinct, perchance, making them aware that it was safer than 
the plain. When their direction was seen, the bushman 
asked his companion to dismount. The horses were tied 


















































































































































































. f 

, . 























• • : 




































The Hunters glided through the Creepers and Brushwood.—[Page 151.) 













































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 151 


to a sycamore, and their heads covered to secure them 
from taking alarm. 

Followed by the dogs, the hunters glided through the 
creepers and brushwood till they were within three hundred 
paces of the troop. Then, crouching in ambush, and wait¬ 
ing with loaded guns, they could admire the beauty of the 
animals. By a strange freak of nature, the females were 
armed with horns more formidable than those of the males. 
The whole herd approached the wood, and awhile remained 
stationary. The sentinel oryx, as it seemed, was urging 
them to leave the plain; he appeared to be driving them, 
something like a sheep-collie congregates a flock, into a 
compact mass. The herd seemed strangely indifferent, and 
indisposed to submit to the guidance of their leader. The 
bushman was perplexed; he could not understand the 
relative movements of the sentinel and the herd. 

Sir John began to get impatient. He fidgeted with his 
rifle, sometimes wanting to fire, sometimes to advance; and 
the bushman had some trouble to restrain him. An hour 
passed away in this manner, when suddenly one of the dogs 
gave a loud bark, and rushed towards the plain. The bush¬ 
man felt angry enough to send a ball into the excited brute. 
The oryxes fled, and Sir John saw at once that pursuit was 
useless; in a few seconds they were no more than black 
specks in the grass. But to the bushman’s astonishment it 
was not the old male which had given the signal for flight. 








353 


meridiana; the adventures of 


The oryx remained in its place, without attempting to fol¬ 
low, and only tried to hide in the grass. 

“ Strange,” said the bushman ; “ what ails the creature ? 
Is he hurt, or crippled with age ?” *• 

“We shall soon see,” said Sir John, advancing towards 
the animal. 

The oryx crouched more and more in the grass; only the 
tips of his long horns were visible above the surface; but 
as he did not try to escape, Sir John could easily get near 
him. When within a hundred paces he took aim, and fired. 
The ball had struck the head, for the horns sunk into the 
grass. The hunters ran hastily to the spot. The bushman 
held in his hand his hunting-knife, in case the animal 
should still live. This precaution was unnecessary; the 
oryx was so dead, that when Sir John took hold of the 
horns, he pulled nothing but an empty flabby skin, contain¬ 
ing not so much as a bone. 

“By St. Andrew! these things happen to no one but 
me,” he cried, in a tone so comical that any one but the 
immovable Mokoum would have laughed outright. But 
Mokoum did not even smile. His compressed lips and 
contracted brow showed him to be utterly bewildered. 
With his arms crossed, he looked quickly right and left. 

Suddenly he caught sight of a little red leather bag, 
ornamented with arabesques, on the ground, which he 
picked up and examined carefully. 




The empty Oryx Skin 


Page 152.] 






























































































































































































































































































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


*53 


“ What’s that ?” asked Sir John. 

A Makololo’s pouch,” replied Mokoum. 

“ How did it get there ?” 

“ The owner let it fall as he fled.” 

“ What do you mean ?” 

“I mean,” said Mokoum, clenching his fists, “that the 
Malcololo was in the oryx skin, and you have missed him .” 

Sir John had not time to express his astonishment, when 
Mokoum, observing a movement in the distance, with all 
speed seized his gun and fired. 

He and Sir John hastened to the suspected spot. But the 
place was empty : they could perceive by the trampled grass 
that some one had just been there ; but the Makololo was 
gone, and it was useless to think of pursuit across the prairie. 

The two hunters returned, much discomposed. The 
presence of a Makololo at the cromlech, together with his 
disguise, not unfrequently adopted by oryx hunters, showed 
that he had systematically followed the caravan. It was 
not without design that he was keeping watch upon the 
Europeans and their escort. The more they advanced to 
the north, the greater danger there would be of being 
attacked by the plunderers. 

Emery was inclined to banter Sir John on his return 
from {lis holiday without booty ; but Sir John replied,— 

“ I hadn’t a chance, William ; the first oryx I hunted was 
dead before I shot at him.” 

io 







*54 


meridiana; the adventures of 


CHAPTER XVII. 
an unexpected blight. 

After the oryx hunt the bushman had a long conversa¬ 
tion with the Colonel. He felt sure, he said, that they were 
watched and followed, and that the only reason why they 
had not been attacked before was because the Makololos 
wished to get them farther north, where their hordes were 
larger. The question thus arose whether, in presence of 
this danger, they should retrace their steps ; but they were 
reluctant to suffer that which nature had favoured to be 
interrupted by the attacks of a few African savages. The 
Colonel, aware of the importance of the question, asked 
the bushman to tell him all he knew about the Makololos. 

Mokoum explained that they were the most northerly 
branch ot the great tribe of the Bechuanas. In 1850 Dr, 
Livingstone, during his first journey to the Zambesi, was 
received at Sesheki, the usual -residence of Sebitouani, the 
chief of the Makololos. This native was a man of remark¬ 
able intelligence, and a lormidable warrior. In 1824 he 
had menaced the Cape frontier, and, little by little, had 







THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 155 


gained an ascendency over the tribes of Central Africa, 
and had united them in a compact group. In the year 
before the arrival of the Anglo-Russian expedition the 
chief had died in Livingstone’s arms, and his son Sekeleton 
succeeded him. 

At first Sekeleton was very friendly towards the Euro¬ 
peans who visited the Zambesi, and Dr. Livingstone had no 
complaint to make. But after the departure of the famous 
traveller, not only strangers but the neighbouring tribes 
were harassed by Sekeleton and his warriors. To these 
vexations succeeded pillage on a large scale, and the 
Makololos scoured the district between Lake Ngami and 
the Upper Zambesi. Consequently nothing was more 
dangerous than for a caravan to venture across this region 
without a considerable escort, especially when its progress 
had been previously known. 

Such was the history given by Mokoum. He said that 
he thought it right to tell the Colonel the whole truth, 
adding, that for his own part (if the Colonel so wished) he 
should not hesitate to continue the march. 

Colonel Everest consulted with his colleagues, and it was 
settled that the work, at all risks, should be continued. 
Something more than half of the project was now accom¬ 
plished,and, whatever happened, the English owed itto them¬ 
selves and their country not to abandon their undertaking. 
The series of triangles was resumed. On the 27th the tropic 




1 56 MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


of Capricorn was passed, and on the 3rd of November, with 
the completion of the forty-first triangle, a fifth degree was 
added to the meridian. 

For a month the survey went on rapidly, without meeting 
a single natural obstacle. Mokoum, always on the alert, 
kept a constant look-out at the head and flanks of the 
caravan, and forbade the hunters to venture too great a 
distance away. No immediate danger, however, seemed 
to threaten the little troop, and they were sanguine that the 
bushman’s fears might prove groundless. There was no 
further trace of the native who, after eluding them at the 
cromlech, had taken so strange a part in the oryx chase: 
nor did any other aggressor appear. Still, at various inter¬ 
vals, the bushman observed signs of trepidation among the 
Bochjesmen under his command. The incidents of the 
flight from the old cromlech, and the stratagem of the oryx 
hunt, could not be concealed from them, and they were 
perpetually expecting an attack. A deadly antipathy 
existed between tribe and tribe, and, in the event of a colli¬ 
sion, the defeated party could entertain no hope of mercy. 
The Bochjesmen were already 300 miles from their home, 
and there was every prospect of their being carried 200 
more. It is true that, before engaging them, Mokoum had 
been careful to inform them of the length and difficulties 
of the journey, and they were not men to shrink from 
fatigue ; but now, when to these was added the danger of 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 157 

a conflict with implacable enemies, regret was mingled 
with murmuring, and dissatisfaction was exhibited with 
ill-humour, and although Mokoum pretended neither to 
hear nor to see, he was silently conscious oi an increasing 
anxiety. 

On the 2nd of December a circumstance occurred which 
still further increased the spirit of complaint amongst this 
superstitious people, and provoked them to a kind of rebel¬ 
lion. Since the previous evening the weather had become 
dull. The atmosphere, saturated with vapour, gave signs of 
being heavily charged with electric fluid. There was every 
prospect of the recurrence of one of the storms which in this 
tropical district are seldom otherwise than violent. During 
the morning the sky became covered with sinister-looking 
clouds, piled together like bales of down of contrasted colours, 
the yellowish hue distinctly relieving the masses of dark 
grey. The sun was wan, the heat was overpowering, and 
the barometer fell rapidly; the air was so still that not a 
leaf fluttered. 

Although the astronomers had not been unconscious of 
the change of weather, they had not thought it necessary 
to suspend their labours. Emery, attended by two sailors 
and four natives in charge of a waggon, was sent two miles 
east of the meridian to establish a post for the vertex of 
the next triangle. He was occupied in securing his point of 
sight, when a current of cold air caused a rapid condensa- 







i5 8 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


tion, which appeared to contribute immediately to a deve¬ 
lopment of electric matter. Instantly there fell a violent 
shower of hail, and by a rare phenomenon the hailstones 
were luminous, so that it seemed to be raining-drops of 
boiling silver. The storm increased; sparks flashed from 
the ground, and jets of light gleamed from the iron settings 
of the waggon. Dr. Livingstone relates that he has seen 
tiles broken, and horses and antelopes killed, by the 
violence of these hail-storms. 

Without losing a moment, Emery left his work for the 
purpose of calling his men to the waggon, which would 
afford better shelter than a tree. But he had hardly left 
the top of the hill, when a dazzling flash, instantly followed 
by a peal of thunder, inflamed the air. 

Emery was thrown down, and lay prostrate, as though 
he were actually dead. The two sailors, dazzled for a 
moment, were not long in rushing towards him, and were 
relieved to find that the thunderbolt had spared him. He 
had been enveloped by the fluid, which, collected by the 
compass which he held in his hand, had been diverted in 
its course, so as to leave him not seriously injured. Raised 
by the sailors, he soon came to himself; but he had nar¬ 
rowly escaped. Two natives, twenty paces apart, lay life¬ 
less at the foot of the post. One had been struck by the 
full force of the thunderbolt, and was a black and shattered 
corpse, while his clothes remained entire ; the other had 







Emery and two Natives struck by Lightning. — [Page 158-] 






















































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 159 

been locally struck on the skull by the destructive fluid, 
and had been killed at once. The three men had been 
undeniably struck by a single flash. This trisection of a 
flash of lightning is an unusual but not unknown occur¬ 
rence, and the angular division was very large. The Boch- 
* jesmen were at first overwhelmed by the sudden death of 
their comrades, but soon, in spite of the cries of the sailors 
and at the risk of being struck themselves, they rushed back 
to the camp. The two sailors, having first provided for the 
protection of Emery, conveyed the two dead bodies to the 
wa ffg on > an d then found shelter for themselves, being sorely 
bruised by the hailstones, which fell like a shower of 
marbles. For three quarters of an hour the storm con¬ 
tinued to rage; the hail then abated so as to allow the 
wa gg° n to return to camp. 

The news of the death of the natives had preceded them, 
and had produced a deplorable effect on the minds of the 
Bochjesmen, who already looked upon the trigonometrical 
operations with the terror of superstition. They assembled 
in secret council, and some more timid than the rest 
declared they would go no farther. The rebellious dis¬ 
position began to look serious, and it took all the bushman’s 
influence to arrest an actual revolt. Colonel Everest offered 
the poor men an increase of pay ; but contentment was not 
to be restored without much trouble. It was a matter of 
emergency; had the * natives deserted, the position of the 





i 6 o 


meridiana; the adventures ok 


caravan, without escort and without drivers, would have been 
perilous in the extreme. At length, however, the difficulty 
was overcome, and after the burial of the natives, the camp 
was raised, and the little troop proceeded to the hill where 

the two had met their death. 

Emery felt the shock for some days: his left hand, which 
had held the compass, was almost paralyzed; but after a 
time it recovered, and he was able to resume his work. 

For eighteen days no special incident occurred. The 
Makololos did not appear, and Mokoum, though still dis¬ 
trustful, exhibited fewer indications of alarm. They were 
not more than fifty miles from the desert; and the karroo 
was still verdant, and enriched by abundant water. They 
thought that neither man nor beast could want for any 
thing in this region so rich in game and pasturage; but 
they had reckoned without the locusts, against whose 
appearance there is no security in the agricultural districts 
of South Africa. 

On the evening of the 20th, about an hour before sunset 
the camp was arranged for the night. A light northerly 
breeze refreshed the atmosphere. The three Englishmen 
and Mokoum, resting at the foot of a tree, discussed their 
plans for the future. It was arranged that during the night 
the astronomers should take the altitude of some stars, in 
order accurately to find their latitude. Every thing seemed 
favourable for the operations ; in a cloudless sky the moon 

























































































































































































































































































































































































V • 





































A strange Cloud. —[Page 161.] 










































































































































































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. i6l 


was nearly new, and the constellations might be expected 
to be clear and resplendent. Great was the disappointment, 
therefore, when Emery, rising and pointing to the north, 
said,— 

“ The horizon is overcast: I begin to fear our antici- 
< Potions of a fine night will hardly be verified.” 

Yes, replied Sir John, “I see a cloud is rising, 
and if the wind should freshen, it might overspread the 
sky.” 

“ There is not another storm coming, I hope,” interposed 
the Colonel. 

“We are in the tropics,” said Emery, “and it would not 
be surprising ; for to-night I begin to have misgivings about 
our observations.” 

“What is your opinion, Mokoum ?” asked the Colonel of 
the bushman. 

Mokoum looked attentively towards the north. The 
cloud was bounded by a long clear curve, as definite as 
though traced by a pair of compasses. It marked off a 
section of some miles on the horizon, and its appearance, 
black as smoke, seemed to excite the apprehensions of the 
bushman. At times it reflected a reddish light from the 
setting sun, as though it were rather a solid mass than any 
collection of vapour. Without direct reply to the Colonel’s 
appeal, Mokoum simply said that it was strange. 

In a few minutes one of the Bochjesmen announced that 

M 









162 


meridiana; the adventures of 


the horses and cattle showed signs of agitation, and would 
not be driven to the interior of the camp. 

“ Well, let them stay outside,” said Mokoum ; and in 
answer to the suggestion that there would be danger from 
the wild beasts around, he added significantly, “ Oh, the 
wild beasts will be too much occupied to pay any attention 
to them.” 

After the native had gone back, Colonel Everest turned 
to ask what the bushman meant; but he had moved away, 
and was absorbed in watching the advance of the cloud, of 
which, too accurately, he was aware of the origin. 

The dark mass approached. It hung low and appeared 
to be but a few hundred feet from the ground. Mingling 
with the sound of the wind was heard a peculiar rustling, 
which seemed to proceed from the cloud itself. At this 
moment, above the cloud against the sky, appeared thou¬ 
sands of black specks, fluttering up and down, plunging in 
and out. and breaking the distinctness of the outline. 

“What are those moving specks of black?” asked Sir 
John. 

“ They are vultures, eagles, falcons, and kites,” answered 
Mokoum, “ from afar they have followed the cloud, and will 
never leave it until it is destroyed or dispersed.” 

“ But the cloud ?” 

“ Is not a cloud at all,” answered the bushman, extending 
his hand towards the sombre mass, which by this time had 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 163 


spread over a quarter of the sky. “It is a living host; to 
say the truth, it is a swarm of locusts/’ 

The hunter was not mistaken. The Europeans were 
about to witness one of those terrible invasions of grass¬ 
hoppers which are unhappily too frequent, and in one night 
change the most fertile country into an arid desert. These 
locusts, now arriving by millions, were the “ grylli devas- 
torii” of the naturalists, and travellers have seen for a 
distance of fifty miles the beach covered with piles of these 
insects to the height of four feet. 

“Yes,” continued the bushman, “these living clouds are 
a true scourge to the country, and it will be lucky if we 
escape without harm.” 

“ But we have no crops and pasturages of our own,” saia 
the Colonel; “what have we to fear?” 

“ Nothing, if they merely pass over our heads ; every 
thing, if they settle on the country over which we must 
travel. They will not leave a leaf on the trees, nor a blade 
of grass on the ground ; and you forget, Colonel, that if our 
own sustenance is secure, that of our animals is not. What 
do you suppose will become of us in the middle of a devas¬ 
tated district ?” 

The astronomers were silent for a time, and contemplated 
the animated mass before them. The cries of the eagles 
and falcons, who were devouring the insects by thousands, 
sounded above the redoubled murmur. 


M 3 




164 


meridiana; the adventures of 


“ Do you think they will settle here ?” said Emery. 

“ I fear so/' answered Mokoum, “ the wind carries them 
here direct. The sun is setting, and the fresh evening 
breeze will bear them down; should they settle on the 

trees, bushes, and prairies, why, then I tell you-but 

the bushman could not finish his sentence. In an instant 
the enormous cloud which overshadowed them settled on 
the ground. Nothing could be seen as far as the horizon 
but the thickening mass. The camp was bestrewed ; wag¬ 
gons and tents alike were veiled beneath the living hail. 
The Englishmen, moving knee-deep in the insects, crushed 
them by hundreds at every step. 

Although there was no lack of agencies at work for their 
destruction, their aggregate defied all check. The birds, 
with hoarse cries, darted down from above, and devoured 
them greedily; from below, the snakes consumed them in 
enormous quantities ; the horses, buffaloes, mules, and dogs 
fed on them with great relish; and lions and hyenas, 
elephants and rhinoceroses, swallowed them down by 
bushels. The very Bochjesmen welcomed these‘‘shrimps 
of the air” like celestial manna; the insects even preyed on 
each other, but their numbers still resisted all sources of 
destruction. 

The bushman entreated the English to taste the dainty. 
Thousands of young locusts, of a green colour, an inch to an 
inch and a half long, and about as thick as a quill, were 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 165 


caught. Before they have deposited their eggs, they are 
considered a great delicacy by connoisseurs, and are more 
tender than the old insects, which are of a yellowish tinge, 
and sometimes measure four inches in length. After half an 
hour’s boiling and seasoning with salt, pepper, and vinegar, 
the bushman served up a tempting dish to the three English¬ 
men. The insects, dismembered of head, legs, and skin, 
were eaten just like shrimps, and were found extremely 
savoury. Sir John, who ate some hundreds, recommended 
his people to take advantage of the opportunity to make a 
large provision. # 

At night they were all about to seek their usual beds; 
but the interior of the waggons had not escaped the invasion. 
It was impossible to enter without crushing the locusts, and 
to sleep under such conditions was not an agreeable prospect 
Accordingly, as the night was clear and the stars bright, 
the astronomers were rejoiced to pursue their contemplated 
operations, and deemed it more pleasant than burying 
themselves to the neck in a coverlet of locusts. Moreover, 
they would not have had a moment’s sleep, on account of 
the howling of the beasts which were attracted by their 
unusual prey. 

The next day the sun rose in a clear horizon, and 
commenced its course over a brilliant sky foreboding heat. 
A dull rustling of scales among the locusts showed that 
they were about to carry their devastations elsewhere; and 






166 


MERIDIAN A ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


towards eight o’clock the mass rose like the unfurling of 
an immense veil, and obscured the sun. It grew dusk as if 
night were returning, and with the freshening of the wind 
the whole mass was in motion. For two hours, with a 
deafening noise, the cloud passed over the darkened camp, 
and disappeared beyond the western horizon. 

After their departure the bushman s predictions were 
found to be entirely realized. All was demolished, and the 
soil was brown and bare. Every branch was stripped to 
utter nakedness. It was like a sudden winter settling in 
the height of summer, or like the dropping of a desert into 
the midst of a land of plenty. The Oriental proverb which 
describes the devastating fury of the Osmanlis might justly 
be applied to these locusts, “Where the Turk has passed, 
the grass springs up no more.” 








THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 167 


CHAPTER XVIII. 

THE DESERT. 

It was indeed no better than a desert which now lay 
before the travellers. When, on the 25th of December, 
they completed the measurement of another degree, and 
reached the northern boundary of the karroo, they found 
no difference between the district they had been traversing 
and the new country, the real desert, arid and scorching, 
over which they were now about to pass. The animals 
belonging to the caravan suffered greatly from the dearth 
alike of pasturage and water. The last drops of rain in 
the pools had dried up, and it was an acrid soil, a mixture 
of clay and sand, very unfavourable to vegetation. The 
waters of the rainy season filtered quickly through the 
sandy strata, so that the region was incapable of preserving 
for any length of time a particle of moisture. More than 
once has Dr. Livingstone carried his adventurous explora¬ 
tions across one of these barren districts. The very atmo¬ 
sphere was so dry, that iron left in the open air did not rust, 






168 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


and the distinguished traveller relates that the leaves hung 
weak and shrivelled; that the mimosas remained closed by 
day as well as by night; that the scarabaei, laid on the 
ground, expired in a few seconds; and that the mercury in 
the ball of a thermometer buried three inches in the soil 
rose at midday to 134 0 Fahrenheit. 

These records which Livingstone had made were now 
verified by the astronomers between the karroo and Lake 
Ngami. The suffering and fatigue, especially of the animals, 
continually increased, and the dry dusty grass afforded 
them but little nourishment. Nothing ventured on the 
desert; the birds had flown beyond the Zambesi for fruit 
and flowers, and the wild beasts shunned the plain which 
offered them no prey. During the first fortnight in January 
the hunters caught sight of a few couples of those antelopes 
which are able to exist without water for several weeks. 
There were some oryxes like those in whose pursuit Sir 
John had sustained so great a disappointment, and there 
were besides, some dappled, soft-eyed caamas, which venture 
beyond the green pasturages, and which are much esteemed 
for the quality of their flesh. 

To travel under that burning sun through the stifling 
atmosphere, to work for days and nights in the oppressive 
sultriness, was fatiguing in the extreme. The reserve of 
water evaporated continuously, so they were obliged to 
ration themselves to a painfully limited allowance. How- 





















# 



















































» 






































Crossing the Desert. — [Page 169.] 





















































































































































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 169 


ever, such were their zeal and courage that they mastered 
all their troubles, and not a single detail of their task was 
neglected. On the 25th of January they completed their 
seventh degree, the number of triangles constructed having 
amounted to fifty-seven. 

Only a comparatively small portion of the desert had 
now to be traversed, and the bushman thought that they 
would be able to reach Lake Ngami before their provision 
was exhausted. The Colonel and his companions thus had 
definite hopes, and were inspirited to persevere. But the 
hired Bochjesmen, who knew nothing of any scientific 
ardour, and who had been long ago reluctant to pursue their 
journey, could hardly be encouraged to hold out: unques¬ 
tionably they suffered greatly, and were objects for com¬ 
miseration. Already, too, some beasts of burden, overcome 
by hard work and scanty food, had been left behind, and 
it was to be feared that more would fall into the same 
helpless condition. Mokoum had a difficult task to perform, 
and as murmurs and recriminations increased, his influence 
more and more lost its weight. It became evident that the 
want of water would be a serious obstacle, and that the 
expedition must either retrace its steps, or, at the risk of 
meeting the Russians, turn to the right of the meridian, to 
seek some of the villages which were known to be scattered 
along Livingstone’s route. 

It was not long, however, before the bushman one morn- 







170 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


ing came to the Colonel, and declared himself powerless 
against the increasing difficulties. The drivers, he said, 
refused to obey him ; and there were continued scenes of 
insubordination, in which all the natives joined. The 
Colonel perfectly well understood the situation ; but stern 
to himself, he was stern to others. He refused to suspend t 
his operations, and declared that although he went alone,^ 
he would continue to advance. His two companions of | 


course agreed, and professed themselves ready to follow 
him. Renewed efforts of Mokoum persuaded the natives 
to venture a little farther : he felt sure that the caravan | f 
could not be more than five or six days’ march from Lake 
Ngami, and once there, the animals could find pasturage 
and shade, and the men an abundance of fresh water. All 
these considerations he laid before the principal Bochjes- 
men. He showed them that it was really best to advance 
northwards. If they turned to the west, their march would 
be perilous, and to turn back was only to find the karroo, 
desolate and dry. The natives at length yielded to his 
solicitations, and the almost exhausted caravan continued | 
its course. 

Happily this vast plain was in itself favourable to all! 
astronomical observations, so that no delay arose from any* ( 
natural obstruction. On one occasion there sprang up a 
sudden hope that nature was about to restore to them a 
supply of the water of which she had been so niggardly. A 








THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE 


RUSSIANS. 171 


lagoon, a mile or two in extent, was discovered on the 

, horizon. The reflection was indubitably of water, proving 

that what they saw was no mirage, due to the unequal 
density of the atmospheric strata. The caravan speedily 
turned in that direction, and the lagoon was reached towards 
five in the evening. Some of the horses broke away from 
' tlleir drivers » an d galloped to the longed-for water. Having 
smelt it, they plunged in to their chests, but almost imme¬ 
diately returned to the bank. They had not drunk, and 
when the Bochjesmen arrived they found themselves by 
i the side of a lagoon so impregnated with salt that its water 
could not be touched. Disappointment was keen, it was 
little short of despair. Mokoum thought that he should 
never induce the natives to proceed; but fortunately the 
only hope was in advancing, and even the natives were alive 
to the conviction that Lake Ngami was the nearest point 
where water could be procured. In four days, unless 
retarded by its labours, the expedition must reach the 
shores of the lake. 

Every day was momentous. To economize time, Colonel 
Everest formed larger triangles and established fewer posts. 
No efforts were spared to hurry on the progress of the 
survey. Notwithstanding the application of every energy, 
the painful sojourn in the desert was prolonged, and it was 
not until the 21st of February that the level ground began 
to be rough and undulating. A mountain 500 or 600 feel 







173 


meridiana; the adventures of 


high was descried about fifteen miles to the north-west. 
The bushman recognized it as Mount Scorzef, and, pointing 
to the north, said,— 

“ Lake Ngami is there.” 

“ The Ngami! the Ngami 1” echoed the natives, with noisy 
demonstration. They wished to hurry on in advance over the 
fifteen miles, but Mokoum restrained them, asserting that the < 
country was infested by Makololos, and that it was important 
to keep together. Colonel Everest, himself eager to reach 
the lake, resolved to connect by a single triangle the station 
he was now occupying with Mount Scorzef. The instruments 
were therefore arranged, and the angle of the last triangle 
which had been already measured from the south was i 
measured again from the station. Mokoum, in his impa¬ 
tience, only established a temporary camp ; he hoped to 
reach the lake before night; but he neglected none of his 
usual precautions, and prudently sent out horsemen right 
and left to explore the underwood. Since the oryx-chase 
the Makololos seemed indeed to have abandoned their watch, 
still he would not incur any risk of being taken by surprise. 

Thus carefully guarded by the bushman, the astronomers 
constructed their triangle. According to Emery’s calcula¬ 
tions it would carry them nearly to the twentieth parallel, 
the proposed limit of their arc. A few more triangles on 
the other side of Lake Ngami would complete their eighth 
degree; to verify the calculations, a new base would 












































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 173 

subsequently be measured directly on the ground, and the 
great enterprise would be ended. The ardour of the 
astronomers increased as they approached the fulfilment of 
their task. 

Meanwhile there was considerable curiosity as to what 
the Russians on their side had accomplished. For six 
months the members of the commission had been separated, 
and it seemed probable to the English that the Russians 
had not suffered so much from heat and thirst, since their 
course had lain nearer Livingstone’s route, and therefore in 
less arid regions. After leaving Kolobeng they would come 
across,various villages to the right of their meridian, where 
they could easily revictual their caravan. But still it was 
not unlikely that in this less arid, though more frequented 
country, Matthew Strux’s little band had been more exposed 
to the attacks of the plundering Makololos, and this was 
the more probable, since they seemed to have abandoned 
the pursuit of the English caravan. 

Although the Colonel, ever engrossed, had no thought 
to bestow on these things, Sir John and Emery had often 
discussed the doings of their former comrades. They 
wondered whether they would come across them again, 
and whether they would find that they had obtained the 
same mathematical result as themselves, and whether the 
two computations of a degree in South Africa would be 
identical. Emery did not cease to entertain kind memories 






174 


meridiana; the adventures of 


of his friend, knowing well that Zorn, for his part, would 
never forget him. 

The measurement of the angles was now resumed. To 
obtain the angle at the station they now occupied, they had 
to observe two points of sight. One of these was formed 
by the conical summit of Mount Scorzef, and the other by 
a sharp peak three or four miles to the left of the meridian, 
whose direction was easily obtained by one of the telescopes 
of the repeating circle. Mount Scorzef was much more 
distant; its position would compel the observers to diverge 
.considerably to the right of the meridian, but on examination 
they found they had no other choice. The station was 
therefore observed with the second telescope of the repeating 
circle, and the angular distance between Mount Scorzef 
and the smaller peak was obtained. 

Notwithstanding the impatience of the natives, Colonel 
Everest, as calmly as though he were in his own ob¬ 
servatory, made many successive registries from the 
graduated circle of his telescope, and then, by taking the 
average of all his readings, he obtained a result rigorously 
exact. 

The day glided on, and it was not until the darkness 
prevented the reading of the instruments, that the Colonel 
brought his observations to an end, saying,— 

“ I am at your orders, Mokoum ; we will start as soon as 
you like. ” 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 175 

“ And none too soon,” replied Mokoum ; “ better had we 
accomplished our journey by daylight.” 

The proposal to start met with unanimous approval, and 
by seven o clock the thirsty party were once more on the 
march. 

Some strange foreboding seemed weighing on the mind 
of Mokoum, and he urged the three Europeans to look 
carefully to their rifles and to be well provided with ammu¬ 
nition. The night grew dark, the moon and stars were 
repeatedly veiled in mist, but the atmosphere near the 
ground was clear. The bushman’s keen vision was ever 
watching the flanks and front of the caravan, and his 
unwonted disquietude could not fail to be noticed by Sir 
John, who was likewise on the watch. They toiled through 
the weary evening, occasionally stopping to gather together 
the loiterers, and at ten o’clock they were still six miles 
from the lake. The animals gasped for breath in an atmo¬ 
sphere so dry that the hygrometer could not have detected 
a trace of moisture. 

Mokoum was indefatigable in his endeavours to keep the 
disorganized party close together; but, in spite of his 
remonstrances, the caravan no longer presented a compact 
nucleus. Men and beasts stretched out into a long file, 
and some oxen had sunk exhausted to the ground. The 
dismounted horsemen could hardly drag themselves along, 
and any stragglers could have been easily carried off by 





meridiana; the adventures of 


176 


the smallest band of natives. Mokoum went in evident 
anxiety from one to another, and with word and gestures 
tried to rally the troop ; but his success was far from 
complete, and already, without his knowledge, some of his 
men were missing. 

By eleven o’clock the foremost waggons were hardly 
more than three miles from their destination. In the gloom 
of night Mount Scorzef stood out distinctly in its solitary 
height, like an enormous pyramid, and the obscurity made 
its dimensions appear greater than they actually were. 
Unless Mokoum were mistaken, Lake Ngami lay just 
behind Mount Scorzef, so that the caravan must pass 
round its base in order to reach the tract of fresh water by 
the shortest route. 

The bushman, in company with the three Europeans, 
took the lead, and prepared to turn to the left, when suddenly 
some distinct, though distant reports, arrested their atten¬ 
tion. They reined in their horses, and listened with a 
natural anxiety. In a country where the natives use only 
lances and arrows the report of European fire-arms was 
rather startling. The Colonel and Sir John simultaneously 
asked the bushman from whence the sound could proceed. 
Mokoum asserted that he could perceive a light in the 
shadow at the summit of Mount Scorzef, and that he had 
no doubt that the Makololos were attacking a party of 
Europeans. * 






THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


177 


“ Europeans!” cried Emery. 

“Yes,” replied Mokoum; “these reports can only be 
produced by European weapons.” 

“ But what Europeans could they be ?” began Sir John. 

“ Be who they may,” broke in the Colonel, “we must go 
to their assistance.” 

“Yes ; come on,” said Emery, with no little excitement. 

Before setting off for the mountain, Mokoum, for the 
last time, tried to rally the small band. But when the 
bushman turned round the caravan was dispersed, the 
horses unyoked, the waggons forsaken, and a few scattered 
shadows were flying along the plain towards the south. 

“The cowards !” he cried; then turning to the English, 
he said, “Well, we must go on.” 

The Englishmen and the bushman, gathering up all the 
remaining strength of their horses, darted on to the north. 
After a while they could plainly distinguish the war-cry 
of the Makololos. Whatever was their number, it was 
evident they were making an attack on Mount Scorze/, 
from the summit of which the flashes of fire continued 
Groups of men could be faintly distinguished ascending 
the sides. Soon the Colonel and his companions were on 
the rear of the besiegers. Abandoning their worn-out 
steeds, and shouting loud enough to be heard by the 
besieged, they fired at the mass of natives. The rapidity 
with which they re-loaded caused the Makololos to imagine 





178 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


themselves assailed by a large troop. The sudden attack 
surprised them, and, letting fly a shower of arrows and 
assagais, they retreated. Without losing a moment, the 
Colonel, Sir John, Emery, the bushman, and the sailors, 
never desisting from firing, darted among the group of 
natives, of whose bodies no less than fifteen soon strewed 
the ground. 

The Makololos divided. The Europeans rushed into the 
gap, and, overpowering the foremost, ascended the slope 
backwards. In a few minutes they had reached the summit, 
which was now entirely in darkness, the besieged having 
suspended their fire for fear of injuring those who had 
come so opportunely to their aid. 

They were the Russian astronomers. Strux, Palander, 
Zorn, and their five sailors, all were there : but of all the 
natives belonging to their caravan there remained but the 
faithful pioneer. The Bochjesmen had been as faithless to 
them as they had been to the English. 

The instant the Colonel appeared, Strux darted from 
the top of a low wall that crowned the summit. 

“The English !” he cried. 

“ Yes,” replied the Colonel gravely; “but now neither 
Russian nor English. Nationalities be forgotten; for 
mutual defence we are kinsmen, in that we are one and all 
Europeans 1” 





The English come to the relief of the Russians. — [Page 178.] 

















































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


I 79 


CHAPTER XIX. 

SCIENCE UNDAUNTED. 

NOBLE words were those just uttered by the Colonel. In 
the face of the Makololos it was no time for hesitation or 
discussion, and English and Russians, forgetting their 
national quarrel, were now re-united for mutual defence 
more firmly than ever. Emery and Zorn had warmly 
greeted each other, and the others had sealed their new 
alliance with a grasp of the hand. 

The first care of the English was to quench their thirst. 
Water, drawn from the lake, was plentiful in the Russian 
camp. Then, as soon as the Makololos were quiet enough 
to afford some respite, the astronomers, sheltered by a sort 
of casemate forming part of a deserted fortress, talked of 
all that had happened since their separation at Kolobeng. 

It appeared that the same reason had brought the 
Russians so far to the left of their meridian as had caused 
the English to turn to the right of theirs. Mount Scorzef, 
halfway between the two arcs, was the only height in that 




i8o 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


district which would serve as a station on the banks of 
Lake Ngami. Each of the meridians crossed the lake, 
whose opposite shores it was necessary to unite trigono¬ 
metrically by a large triangle. Naturally, therefore, the two 
rival expeditions met on the only mountain which could 
serve their purpose. 

Matthew Strux then gave some details of his operations. 
After leaving Kolobeng, the Russian party had continued 
without irregularity. The old meridian, which had fallen 
by lot to the Russians, fell across a fertile and slightly 
undulated country, which offered every facility for the 
formation of the triangles. Like the English, they had 
suffered from the heat, but they had experienced no hardship 
from the want of water. Streams were abundant, and kept 
up a wholesome moisture. The horses and oxen had 
roamed over an immense pasturage, across verdant prairies 
broken by forests and underwood. The wild animals by 
night had been safely kept at a distance by sentinels and 
fires, nor had any natives been seen except those stationary 
in the villages in which Dr. Livingstone had always found 
a hospitable reception. All through the journey the Bochjes- 
men of the caravan had given no cause for complaint, nor 
was it until the previous day, when the Makololos to the 
number of 200 or 300 had appeared on the plain, that they 
had shown themselves faithless, and deserted. For thirty- 
six hours the expedition had now occupied the little fortress. 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. l8l 


The Makololos had attacked them in the evening, after 
plundering the waggons left at the foot of the hill. The 
instruments fortunately, having been carried into the fort, 
were secure. The steamboat had also escaped the ravages 
of the natives ; it had been immediately put together by the 
sailors, and was now at anchor in a little creek of Lake 
Ngami, behind the enormous rocks that formed the base 
of the mountain. Mount Scorzef sloped with sudden 
abruptness down to the lake, and there was no danger of 
an attack from that side. 

Such was Matthew Strux’s account. Colonel Everest, 
in his turn, related the incidents of his march, the fatigues 
and difficulties, and the revolt of the Bochjesmen, and it 
was found by comparison that the Russians had had a less 
harassing journey than their rivals. 

The night of the 21st passed quietly. The bushman and 
sailors kept watch under the walls of the fort; the Makololos 
on their part did not renew any attack, but the bivouac-fires 
at the foot of the mountain proved that they had not 
relinquished their project. At daybreak the Europeans 
left their casemate for the purpose of reconnoitring the 
plain. The early morning light illumined the vast extent 
of country as far as the horizon. Towards the south lay 
the desert, with its burnt brown grass and barren aspect. 
Close under the mountain was the circular camp, containing 
a swarm of 400 to 500 natives. The fires were still alight. 




meridiana; the adventures of 


182 


and some pieces of venison broiling on the hot embers. 
The encampment was something more than temporary; 
the Makololos were evidently determined not to abandon 
their prey. Either vengeance or an instinctive thirst for 
blood appeared to be prompting them, since all the valuables 
t)f both caravans, the waggons, horses, oxen, and provisions, 
had fallen into their power; or perhaps it might be that 
they coveted the fire-arms which the Europeans carried, and 
of which they made such terrible use. The united English 
and Russians held a long consultation with the bushman, 
and it was felt that they could not relax their watch until 
they should arrive at a definite decision. This decision 
must depend on a variety of circumstances, and first of all 
it was necessary to understand exactly the position of 
Mount Scorzef. 

The mountain overlooked to the south, east, and west the 
vast desert which the astronomers, having traversed it, 
knew extended southwards to the karroo. In the west 
could be discerned the faint outlines of the hills bordering 
the fertile country of the Makololos, one of whose capitals, 
Maketo, lies about a hundred miles north-west of Lake 
Ngami. To the north the mountain commanded a country 
which was a great contrast to the arid steppes of the south. 
There were water, trees, and pasturage. For a hundred 
miles east and west lay the wide Lake Ngami, while from 
north to south its length was not more than 30 to 40 miles. 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 185 


Beyond appeared a gentle, undulated country, enriched 
with forests and watered by the affluents of the Zambesi, 
and shut in to the extreme north by a low chain of moun¬ 
tains. This wide oasis was caused by the great artery, the 
Zambesi, which is to South Africa what the Danube is to 
Europe, or the Amazon to South America. 

The side of the mountain towards the lake, steep as it 
was, was not so steep but that the sailors could accomplish 
an ascent and descent by a narrow way which passed from 
point to point. They thus contrived to reach the spot 
where the “ Queen and Czar’’ lay hid, and, obtaining a 
supply of water, enabled the little garrison to hold out in 
the deserted fort as long as their provisions lasted. 

The astronomers wondered why this little fort had been 
placed on the top of the mountain. Mokoum, who had 
visited the country as Livingstone’s guide, explained that 
formerly the neighbourhood of Lake Ngami was frequented 
by traders in ivory and ebony. The ivory was furnished 
by the elephants and rhinoceroses; but the ebony trade 
was but too often another name for that traffic in human 
beings which is still carried on by the slave-traders in the 
region of the Zambesi. A great numberof prisoners are made 
in the wars and pillages in the interior of the country, and 
these prisoners are sold as slaves. Mount Scorzef had been 
a centre of encampment for the ivory-traders, and it was 
there that they had been accustomed to rest before descend- 





184 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


ing the Zambesi. They had fortified their position, to 
protect themselves and their slaves from depredations, since 
it was not an uncommon occurrence for the prisoners to bfl- 
recaptured for fresh sale by the very men who had recently 
sold them. The route of the traders was now changed ; 
they no longer passed the shores of the lake, and the little 
fort was falling into ruins. All that remained was an 
enclosure in the form of the sector of a circle, from the 
centre of which rose a small casemated redoubt, pierced 
with loop-holes, and surmounted by a small wooden 
turret. 

But notwithstanding the condition of ruin into which it 
had fallen, the fortress offered the Europeans a welcome 
retreat. Behind the thick sandstone walls, and armed with 
their rapidly-loading guns, they were confident that they 
could keep back an army of Makololos, and, unless their 
provisions and ammunition failed, they would be able to 
complete their observations. At present they had plenty 
of ammunition; the coffer in which it was contained had 
been placed on the same waggon which carried the steam¬ 
boat, and had therefore escaped the rapacity of the natives. 
The great difficulty would be thepossible failure of provisions. 
The Colonel and Strux made a careful inspection of the 
store, and found that there was only enough to last the 
eighteen men for two days. After a short breakfast, the 
astronomers and the bushman, leaving the sailors still to 





THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 185 


keep watch round the walls, assembled in the redoubt to 
discuss their situation. 

I cannot understand, said Mokoum, “why you are so 
uneasy. You say that we have only provisions for two 
days; but why stay here ? Let us leave to-morrow, or A 
even to-day. The Makololos need not hinder us; they 
could not cross the lake, and in the steamboat we may 
reach the northern shore in a few hours.” 

The astronomers looked at each other ; the idea, natural 
as it was, had not struck them before. Sir John was the 
first to speak. 

“ But we have not yet completed the measurement of our 
meridian.” 

“ Will the Makololos have any regard for your meridian ?” 
asked the hunter. 

“Very likely not,” answered Sir John ; “but we have a 
regard for it, and will not leave our undertaking incomplete. 

I am sure my colleagues agree with me.” 

“Yes,” said the Colonel, speaking for all; “as long 
as one of us survives, and is able to put his eye to 
his telescope, the survey shall go on. If necessary, 
we will take our observations with our instrument in 
one hand and our gun in the other, even to the last 
extremity.” 

The energetic philosophers shouted out their resolution 
to proceed at every hazard. 






186 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


When it was thus decided that the survey should at all 
risks be continued, the question arose as to the choice oi 
the next station. 

“ Although there will be a difficulty,” said Strux, “ in 
joining Mount Scorzef trigonometrically to a station to the 
north of the lake, it is not impracticable. I have fixed on a 
peak in the extreme north-east, so that the side of the 
triangle will cross the lake obliquely.” 

“ Well,” said the Colonel, “ if the peak exists, I do not 
see any difficulty.” 

“ The only difficulty,” replied Strux, “ consists in the 
distance.” 

“ What is the distance ?” 

“ Over a hundred miles, and a lighted signal must be 
carried to the top of the peak.” 

“ Assuredly that can be done,” said the Colonel. 

“And all that time, how are we to defend ourselves 
against the Makololos?” asked the bushman. 

“ We will manage that too.” 

Mokoum said that he would obey the Colonel’s orders, 
and the conversation ended. The whole party left the 
casemate, and Strux pointed out the peak he had chosen. 
It was the conical peak of Volquiria, 300 feet high, and 
just visible in the horizon. Notwithstanding the distance, 
a powerful reflector could thence be discerned by means 
of a magnifying telescope, and the curvature of the 





THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 187 


earth’s surface, which Strux had taken into account, 
would not be any obstacle. The real difficulty was how 
the lamp should be hoisted to the top of the moun¬ 
tain. The angle made at Mount Scorzef with Mount 
Volquiria and the preceding station would probably 
complete the measurement of the meridian, so that the 
operation was all important. Zorn and Emery offered 
to take this journey of a hundred miles in an unknown 
country, and, accompanied by the pioneer, prepared to 
start. 

One of the canoes of birch-bark, which are manufactured 
by the natives with great dexterity, would be sufficient to 
carry them over the lake. Mokoum and the pioneer 
descended to the shore, where were growing some dwarf 
birches, and in a very short time had accomplished their 
task, and prepared the canoe. 

At eight o’clock in the evening the newly-constructed 
craft was loaded with instruments, the apparatus for the 

reverberator, provisions, arms, and ammunition. It was 

. 

arranged that the astronomers should meet again in a small 
creek known to both Mokoum and the pioneer ; it was also 
agreed that as soon as the reverberator on Mount Volquiria 
should be perceived, Colonel Everest should light a signal 
on Mount Scorzef, so that Emery and Zorn, in their turn, 
might take the direction. 

The young men took leave of their colleagues, and 






i88 


meridiana; the adventures of 


descended the mountain in the obscurity of night, having 
been preceded by the pioneer and two sailors, one English 
and one Russian. The mooring was loosened, and the 
frail boat turned quietly across the lake. 













• 


















I 

' 









. 

















ft 









































On Guard on Mount Scorzef. - [Page iSo 1 






































































































































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE 


RUSSIANS. 189 


CHAPTER XX. 

STANDING A SIEGE. 

Not without anxiety had the astronomers witnessed the 
departure of their young colleagues: they could not tell 
what dangers awaited them in that unknown country. 
Mokoum tried to reassure them by praising the courage of 
the pioneer, and besides, he said, the Makololos were too 
much occupied around Mount Scorzef to beat the country 
to the north of Lake Ngami. He instinctively felt that 
the Colonel and his party were in a more dangerous 
position than the two young astronomers. 

The sailors and Mokoum kept watch in turns through the 
night. But “the reptiles/' as the bushman termed the 
Makololos, did not venture another attack. They seemed to 
be waiting for reinforcements, in order to invade the 
mountain from all sides, and overcome by their numbers 
the resistance of the besieged. 

The hunter was not mistaken in his conjectures; and 
when daylight appeared Colonel Everest perceived a 






190 


meridiana; the adventures of 


sensible increase in the number of the natives. Their camp, 
carefully arranged round the base of the mountain, shut off 
escape on every side except that towards the lake. This 
side could not be invested, so that unless unforeseen cir¬ 
cumstances occurred, retreat to the water was always prac¬ 
ticable. But the Europeans had no thought of escaping : 
they occupied a post of honour, and were all agreed 
that it must not be abandoned. No allusion was ever 
made to the war between England and Russia, and both 
parties strove together to accomplish their scientific 
labour. 

The interval of waiting for the signal on Mount Volquiria 
was employed in completing the measurement of the 
preceding triangle and in finding the exact latitude of 
Mount Scorzef by means of the altitudes of the stars. 

Mokoum was called upon to say what would be the 
shortest possible space of time that must elapse before 
Emery and Zorn could reach Mount Volquiria. He replied 
that as the journey was to be performed on foot, and the 
country was continually crossed by rivers, he did not think 
that they could arrive in less than five days at least. They 
therefore adopted a maximum of six days, and portioned 
out their supplies to serve for that period. Their reserve 
was very limited, consisting only of a few pounds of biscuit, 
preserved meat, and pemmican, and had already been dimi¬ 
nished by the portion furnished to the pioneer’s little troop. 





THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE 


RUSSIANS. 191 


o onel Everest and his companions, anxiously anticipating 
. the sixth day, decided that the daily ration must be reduced 
to a third of their previous allowance. The thirteen men 
would doubtless suffer much from this small amount of 
nourishment, but there was an unflinching determination to 
! bear up bravely. 

“Besides,” said Sir John, "we have room enough to 
hunt.” & 

Mokoum shook his head doubtfully : he thought 
that game would be rare on the mountain. However 
his gun need not be idle, and leaving the astronomers 
to examine and correct their registers, he set off with Sir 
1 John. 

The Makololos were quietly encamped, and apparently 
patient in their intention of reducing the besieged by famine. 
The two hunters reconnoitred the mountain. The fort 
occupied a space of ground measuring not more than a 
quarter of a mile in its widest part. The soil was covered 
with flints and grass, dotted here and there with low shrubs, 
and bright with gladioli. Red heaths, silvery-leaved protete, 
and erica; with wavy fronds, formed the flora of the moun¬ 
tain, and beneath the angles formed by the projections of 
rock sprung up thorny bushes ten feet high, with bunches 
of a sweet-smelling white flower. The bushman was igno¬ 
rant of its name, but it was doubtless the A rduina bispinosa , 
which bears fruit like the barberry. 







meridiana; the adventures of 


193 

After an hour’s search Sir John had seen no trace of 
game. Some little birds with dark wings and red beaks 
flew out of the bushes, but at the first shot they disappeared, 
no more to return. It was evident that the garrison must ^ 
not depend on the products of the chase for sustenance. 

« We can fish in the lake,” said Sir John, standing and 
contemplating the fine extent of water. 

“ To fish without net or line,” replied the bushman, “is as 
difficult as to lay hands on birds on the wing. But we 
will not despair; chance has hitherto favoured us. 

“Chance! nay, not chance, but Providence,” said Sir 
John. “That does not forsake us; it has brought us to 
the Russians, and will no doubt carry us on to our goal.” 

“And will Providence feed us, Sir John?” asked the 
bushman. 

“No doubt, Mokoum,” said Sir John encouragingly; 
and the bushman thought to himself that no blind trust in 
Providence should prevent him from using his own best 
exertions. 

The 25th brought no change in the relative positions of 
besiegers and besieged. The Makololos, having brought 
in the plundered waggons, remained in their camp. Herds 
and flocks were grazing in the pasturages at the foot of the 
mountain, and some women and children, who had joined 
the tribe, went about and pursued their ordinary occu¬ 
pations. From time to time, some chief, recognizable by 









An Attack on Mount Scorzef. — [Page 193.] 

































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


193 


the richness of the skins which he wore, ascended the slope 
of the mountain and tried to examine the approaches to 
the summit; but the report of a rifle always took him 
speedily back to the plain. The Makololos then raised 
their war-cry, brandished their assagais, and all became 
quiet. 

The following day the natives made a more serious 
attempt, and about fifty of them at once scaled three sides 
of the mountain. The whole garrison turned out to the 
foot of the enclosure, and the European arms caused 
considerable ravage among the Makololos. Five or six 
were killed, and the rest abandoned their project, but it 
was quite evident that if several hundred were to assault 
the mountain simultaneously, the besieged would find it 
difficult to face them on all sides. Sir John now thought 
of the mitrailleuse, which was the principal weapon of the 
“ Queen and Czar,” and proposed that it should be brought 
up to defend the front of the fortress. It was a difficult 
task to hoist the machine up the rocks, which in some 
parts were almost perpendicular; but the sailors showed 
themselves so agile and daring, that in the course of the 
day the mitrailleuse was installed in the embrasure of the 
embattled enclosure. Thence, its twenty-five muzzles, 
arranged in the shape of a fan, would cover the front of 
the fort, and the natives would thus early make acquaint¬ 
ance with the engine of death which in after-years was to 





i 9 4 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


effect such devastation amongst the civilized armies of the 
European continent 

The dry air and clear sky had enabled the astronomers 
each night to pursue their observations. They had found 
the latitude of Mount Scorzef to be 19 0 , 37', which result 
confirmed their opinion that they were less than half a 
degree from the northern extremity of their meridian, and 
that consequently the next triangle would complete the 
series. 

The night passed without any fresh alarm. If circum¬ 
stances had favoured the pioneer, he and his companions 
would reach Mount Volquiria the following day, so that the 
astronomers kept unflagging watch through the next night 
for the appearance of the light. Strux and the Colonel 
had already pointed the telescope to the peak, so that it 
was continuously embraced in the field of the object-glass, 
otherwise it would have been difficult to discern on a dark 
night; as it was, the light would doubtless be perceived 
immediately on its appearance. 

All day Sir John beat fruitlessly the bushes and long 
grass. He could not unearth a single animal that was fit 
to eat. The very birds, disturbed from their retreats, had 
gone to the underwood on the shore for shelter. Sir John 
was extremely vexed, inasmuch as he was not hunting 
merely for personal gratification, but to supply the neces¬ 
sities of the party. Perhaps he himself suffered from 






THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 195 


hunger more than his three colleagues, whose attention 
was more riveted by their application to science. The 
sailors and Mokoum suffered equally with Sir John. One 
more day and their scanty reserve would be at an end, and 
if the pioneer’s expedition were delayed, they would soon 
be exposed to a severe extremity of hunger, 

The dark, calm night was passed in watching; but the 
horizon remained wrapped in shade, and no light appeared 
in the object-glass of the telescope. The minimum oi time, 
however, allowed to the expedition had hardly expired, 
and they felt that they were bound to exhibit patience for 
a while. 

The next day the garrison ate their last morsel of meat 
and biscuit; but their courage did not fail, and, though 
they should be obliged to feed on what herbs they could 
gather, they were resolved to hold out. 

The succeeding night passed without any result. More 
than once the astronomers believed that they had seen the 
light, but it was always proved to be a star in the misty 
horizon. 

On the 1st of March they were compelled absolutely to 
fast. Having been for some time accustomed to meagre 
and inadequate nourishment, they passed the first day 
without much acute suffering, but on the morrow they 
began to experience the pangs of craving. Sir John and 
Mokoum, haggard-eyed, and sensitive to the gnawings of 



MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


196 


hunger, wandered over the top of the mountain ; but no 
game whatever was to be seen. They began to think that, 
as the Colonel had said, they should literally have to feed 
on grass. If they only had the stomachs of ruminants, 
thought poor Sir John, as he eyed the abundant pasturage, 
they would be able to hold out; but still no game, still not 
even a bird ! He gazed intently over the lake, in which 
the sailors had fished in vain ; and it was impossible to get 
near the wary aquatic birds that skimmed the tranquil 
waters. 

At last, worn out with fatigue, Sir John and his companion 
lay down on the grass at the foot of a mound of earth some 
five or six feet high. Here they fell, not precisely into a 
sleep, but into a heavy torpor, which for a while benumbed 
their sufferings. How long this drowsiness would have lasted 
neither of them could have said ; but in about an hour Sir 
John was aroused by a disagreeable pricking. He tried to 
slumber again, but the pricking continued, and at last 
impatiently he opened his eyes. 

He was entirely covered, face, hands, and clothes, with 
swarms of white ants. He started to his feet, and his sudden 
movement aroused the bushman, who was covered in the 
same way. But to Sir John’s great surprise, the bushman, 
instead of shaking off the insects, carried them by handfuls 
to his mouth, and devoured them greedily. Sir John’s 
first sensation was disgust at his voracity. 








The Rice of the Bochjesmen. — [Page 196.] 




































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 197 

Come, eat, do as I do!” said the bushman; “it is the 
rice of the Bochjesmen.” 

And that was, in truth, the native term for these insects. 
The Bochjesmen feed on both the black and white species, 
but they consider the white to be of superior quality. The 
only drawback is, that they must be swallowed in large 
quantities to satisfy any longing for food. The Africans 
generally mix them with the gum of the mimosa, thus ren- 
deringthem capable of affording a less unsubstantial meal; 
but as the mimosa did not grow on Mount Scorzef, the bush- 
man had to content himself with his rice au naturel. 

Sir John, in spite of his repugnance, resolved to imitate 
him. The insects poured forth by thousands from their 
enormous ant-hill, which was none other than the mound of 
earth by which the weary sufferers had reclined. Sir John 
took them by handfuls, and carried them to his lips ; he did 
not dislike the flavour, which was a grateful acid; and 
gradually he felt his hunger moderated. 

Mokoum did not forget his companions in misfortune. 
He ran to the fort, and brought out the garrison. The 
sailors were without difficulty induced to attack the singular 
food, and although the astronomers hesitated a moment, 
yet, encouraged by Sir John’s example, and half dead with 
inanition, they soon at least assuaged the intenseness of 
their hunger by devouring considerable quantities of these 
ants. 







198 


MERIDIAN A; THE ADVENTURES OF 


But an unexpected incident procured for the starving 
men a more solid meal. In order to lay in a provision oi 
the insects, Mokoum resolved to destroy one side of the 
enormous ant-hill. It consisted of a central conical mound, 
with smaller cones arranged at intervals round its base. 
The hunter had already made several blows with his hatchet, 
when a singular grunting sound from the centre attracted 
his attention: he paused in his work of destruction, and 
listened, while his companions watched him in silence. He 
struck a few more blows, and the groan was repeated more 
audibly than before. The bushman rubbed his hands, 
whilst his eyes evidently sparkled. Once more attacking 
the ant-hill, he opened a cavity about a foot wide. The 
ants were escaping on every side; but of them he took 
no heed, leaving the sailors to collect them in sacks. 
All at once a strange animal appeared at the mouth 
of the hole. It was a quadruped with a long snout, 
small mouth, and flexible tongue, which protruded to 
a great length; its ears were straight, its legs short, and 
its tail long and pointed. Long grey bristles with a 
reddish tinge covered its lank body, and its feet were 
armed with enormous claws. Mokoum killed it .at once 
with a sharp blow on the snout. “ There is our supper,” 
he said. “ It has been some time coming, but it will not 
taste the worse for that. Now for a fire, and a ramrod for 
a spit, and we will feast as we have never feasted in our lives.” 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


199 


The bushman speedily began to skin the animal, which 
was a species of octeropus or ant-eater, very common 
m South Africa, and known to the Dutch at the Cape under 
the name of “earth-pig.” Swarms of ants are'devoured 
by this creature, which catches them by means of its long 
glutinous tongue. 

The meal was soon cooked ; perhaps it would have been 
better for a few more turns of the spit, but the hungry men 
were impatient. The firm, wholesome flesh was declared 
to be excellent, although slightly impregnated with the 
acid of the ants 

After the repast the Europeans felt re-invigorated, and 
animated with more steadfast purpose to persevere ■ and 
in truth there was need of encouragement. All through 
the following night no light appeared on Mount Volquiria. 







200 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


CHAPTER XXI. 

SUSPENSE. 

It was now the ninth day since Zorn and Emery had 
started on their expedition. Their colleagues, detained on 
the summit of Mount Scorzef, began to give way to the 
fear that they had fallen into some irretrievable misfortune. 
They were all well aware that the young astronomers would 
omit nothing that lay in their power to ensure the success of 
their enterprise, and they dreaded lest their courageous spirit 
should have exposed them to danger, or betrayed them into 
the hands of the wandering tribes. They waited always 
impatiently for the moment when the sun sank behind the 
horizon, that they might begin their nightly watch, and 
then all their hopes seemed concentrated on the field of 
their telescope. 

All through the 3rd of March, wandering up and down 
the slopes, hardly exchanging a word, they suffered as they 
had never suffered before; not even the heat and fatigues 
of the desert, nor the tortures of thirst, had equalled the 
pain that arose from their apprehensions. The last morsel 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


201 


of the ant-eater had been devoured, and nothing 1 now 
remained but the insufficient nourishment afforded by the 
ants. 

Night came, dark and calm, and extremely favourable 
to their operations ; but although the Colonel and Strux 
watched alternately with the utmost perseverance, no light 
appeared, and the sun’s rays soon rendered any longer 
observations futile. 

There was still nothing immediate to fear from the 
Makololos; they seemed resolved to reduce the besieged 
by famine, and it seemed hardly likely that they would 
desist from their project. The unhappy Europeans were 
tortured afresh with hunger, and could only diminish their 
sufferings by devouring the bulbs of the gladioli that sprang 
up between the rocks. 

Yet they were hardly prisoners ; their detention was 
voluntary. At any moment the steamboat would have 
carried them to a fertile land, where game and fruit abounded. 
Several times they discussed the propriety of sending 
Mokoum to the northern shore to hunt for the little garrison; 
but this manoeuvre might be discovered by the natives; 
and there would be a risk to the steam-vessel, and conse¬ 
quently to the whole party, in the event of finding other 
hostile tribes to the north of the lake : accordingly the 
proposal was rejected, and it was decided that they must 
abide in company, and that all or none must depart. To 



202 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


leave Mount Scorzef before the observations were complete 
was an idea that was not entertained for a moment; the 
astronomers were determined to wait patiently until the 
faintest hope of success should be extinguished. 

“We are no worse off,” remarked the Colonel in the 
course of the day to his assembled companions, “than 
Arago, Biot, and Rodriguez were when they were measuring 
the arc from Dunkirk to Ivica: they were uniting the 
Spanish coast and the island by a triangle of which the 
sides were more than eighty miles long. Rodriguez was 
installed on an isolated peak, and kept up lighted lamps 
at night, while the French astronomers lived in tents a 
hundred miles away in the desert of Las Palmas. For 
sixty nights Arago and Biot watched for the signal, and, 
discouraged at last, were about to renounce their labour, 
when, on the sixty-first night, appeared a light, which it was 
impossible to confound with a star. Surely, gentlemen, if 
those French astronomers could watch for sixty-one nights 
in the interests of science, we English and Russians must 
not give up at the end of nine.” 

The Colonel’s companions most heartily approved the 
sentiment; but they could have said that Arago and Biot 
did not endure the tortures of hunger during their long 
vigil. 

In the course of the day Mokoum perceived an unusual 
agitation in the Makololo camp. He thought at first that 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


203 


they were about to raise the siege, but, after some contem¬ 
plation, he discovered that their intentions were evidently 
hostile, and that they would probably assault the mountain 
in the course of the night. All the women and children, 
under the protection of a few men, left the encampment, 
and turned eastward to the shores of the lake. It was 
probable that the natives were about to make a last attack 
on the fortress before retiring finally to Maketo. The 
bushman communicated his opinion to the Europeans. They 
resolved to keep a closer watch all night, and to have their 
guns in readiness. The enclosure of the fort was broken in 
several places, and as the number of the natives was now 
largely increased they would find no difficulty in forcing 
their way through the gaps. Colonel Everest therefore 
thought it prudent to have the steamboat in readiness for a 
retreat. The engineer received orders to light the fire, but 
not until sunset, lest the smoke should reveal the presence of 

the vessel to the natives ; and to keep up the steam, in order 
to start at the first signal. The evening repast was com¬ 
posed of white ants and gladiolus bulbs—a meagre supper 
for men about to fight with several hundred savages; but 
they were resolute, and staunchly awaited the engagement 
which appeared imminent. 

Towards six o’clock, when night was coming on with its 
tropical celerity, the engineer descended the mountain, 
and proceeded to light the fire of the steamboat. It was 







204 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


still the Colonel’s intention not to effect an escape until 
the last extremity: moreover, he was firm in his determina¬ 
tion to abide until the night was advanced, that he might 
give himself the last chance of observing the signal from 
Mount Volquiria. The sailors were placed at the foot of 
the rampart, with orders to defend the breaches to the last. 
All arms were ready, and the mitrailleuse, armed with the 
heaviest ammunition that they had in store, spread its 
formidable mouth across the embrasure. 

For several hours the Colonel andStrux, posted in thenar- 
row donjon, kept a constant watch on the peak of Volquiria. 
The horizon was dark, while the finest of the southern con¬ 
stellations were resplendent in the zenith. There was no 
wind, and not a sound broke the imposing stillness of 
nature. The bushman, however, posted on a projection of 
rock, heard sounds which gradually became more distinct. 
He was not mistaken ; the Makololos were at length com¬ 
mencing their assault on the mountain. 

Until ten o’clock the assailants did not move; their fires 
were extinguished, and camp and plain were alike wrapped 
in obscurity. Suddenly Mokoum saw shadows moving up 
the mountain, till the besiegers seemed but a few hundred 
feet from the plateau on which stood the fort. 

“Now then, quick and ready!” cried Mokoum. 

The garrison immediately advanced to the south side of 
the fort, and opened a running fire on the assailants. The 




Watching for the Signal from Mount Volquiria.—[Page 204.] 



















































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 205 


Makololos answered by a war-cry, and, in spite of the firing, 
continued to advance. In the light caused by the flash of the 
guns, the Europeans perceived such swarms of natives that 
resistance seemed impossible. But still they trusted that 
their well-directed balls were doing considerable execution, 
and they discerned that not a few of the natives were rolling 
down the sides of the mountain. Hitherto, however, no¬ 
thing arrested them: with savage cries they continued to press 
on in compacted order, without even waiting to hurl a single 
dart. Colonel Everest put himself at the head of his little 
troop, who seconded him admirably, not excepting Palander, 
who probably was handling a gun for almost the first time. 
Sir John, now on one rock now on another, sometimes kneel¬ 
ing sometimes lying, did wonders, and his gun, heated with 
the rapidity of the repeated loading, began to burn his 
hands. Mokoum, as ever, was patient, bold, and undaunted 
in his confidence. 

But the valour and precision of the besieged could avail 
nothing against the torrent of numbers. Where one native 
fell, he was replaced by twenty more, and, after a some¬ 
what prolonged opposition, Colonel Everest felt that he 
must be overpowered. Not only did the natives swarm 
up the south slope of the mountain, but they made an ascent 
also by the side slopes. They did not hesitate to use the 
dead bodies of the fallen as stepping-stones, and they even 
lifted them up, and sheltered themselves behind them, 



20 6 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


as they mounted. The scene revealed by the flash of the 
fire-arms was appalling, and the Europeans saw enough to 
make them fully aware that they could expect no quarter, 
and that they were being assaulted by barbarians as savage 
as tigers. 

At half-past ten the foremost natives had reached the 
plateau. The besieged, who were still uninjured (the natives 
not yet having employed their arrows and assagais), were 
thoroughly conscious they were impotent to carry on a 
combat hand to hand. The Colonel, in a calm, clear voice 
that could be heard above the tumult, gave the order to 
retire. With a last discharge the little band withdrew 
behind the walls. Loud cries greeted their retreat, and the 
natives immediately made a nearer approach in their 
attempt to scale the central breach. 

A strange and unlooked for reception awaited them. 
Suddenly at first, and subsequently repeated at intervals 
but of a few minutes, there was a growling reverberation 
as of rolling thunder. The sinister sound was the report of 
the exploding mitrailleuse, which Sir John had been 
prepared to employ, and now worked with all his energy, 
Its twenty-five muzzles spread over a wide range, and the 
balls, continually supplied by a self-adjusting arrangement, 
fell like hail among the assailants. The natives, swept 
down at each discharge, responded at first with a howl and 
then with a harmless shower of arrows. 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 207 


She plays well,” said the bushman, approaching 1 Sir 
John. “ When you have played your tune, let me play 
mine.” 

But there was no need for Sir John to be relieved ; the 
mitrailleuse was soon silent. The Makololos were struck 
with consternation, and had sought shelter from the torrent 
of grape-shot, having retired under the flanks of the fort, 
leaving the plateau strewn with numbers of their dead. 

In this instant of respite the Colonel and Strux regained 
the donjon, and there, collecting themselves to a composure 
as complete as if they were under the dome of an obser¬ 
vatory, they kept a constant eye upon their telescope, and 
scanned the peak of Volquiria. When, after a short period 
of rest, the yells of the Makololos made them aware that 
the combat was renewed, they only persevered in their 
determination, and resolved that they would alternately 
remain to guard their invaluable instrument. 

The combat, in truth, had been renewed, The range of 
the mitrailleuse was inadequate to reach all the natives, 
who, uttering their cries of mortal vengeance, rallied again, 
and swarmed up every opening. The besieged, protected 
by their fire-arms, defended the breaches foot by foot; they 
had only received a few scratches from the points of the 
assagais, and were able to continue the fight for half an hour 
with unabated ardour. 

Towards half-past eleven, while the Colonel was in the 



208 


MERIDIANA ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


thick of the fray, in the middle of an angry fusillade, Matthew 
Strux appeared at his side. His eye was wild and 
radiant: an arrow had just pierced his hat and quivered 
above his head. 

“ The signal! the signal!” he cried. 

The Colonel was incredulous, but ascertaining the cor¬ 
rectness of the welcome announcement, discharged his 
rifle for the last time, and with an exuberant shout of 
rejoicing, rushed towards the donjon, followed by his intrepid 
colleague. There, kneeling down, he placed his eye to the 
telescope, and perceived with the utmost delight the signal, 
so long delayed and yet so patiently expected. 

It was truly a marvellous sight to see these two astro¬ 
nomers work during the tumult of the conflict. The natives 
had by their numbers forced the enclosure, and Sir John 
and the bushman were contending for every step. The 
Europeans fought with their balls and hatchets, while the 
Makoltflos responded with their arrows and assagais. 

Meanwhile the Colonel and Strux intently continued 
their observations, and Palander, equally composed, noted 
down their oft-repeated readings. More than once an arrow 
grazed their head, and broke against the inner wall of the 
donjon. But their eye was ever fixed on the signal, and 
reading the indications of the vernier, they incessantly 
verified each other’s calculations. 

“ Only once more,” said Strux, sliding the telescope along 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


209 


the graduated scale. An instant later, and it would have 
been too late for any observations, but the direction of the 
light was calculated to the minutest fraction of a second ; 
and at that very instant an enormous stone, hurled by a 
native, sent the register flying from Palander’s hands, and 
smashed the repeating-cir<jle. 

They must now fly in order to save the result which they 
had obtained at the cost of such continuous labour. The 
natives had already penetrated the casemate, and might at 
any moment appear in the donjon. The Colonel and his 
colleagues caught up their guns, and Palander his precious 
register, and all escaped through one of the breaches. Their 
companions, some slightly wounded, were ready to cover 
their retreat, but just as they were about to descend the 
north side of the mountain, Strux remembered that they had 
failed to kindle the signal. In fact, for the completion of 
the survey, it was necessary that the two astronomers on 
Mount Volquiria should in their turn observe the summit 
of Mount Scorzef, and were doubtless anxiously expecting 
the answering light. 

The Colonel recognized the imperative necessity for yet 
one more effort, and whilst his companions, with almost 
superhuman energy, repulsed the natives, he re-entered the 
donjon. This donjon was formed of an intricate framework 
of dry wood, which would readily ignite by the application 
of a flame. The Colonel set it alight with the powder from 




210 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


the priming of his gun, and, rushing out, rejoined his 
companions. In a few moments, rolling their mitrailleuse 
before them, the Europeans, under a shower of arrows and 
various missiles, were descending the mountain, and, in their 
turn, driving back the natives with a deadly fire, reached the 
steamboat. The engineer, according to orders, had kept 
up the steam. The mooring was loosened, the screw set in 
motion, and the “ Queen and Czar” advanced rapidly over 
the dark waters. They were shortly far enough out to see 
the summit of the mountain. The donjon was blazing like 
a beacon, and its light would be easily discerned from the 
peak ofVolquiria. A resounding cheer of triumph from 
English and Russians greeted the bonfire they had left 
behind. 

Emery and Zorn would have no cause for complaint; 
they had exhibited the twinkling of a star, and had been 
answered by the glowing of a sun. 






The Steamboat leaving Mount Scorzef.—[Page 210.] 












































































































































































































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 21 I 


CHAPTER XXII. 

HIDE AND SEEK. 

WHEN daylight re-appeared, the vessel was nearing the 
northern shore of the lake. There was no trace of natives, 
consequently the Colonel and his companions, who had 
been ready armed, laid aside their guns as the “ Queen and 
Czar" drew up in a little bay hollowed in the rocks. The 
bushman, Sir John, and one of the sailors set out at once 
to reconnoitre the neighbourhood. They could perceive no 
sign of Makololos, and fortunately they found game in 
abundance. Troops of antelopes grazed in the long grass 
and in the shelter of the thickets, and a number of aquatic 
birds frequented the shores of the lake. The hunters 
returned with ample provision, and the whole party could 
enjoy the savoury venison, a supply of which was now 
unlikely to fail them again. 

The camp was arranged under the great willows near the 
lake, on the banks of a small river. The Colonel and Strux 
had arranged to meet on the northern shore with the 
pioneer’s little party, and the rest afforded by the few days 



212 


meridiana; the adventures of 


of expectation was gratefully enjoyed by all. Palander 
employed himself in rectifying and adjusting the results of 
the latest observations, while Mokoum and Sir John hunted 
most vigorously over the fertile, well-watered country, 
abounding in game, of which the Englishman would have 
been delighted, had it been in his power, to complete a 
purchase on behalf of the British government. Three days 
after, on the 8th of March, some gun-shots announced the 
arrival of the remainder of the party for whom they 
tarried. Emery, Zorn, the two sailors, and the pioneer, 
were all in perfect health. Their theodolite, the only 
instrument remaining to the Commission, was safe. The 
young astronomers and their companions were received 
with joyous congratulations. In a few words they related 
that their journey had not been devoid of difficulty. Foi 
two days they had lost their way in the forests that skirted 
the mountainous district, and with only the vague indica¬ 
tions of the compass they would never have reached Mount 
Volquiria, if it had not been for the shrewd intelligence of the 
pioneer. The ascent of the mountain was rough, and the 
delay had caused the young astronomers as much impa¬ 
tience as it had their colleagues on Mount Scorzef. They 
had carefully, by barom’etrical observations, calculated that 
the summit of Volquiria was 3200 feet above the level of 
the sea. The light, increased by a strong reflector, was first 
lighted on the night of the 4th; thus the observers on 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 213 


Mount Scorzef had perceived it as soon as it appeared. 
Emery and Zorn had easily discerned the intense fire caused 
by the burning fortress, and with the theodolite had com¬ 
pleted the measurement of the triangle. 

“ And did you determine the latitude of the peak ?” said 
the Colonel to Emery. 

“ Yes, most accurately,” replied Emery; “we found it to 
be 19 0 37' 35.337".” 

“Well, gentlemen,” said the Colonel, “we may say that 
our task is ended. We have measured, by means of sixty- 
three triangles, an arc of more than eight degrees in length ; 
and when we have rigidly corrected our results, we shall 
know the exact value of the degree, and consequently of 
the mtire, in this part of the globe.” 

A cheer of satisfaction could not be repressed amongst 
the others. 

“ And now,” added the Colonel, “ we have only to descend 
the Zambesi in order to reach the Indian Ocean: is it not 
so, Mr Strux ?” 

“ It is so,” answered Strux ; “but I think we ought still to 
adopt some means of testing our previous operations. Let 
us continue our triangles until we find a place suitable 
for the direct measurement of a base. The agreement 
between the lengths of the base, obtained by the calculations 
and by the direct measurement, will alone tell what degree 
of accuracy we ought to attribute to our observations.” 




214 


meridiana; the adventures of 


Strux’s proposition was unanimously adopted. It was 
agreed to construct a series of subsidiary triangles until a 
side could be measured with the platinum rods. The steam¬ 
boat, descending the affluents of the Zambesi, was to await 
the travellers below the celebrated Victoria Falls. Every 
thing being arranged, the little troop, with the exception of 
four sailors on board the “Queen and Czar,” started the next 
day at sunrise. Some stations had been chosen to the east 
and the angles measured, and along this favourable country, 
they hoped easily to accomplish their auxiliary series. The 
bushman had adroitly caught a quagga, of which, willing or 
unwilling, he made a beast of burden to carry the theodo¬ 
lite, the measuring-rods, and some other luggage of the 
caravan. 

The journey proceeded rapidly. The undulated country 
afforded many points of sight for the small accessory trian¬ 
gles. The weather was fine, and it was not needful to 
have recourse to nocturnal observations. The travellers 
could nearly always find shelter in the woods, and, besides, 
the heat was not insufferable, since some vapours arose 
from the pools and streams which tempered the sun’s rays. 
Every want was supplied by the hunters, and there was no 
longer any thing to be feared from the natives, who seemed 
to be more to the south of Lake Ngami. 

Matthew Strux and the Colonel seemed to have forgotten 
all their personal rivalry, and although there was no close 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 215 


intimacy between them, they were on the most perfect 
terms of courtesy. 

Day after day, during a period of three weeks, the 
observations steadily proceeded. For the measurement of 
a base the astronomers required a tract of land that should 
be level for several miles, and the very undulations of the 
soil that were desirable for the establishment of the points 
of sight were unfavourable for that observation. They 
proceeded to the north-east, sometimes following the right 
bank of the Cnobi, one of the principal tributaries of the 
Upper Zambesi, in order to avoid Maketo, the chief settle¬ 
ment of the Makololos. They had now ever}’- reason to 
anticipate that their return would be happily accomplished, 
and that no further natural obstacle would occur, and they 
hoped that their difficulties were all at an end. The country 
which they were traversing was comparatively well known 
and they could not be far from the villages of the Zambesi 
which Livingstone had lately visited. They thus thought 
with reason that all the most arduous part of their task was 
over, when an incident, of which the consequences might 
have been serious, almost compromised the result of the 
whole expedition. 

Nicholas Palander was the hero, or rather was nearly 
being the victim, of the adventure. 

The intrepid but thoughtless calculator, unwarned by his 
escape from the crocodiles, had still the habit* of withdraw- 



215 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


ing himself from his companions. In an open country 
there was no great danger in this, but in woods Palander’s 
^ a bstraction might lead to serious consequences. Strux and 
the bushman gave him many warnings, and Palander, 
though much astonished at what he considered an excess of 
prudence, promised to conform to their wishes. 

On the 27th, some hours had passed since Strux and 
Mokoum had seen any thing of Palander. The little 
troop were travelling through thickets of low trees and 
shrubs, extending as far as the horizon. It was important 
to keep together, as it would be difficult to discover the 
track of any one lost in the wood. But seeing and fearing 
nothing, Palander, who had been posted, pencil in one hand, 
the register in the other, on the left flank of the troop, was 
not long in disappearing. 

When, towards four o’clock, Strux and his companions 
found that Palander was no longer with them, they became 
extremely anxious. His former aberrations were still fresh 
in their remembrance, and it was probably the abstracted 
calculator alone by whom they had been forgotten. The 
march was stopped, and they all shouted in vain. The 
bushman and the sailors dispersed for a quarter of a mile 
in each direction, beating the bushes, trampling through 
the woods and long grass, firing off their guns, but yet 
without success. They became still more uneasy, especially 
Matthew Strux, to whose anxiety was joined an extreme 












Palander robbed by the Chacma.—[Page 217.] 




































































































































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 317 

irritation against his unlucky colleague. This was not the 
first time that Palander had served them thus, and if the 
Colonel had laid any blame on him, Strux would not have 
known what to say. Under the circumstances, the only 
thing to be done was to encamp in the wood, and begin 
a more careful search. 

The Colonel and his companions had just arranged to 
place their camp near a glade of considerable extent, when 
a cry, unlike any thing human, resounded at some distance 
to the left. Almost immediately, running at full speed, 
appeared Palander. His head was bare, his hair dishevelled, 
and his clothes torn in some parts almost to rags. His 
companions plied him with questions; but the unhappy 
man, with haggard and distended eye, whose compressed 
nostrils still further hindered his short jerking respiration, 
could not bring out a word. 

What had happened ? why had he wandered away ? and 
why did he appear so terrified ? At last, to their repeated 
questions, he gasped out, in almost unintelligible accents, 
something about the registers. 

The astronomers shuddered ; the registers, on which was 
inscribed every result of their operations, and which the 
calculator had never allowed out of his possession, even when 
asleep, these registers were missing. No matter whether 
Palander had lost them, or whether they had been stolen 
from him ; they were gone, and all their labour was in vain! 






meridiana; the adventures of 


218 


While his companions, mutely terrified, only looked at 
each other, Matthew Strux could no longer restrain his 
anger. He burst forth into all manner of invective against 
the miserable man, threatening him with the displeasure of 
the Russian government, and adding, that if he did not 
suffer under the knout he should linger out his life in 
Siberia. 

To all this Palander answered but by a movement of the 
head : he seemed to acquiesce in all these condemnations, 
and even thought the judgment would be too lenient. 

“ But perhaps he has been robbed,” said the Colonel at 
last. 

“What matters?” cried Strux, beside himself; “what 
business had he so far away from us, after our continual 
warning ?” 

“True,” replied Sir John, “ but we ought to know whether 
he has lost the registers or been robbed of them. Has any 
one robbed you, Palander ?” continued he, turning to the 
poor man, who had sunk down with fatigue. 

Palander made a sign of affirmation. 

“Who ?” continued Sir John.” Natives ? Makololos ?” 

Palander shook his head. 

“Well, then, Europeans?” asked Sir John. 

“ No,” answered Palander in a stifled voice. 

“Who then ?” shouted Strux, shaking his clenched fists 
in Palander’s face. 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE 


RUSSIANS. 219 


“They were neither natives—nor white men—but 
monkeys,” stammered out Palander at last. 

It was a fact that the unhappy man had been robbed by 
a monkey, and if the consequences of the incident had been 
less serious, the whole party would have broken out into 
laughter. Mokoum explained that what had just happened 
was of frequent occurrence. Many times, to his knowledge, 
had travellers been rifled by these pig-headed chacmas, a. 
species of baboon very common in South African forests. 
The calculator had been plundered by these animals, though 
not without a struggle, as his ragged garments testified. 
Still, in the judgment of his companions, there was no 
excuse to be made: if he had remained in his proper place 
this irreparable loss would not have occurred. 

“We did not take the trouble,” began Colonel Everest, 
“to measure an arc of meridian in South Africa for a 
blunderer like you—” 

He did not finish his sentence, conscious that it was 
useless to continue to abuse the unhappy man, whom 
Strux had not ceased to load with every variety of vitupera¬ 
tion. The Europeans were, without exception, quite over¬ 
powered by emotion ; but Mokoum, who was less sensitive 
to the importance of the loss, retained his self-possession. 

“ Perhaps even yet,” he said, “ something may be done 
to assist you in your perplexity. These chacmas are always 
careful of their stolen goods, and if we find the robber we 








220 


MERIDIAN A ; THE ADVENTURES OF 


shall find the registers with him. But time is precious, and 
none must be lost.” 

The bushman had opened a ray of hope. Palander 
revived at the suggestion : he arranged his tattered clothes 
as best he could, and having accepted the jacket of one 
sailor and the hat of another, declared himself ready to 
lead his companions to the scene of his adventure. 

They all started off towards the west, and passed the 
night and the ensuing day without any favourable result. 
In many places, by traces on the ground and the bark of 
the trees, the bushman and the pioneer recognized unmis¬ 
takable vestiges of the baboons, of which Palander affirmed 
that he was sure he had seen no less than ten. The party 
was soon on their track, and advanced with the utmost 
precaution, the bushman affirming that he could only count 
on success in his search by taking the chacmas by surprise, 
since they were sagacious animals, such as could only be 
approached by some device of secrecy. 

Early the following morning one of the Russian sailors, 
who was somewhat in front, perceived, if not the actual 
thief, yet one of its associates. He prudently returned to 
the little troop, who came at once to a halt. The Euro¬ 
peans, who had resolved to obey Mokoum in every thing, 
awaited his instructions. The bushman begged them to 
remain in quietness where they were, and, taking Sir John 
and the pioneer, turned towards the part of the wood 



THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 221 


already visited by the sailor, carefully keeping under shelter 
of the trees and bushwood. 

In a short time the bushman and his two companions 
caught sight of one chacma, and almost immediately of 
nine or ten more, gambolling among the branches. Crouch¬ 
ing behind a tree, they attentively watched the animals, 
Their long tails were continually sweeping the ground, and 
their powerful muscles, sharp teeth, and pointed claws, 
rendered them formidable even to the beasts of prey. 
These chacmas are the terror of the Boers, whose fields of 
corn and maize, and occasionally whose habitations, are 
plundered by them. 

Not one of the animals had as yet espied the hunters, 
but they all continued their sport, yelping and barking as 
though they were great ill-favoured dogs. The important 
point for determination was, whether the actual purloiner 
of the missing documents was there. All doubt was put 
aside when the pioneer pointed out a chacma wrapped in a 
rag of Palander’s coat. Sir John felt that •this creature 
must be secured at any price, but he was obliged to act 
with great circumspection, aware as he was that a single 
false movement would cause the whole herd to decamp at 
once. 

“ Stay here,” said Mokoum to the pioneer; “Sir John 
and I will return to our companions, and set about surround¬ 
ing the animals; but meanwhile do not lose sight of them. 






222 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


The pioneer remained at his post, while Sir John and 
the bushman returned to Colonel Everest. The only 
means of securing the suspected culprit was to surround 
the whole troop. To accomplish this, the Europeans 
divided into separate detachments ; one composed of Strux, 
Emery, Zorn, and three sailors, was to join the pioneer, 
and to form a semicircle around him; and the other, 
comprising the Colonel, Mokoum, Sir John, Palander, and 
the other three sailors, made a detour to the left, in order 
to fall back upon the herd from the other side 

Implicitly following the bushman’s advice, they all ad¬ 
vanced with the utmost caution. Their guns were ready, 
and it was agreed that the chacma with the rags should 
be the aim for every shot. 

Mokoum kept a watchful eye upon Palander, and insisted 
upon his marching close to himself, lest his unguardedness 
should betray him into some fresh folly. The worthy 
astronomer was almost beside himself in consternation at 
his loss, and evidently thought it a question of life or death. 

After marching with the frequent halts which the policy 
of being unobserved suggested, and continuing to diverge 
for half an hour, the bushman considered that they might 
now fall back. He and his companions, each about twenty 
paces apart, advanced like a troop of Pawnies on a war-trail, 
without a word or gesture, avoiding even the least rustling ' 
in the branches. Suddenly the bushman stopped ; the rest 
instantly followed his example, and standing with their 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 223 

finger on the lock of their guns, were ready to raise them to 
them shoulder. The band of chacmas was in sight, they 
were already sensible of some danger, and seemed on the 
look-out. The great animal which had stolen the regis¬ 
ters had, to their fancy, an appearance of being espe¬ 
cially agitated. It had been already recognized by 
Palander, who muttered something like an imprecation 
between his teeth. 

The chacma looked as if it was making signs to its com¬ 
panions : some females, with their young ones on their shoul¬ 
ders, had collected in a group, and the males went to and 
fro around them. The hunters still drew on, one and all 
keeping a steady eye direct towards the ostensible thief. 
All at once, by an involuntary movement, Palander’s gun 
went off in his hands. Sir John broke out into an exclama¬ 
tion of disgust, and instantly afterwards fired. Ten reports 
followed: three chacmas lay dead on the ground, and the 
rest, with a prodigious bound, passed over the hunters’ heads. 

The robber baboon alone remained : it darted at the trunk 
of a sycamore, which it climbed with an amazing agility, 
and disappeared among the branches. The bushman, having 
keenly surveyed the spot, asserted that the registers were 
there concealed, and fearing lest the chacma should escape 
across the trees, he calmly aimed and fired. The animal, 
wounded in the leg, fell from branch to branch. In one of 
its fore-claws it was seen to clutch the registers, which it 
had taken from a fork of the tree. 






224 


meridiana; the adventures of 


At the sight, Palander, with a leap like a chamois, darted 
at the chacma, and a tremendous struggle ensued. The 
cries of both man and beast mingled in harsh and discordant 
strain, and the hunters dared not take aim at the chacma for 
fear of wounding their comrade. Strux, beside himself with 
rage, shouted again and again that they should fire, and in 
his furious agitation he would probably have done so, if it 
had not been that he was accidentally without a cartridge 
for his gun, which had been already discharged. 

The combat continued ; sometimes Palander, sometimes 
the chacma, was uppermost. The astronomer, his shoulders 
lacerated by the creature’s claws, tried to strangle his 
adversary. At last the bushman, seizing a favourable 
moment, made a sudden dash, and killed the ape with one 
blow of his hatchet. 

Nicholas Palander, bleeding, exhausted, and insensible, 
was picked up by his colleagues: in his last effort he had 
recaptured his registers, which he was found unconsciously 
grasping to his bosom. 

The carcase of the chacma was conveyed with glee to 
the camp. At the evening repast it furnished a delicious 
meal to the hunters. To all of them, but especially to 
Palander, not only had the excitement of the chase quick¬ 
ened their appetite for the palatable dish, but the relish was 
heightened by the gratifying knowledge that vengeance was 
satisfied. 




4 





Pailander’s Combat with the Chacma. — [Page 224. J 


















































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 335 


CHAPTER XXIII, 


HOMEWARD BOUND. 




PALANDER’s wounds were not serious : the bushman dressed 
the contused limbs with herbs, and the worthy astronomer, 
sustained by his triumph, was soon able to travel. Any 
exuberance on his part, however, was of short duration, and 
he quickly became again engrossed in his world of figures. 
He only now retained one of the registers, because it had 
been thought prudent that Emery should take possession of 
the other. Under the circumstances, Palander made the 
surrender with entire good-humour. 

The operation of seeking a plain suitable for a base was 
now resumed. On the 1st of April the march was some¬ 
what retarded by wide marshes; to these succeeded 
numerous pools, whose waters spread a pestilential odour; 
but, by forming larger triangles, Colonel Everest and his 
companions soon escaped the unhealthy region. 

The whole party were in excellent spirits. Zorn and Emery 
14 








226 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


often congratulated themselves on the apparent concord 
that existed between their chiefs. Zorn one day expressed 
his hope to his friend that when they returned to Europe 
they would find that peace had been concluded between 
1 England and Russia, so that they might remain as good 
friends as they had been in Africa. 

- Emery replied that he acquiesced entirely in the hope : 
in days when war is seldom long protracted they might be 
sanguine all would be terminated by the date of their 
return. 

Zorn had already understood from Emery that it was 
not his intention to return immediately to the Cape, and 
expressed his hope that he might introduce him to the 
observatory at Kiew. This proposal Emery expressed his 
desire to embrace, and added that he should indulge the 
expectation that Zorn would at some future time visit the 
Cape. 

With these mutual assignations they made their plans 
for future astronomical researches, ever reiterating their 
hopes that the war would be at an end. 

“ Anyhow,” observed Emery, “ Russia and England will 
be at peace before the Colonel and Strux ; I have no trust 
in any reconciliation of theirs. 

For themselves, they could only repeat their pledges of 
mutual good-will. 

Eleven days after the adventure with the chacmas, the 




THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 227 

little troop, not far from the Zambesi Falls, arrived at a 
level plain several miles in extent, and perfectly adapted 
for the establishment of a base. On the edge ol the plain 
rose a native village, composed of a few huts containing a 
small number of inhabitants, who kindly received the 
Europeans. Colonel Everest found the proximity of the 
natives very opportune, since the measurement of the base 
would occupy a month, and being without waggons, or any 
materials for an encampment, he would have had no resource 
but to pass the time in the open air, with no other shelter 
than that afforded by the foliage. 

The astronomers took up their abode in the huts, which 
were quickly appropriated for the use of their new occupants. 
Their requirements were but small ; their one thought was 
directed towards verifying their calculations by measuring 
the last side of their last triangle. 

The astronomers at once proceeded to their work. The 
trestles and platinum rods were arranged with all the care 
that had been applied to the earliest base. Nothing was 
neglected; all the conditions of the atmosphere, and the 
variations of the thermometer, were taken into account, and 
the Commission, without flagging, brought every energy to 
bear upon their final operation. 

The work, which lasted for five weeks, was completed on 
the 15th of May. When the lengths obtained had been 
estimated and reduced to the mean level of the sea at the 






228 


MERIDIANA; THE ADVENTURES OF 


temperature of 6 1° Fahrenheit, Palander and Emery pre¬ 
sented to their colleagues the following numbers :— 

Toises. 

New base actually measured. .... 5 ° 75- 2 5 

The same base deduced trigonometrically from 

the entire series ...... 5075.11 

Difference between the calculation and the obser¬ 
vation . .14 

Thus there was only a difference of less than £ of a toise 
that is to say, less than ten inches; yet the first base and 
the last were six hundred miles apart. 

When the meridian of France was measured from Dunkirk 
to Perpignan, the difference between the base at Melun and 
that at Perpignan was eleven inches. The agreement 
obtained by the Anglo-Russian Commission was still more 
remarkable, and thus made the work accomplished in the 
deserts of Africa, amid dangers of every kind, more perfect 
than any previous geodetic operation. 

The accuracy of this unprecedented result was greeted 
by the astronomers with repeated cheers. 

According to Palander’s reductions, the value of a 
degree in this part of the world was 57037 toises. This 
was within a toise, the same as was found by Lacaille at 
the Cape in 1752* thus, at the interval of a century, the 
French astronomer and the members of the Anglo-Russian 
Commission had arrived at almost exactly the same result 
















































































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


229 


To deduce the value of the metre, they would have to wait 
the issue of the operations which were to be afterwards 
undertaken in the northern hemisphere. This value was 
to be the -n s 0 o'o 0 ov of the quadrant of the terrestrial 
meridian. According to previous calculations, the quadrant, 
taking the depression of the earth into account, comprised 
10,000,856 metres, which brought the exact length of the 
metre to .013074 of a toise, or 3 feet o inches 11.296 lines. 
Whether this was correct the subsequent labours of the 
Commission would have to decide. 

***** 

The astronomers had now entirely finished their task, 
and it only remained for them to reach the mouth of the 
Zambesi, by following inversely the route afterwards taken 
by Dr. Livingstone in his second voyage from 1858 to 
1864. 

On the 25th of May, after a somewhat laborious journey 
across a country intersected with rivers, they reached the 
Victoria Falls. These fine cataracts fully justified their 
native name, which signifies " sounding smoke.” Sheets of 
water a mile wide, crowned with a double rainbow, rushed 
from a height twice that of Niagara. Across the deep basalt 
chasm the enormous torrent produced a roar like peal 
after peal of thunder. 

Below the cataract, where the river regained its calmness, 
the steamboat, which had arrived a fortnight previously by 












* 3 ° 


meridiana; the adventures of 


an inferior affluent of the Zambesi, awaited the astronomers, 
who soon took their places on board. 

There were two to be left behind. Mokoum and the 
pioneer stood on the bank. In Mokoum the English were 
leaving, not only a devoted guide, but one whom they 
might call a friend. Sir John was especially sorry to part 
from him, and had offered to take him to Europe, and 
there entertain him as long as he pleased to remain. But 
Mokoum had previous engagements; in fact, he was to 
accompany Livingstone on the second voyage which the 
brave traveller was about to undertake up the Zambesi, and 
Mokoum was not a man to depart from his word. He was 
presented with a substantial recompense, and, what he prized 
still more, the kind assurances of regard of the Europeans, 
who acknowledged how much they owed to him. As the 
steamer left the shore to take the current in the middle 
of the river, Sir John’s last gesture was to wave an adieu to 
his associate. 

The descent of the great river, whose banks were dotted 
with numerous villages, was soon accomplished. The 
natives, regarding with superstitious admiration the smoking 
vessel as it moved by mysterious mechanism, made no 
attempt to obstruct its progress. 

On the 15th of June the Colonel and his companions 
arrived at Quilimane, one of the principal towns at the 
mouth of the Zambesi. Their first thought was to ask for 



Adieu to Mokoum. — [Page 230.] 










































































































The Natives regarded with superstitious admiration the smoking vessel. 
[Page 230.] 


















































% 































































































































































































































































THREE ENGLISHMEN AND THREE RUSSIANS. 


231 


news of the war. They found that it had not yet come to 
* termination, and that Sebastopol was still holding out 
against the allied armies. This was a disappointment to 
the Europeans, now so united in one scientific object; 
but they received the intelligence in silence, and prepared 
to start. An Austrian merchant-vessel, “La Novara,” was 
just setting out for Suez ; in that they resolved to take their 
passage. 

Three days after, as they were on the point of embarking, 
the Colonel assembled his colleagues, and in a calm voice 
reminded them how in the last eighteen months they had 
together experienced many trials, and how they had been 
rewarded by accomplishing a work which would call forth 
the admiration of all scientific Europe. He could not 
refrain from giving expression to his trust that they would 
feel themselves bound in the common fellowship of a true 
| alliance. 

Strux bowed slightly, but did not interrupt the Colonel, 
who proceeded to deplore the tidings of the continuation of 
warfare. When he referred to the expected capitulation 
of Sebastopol, Strux indignantly rejected the possibility of 
such an event, which no union of France and England, he 
maintained, could ever effect. 

There was, however, it was admitted on all hands, a pro¬ 
priety in the Russians and English submittingto the national 
status of hostility. The necessities of their position were thus 







232 


MER1 DIANA. 


clearly defined, and under these conditions they embarked 
in company on board “ La Novara.” 

In a few days they arrived at Suez. At the moment of 
separation Emery grasped Zorn’s hand, and said,— 

“We are always friends, Michael!” 

"Always and every where, William!” ejaculated Zorn; 
and with this sentiment of mutual devotion they parted. 

The Commission was dissolved. 


THE END. 

































































4 











































































* 















































A HURRICANE IN THE CENTRE OP THE EArTH. AN ELECTRIC STORM, 


T 


























































A. JOURNEY 


TO THE 


CENTRE OF THE EARTH, 


TRANSLATED FROM THE FRENCH OF 


JULES VERNE, 

AUTHOR Or “FROM THE EARTH TO THE MOON,” “THE MYSTERIOUS ISLAND,” 

ETC., ETC. 



NEW YORK: 

SCRIBNER, ARMSTRONG & CO., 

654 BROADWAY, 






Works of Jules Verne-, 

PUBLISHED BY 

Scribner, Armstrong & Co. 

THE COMPLETE AND AUTHORIZED EDITIONS. 


CAUTION. 

The public are cautioned against any editions of the works named below 
which do not bear the imprint of SCRIBNER, ARMSTRONG- & CO. 
Any edition of these particular works published under other imprints are 
pirated, and cannot fail to be inferior in every particular. Editions 
bearing our imprint are issued under a direct arrangement with the 
French and English publishers of JULES VERNE, and are authorized 
in text and complete in illustration. 


MERIDIANA: 

The Adventures of Three Englishmen and Three Rus¬ 
sians in South Africa. By Jules Verne. Translated from the 
French. With 48 illustrations. One vol. i2mo, cloth, gilt side and 
back. Price, 75 cents. The only edition authorized in text and 
complete in illustrations. 

FROM THE EARTH TO THE MOON 

In 97 Hours and 20 Minutes and a Trip Around It. Eighty 
full-page illustrations, beautifully bound in cloth, black and gilt. 
Price, $3.00. 

A JOURNEY to the CENTRE of the EARTH. 
Translated from the French of Jules Verne, author of "From the 
Earth to the Moon Direct ,” “ The Mysterious Island ,” &c., &c. 
With fifty-two illustrations by Riou. 

Popular edition , 20 illustrations, 75c. Complete edition, 53 illustra¬ 
tions, on super-calendered paper, handsomely bound in cloth, black and 
gilt, beveled boards, $3.00. 

SCRIBNER, ARMSTRONG & CO., 

654 BROADWAY, NEW YORK 





LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 

-♦- 

PAGE. 

A Hurricane in the Centre of the Earth. An Elec- 

Title Storm. Frontispiece . 

The Museum . g 

Professor Yon Hardwigg. 10 

Harry in a Brown Study. 16 

Tracing our Route. 21 

Hans Bjelke, the Guide.,. 44 

En Route 1. 50 

The Ascent of Sneffels. 68 

The Descent of the Crater. 88 

The Last Drop of Water. 118 

The Boiling Jet. 131 

The Whisper Heard. 154 

The Central Sea. 168 

The Antediluvian World.192 

A Majestic Geyser. The Geyser of the Central Sea. 206 

The Ball of Fire.218 

Gigantic Inhabitants.246 

The Fearful Explosion. 258 

The Torch-light Passage .. 266 

Our Condition at the End of the Journey. 300 









































- 
















■ 


















■ 


















A JOURNEY 


TO THE 

CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER I. 

MY UNCLE MAKES A GREAT DISCOVERY. 

Looking back to all that has occurred to me since that 
eventful day, I am scarcely able to believe in the reality 
of my adventures. They were truly so wonderful that 
even now I am bewildered when I think of them. 

My uncle was a German, having married my mother’s 
sister, an Englishwoman. Being very much attached to 
his fatherless nephew, he invited me to study under him in 
his home in the fatherland. This home was in a large 
town, and my uncle a Professor of philosophy, chemistry, 

, geology, mineralogy, and many other ologies. 

One day, after passing some hours in the laboratory— 
my uncle being absent at the time—I suddenly felt the 
necessity of renovating the tissues— i. e., I was hungry, and 
was about to rouse up our old French cook, when my 
uncle, Professor Von Hardwigg, suddenly opened the 
street door, and came rushing up stairs. 

Now Professor Hardwigg, my worthy uncle, is by no 
means a bad sort of man; he is, however, choleric and 

1 



2 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

original. To bear with him means to obey; and scarcely 
had his heavy feet resounded within our joint domicile 
than he shouted for me to attend upon him. 

“ Harry—Harry—Harry-” 

I hastened to obey, but before I could reach his room, 
jumping three steps at a time, he was stamping his right 
foot upon the landing. 

“ Harry! ” he cried, in a frantic tone, “ are you coming 
up?” 

Now to tell the truth, at that moment I was far more 
interested in the question as to what was to constitute our 
dinner than in any problem of science; to me soup was 
more interesting than soda, an omelette more tempting 
than arithmetic, and an artichoke of ten times more value 
than any amount of asbestos. 

But my uncle was not a man to be kept waiting; so 
adjourning therefore all minor questions, I presented my¬ 
self before him. 

He was a very learned man. Now most persons in this 
category supply themselves with information, as peddlers do 
with goods, for the benefit of others, and lay up stores in 
order to diffuse them abroad for the benefit of society in 
general. Not so my excellent uncle, Professor Hardwigg ; 
he studied, he consumed the midnight oil, he pored over 
heavy tomes, and digested huge quartos and folios in order 
to keep the knowledge acquired to himself. 

There was a reason, and it may be regarded as a good 
one, why my uncle objected to display his learning more 
than was absolutely necessary; he stammered; and when 
intent upon explaining the phenomena of the heavens, was 
apt to find himself at fault, and allude in such a vague 
way to sun, moon, and stars, that few were able to compre¬ 
hend his meaning. To tell the honest truth, when the 
right word would not come, it was generally replaced by a 
very powerful adjective. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 3 

In connection with the sciences there are many almost 
Unpronounceable names—names very much resembling 
those of Welsh villages; and my uncle being very fond of 
Using them, his habit of stammering was not thereby im¬ 
proved. In fact, there were periods in his discourse when 
he would finally give up and swallow his discomfiture—in 
a glass of water. 

As I said, my uncle, Professor Hardwigg, was a very 
learned man ; and I now add a most kind relative. I was 
bound to him by the double ties of affection and interest. 
I took deep interest in all his doings, and hoped some day 
to be almost as learned myself. It was a rare thing for me 
to be absent from his lectures. Like him, I preferred 
mineralogy to all the other sciences. My anxiety was to 
gain real knowledge of the earth . Geology and mineralogy 
were to us the sole objects of life, and in connection with 
these studies many a fair specimen of stone, chalk, or metal 
did we break with our hammers. 

Steel rods, loadstone, glass pipes, and bottles of various 
acids were oftener before us than our meals. My uncle 
Hardwigg was once known to classify six hundred different 
geological specimens by their weight, hardness, fusibility, 
sound, taste, and smell. 

He corresponded with all the great, learned, and scien¬ 
tific men of the age. I was, therefore, in constant com¬ 
munication with, at all events the letters of, Sir Humphrey 
Davy, Captain Franklin, and other great men. 

But before I state the subject on which my uncle wished 
to confer with me, I must say a word about his personal 
appearance. Alas! my readers will see a very different 
portrait of him at a future time, after he has gone through 
the fearful adventures yet to be related. 

My uncle was fifty years old; tall, thin, and wiry. 
Large spectacles hid, to a certain extent, his vast, round 
and goggle eyes, while his nose was irreverently compared 


4 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

to a thin file. So much indeed did it resemble that useful 
article, that a compass was said in his presence to have 
made considerable N* deviation. 

The truth being told, however, the only article really 
attracted to my uncle’s nose was tobacco. 

Another peculiarity of his was, that he always stepped a 
yard at a time, clenched his fists as if he were going to hit 
you, and was, when in one of his peculiar humors, very 
far from a pleasant companion. 

It is further necessary to observe, that he lived in a very 
nice house, in that very nice street, the Konigstrasse at 
Hamburg. Though lying in the centre of a town, it was 
perfectly rural in its aspect—half wood, half bricks, with 
old-fashioned gables—one of the few old houses spared by 
the great fire of 1842. 

When I say a nice house, I mean a handsome house—• 
old, tottering, and not exactly comfortable to English 
notions : a house a little off the perpendicular and inclined 
to fall into the neighboring canal; exactly the house for a 
wandering artist to depict; all the more that you could 
scarcely see it for ivy and a magnificent old tree which 
grew over the door. 

My uncle was rich ; his house was his own property, 
while he had a considerable private income. To my notion 
the best part of his possessions was his god-daughter, 
Gretchen. And the old cook, the young lady, the Pro¬ 
fessor and I were the sole inhabitants. 

I loved mineralogy, I loved geology. To me there was 
nothing like pebbles—and if my uncle had been in a little 
less of a fury, we should have been the happiest of families. 
To prove the excellent Hardwigg’s impatience, I solemnly 
declare that when the flowers in the drawing-room pots be¬ 
gan to grow, he rose every morning at four o’clock to make 
them grow quicker by pulling the leaves! 

* (?) Nasal. 


THE MUSEUM. 


3 































































































































































































































































































































































A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OP THE EARTH. 5 

Having described my uncle, I will now give an account 
of our interview. 

He received me in bis study; a perfect museum, con¬ 
taining every natural curiosity that can well be imagined 
—minerals, however, predominating. Every one was 
familiar to me, having been catalogued by my own hand. 
My uncle, apparently oblivious of the fact that he had 
summoned me to his presence, was absorbed in a book. He 
was particularly fond of early editions, tall copies, and 
unique works. 

“ Wonderful! ” he cried, tapping his forehead. “ Won¬ 
derful—wonderful! ” 

It was one of those yellow-leaved volumes now rarely 
found on stalls, and to me it appeared to possess but little 
value. My uncle, however, was in raptures. 

He admired its binding, the clearness of its characters, 
the ease with which it opened in his hand, and repeated 
aloud, half-a-d ozen times, that it was very, very old. 

To my fancy he was making a great fuss about nothing, 
but it was not my province to say so. On the contrary, 
I professed considerable interest in the subject, and asked 
him what it was about. 

“ It is the Heims-Kringla of Snorre Tarleson,” he said, 
“ the celebrated Icelandic author of the twelfth century— 
it is a true and correct account of the Norwegian princes 
who reigned in Iceland.” 

My next question related to the language in which it 
was written. I hoped at all events it was translated into 
German. My uncle was indignant at the very thought, 
and declared he wouldn’t give a penny for a translation. 
His delight was to have found the original work in the 
Icelandic tongue, which he declared to be one of the most 
magnificent and yet simple idioms in the world—while at 
the same time its grammatical combinations were the most 
varied known to students. 



6 


A JOURNEY TO TIIE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


“ About as easy as German?” was my insidious remark. 

My uncle shrugged his shoulders. 

“ The letters at all events,” I said, “ are rather difficult 
of comprehension.” 

It is a Runic manuscript, the language of the original 
population of Iceland, invented by Odin himself,” cried 
my uncle, angry at my ignorance. 

I was about to venture upon some misplaced joke on the 
subject, when a small scrap of parchment fell out of the 
leaves. Like a hungry man snatching at a morsel of bread 
the Professor seized it. It was about five inches by three 
and was scrawled over in the most extraordinary fashion. 

The lines on page 12 are an exact fac-simile of what 
was written on the venerable piece of parchment—and 
have wonderful importance, as they induced my uncle to 
undertake the most wonderful series of adventures which 
ever fell to the lot of human beings. 

My uncle looked keenly at the document for some mo¬ 
ments and then declared that it was Runic. The letters 
were similar to those in the book, but then what did they 
mean ? This was exactly what I wanted to know. 

Now as I had a strong conviction that the Runic 
alphabet and dialect were simply an invention to mystify 
poor human nature, I was delighted to find that my uncle 
knew as much about the matter as I did—which was 
nothing. At all events, the tremulous motion of his finders 
made me think so. 

“ And yet.” he muttered to himself, “ it is old Icelandic 
I am sure of it.” 

And my uncle ought to have known, for he was a per¬ 
fect polyglot dictionary in himself. He did not pretend 
like a certain learned pundit, to speak the two thousand 
languages and fotir thousand idioms made use of in dP‘ 
ferent parts of the globe, but he did know all the more 
important ones. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OP THE EARTH. 7 

t is a matter of great doubt to me now, to what violent 
measures my uncle’s impetuosity might have led him, 
had not the clock struck two, and our old French cook 
called out to let us know that dinner was on the table, 
toother the dinner! ” cried my uncle. 

But as I was hungry, I sallied forth to the dining-room, 
where I took up my usual quarters. Out of politeness I 
waited three minutes, but no sign of my uncle, the Pro¬ 
fessor I was surprised. He was not usually so blind to 
e pleasure of a good dinner. It was the acme of German 
uxury—parsley soup, a ham omelette with sorrel trim¬ 
mings, an oyster of veal stewed with prunes, delicious fruit 
and sparkling Moselle. For the sake of poring over this 
musty old piece of parchment, my uncle forbore to share 
our meal. To satisfy my conscience, I ate for both. 

The old cook and housekeeper was nearly out of her 
mind. After taking so much trouble, to find her master 
not appear at dinner was to her a sad disappointment— 
which, as she occasionally watched the havoc I was 
making on the viands, became also alarm. If my uncle 
were to come to table after all ? 

Suddenly, just as I had consumed the last apple and 
drank the last glass of wine, a terrible voice was heard at 
no great distance. It was my uncle roaring for me to 
come to him. I made very nearly one leap of it-^o loud, 
so fierce was his tone. 




8 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER II. 

THE MYSTERIOUS PARCHMENT. 


XAkbhH JH/M'h + t' 
M'tHhYF hkYYIYF 
r^H-iYk 'I't-k'i'T'f’h 
+YYk1Yl Kh'lYK'T' 
^thiu . k H K/k Y 
YY b^KYI Y+hYhb 
bY^Mr kh-MBk 


H+YKlbN 
k IYb/Kr+ 


Iirl bb-Uk 
rtwkl bkl 
I +1 i P H 
F Ai kY b» 
F+bUl 


“ I declare,” cried my uncle, striking the table fiercely 
with his fist, “ I declare to you it is Runic—and contains 
some wonderful secret, which I must get at, at any price.” 

I was about to reply when he stopped me. 

“ Sit down,” he said, quite fiercely, “ and write to my 
dictation.” 

I obeyed. 

“ I will substitute,” he said, “ a letter of our alphabet 
for that of the Runic: we will then see what that will pro¬ 
duce. Now, begin and make no mistakes.” 

The dictation commenced with the following incompre¬ 
hensible result:— 


m.mlls 

esruel 

seecJde 

sgissmf 

unteief 

niedrJce 

kt,samn 

atrateS 

Saodrrn 

emtnael 

nuaect 

rrilSa 

Atvaar 

.nscrc 

ieaabs 

ccdrmi 

eeutul 

frantu 

dt,iae 

oseibo 

Kediil 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 9 

Scarcely giving me time to finish, my uncle snatched 
the document from my hands and examined it with the 
most rapt and deep attention. 

“ I should like to know what it means,” he said, after a 
long period. 

I certainly could not tell him, nor did he expect me 
to—his conversation being uniformly answered by him¬ 
self. 

“ I declare it puts me in mind of a cryptograph,” he 
cried, “ unless, indeed, the letters have been written with¬ 
out any real meaning; and yet why take so much 
trouble ? Who knows but I may be on the verge of some 
great discovery ? ” 

My candid opinion was that it was all rubbish! But 
this opinion I kept carefully to myself, as my uncled 
choler was not pleasant to bear. All this time he was 
comparing the book with the parchment. 

“The manuscript volume and the smaller document 
are written in different hands,” he said, “ the cryptograph 
is of much later date than the book; there is an undoubt¬ 
ed proof of the correctness of my surmise. [An irre¬ 
fragable proof I took it to be.] The first letter is a 
double M, which was only added to the Icelandic lan¬ 
guage in the twelfth century—this makes the parchment 
two hundred years posterior to the volume.” 

The circumstances appeared very probable and very 
logical, but it was all surmise to me. 

“ To me it appears probable that this sentence was 
written by some owner of the book. Now who was the 
owner, is the next important question. Perhaps by great 
good luck it may be written somewhere in the volume.” 

With these words Professor Hardwigg took off his spec¬ 
tacles, and, taking a powerful magnifying glass, examined 
the book carefully. 

On the fly leaf was what appeared to be a blot of ink, 
1 * 


10 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


but on examination proved to be a line of writing almost 
effaced by time. This was what he sought; and, after 
some considerable time, he made out these letters : 

'1AM' WkhhhiX 

“ Arne Saknussemm! ” he cried in a joyous and tri¬ 
umphant tone, “ that is not only an Icelandic name, but 
of a learned professor of the sixteenth century,[a celebrated 
alchemist.” 

I bowed as a sign of respect. 

“ These alchemists,” he continued, “ Avicena, Bacon, 
Lully, Paracelsus, were the true, the only learned men of 
the day. They made surprising discoveries. May not this 
Saknussemm, nephew mine, have hidden on this bit of 
parchment some astounding invention? I believe the 
cryptograph to have a profound meaning—which I must 
make out.” 

My uncle walked about the room in a state of excite¬ 
ment almost impossible to describe. 

“ It may be so, sir,” I timidly observed, “ but why con¬ 
ceal it from posterity, if it be a useful, a worthy dis¬ 
covery ? ” 

“ Why—how should I know ? Did not Galileo make a 
secret of his discoveries in connection with Saturn ? But 
we shall see. Until I discover the meaning of this sentence 
I will neither eat nor sleep.” 

“ My dear uncle-” I began. 

“ Nor you neither,” he added. 

It was lucky I had taken double allowance that day. 

In the first place,” he continued, “ there must be a clue 
to the meaning. If we could find that, the rest would be 
easy enough.” 

I began seriously to reflect. The prospect of going 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 11 

without food and sleep was not a promising one, so I de¬ 
termined to do my best to solve the mystery. My uncle, 
meanwhile, went on with his soliloquy. 

“ The way to discover it is easy enough. In this docu¬ 
ment there are one hundred and thirty-two letters, giving 
seventy-nine consonants to fifty-three vowels. This is about 
the proportion found in most southern languages, the 
idioms of the north being much more rich in consonants. 
We may confidently predict, therefore, that we have to deal 
with a southern dialect.” 

Nothing could be more logical. 

“ Now,” said Professor Hardwigg, “ to trace the parti¬ 
cular language.” 

“ As Shakspeare says, * that is the question,’ ” was my 
rather satirical reply. 

“ This man Saknussemm,” he continued, “ was a very 
learned man : now as he did not write in .the language of 
his birth-place, he probably, like most learned men of the 
sixteenth century, wrote in Latin. If, however, I prove 
wrong in this guess, we must try Spanish, French, Italian, 
Greek, and even Hebrew. My own opinion, though, is 
decidedly in favor of Latin.” 

This proposition startled me. Latin was my favorite 
study, and it seemed sacrilege to believe this gibberish to 
belong to the country of Virgil. 

“Barbarous Latin, in all probability,” continued my 
uncle, “ but still Latin.” 

“Very probably,” I replied, not to contradict him. 

“Let us see into the matter,” continued my uncle; 

“ here you see we have a series of one hundred and thirty- 
two letters, apparently thrown pell-mell upon paper, with¬ 
out method or organization. There are words which are 
composed wholly of consonants, such as m.rnlls, others 
which are nearly all vowels, the fifth, for instance, which 
is unteief, and one of the last oseibo. This appears an 


32 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

extraordinary combination. Probably we shall find that 
the phrase is arranged according to some mathematical 
plan. No doubt a certain sentence has been written out 
and then jumbled up—some plan to which some figure is 
the clue. Now, Harry, to show your English wit—what 
is that figure ? ” 

I could give him no hint. My thoughts were indeed 
far away. While he was speaking I had caught sight of 
the portrait of my cousin Gretchen, and was wondering 
when she would return. 

We were afiianced, and loved one another very sincerely. 
But my uncle, who never thought even of such sublunary 
matters, knew nothing of this. Without noticing my ab¬ 
straction, the Professor began reading the puzzling cryp¬ 
tograph all sorts of ways, according to some theory of his 
own. Presently, rousing my wandering attention, he dic¬ 
tated one precious attempt to me. 

I mildly handed it over to him. It read as follows:— 

mmessunhaSenrA.icefdoK.segnittamurtn 
ecertserrette,rotaivsadua, ednecsedsadne 
lacartnTiiluJsiratmcSarbmutabiledmek 
meretarcsilucoIsleffenSnl. 

I could scarcely keep from laughing, while my uncle, 
on the contrary, got in a towering passion, struck the table 
with his fist, darted out of the room, out of the house, and 
then taking to his heels was presently lost to sight. 



PROFESSOR YON HARDWIGG 










































































































































# 








I 



* . 


% 































































A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 13 


CHAPTER III. 

AN ASTOUNDING DISCOVERY. 

“What is the matter?” cried the cook, entering the 
room ; “ when will master have his dinner ? ” 

“ Never.” 

“ And, his supper ? ” 

“ I don’t know. He says he will eat no more, neither 
shall I. My uncle has determined to fast and make me 
fast until he makes out this abominable inscription,” I 
replied. 

“You will be starved to death,” she said. 

I was very much of the same opinion, but not liking to 
say so, sent her away, and began some of my usual work 
of classification. But boy as I made myself, nothing 
could keep me from thinking alternately of the stupid 
manuscript and of the pretty Gretchen. 

Several times I thought of going out, but my uncle 
would have been angry at my absence. At the end of an 
hour, my allotted task was done. How to pass the time ? 
I began by lighting my pipe. Like all other students, I 
delighted in tobacco ; and, seating myself in the great 
arm-chair, I began to think. 

Where was my uncle? I could easily imagine him 
tearing along some solitary road, gesticulating, talking to 
himself, cutting the air with his cane, and still thinking 
of the absurd bit of hieroglyphics. Would he hit upon 
some clue? Would he come home in better humor? 
While these thoughts were passing through my brain, I 
mechanically took up the execrable puzzle and tried every 
imaginable way of grouping the letters. I put them to¬ 
gether by twos, by threes, fours, and fives—in vain. 


14 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

Nothing intelligible came out, except that the fourteenth, 
fifteenth and sixteenth made ice in English; the eighty- 
fourth, eighty-fifth and eighty-sixth, the word sir; then at 
last I seemed to find the Latin words rota , mwtabile , ira, 
nec, atra. 

“ Ha! there seems to be some truth in my uncle’s no¬ 
tion,” thought I. 

Then again I seemed to find the word luco, which means 
sacred wood. Then in the third line I appeared to make 
out labiled, a perfect Hebrew word, and at the last the 
syllables mere, are, mer, which were French. 

It was enough to drive, one mad. Four different idioms 
in this absurd phrase. What connection could there be 
between ice, sir, anger, cruel, sacred wood, changing, 
mother, are and sea ? The first and the last might, in a 
sentence connected with Iceland, mean sea of ice. But 
what of the rest of this monstrous cryptograph ? 

I was, in fact, fighting against an insurmountable diffi¬ 
culty ; my brain was almost on fire ; my eyes were strained 
with staring at the parchment; the whole absurd collec¬ 
tion of letters appeared to dance before my vision in a 
number of black little groups. My mind was possessed 
with temporary hallucination—I was stifling. I wanted 
air. Mechanically I fanned myself with the document, 
of which now I saw the back and then the front. 

Imagine my surprise when glancing at the back of the 
wearisome puzzle, the ink having gone through, I clearly 
made out Latin words, and among others craterem and 
terrestre. 

I had discovered the secret! 

It came upon me like a flash of lightning. I had got the 
clue. All you had to do to understand the document was 
to read it backwards. All the ingenious ideas of the Pro¬ 
fessor were realized; he had dictated it rightly to me; by a 
mere accident I had discovered what he so much desired. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 15 

My delight, my emotion may be imagined, my eyes 
were dazzled and I trembled so that at first I could make 
nothing of it. One look, however, would tell me all I 
wished to know. 

“ Let me read,” I said to myself, after drawing a long 
breath. 

I spread it before me on the table, I passed my finger 
over each letter, I spelt it through; in my excitement I 
read it out. 

What horror and stupefaction took possession of my 
soul. I was like a man who had received a knock-down 
blow. Was it possible that I really read the terrible 
secret, and it had really been accomplished! A man had 
dared to do—what ? 

No living being should ever know. 

“ Never! ” cried I, jumping up ; “ Never shall my uncle 
be made aware of the dread secret. He would be quite 
capable of undertaking the terrible journey. Nothing 
would check him, nothing stop him. Worse, he would 
compel me to accompany him, and we should be lost for¬ 
ever. But no ; such folly and madness cannot be allowed.” 

I was almost beside myself with rage and fury. 

“ My worthy uncle is already nearly mad,” I cried 
aloud. “ This would finish him. By some accident he 
may make the discovery; in which case, we are both lost. 
Perish the fearful secret—let the flames forever bury it in 
oblivion.” 

I snatched up book and parchment, and was about to 
cast them into the fire, when the door opened and my 
uncle entered. 

I had scarcely time to put down the wretched docu¬ 
ments before my uncle was by my side. He was pro¬ 
foundly absorbed. His thoughts were evidently bent on 
the terrible parchment. Some new combination had pro¬ 
bably struck him while taking his walk. 

2 


16 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OP THE EARTH. 

He seated himself in his arm-chair, and with a pen began 
to make an algebraical calculation. I watched him with 
anxious eyes. My flesh crawled as it became probable 
that he would discover the secret. 

His combinations I knew now were useless, I having 
discovered the one only clue. For three mortal hours he 
continued without speaking a word, without raising his 
head, scratching, re-writing, calculating over and over 
again. I knew that in time he must hit upon the right 
phrase. The letters of every alphabet have only a certain 
number of combinations. But then years might elapse be¬ 
fore he would arrive at the correct solution. 

Still time went on ; night came, the sounds in the streets 
ceased and still my uncle went on, not even answering 
our worthy cook when she called us to supper. 

I did not dare to leave him, so waved her away, and 
at last fell asleep on the sofa. 

When I awoke my uncle was still at work. His red 
eyes, his pallid countenance, his matted hair, his feverish 
hands, his hecticly flushed cheeks, showed how terrible 
had been his struggle with the impossible, and what fear¬ 
ful fatigue he had undergone during that long sleepless 
night. It made me quite ill to look at him. Though he 
was rather severe with me, I loved him, and my heart 
ached at his sufferings. He was so overcome by one idea 
that he could not even get in a passion ! All his energies 
were focussed on one point. And I knew that by speaking 
one little word all this suffering would cease. I could not 
speak it. 

My heart was, neverthless, inclining towards him. Why, 
then, did I remain silent ? In the interest of my uncle 
himself. 

“Nothing shall make me speak,” I muttered. “ He 
will want to follow in the footsteps of the other ! I know 
him well. His imagination is a perfect volcano, and to 



HARRY IN A BROWN STUDY, 






































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 17 

make discoveries in the interests of geology he would, 
sacrifice his life. I will therefore be silent and strictly 
keep the secret I have discovered. To reveal it would be 
suicidal. He would not only rush, himself, to destruction, 
but drag me with him.” 

I crossed my arms, looked another way and smoked—• 
resolved never to speak. 

When our cook wanted to go out to market, or on any 
other errand, she found the front door locked and the 
key taken away. Was this done purposely or not? 
Surely Professor Hardwigg did not intend the old woman 
and myself to become martyrs to his obstinate will. Were 
we to be starved to death ? A frightful recollection came 
to my mind. Once we had fed on bits and scraps for a 
week while he sorted some curiosities. It gave me the 
cramp even to think of it! 

I wanted my breakfast, and I saw no way of getting it. 
Still my resolution held good. I would starve rather than 
yield. But the cook began to take me seriously to task. 
What was to be done ? She could not go out ; and I 
dared not. 

My uncle continued counting and writing; his imagi¬ 
nation seemed to have translated him to the skies. He 
neither thought of eating nor drinking. In this way 
twelve o’clock came round. I was hungry, and there was 
nothing in the house. The cook had eaten the last bit of 
bread. This could not go on. It did, however, until two ? 
when my sensations were terrible. After all, I began to 
think the document very absurd. Perhaps it might only 
be a gigantic hoax. Besides, some means would surely be 
found to keep my uncle back from attempting any such 
absurd expedition. On the other hand, if he did attempt 
anything so Quixotic, I should not be compelled to ac¬ 
company him. Another line of reasoning partially de¬ 
cided me. Very likely he would make the discovery him- 


18 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

self when I should have suffered starvation for nothing. 
Under the influence of hunger this reasoning appeared 
admirable. I determined to tell all. 

The question now arose as to how it was to be done. I 
was still dwelling on the thought, when he rose and put 
on his hat. 

What! go out and lock us in ? Never! 

“ Uncle,” I began. 

He did not appear even to hear me. 

“• Professor Hardwigg,” I cried. 

“ What,” he retorted, “ did you speak ? ” 

“ How about the key ? ” 

“ What key—the key of the door ? ” 

“No—of these horrible hieroglyphics?” 

He looked at me from under his spectacles, and started 
at the odd expression of my face. Rushing forward, he 
clutched me by the arm and keenly examined my counte¬ 
nance. His very look was an interrogation. 

I simply nodded. 

With an incredulous shrug of the shoulders, he turned 
upon his heel. Undoubtedly he thought I had gone mad. 

“ I have made a very important discovery.” 

His eyes flashed with excitement. His hand was lifted 
in a menacing attitude. For a moment neither of us 
spoke. It is hard to say which was most excited. 

“ You don’t mean to say that you have any idea of the 
meaning of the scrawl ? ” 

“ I do,” was my desperate reply. “ Look at the sentence 
as dictated by you.” 

^ “Well, but it means nothing,” was the angry answer. 

“ Nothing if you read from left to right, but mark, if 
from right to left-” 

“Backwards!” cried my uncle, in wild amazement. 
“Oh most cunning Saknussemm; and I to be such a 
blockhead! ” 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 19 

He snatched up the document, gazed at it with haggard 
eye, and read it out as I had done. 

It read as follows:— 

In Snejfels yoculis craterem hem delebat 

Umbra Seartaris Julii intra calendas descende. 

Audas viator , et terrestre centrum attinges , 

Kod fed. Arne Sahnussemm. 

Which dog-Latin being translated, reads as follows:—■ 

“ Descend into the crater of Yocul of Sneffels, which 
the shade of Seartaris caresses, before the kalends of July, 
audacious traveller, and you will reach the centre of the 
earth. I did it. Arne Saknussemm.” 

My uncle leaped three feet from the ground with joy. 
He looked radiant and handsome. He rushed about the 
room wild with delight and satisfaction. He knocked over 
tables and chairs. He threw his books about until at last, 
utterly exhausted, he fell into his arm-chair. 

“ What’s o’clock ? ” he asked. 

“ About three.” 

“ My dinner does not seem to have done me much good,” 
he observed, “ Let me have something to eat. We can 
then start at once. Get my portmanteau ready.” 

“What for?” 

“And your own,” he continued. “We start at once.” 

My horror may be conceived. I resolved however to 
show no fear. Scientific reasons were the only ones likely 
to influence my uncle. Now, there were many against 
this terrible journey. The very idea of going down to the 
centre of the earth was simply absurd. I determined 
therefore to argue the point after dinner. 

My uncle’s rage was now directed against the cook for 
having no dinner ready. My explanation however satis¬ 
fied him, and giving her the key she soon contrived to get 
sufficient to satisfy our voracious appetites. 

During the repast my uncle was rather gay than other- 


20 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


wise. He made some of those peculiar jokes which belong 
exclusively to the learned. As soon however as dessert 
was over, he called me to his study. We each took a 
chair on opposite sides of the table. 

“ Henry,” he said, in a soft and winning voice; “ I have 
always believed you ingenious, and you have rendered me 
a service never do be forgotten. Without you, this great, 
this wondrous discovery would never have been made. It 
is my duty, therefore, to insist on your sharing the glory.” 

“ He is in a good humor,” thought I; “ Ill soon let him 
know my opinion of glory.” 

“ In the first place,” he continued, “ you must keep the 
whole affair a profound secret. There is no more envious 
race of men than scientific discoverers. Many would 
start on the same journey. At all events, we will be the 
first in the field.” 

“ I doubt your having many competitors,” was my reply. 
“ A man of real scientific acquirements would be de¬ 
lighted at the chance. We should find a perfect stream 
of pilgrims on the traces of Arne Saknussemm, if this 
document were once made public. 

“ But my dear sir, is not this paper very likely to be a 
hoax ? ” I urged. 

“ The book in which we find it is sufficient proof of its 
authenticity,” he replied. 

“ I thoroughly allow that the celebrated Professor wrote 
the lines, but only, I believe, as a kind of mystification,” 
was my answer. 

Scarcely were the words out of my mouth, when I was 
sorry I had uttered them. My uncle looked at me with a 
dark and gloomy scowl, and I began to be alarmed for the 
results of our conversation. His mood soon changed, how¬ 
ever, and a smile took the place of a frown. 

We shall see,” he remarked, with decisive emphasis. 

“ But see, what is all this about Yocul, and Sneffels, 







. 






































■ ~ 9 


> 






















« 















































TRACING OUR ROUTE, 



















































































































































































































A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 21 

and this Scartaris ? I have never heard anything about 
them.” 

“ The very point to which I am coming. I lately re* 
ceived from my friend, Augustus Peterman, of Leipzig, a 
map. Take down the third atlas from the second shelf, 
series Z, plate* 4. 

I rose, went to the shelf, and presently returned with the 
volume indicated. 

“ This,” said my uncle, “ is one of the best maps of Ice¬ 
land. I believe it will settle all your doubts, difficulties 
and objections.” 

With a grim hope to the contrary, I stooped over the 
map. 


22 A JOURNEY 


TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER IV. 

WE START ON THE JOURNEY. 

“You see, the whole island is composed of volcanoes, 1 ” 
said the Professor, “ and remark carefully that they all 
bear the name of Yokul. The word is Icelandic, and 
means a glacier. In most of the lofty mountains of that 
region the volcanic eruptions come forth from ice-bound 
caverns. Hence the name applied to every volcano on 
this extraordinary island.” 

“ But what does this word Sneffels mean ? ” 

" this question I expected no rational answer. I was 
mistaken. 

“ Follow my finger to the western coast of Iceland, 
there you see Reykjawik, its capital. Follow the direction 
of one of its innumerable fjords or arms of the sea, and 
what do you see below the sixty-fifth degree of latitude ? ” 

“ A peninsula—-very like a thigh-bone in shape.” 

“ And in the centre of it-? ” 

“ A mountain.” 

“ Well, that’s Sneffels.” 

I had nothing to say. 

“ That is Sneffels—a mountain about five thousand feet 
m height,, one of the most remarkable in the whole island, 
and certainly doomed to be the most celebrated in the 
world, for through its crater we shall reach the Centre of 
the Earth.” 

“Impossible!” cried I, startled and shocked at the 
thought. 

“ Why impossible ? ” said Professor Hardwigg in his 
severest tones. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 23 

“Because its crater is choked with lava, by burning 
rocks—by infinite dangers.” 

“ But if it be extinct ? ” 

“ That would make a difference.” 

“ Of course it would. There are about three hundred 
volcanoes on the whole surface of the globe—but the 
greater number are extinct. Of these Sneffels is one. No 
eruption has occurred since 1219—in fact it has ceased to 
be a volcano at all.” 

After this what more could I say ? Yes—I thought of 
another objection. 

“ But what is all this about Scartaris and the kalends 
of July-? ” 

My uncle reflected deeply. Presently he gave forth the 
result of his reflections in a sententious tone. 

“ What appears obscure to you, to me is light. This 
very phrase shows how particular Saknussemm is in his 
directions. The Sneffels’ mountain has many craters. He 
is careful therefore to point the exact one which is the 
highway into the Interior of the Earth. He lets us know, 
for this purpose, that about the end of the month of June, 
the shadow of Mount Scartaris falls upon the one crater. 
There can be no doubt about the matter.” 

My uncle had an answer for everything. 

“ I accept all your explanations,” I said, “ and Saknus¬ 
semm is right. He found out the entrance to the bowels 
of the earth, he has indicated correctly, but that he or any 
one else ever followed up the discovery, is madness to 
suppose.” 

“ Why so, young man ? ” 

“ All scientific teaching, theoretical and practical, shows 
it to be impossible.” 

“ I care nothing for theories,” retorted my uncle. 

“ But is it not well-known that heat increases one degree 
for every seventy feet you descend into the earth ? which 


24 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


gives a fine idea of the central heat. All the matters 
which compose the globe are in a state of incandescence; 
even gold, platinum, and the hardest rocks are in a state 
of fusion. What would become of us ? ” 

“ Don’t be alarmed at the heat, my bov.” 

“ How so ? ” 

“ Neither you nor anybody else know anything about 
the real state of the earth’s interior. All modern experi¬ 
ments tend to explode the older theories. Were any such 
heat to exist, the upper crust of the earth would be 
shattered to atoms, and the world would be at an end.” 

A long, learned and not uninteresting discussion followed, 
which ended in this wise :— 

“ I do not believe in the dangers and difficulties which 
you, Henry, seem to multiply; and the only way to learn, 
is like Arne Saknussemm, to go and see.” 

“ Well,” cried I, overcome at last, “let us go and see. 
Though how we can do that in the dark is another 
mystery.” 

“Fear nothing. We shall overcome these, and many 
other difficulties. Besides, as we approach the Centre, I 
expect to find it luminous—” 

“ Nothing is impossible.” 

“And now that we have come to a thorough under¬ 
standing, not a word to any living soul. Our success 
depends on secrecy and despatch.” 

Thus ended our memorable conference, which roused a 
perfect fever in me. Leaving my uncle, I went forth like 
one possessed. Reaching the banks of the Elbe, I began to 

think. Was all I had heard really and truly possible? Was 

my uncle in his sober senses, and could the interior of the 
earth be reached ? Was I the victim of a madman, or was 
he a discoverer of rare courage and grandeur of conception? 

To a certain extent I was anxious to be off. I was 
afraid my enthusiasm would cool. I determined to pack 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 25 

up at once. At the end of an hour, however, on my way 
home, I found that my feelings had very much changed. 

<( Im all abrqad,” I cried; “’tis a nightmare—I must 
have dreamed it ” 

At this moment I came face to face with Gretchen, 
whom I warmly embraced. 

“So you have come to meet me,” she said ; “ how good 
of you. But what is the matter ?” 

Well, it was no use mincing the matter, I told her all. 
She listened with awe, and for some minutes she could 
not speak. 

“ Well ? ” I at last said, rather anxiously. 

“ What a magnificent journey. If I were only a man! 
A journey worthy of the nephew of Professor Hardwigg. 
I should look upon it as an honor to accompany him.” 

“ My dear Gretchen, I thought you would be the first 
to cry out against this mad enterprise.” 

“No; on the contrary, I glory in it. It is magnificent, 
splendid—an idea worthy of my father. Henry Lawson, 
I envy you.” 

This was, as it were, conclusive. The final blow of all. 

When we entered the house we found my uncle sur¬ 
rounded by workmen and porters, who were packing up. 
He was pulling and hauling at a bell. 

“Where have you been wasting your time? Your 
portmanteau is not packed—my papers are not in order— 
the precious tailor has not brought my clothes, nor my 
gaiters—the key of my carpet bag is gone ! ” 

I looked at him stupefied. And still he tugged away 
at the bell. 

“We are really off, then?” I said. 

“ Yes—of course, and yet you go out for a stroll, unfor¬ 
tunate boy!” 

“ And when do we go ? ” 

“ The day after to-morrow, at daybreak.” 


26 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


I heard no more; but darted off to my little bed¬ 
chamber and locked myself in. There was no doubt about 
it now. My uncle had been hard at work all the after¬ 
noon. The garden was full of ropes, rope-ladders, torches, 
gourds, iron clamps, crow-bars, alpenstocks, and pickaxes 
—enough to load ten men. 

I passed a terrible night. I was called early the next 
day to learn that the resolution of my uncle was un¬ 
changed and irrevocable. I also found my cousin and 
affianced wife as warm on the subject as was her father. 

Next day, at five o’clock in the morning, the post-chaise 
was at the door. Grretchen and the old cook received the 
keys of the house; and, scarcely pausing to wish any one 
good-bye, we started on our adventurous journey into the 
Centre of the Earth. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 27 


CHAPTER Y. 

FIRST LESSONS IN CLIMBING. 

At Altona, a suburb of Hamburg, is the Chief Station 
of the Kiel railway, which was to take us to the shores of 
the Belt. In twenty minutes from the moment of our 
departure we were in Holstein, and our carriage entered 
the station. Our heavy luggage was taken out, weighed, 
labelled, and placed in a huge van. We then took our 
tickets, and exactly at seven o’clock were seated opposite 
each other in a first-class railway carriage. 

My uncle said nothing. He was too busy examining 
his papers, among which of course was the famous parch¬ 
ment, and some letters of introduction from the Danish 
consul, which were to pave the way to an introduction to 
the Governor of Iceland. My only amusement was look¬ 
ing out of the window. But as we passed through a flat 
though fertile country, this occupation was slightly mo¬ 
notonous. In three hours we reached Kiel, and our 
baggage was at once transferred to the steamer. 

We had now a day before us, a delay of about ten 
hours. Which fact put my uncle in a towering passion. 
We had nothing to do but to walk about the pretty town 
and bay. At length, however, we went on board, and at 
half past ten were steaming down the Great Belt. It was 
a dark night, with a strong breeze and a rough sea, nothing 
being visible but the occasional fires on shore, with here 
and there a lighthouse. At seven in the morning we left 
Korsor, a little town on the western side of Seeland. 

Here we took another railway, which in three hours 
brought us to the capital, Copenhagen, where, scarcely 
taking time for refreshment, my uncle hurried out to pre- 


28 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


sent one of his letters of introduction. It was to the 
director of the Museum of Antiquities, who haying been 
informed that we were tourists bound for Iceland, did all 
he could to assist us. One wretched hope sustained me 
now. Perhaps no vessel was bound for such distant parts. 

Alas! a little Danish schooner, the Valkyrie, was to 
sail on the second of June for Reykjawik. The captain, 
M. Bjarne, was on board, and was rather surprised at the 
energy and cordiality with which his future passenger 
shook him by the hand. To him a voyage to Iceland 
was merely a matter of course. My uncle, on the other 
hand, considered the event of sublime importance. The 
honest sailor took advantage of the Professor’s enthusiasm 
to double the fare. 

“ On Tuesday morning at seven o’clock be on board,” 
said M. Bjarne, handing us our receipts. 

“ Excellent! Capital! Glorious! ” remarked my uncle 
as we sat down to a late breakfast; “ refresh yourself, my 
boy, and we will take a run through the town.” 

Our meal concluded, we went to the Kongens-Nye-Torw; 
to the king’s magnificent palace; to the beautiful bridge 
over the canal near the Museum ; to the immense ceno¬ 
taph of Thorwaldsen with its hideous naval groups; to 
the castle of Rosenberg; and to all the other lions of the 
place,—none of which my uncle even saw, so absorbed 
was he in his anticipated triumphs. 

But one thing struck his fancy, and that was a certain 
singular steeple situated on the Island of Amak, which is 
the south-east quarter of the city of Copenhagen. My 
uncle at once ordered me to turn my steps that way, and 
accordingly we went on board the steam ferry boat which 
does duty on the canal, and very soon reached the noted 
dockyard quay. 

In the first instance we crossed some narrow streets, 
where we met numerous groups of galley slaves, with parti- 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 29 

colored trousers, grey and yellow, working under the orders 
and the sticks of severe task-masters, and finally reached 
the v or-Frelser’s-Kirk. 

This church exhibited nothing remarkable in itself; in 
fact, the worthy Professor had only been attracted to it by 
one circumstance, which was, that its rather elevated stee¬ 
ple started from a circular platform, after which there was 
an exterior staircase, which wound round to the very summit. 

Let us ascend/’ said my uncle. 

“ But I never could climb church towers,” I cried, “ I 
am subject to dizziness in my head.” 

“ The ver y reason why you should go up. I want to 
cure you of a bad habit.” 

“ But my good sir-” 

I tell you to come. What is the use of wasting so 
much valuable time ? ” 

It was impossible to dispute the dictatorial commands of 
my uncle. I yielded with a groan. On payment of a 
fee, a verger gave us the key. He, for one, was not partial 
to the ascent. My uncle at once showed me the way, run¬ 
ning up the steps like a school-boy. I followed as well as 
I could, though no sooner was I outside the tower, than 
my head began to swim. There was nothing of the eagle 
about me. The earth was enough for me, and no ambi¬ 
tious desire to soar ever entered my mind. Still things 
did not go badly until I had ascended 150 steps, and was 
near the platform, when I began to feel the rush of cold 
air. I could scarcely stand, when clutching the railings, 

I looked upwards. The railing was frail enough, but no¬ 
thing to those which skirted the terrible winding staircase, 
that appeared, from where I stood, to ascend to the skies. 
“Now then, Henry.” 

“I can’t do it! ” I cried, in accents of despair. 

“ Are you, after all, a coward, sir ? ” said my uncle in a 
pitiless tone. “Go up, I say! ” 


30 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

_ To there was no reply possible. And yet the keen 
air acted violently on my nervous system; sky, earth, all 
seemed to swim round; while the steeple rocked like a 
ship. My legs gave way like those of a drunken man. I 
crawled upon my hands and knees; I hauled myself up 
slowly, crawling like a snake. Presently I closed my eyes, 
and allowed myself to be dragged upwards. 

“ Look around you,” said my uncle, in a stern voice, 

heaven knows what profound abysses you may have to 
look down. This is excellent practice.” 

Slowly, and shivering all the while with cold, I opened 
my eyes. What then did I see ? My first glance was up¬ 
wards at the cold fleecy clouds-, which as by some optical 
delusion appeared to stand still, while the steeple, the 
weathercock, and our two selves were carried swiftly along. 
Far away on one side could be seen the grassy plain, while 
on the other lay the sea bathed in translucent light The 
Sund, or Sound as we call it, could be discovered beyond 
the point of Elsinore, crowded with white sails, which, at 
that distance, looked like the wings of sea-gulls; while to 
the east could be made out the far-off coast of Sweden. 
The whole appeared a magic panorama. 

But faint and bewildered as I was, there was no remedy 
for it. Pise and stand up I must. Despite my protes¬ 
tations my first lesson lasted quite an hour. When, nearly 
two hours later, I reached the bosom of mother earth, J 
was like a rheumatic old man bent double with pain. 

Enough for one day,” said my uncle, rubbing his 
hands, “ we will begin again to-morrow.” 

There was no remedy. My lessons lasted five days, and 
at the end of that period, I ascended blithely enough, and 
found myself able to look down into the depths below 
without even winking, and with some degree of pleasure. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OP THE EARTH. SI 


CHAPTER VI. 

OUR VOYAGE TO ICELAND. 

The hour of departure came at last. The night before, 
the worthy Mr. Thompson brought us the most cordial let¬ 
ters of introduction for Count Trampe, Governor of Ice¬ 
land, for M. Pictursson, coadjutor to the bishop, and for 
M. Finsen, mayor of the town of Reykjawik. In return, 
my uncle nearly crushed his hands, so warmly did he 
shake them. 

On the second of the month, at two in the morning, our 
precious cargo of luggage was taken on board the good 
ship Valkyrie. We followed, and were very politely in¬ 
troduced by the captain to a small cabin with two stand¬ 
ing bed places, neither very well ventilated nor very com¬ 
fortable. But in the cause of science men are expected to 
suffer. 

“ Well, and have we a fair wind? ” cried my uncle, in 
his most mellifluous accents. 

“An excellent wind!” replied Captain Bjarne; “we 
shall leave the Sound, going free with all sails set.” 

A few minutes afterwards, the schooner started before 
the wind, under all the canvas she could carry, and en¬ 
tered the channel. An hour later, the capital of Denmark 
seemed to sink into the waves, and we were at no great dis¬ 
tance from the coast of Elsinore. My uncle was delighted; 
for myself, moody and dissatisfied, I appeared almost to 
expect a glimpse of the ghost of Hamlet. 

“Sublime madman,” thought I, “you doubtless, would 
approve our proceedings. You might perhaps even follow 
us to the centre of the earth, there to resolve your eternal 
doubts.” 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


But no ghost, or anything else appeared upon the an¬ 
cient walls. The fact is, the castle is much later than the 
time of the heroic prince of Denmark. It is now the re¬ 
sidence of the keeper of the Strait of the Sound, and 
through that Sound more than fifteen thousand vessels of 
all nations pass every year. 

The castle of Kronborg soon disappeared in the murky 
atmosphere, as well as the tower of Helsinborg, which 
raises- its head on the Swedish Bank. And here the 
schooner began to feel in earnest the breezes of the Catte- 
gat. The Valkyrie was swift enough, but with all sailing 
boats there is the same uncertainty. Her cargo was coal, 
furniture, pottery, woolen clothing, and a load of corn! 
As usual, the crew was small, five Danes doing the whole 
of the work. 

“ How lon g will the voyage last ? ” asked my uncle. 

“Well, I should think about ten days,” replied the 
skipper, “unless, indeed, we meet with some north-east 
gales among the Faroe Islands. 

At all events, there will be no very considerable de¬ 
lay,” cried the impatient Professor. 

“ No, Mr. Hardwigg,” said the captain, “no fear of that. 
At all events, we shall get there some day.” 

Towards evening the schooner doubled Cape Skagen, 
the northernmost part of Denmark, crossed the Skager! 
Rak during the night—skirted the extreme point of Nor¬ 
way through the gut of Cape Lindness, and then reached 
the Northern Seas. Two days later we were not far from 
the coast of Scotland, somewhere near what Danish sailoTs 
call Peterhead, and then the Valkyrie stretched out direct 
for the Faroe Islands, between Orkney and Shetland. Our 
vessel now felt the full force of the ocean waves, and the 
wind shifting, we with great difficulty made the Faroe 
Isles. On the eighth day, the captain made out Mygan- 
ness, the westernmost of the Isles, and from that moment 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 33 

headed direct for Portland, a cape on the southern shores 
of the singular island for which we were bound. 

The voyage offered no incident worthy of record. I bore 
it very well, but my uncle to his great annoyance, and 
even shame, was remarkably sea-sick! This mol de mer 
troubled him the more, that it prevented him from ques¬ 
tioning Captain Bjarne as to the subject of Sneffels, as to 
the means of communication, and the facilities of transport. 
All these explanations he had to adjourn to the period of 
his arrival. His time meanwhile, was spent lying in bed 
groaning, and dwelling anxiously on the hoped-for termi¬ 
nation of the voyage. I didn’t pity him. 

On the eleventh day we sighted Cape Portland, over 
which towered Mount Myrdals Yokul, which, the weather 
being clear, we made out very readily. The cape itself is 
nothing but a huge mount of granite standing naked and 
alone to meet the Atlantic waves. The Valkyrie kept off 
the coast, steering to the westward. On all sides were to 
be seen whole “ schools ” of whales and sharks. After 
some hours we came in sight of a solitary rock in the 
ocean, forming a mighty vault, through which the foam¬ 
ing waves poured with intense fury. The islets of West- 
man appeared to leap from the ocean, being so low in the 
water as scarcely to be seen until you were right upon 
them. From that moment the schooner was steered to 
the westward in order to round Cape Reykjaness, the 
western point of Iceland. 

My uncle, to his great disgust, was unable even to crawl 
on deck, so heavy a sea was on, and thus lost the first 
view of the Land of Promise. Forty-eight hours later, 
after a storm which drove us far to sea under bare poles, 
we came once more in sight of land, and were boarded by 
a pilot, who, after three hours of dangerous navigation, 
brought the schooner safely to an anchor in the bay of 
Faxa before Reykjawik. 


34 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

My uncle came out of his cabin pale, haggard, thin, 
but full of enthusiasm, his eyes dilated with pleasure and 
satisfaction. Nearly the w T hole population of the town 
was on foot to see us land. The fact was, that scarcely 
any one of them but expected some goods by the periodi¬ 
cal vessel. 

Professor Hardwigg was in haste to leave his prison, or 
rather as he called it, his hospital; but before he at¬ 
tempted to do so, he caught hold of my hand, led me to 
the quarter-deck of the schooner, took my arm with his 
left hand, and pointed inland with his right, over the 
northern part of the bay, to where rose a high two-peaked 
mountain—a double cone covered with eternal snow. 

“ Behold,” he whispered in an awe-stricken voice, “ be¬ 
hold—Mount Sneffels ! ” 

Then without further remark, he put his finger to his 
lips, frowned darkly, and descended into the small boat 
which awaited us. I followed, and in a few minutes we 
stood upon the soil of mysterious Iceland! 

Scarcely were we fairly on shore when there appeared 
before us a man of excellent appearance, wearing the cos¬ 
tume of a military officer. He was, however, but a civil 
servant, a magistrate, the governor of the island—Baron 
Trampe. The Professor knew whom he had to deal with. 
He therefore handed him the letters from Copenhagen, 
and a brief conversation in Danish followed, to which I 
of course was a stranger, and for a very good reason, for I 
did not know the language in which they conversed. I af¬ 
terwards heard, however, that Baron Trampe placed him¬ 
self entirely at the beck and call of Professor Hardwigg. 

My uncle was most graciously received by M. Finsen, 
the mayor, who as far as costume went, was quite as 
military as the governor, but also from character and oc¬ 
cupation quite as pacific. As for his coadjutor, M. Pic- 
tursson, he was absent on an episcopal visit to the 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 35 

northern portion of the diocese. We were therefore com¬ 
pelled to defer the pleasure of being presented to him. 
His absence was, however, more than compensated by the 
presence of M. Fridriksson, Professor of natural science in 
the college of Reykjawik, a man of invaluable ability. 
This modest scholar spoke no languages save Icelandic 
and Latin. When, therefore, he addressed himself to me 
in the language of Horace, we at once came to understand 
one another. He was, in fact, the only person that I did 
thoroughly understand during the whole period of my 
residence in this benighted island. 

Out of three rooms of which his house was composed, 
two was placed at our service, and in a few hours we were 
installed with all our baggage, the amount of which 
rather astonished the simple inhabitants of Reykjawik. 

Now, Harry, said my uncle, rubbing his hands, “all 
goes well, the worse difficulty is now over.” 

“How the worse difficulty over?” I cried in fresh amaze¬ 
ment. 

Doubtless. Here we are in Iceland. Nothing more 
remains but to descend into the bowels of the earth.” 

“Well, sir, to a certain extent you are right. We have 
only to go down but, as far as I am concerned, that is 
not the question. I want to know how we are to get up 
again.” 

“ That is the least part of the business, and does not in 
any way trouble me. In the meantime, there is not an 
hour to lose. I am about to visit the public library. Very 
likely I may find there some manuscripts from the hand 
of Saknussemm. I shall be glad to consult them.” 

“In the meanwhile,” I replied, “I will take a walk 
through the town. Will you not likewise do so?” 

“ I feel no interest in the subject,” said my uncle. “ What 
for me is curious in this island, is not what is above the 
surface, but what is below.” 


36 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

I bowed by way of reply, put on my hat and furred 
cloak, and went out. 

It was not an easy matter to lose oneself in the two streets 
of Reykjawik; I had therefore no need to ask my way. 
The town lies on a flat and marshy plain, between two 
hills. A vast field of lava skirts it on one side, falling away 
in terraces towards the sea. On the other hand is the 
large bay of Faxa, bordered on the north by the enormous 
glacier of Sneflels, and in which bay the Valkyrie was then 
the only vessel at anchor. Generally there was one or two 
English or French gunboats, to watch and protect the 
fisheries in the ofiing. They were now, however, absent on 
duty. 

The longest of the streets of Reykjawik runs parallel to 
the shore. In this street the merchants and traders live in 
wooden huts made with beams of wood, painted red,—mere 
log huts, such as you find in the wilds of America. The 
other street, situated more to the west, runs towards a little 
lake between the residences of the bishop and the other 
personages not engaged in commerce. 

I had soon seen all I wanted of these weary and dismal 
thoroughfares. Here and there was a strip of discolored 
turf, like an old worn-out bit of woollen carpet; and now 
and then a bit of kitchen garden, in which grew potatoes, 
cabbage, and lettuces, almost diminutive enough to suggest 
the idea of Lilliput. 

In the centre of the new commercial street, I found the 
public cemetery, enclosed by an earthen wall. Though 
not very large, it appeared not likely to be filled for cen¬ 
turies. From hence I went to the house of the Governor— 
a mere hut in comparison with the Mansion House of 
Hamburg but a palace alongside the other Icelandic 
houses. Between the little lake and the town was the 
church, built in simple Protestant style, and composed of 
calcined stones, thrown up by volcanic action. I have not 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 37 

the slightest doubt that in high winds, its red tiles were 
blown out, to the great annoyance of the pastor and con¬ 
gregation. Upon an eminence close at hand was the na¬ 
tional school, in which were taught Hebrew, English, 
French and Danish. 

In three hours my tour w T as complete. The general im¬ 
pression upon my mind was sadness. No trees, no vegeta¬ 
tion, so to speak—on all sides volcanic peaks—the huts of 
turf and earth—more like roofs than houses. Thanks to 
the heat of these residences, grass grows on the roof, which 
grass is carefully cut for hay. I saw but few inhabitants 
during my excursion, but I met a crowd on the beach, 
drying, salting and loading cod-fish, the principal article 
of exportation. The men appeared robust but heavy; 
fair-haired like Germans, but of pensive mien—exiles of a 
higher scale in the ladder of humanity than the Esquimaux, 
but, I thought, much more unhappy, since with superior 
perceptions they are compelled to live within the limits 
of the Polar Circle. 

Sometimes they gave vent to a convulsive laugh, but by 
no chance did they smile. Their costume consists of a 
coarse capote of black wool, known in Scandinavian coun¬ 
tries as the “vadmel,” a broad-brimmed hat, trousers of 
red serge, and a piece of leather tied with strings for a 
shoe—a coarse kind of moccasin. The women, though 
sad-looking and mournful, had rather agreeable features, 
without much expression. They wear a bodice and pet¬ 
ticoat of sombre vadmel. When unmarried they wear a 
little brown knitted cap over a crown of plaited hair; but 
when married, they cover their heads with a colored 
handkerchief, over which they tie a white scarf. 


38 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER VII. 


CONVERSATION AND DISCOVERY. 

When I returned, dinner was ready. This meal was 
devoured by my worthy relative with avidity and voraci¬ 
ty. His shipboard diet had turned his interior into a per¬ 
fect gulf. The repast, which was more Danish than Ice¬ 
landic, was in itself nothing, but the excessive hospitality 
of our host made us enjoy it doubly. 

The. conversation turned upon scientific matters, and 
M. Fndnksson asked my uncle what he thought of the 
public library. 

“Library, sir?” cried my uncle; “it appears to me a 
collection of useless odd volumes, and a beggarly amount 
of empty shelves.” 

“What!” cried M. Fridriksson ; “why, we have eight 
thousand volumes of most rare and valuable works—some 
m the Scandinavian language, besides all the new publi- 
cations from Copenhagen.” 

Eight thousand volumes, my dear sir—why, where are 
they ? ” cried my uncle. 

“ Sca -ttered over the country, Professor Hardwigg. W e 
are very studious, my dear sir, though we do live in 
Iceland Every farmer, every laborer, every fisherman 
can both read and write—and we think that books instead 
oi being locked up in cupboards, far from the sight of 
students should be distributed as widely as possible. The 
books of our library are therefore, passed from hand to 
hand uuthout returning to the library shelves perhaps for 

“Then when foreigners visit you, there is nothing for 
them to see?” 6 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 39 

“ Well > sir > foreigners have their own libraries, and our 
first consideration is, that our humbler classes should be 
highly educated. Fortunately, the love of study is innate 
in the Icelandic people. In 1816 we founded a Literary 
Society and Mechanics’ Institute; many foreign scholars 
of eminence are honorary members; we publish books des¬ 
tined to educate our people, and these books have rendered 
valuable services to our country. Allow me to have the 
honor, Professor Hardwigg, to enrol you as an honorary 
member ? ” 

My uncle, who already belonged to nearly every literary 
and scientific institution in Europe, immediately yielded 
to the amiable wishes of good M. Fridriksson. 

“ now,” he said, after many expressions of gratitude 
and good-will, “if you will tell me what books you ex¬ 
pected to find, perhaps I may be of some assistance to 
you.” 

I watched my uncle keenly. For a minute or two he 
hesitated, as if unwilling to speak; to speak openly was, 
perhaps, to unveil his projects. Nevertheless, after some 
reflection, he made up his mind. 

“Well, M. Fridriksson,” he said in an easy, uncon¬ 
cerned kind of way. “ I was desirous of ascertaining, if 
among other valuable works, you had any of the learned 
Arne Saknussemm.” 

“ Arne Saknussemm ! ” cried the Professor of Reykja- 
wik; “ you speak of one of the most distinguished scholars 
of the sixteenth century, of the great naturalist, the great 
alchemist, the great traveller.” 

“ Exactly so.” 

“ One of the most distinguished men connected with Ice¬ 
landic science and literature.” 

“ As you say, sir-” 

“ A man illustrious above all.” 

“Yes, sir, all this is true, but his works?” 


40 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

“We have none of them.” 

“ Not in Iceland ? ” 

“ There are none in Iceland or elsewhere,” answered the 
other, sadly. 

“ Why so?” 

“ Because Arne Saknussemm was persecuted for heresy, 
and in 1573 his works were publicly burnt at Copenhagen, 
by the hands of the common hangman.” 

“ Very good ! capital! ” murmured my uncle, to the 
great astonishment of the worthy Icelander. 

“ You said, sir-” 

“Yes, yes, all is clear, I seethe link in the chain; 
everything is explained, and I now understand why Arne 
Saknussemm, put out of court, forced to hide his magnifi¬ 
cent discoveries, was compelled to conceal beneath the veil 
of an incomprehensible cryptograph, the secret-” 

“ What secret ? ” 

“ A secret—which,” stammered my uncle. 

“ Have you discovered some wonderful manuscript ? ” 
cried M. Fridriksson. 

“ No, no, I was carried away by my enthusiasm. A 
mere supposition.” 

“ Very good, sir. But, really, to turn to another sub¬ 
ject, I hope you will not leave our island without exami¬ 
ning into its mineralogical riches.” 

“ Well, the fact is, I am rather late. So many learned 
men have been here before me.” 

“ Yes, yes, but there is still much to be done,” cried M. 
Fridriksson. 

“ You think so,” said my uncle, his eyes twinkling with 
hidden satisfaction. 

“ Yes, you have no idea how many unknown mountains, 
glaciers, volcanoes there are which remain to be studied. 
Without moving from where we sit, I can show you one. 
Yonder on the edge of the horizon, you see Sneffels.” 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 41 

“ Oh yes, Sneffels,” said my uncle. 

“ One of the most curious volcanoes in existence, the 
crater of which has been rarely visited.” 

“ Extinct?” 

“ Extinct, any time these five hundred years,” was the 
ready reply. 

“Well,” said my uncle, who dug his nails into his flesh, 
and pressed his knees tightly together to prevent himself 
leaping up with joy. “ I have a great mind to begin my 
studies with an examination of the geological mysteries 
of this Mount Seffel—Feisel—what do you call it ? ” 

“ Sneffels, my dear sir.” 

This portion of the conversation took place in Latin, 
and I therefore understood all that had been said. I 
could scarcely keep my countenance when I found my 
uncle so cunningly concealing his delight and satisfaction. 
I must confess that his artful grimaces, put on to conceal 
his happiness, made him look like a new Mephistopheles. 

“ Yes, yes,” he continued, “ your proposition delights 
me. I will endeavor to climb to the summit of Sneffels, 
and, if possible, will descend into its crater.” 

“I very much regret,” continued M. Fridriksson, “that 
my occupation will entirely preclude the possibility of my 
accompanying you. It would have been both pleasurable 
and profitable if I could have spared the time.” 

“No, no, a thousand times no,” cried my uncle. “I do 
not wish to disturb the serenity of any man. I thank you, 
however, with all my heart. The presence of one so 
learned as yourself, would no doubt have been most useful, 
but the duties of your office and profession before every¬ 
thing.” 

In the innocence of his simple heart, our host did not 
perceive the irony of these remarks. 

“I entirely approve your project,” continued the Ice¬ 
lander, after some further remarks. “ It is a good idea to 


42 A JOURNEY TO 


THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

begin by examining this volcano. You will make a harvest 
of curious observations. In the first place, how do you 
propose to get to Sneffels?” y 

Ji h ‘" C ~ ^ °' “»* - 4. 

Of course. But still it cannot be done ” 

“Why?” 

“ ““ *“» *“ 

“What is to be done?” 

“You must go by land along the coast. It is longer 
but much more interesting.” ^ ’ 

“Then I must have a guide.” 

^ Of course; and I have your very man.” 

^homebody on whom I can depend.” 

is litaateT 1 nf- itaDt ° f th t P eDinsula on which Sneffels 
s situated. He is a very shrewd and worthy man with 

» pi—i h. ni uh i™ 

“When can I see him—to-day?” 

“No, to-morrow; he will not be here before.” 

To-morrow be it,” replied my uncle, with a deep sigh. 
The conversation ended by compliments on both sides 
During the dinner my uncle had learned much as to the 
istory Of Arne Saknussemm, the reasons for his myste 
nous and hieroglyphical document. He also become 
aware that his host would not accompany him on his ad 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE 


OF THE EARTH. 43 


CHAPTER VIII. 

THE EIDER-DOWN HUNTER.—OFF AT LAST. 

That evening I took a brief walk on the shore near 
Reykjawik, after which I returned to an early sleep on my 
bed of coarse planks, where I slept the sleep of the just. 
When I awoke I heard my uncle speaking loudly in the 
next room.. I rose hastily and joined him. He was talk¬ 
ing in Danish with a man of tall stature, and of perfectly 
Herculean build. This man appeared to be possessed of 
very great strength. His eyes, which started rather pro¬ 
minently from a very large head, the face belonging to 
which was simple and naive, appeared very quick and 
intelligent. Very long hair, which even in England would 
have been accounted exceedingly red, fell over his athletic 
shoulders. This native of Iceland was active and supple 
m appearance, though he scarcely moved his arms, being 
m fact one of those men who despise the habit of gesticu¬ 
lation common to southern people. 

Everything m this man’s manner revealed a calm and 
phlegmatic temperament. There was nothing indolent 
about him, but his appearance spoke of tranquillity. He 
was one of those who never seemed to expect anything 
from anybody, who liked to work when he thought pro¬ 
per, and whose philosophy nothing could astonish or 
trouble. 

I began to comprehend his character, simply from the 
way in which he listened to the wild and impassioned ver¬ 
biage of my worthy uncle. While the excellent Professor 
spoke sentence after sentence, he stood with folded arms, 
utterly still, motionless to all my uncle’s gesticulations. 
When he wanted to say No he moved his head from left to 


44 


JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


2d T ^ aC ' 1Ule l SCed be aodd ^, *> slightly that you 
could scarcely see the undulation of his head. This 

economy of motion was carried to the length of avarice. 

time hef g T2 S appearance 1 We been a long 

time before I- had suspected him to be what he was a 

frifhtm thf r ‘ Certainl ^ his manuer was not likely’to 

2l g pr2 game ' ’ the “’ did He C ° ntriVe t0 at 

“<■ s: Si'.5 w “S“' 

the ea % days of summer, the female of the eider a 
pretty sort of duck, builds its nest amid the rocL of tbe 

•I.. — 

““wZ“ZZ‘2T "" y » *■>''ST* 

to see what he’ ca^do^A'“h ^ Wrd sets to work 
-ft, and «*» 

does not take the trouble to rob him of hk 6 , * 
The nest is accordingly finished, the eggs Ire laid'the rtT 
ones are born, and next year the harvest of } n ' 
again collected. 1 f eider ' d °wn is 

Now, as the eider-duck upvoi* i 
pects to build its nest but rath Selects . stee P or as- 
near to the sea, the Icelandic wT ° P “ g <md J ° W eIiffs 
operations without much difficulty." ^TlIkT 2^ 
who has neither to plow to sow n * , k a farmer 
lect his harvest* ’ DOT to Wow > only to col- 

; * The birds, however, are not always so see 

ways so accommodating. They are found 



HANS BJELKE, THE GUIDE. 





























































3 







A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 45 

This grave, sententious, silent person, as phlegmatic as 
an Englishman on the French stage, was named Hans 
Bjelke. He had called upon us in consequence of the re¬ 
commendation of M. Fridriksson. He was, in fact, our 
future guide. It struck me that had I sought the world 
over, I could not have found a greater contradiction to my 
impulsive uncle. 

They, however, readily understood one another. Neither 
of them had any thought about money; one was ready to 
take all that was offered him, the other ready to offer any¬ 
thing that was asked. It may readily be conceived, then, 
that an understanding was soon come to between them. 

Now, the understanding was, that he was to take us to 
the village of Stapi, situated on the southern slope of the 
peninsula of Sneffels, at the very foot of the volcano. 
Hans, the guide, told us the distance was about twenty-two 
miles, a journey which my uncle supposed would take 
about two days. 

But when my uncle came to understand that they were 
Danish miles, of eight thousand yards each, he was obliged 
to be more moderate in his ideas, and, considering the 
horrible roads we had to follow, to allow eight or ten days 
for the journey. 

Four horses were prepared for us, two to carry the bag¬ 
gage, and two to bear the important weight of myself and 
uncle. Hans declared that nothing ever would make him 
climb on the back of any animal. He knew every inch 
of that part of the coast, and promised to take us the very 
shortest way. 

His engagement with my uncle was by no means to 

in the southern part of England as a winter visitant, but in the more north¬ 
ern part of our isle, and in the north of Scotland remain all the year. One 
of our ablest, naturalists says: “Taking these nests is a regular business 
not unattended with risk, on account of the precipitous localities in which 
the eider-duck often breeds.” Again, “The eider is a shy, retiring bird 
placing its nest on islands and rocks projecting well into the sea.” 


46 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

cease with our arrival at Stapi; he was further to remain 
in his service during the whole time required for the com¬ 
pletion of his scientific investigations, at the fixed salary 
of three rix-dollars a week, being exactly fourteen shil¬ 
lings and twopence, minus one farthing, English currency. 
One stipulation, however, was made by the guide—the 
money was to be paid to him every Saturday night, fail¬ 
ing which, his engagement was at an end. 

The day of our departure was fixed. My uncle wished 
to hand the eider-down hunter an advance, but he refused 
in one emphatic word— 

“Efter” 

Which being translated from Icelandic into plain Eng¬ 
lish means—After. 

The treaty concluded, our worthy guide retired without 
another word. 

“A splendid fellow,” said my uncle; “only he little 
suspects the marvellous part he is about to play in the his¬ 
tory of the world.” 

“You mean, then,” I cried in amazement, “that he 
should accompany us ? ” 

“ To the Interior of the Earth, yes ; ” replied my uncle. 
“ Why not?” 

There were yet forty-eight hours to elapse before we 
made our final start. To my great regret, our wdiole time 
was taken up in making preparations for our journey. All 
our industry and ability were devoted to packing every 
object in the most advantageous manner—the instruments 
on one side, the arms on the other, the tools here and the 
provisions there. There were, in fact, four distinct groups. 

The instruments were of course of the best manufac¬ 
ture :— 

1. A centigrade thermometer of Eizel, counting up to 
150 degrees, which to me did not appear half enough—or 
too much. Too hot by half, if the degree of heat was to 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OE THE EARTH. 47 

ascend so high in which case we should certainly be 
cooked—not enough, if we wanted to ascertain the exact 
temperature of springs or metal in a state of fusion. 

2. A manometer worked by compressed air, an instru¬ 
ment used to ascertain the upper atmospheric pressure on 
the level of the ocean. Perhajis a common barometer 
would not have done as well, the atmospheric pressure be¬ 
ing likely to increase in proportion as we descended below 
the surface of the earth. 

3. A first-class chronometer made by Boissonnas, of 
Geneva, set at the meridian of Hamburg, from which 
Germans calculate, as the English do from Greenwich, and 
the French from Paris. 

4. Two compasses, one for horizontal guidance, the other 
to ascertain the dip. 

5. A night glass. 

6. Two Ruhmkorf’s coils, which, by means of a current 
of electricity, would ensure us a very excellent, easy car¬ 
ried, and certain means of obtaining light. 

7. A voltaic battery on the newest principle.* 


*Thermometer ( thermos , hot, and metron, measure); an instrument for 
measuring the temperature of the air.—Manometer (memos, rare, and metron, 
measure); an instrument to show the density or rarity of gases.—Chrono¬ 
meter ( clironos , time, and metron, measure) a time measurer, or superior 
watch.—Ruhmkorf s coil, an instrument for producing currents of induced 
electricity of great intensity. It consists of a coil of copper wire, insulated 
by being covered with silk, surrounded by another coifol fine wire, also in¬ 
sulated, in which a momentary current is induced when a current is passed 
through the inner coil from a voltaic battery. When the apparatus is in 
action, the gas becomes luminous, and produces a white and continued 
light. The battery and wire are carried in a leather bag, which the travel¬ 
ler fastens by a strap to his shoulders. The lantern is in front, and enables 
the benighted wanderer to see in the most profound obscurity. He may 
venture without fear of explosion into the midst of the most inflammable 
gases, and the lantern will burn beneath the deepest waters. M. Ruhm¬ 
korf, an able and learned chemist, discovered the induction coil. In 1804 
he obtained the great French prize £2,000 for this ingenious application of 
electricity.—A voltaic battery, so called from Volta, its designer, is an ap¬ 
paratus consisting of a series of metal plates arranged in pairs and sub¬ 
jected to the action of saline solutions for producing currents of electricity. 


48 A JOURNEY TO 


THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


Our arms consisted of two rifles, with two revolving six- 
shooters. Why these arms were provided it was impossi¬ 
ble for me to say. I had every reason to believe that we had 
neither wild beasts, nor savage natives to fear. My uncle, 
on the other hand, was quite as devoted to his arsenal as to 
his collection of instruments, and above all was very careful 
with his provision of fulminating or gun cotton, warranted 
to keep in any climate, and of which the expansive force 
was known to be greater than that of ordinary gunpowder. 

Our tools consisted of two pickaxes, two crowbars, a 
silken ladder, three iron-shod Alpine poles, a hatchet, a 
hammer, a dozen wedges, some pointed pieces of iron, and 
a quantity of strong rope. You may conceive that the 
whole made a tolerable parcel, especially when I mention 
that the ladder itself was three hundred feet long ! 

Then there came the important question of provisions. 
The hamper was not very large but tolerably satisfactory,* 
for I knew that in concentrated essence of meat and biscuit 
there was enough to last six months. The only liquid 
provided by my uncle was scheidam. Of water, not a 
drop. We had, however, an ample supply of gourds, and 
my uncle counted on finding water, and enough to fill 
them, as soon as we commenced our downward journey. 

My remarks as to the temperature, the quality, and even 
as to the possibility of none being found, remained wholly 
without effect. 

To make up the exact list of our travelling gear—for the 
guidance of future travellers-I will add, that we carried a 
medicine and surgical chest with all apparatus necessary 
for wounds, fractures and blows; lint, scissors, lancets-in 
tact, a perfect collection of horrible-looking instruments ; 
a number of phials containing ammonia, alcohol, ether,’ 
goulard water, aromatic vinegar, in fact, every possible 
and impossible drug-finally, all the materials for working 
the Ruhmkorf coil! 6 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 49 

My uncle had also been careful to lay in a goodly sup¬ 
ply of tobacco, several flasks of very fine gunpowder, boxes 
of tinder, besides a large belt crammed full of notes and 
gold. Good boots rendered water-tight were to be found 
to the number of six in the tool-box. 

“ My boy, with such clothing, with such boots, and such 
general equipments,” said my uncle, in a state of rapturous 
delight; “ we may hope to travel far.” 

It took a whole day to put all these matters in order. 
In the evening we dined with Baron Trampe, in company 
with the Mayor of Beykjawik, and Doctor Hyaltalin, the 
great medical man of Iceland. M. Fridriksson was not 
present, and I was afterwards sorry to hear that he and the 
governor did not agree on some matters connected with the 
administration of the island. Unfortunately, the conse¬ 
quence was, that I did not understand a word that was 
said at dinner—a kind of semi-official reception. One 
thing I can say, my uncle never left off speaking. 

The next day our labor came to an end. Our worthy 
host delighted my uncle, Professor Hardwigg, by giving 
him a good map of Iceland, a most important and precious 
document for a mineralogist. 

Our last evening was spent in a long conversation with 
M. Fridriksson, whom I liked very much—the more that 
I never expected to see him or any one else again. After 
this agreeable way of spending an hour or so, I tried to 
sleep. In vain; with the exception of a few dozes, my 
night was miserable. 

At five o’clock in the morning I was awakened from the 
only real half hour’s sleep of the night, by the loud 
neighing of horses under my window. I hastily dressed 
myself and went down into the street. Hans was engaged 
in putting the finishing stroke to our baggage, which he 
did in a silent, quiet way that won my admiration, and yet 
he did it admirably well. My uncle wasted a great deal 


50 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

of breath in giving him directions, but worthy Hans took 
not the slightest notice of his words. 

At six o’clock all our preparations were completed, and 
M. Fridriksson shook hands heartily with us. My uncle 
thanked him warmly, in the Icelandic language, for his 
kind hospitality, speaking truly from the heart. 

As for myself *1 put together a few of my best Latin 
phrases and paid him the highest compliments I could. 
This fraternal and friendly duty performed, we sallied 
forth and mounted our horses. 

As soon as we were quite ready, M. Fridriksson advanced, 
and by way of farewell, called after me in the words of 
Virgil—words which appeared to have been made for us, 
travellers starting for an uncertain destination:— 

“Et quacunque viam dederit fortuna sequamur ” 

(“And whichsoever way thou goest, may fortune fob 
low!”) 


EN ROUTE! 












































































































• 






• 

















































> 














A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 51 


CHAPTER IX. 

OUR START—WE MEET WITH ADVENTURES BY THE WAY. 

The weather was overcast but settled, when we com¬ 
menced our adventurous and perilous journey. We had 
neither to fear fatiguing heat nor drenching rain. It was, 
in fact, real tourist weather. 

As there was nothing I liked better than horse exercise, 
the pleasure of riding through an unknown country, 
caused the early part of our enterprise to be particularly 
agreeable to me. 

# 1 began to enjoy the exhilarating delight of travelling, a 
life of desire, gratification and liberty. The truth is, that 
my spirits rose so rapidly, that I began to be indifferent to 
what had once appeared to be a terrible journey. 

After all, I said to myself, “ what do I risk ? Simply 
to take a journey through a curious country, to climb a 
remarkable mountain, and if the worst comes to the worst, 
to descend into the crater of an extinct volcano.” 

There could be no doubt that this was all this terrible 
Saknussemm had done. As to the existence of a gallery, 
or of subterraneous passages leading into the interior of the 
earth, the idea was simply absurd, the hallucination of a dis¬ 
tempered imagination. All, then, that may be required of 
me I will do cheerfully, and will create no difficulty. 

It was just before we left Reykjawik that I came to this 
decision. 

Hans, our extraordinary guide, went first, walking with 
a steady, rapid, and unvarying step. Our two horses with 
the luggage followed of their own accord, without requiring 
whip or spur. My uncle and I came behind, cutting a 
very tolerable figure upon our small but vigorous animals. 


52 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

Iceland is one of the largest islands in Europe. It con¬ 
tains thirty thousand square miles of surface, and has 
about seventy thousand inhabitants. Geographers have 
divided it into four parts, and we had to cross the South¬ 
west quarter which in the vernacular is called Sudvestr 
Fjord iingr. 

Hans, on taking his departure from Reykjawik, had 
followed the line of the sea. We took our way through 
poor and sparse meadows, which made a desperate effort 
every year to show a little green. They very rarely suc¬ 
ceed in a good show of yellow. 

The rugged summits of the rocky hills were dimly visi¬ 
ble on the edge of the horizon, through the misty fogs; 
every now and then some heavy flakes of snow showed 
conspicuous in the morning light, while certain lofty and 
pointed rocks were first lost in the grey low clouds, their 
summits clearly visible above, like jagged reefs rising 
from a troublous sea. 

Every now and then a spur of rock came down through 
the arid ground, leaving us scarcely room to pass. Our 
horses, however, appeared not only well acquainted with 
the country, but by a kind of instinct, knew which was 
the best road. My uncle had not even the satisfaction of 
urging forward his steed by whip, spur, or voice. It was 
utterly useless to show any signs of impatience. I could 
not help smiling to see him look so big on his little horse; 
his long legs now and then touching the ground made him 
look like a six-footed centaur. 

“ beast, good beast,” he would cry. “ I assure 

you, Henry, that I begin to think no animal is more intel¬ 
ligent than an Icelandic horse. Snow, tempest, impracti¬ 
cable roads, rocks, icebergs—nothing stops him. He is 
brave ; he is sober ; he is safe ; he never makes a false 
step ; never glides or slips from his path. I dare to say 
that if any river, any fjord has to be crossed—and I have 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 53 

no doubt there will be many—you will see him enter the 
water without hesitation like an amphibious animal, and 
reach the opposite side in safety. We must not, however, 
attempt to hurry him ; we must allow him to have his 
own way, and I will undertake to say that between us we 
shall do our ten leagues a day.” 

“We may do so,” was my reply, “ but what about our 
worthy guide?” 

“ I have not the slightest anxiety about him: those sort 
of people go ahead without knowing even what they are 
about. Look at Hans. He moves so little that it is im¬ 
possible for him to become fatigued. Besides, if he were 
to complain of weariness, he could have the loan of my 
horse. I should have a violent attack of the cramp if I 
were not to have some sort of exercise. My arms are 
right—but my legs are getting a little stiff.” 

All this while we were advancing at a rapid pace. The 
country we had reached was already nearly a desert. 
Here and there could be seen an isolated farm, some soli¬ 
tary boer, or Icelandic house, built of wood, earth, frag¬ 
ments of lava—looking like beggars on the highway of 
life. These wretched and miserable huts excited in us 
such pity that we felt half disposed to leave alms at every 
door. In this country there are no roads, paths are nearly 
unknown, and vegetation, poor as it was, slowly as it 
reached perfection, soon obliterated all traces of the few 
travellers who passed from place to place. 

Nevertheless, this division of the province, situated only 
a few miles from the capital, is considered one of the best 
cultivated and most thickly peopled in all Iceland. 
What, then, must be the state of the less known and more 
distant parts of the island ? After travelling fully half a 
Danish mile, we had met neither a farmer at the door of 
his hut, nor even a wandering shepherd with his wild and 
savage flock. 


54 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


A few stray cows and sheep were only seen occasionally. 
What, then, must we expect when we come to the up- 
heaved regions—to the districts broken and roughened 
from volcanic eruptions and subterraneous commotions ? 

We were to learn this all in good time. I saw, however, 
on consulting the map, that we avoided a good deal of this 
rough country, by following the winding and desolate 
shores of the sea. In reality, the great volcanic movement 
of the island, and all its attendant phenomena, is concen¬ 
trated in the interior of the island; there, horizontal layers 
or strata of rocks, piled one upon the other, eruptions of 
basaltic origin, and streams of lava, have given this coun¬ 
try a kind of supernatural reputation. 

Little did I expect, however, the spectacle which awaited 
us when we reached the peninsula of Sneffels, where ag¬ 
glomerations of nature’s ruins form a kind of terrible 
chaos. 

Some two hours or more after we had left the city of 
Eeykjawik, we reached the little town called Aoalkirkja, 
or the principal church. It consists simply of a few 
houses not what in England or Germany \ye should call 
a hamlet. 

Hans stopped here one half hour. He shared our frugal 
breakfast, answered yes and no to my uncle’s questions as 
to the nature of the road, and at last when asked where we 
were to pass the night was as laconic as usual. 

Gardar! was his one-worded reply. 

I took occasion to consult the map, to see where Gardar 
was to be found. After looking keenly I found a small 
town of that name on the borders of the Hvalfjord, about 
four miles from Eeykjawik. I pointed this out to my 
uncle, who made a very energetic grimace. 

“Only four miles out of twenty-two? Why it is onlv a 
little walk.” 

He was about to make some energetic observation to the 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 55 

guide, but Hans, without taking the slightest notice of him, 
went in front of the horses, and walked ahead with the 
same imperturbable phlegm he had always exhibited. 

Three hours later, still travelling over those apparently 
interminable and sandy prairies, we were compelled to go 
round the Kollafjord, an easier and shorter cut than cross¬ 
ing the gulfs. Shortly after we entered a place of com¬ 
munal jurisdiction called Ejulberg, and the clock of which 
would then have struck twelve, if any Icelandic church had 
been rich enough to possess so valuable and useful an ar¬ 
ticle. These sacred edifices are, however, very much like 
these people, who do without watches—and never miss 
them. 

Here the horses were allowed to take some rest and re¬ 
freshment, then following a narrow strip of shore between 
high rocks and the sea, they took us without further halt 
to the “aoalkirkja” of Brantar, and after another mile to 
“Saurboer Annexia,” a chapel of ease, situated on the 
southern bank of the Hvalfjord. 

It was four o’clock in the evening and we had travelled 
four Danish miles, about equal to twenty English. 

The fjord was in this place about half-a-mile in width. 
The sweeping and broken waves came rolling in upon the 
pointed rocks; the gulf was surrounded by rocky walls—a 
mighty cliff, three thousand feet in height, remarkable for 
its brown strata, separated here and there by beds of tufa 
of a reddish hue. Now, whatever may have been the intel¬ 
ligence of our horses, I had not the slightest reliance upon 
them, as a means of crossing a stormy arm of the sea. To 
ride over salt water upon the back of a little horse seemed 
to me absurd. 

“If they are really intelligent,” I said to myself, “they 
Will certainly not make the attempt. • In any case, I shall 
trust rather to my own intelligence than theirs.” 

But my uncle was in no humor to wait. He dug his 


56 A JOUENEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

heels into the sides of his steed, and made for the shore. 
His horse went to the very edge of the water, sniffed at 
the approaching wave and retreated. 

My uncle, who was, sooth to say, quite as obstinate as the 
beast he bestrode, insisted on his making the desired ad¬ 
vance. This attempt was followed by a new refusal on the 
part of the horse which quietly shook his head. This 
demonstration of rebellion was followed by a volley of 
words and a stout application of whipcord; also followed 
by kicks on the part of the horse, which threw its head and 
heels upwards and tried to throw his rider. At length the 
sturdy little pony, spreading out his legs, in a stiff and 
ludicrous attitude, got from under the professor’s legs, and 
left him standing, with both feet on a separate stone, like 
the Colossus of Rhodes. 

“ Wretched animal! ” cried my uncle, suddenly trans¬ 
formed into a foot passenger—and as angry and ashamed 
as a dismounted cavalry officer on the field of battle. 

“ Farja,” said the guide, tapping him familiarly on the 
shoulder. 

“ What, a ferry boat! ” 

“ Her,” answered Hans, pointing to where lay the boat 
in question—“ there.” 

“ Well,” I cried, quite delighted with the information; 
“ so it is.” 

“ Why did you not say so before,” cried my uncle; 
“ why not start at once ? ” 

“ Tidvatten,” said the guide-. 

“ What does he say? ” I asked, considerably puzzled by 
the delay and the dialogue. 

“ He says tide,” replied my uncle, translating the Da¬ 
nish word for my information. 

“ Of course I understand—we must wait til] the tide 
serves.” 

“ For bida t ” asked my uncle. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 57 

“ Ja,” replied Hans. 

My uncle frowned, stamped his feet and then followed 
the horses to where the boat lay. 

I thoroughly understood and appreciated the necessity 
for waiting, before crossing the fjord, for that moment 
when the sea at its highest point is in a state of slack 
water. As neither the ebb nor flow can then be felt, the 
ferry boat was in no danger of being carried out to sea, 
or dashed upon the rocky coast. 

The favorable moment did not come until six o’clock in 
the evening. Then my uncle, myself, and guide, two 
boatmen and the four horses got into a very awkward 
flat-bottom boat. Accustomed as I had been to the steam 
ferry-boats of the Elbe, I found the long oars of the boat¬ 
men but sorry means of locomotion. We were more than 
an hour in crossing the fjord ; but at length the passage 
was concluded without accident. 

Half-an-hour later we reached Gardar. 


58 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER X. 

TRAVELLING IN ICELAND—THE LEPERS. 

It ought, one would have thought, to have been night, 
even in the sixty-fifth parallel of latitude; but still the 
nocturnal illumination did not surprise me. For in Ice¬ 
land, during the months of June and July, the sun never 
sets. 

The temperature, however, was very much lower than I 
expected. I was cold, but even that did not affect me so 
much as ravenous hunger. Welcome indeed, therefore, 
was the hut which hospitably opened its doors to us. 

It was merely the house of a peasant, but in the matter 
of hospitality, it was worthy of being the palace of a king. 
As we alighted at the door the master of the house came 
forward, held out his hand, and without any further cere¬ 
mony, signaled to us to follow him. 

We followed him, for to accompany him was impossible. 
A long, narrow, gloomy passage led into the interior of this 
habitation, made from beams roughly squared by the axe. 
This passage gave ingress to every room. The chambers 
were four in number—the kitchen, the work-shop, where the 
weaving was carried on, the general sleeping-chamber of the 
family, and the best room, to which strangers were especially 
invited. My uncle, whose lofty stature had not been taken 
into consideration when the house was built, contrived to 
knock his head against the beams of the roof. 

We were introduced into our chamber, a kind of large 
room with a hard earthen floor, and lighted by a window, 
the panes of which were made of a sort of parchment from 
the intestines of sheep—very far from transparent. 

The bedding was composed of dry hay thrown into two 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 59 

long red wooden boxes, ornamented with sentences painted 
in Icelandic. I really had no idea that we should be made 
so comfortable. There was one objection to the house, and 
that was, the very powerful odor of dried fish, of macera- 
ted meat, and of sour milk, which three fragrances com- 
bined, did not at all suit my olfactory nerves 

As soon as we had freed ourselves from our heavy tra¬ 
velling costume, the voice of our host was heard calling to 
us to come into the kitchen, the only room in which the Ice¬ 
landers ever make any fire, no matter how cold it may be. 

My uncle, nothing loth, hastened to obey this hospitable 
and friendly invitation. I followed. 

The kitchen chimney was made on an antique model. 
A large stone standing in the middle of the room was the 
fire-place, above, in the roof, was a hole for the smoke to 
pass through. This apartment was kitchen, parlor and 
dining-room all in one. 

On our entrance, our worthy host, as if he had not seen 
us before, advanced ceremoniously, uttered a word which 
means “be happy,” and then kissed both of us on the cheek. 

His wife followed, pronounced the same word, with the 
same ceremonial, then the husband and wife, placing their 
right hands upon their hearts, bowed profoundly. 

This excellent Icelandic woman was the mother of nine¬ 
teen children, who, little and big, rolled, crawled, and 
walked about in the midst of volumes of smoke arising 
from the angular fire-place in the middle of the room. 
Every now and then I could see a fresh white head, and a 
slightly melancholy expression of countenance, peering at 
me through the vapor. 

Both my uncle and myself, however, were very friendly 
with the whole party, and before we were aware of it, there 
were three or four of these little ones on our shoulders, as 
many on our boxes, and the rest hanging about our legs. 
Those who could speak kept crying out scellvertu in every 


60 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


possible and impossible key. Those who did not speak 
only made all the more noise. 

This concert was interrupted by the announcement of sup¬ 
per. At this moment our worthy guide, the eider-duck hun¬ 
ter, came in after seeing to the feeding and stabling of the 
horses—which consisted in letting them loose to browse on 
the stunted green of the Icelandic prairies. There was little 
for them to eat, but moss and some very dry and innutri- 
tious grass; next day they were ready before the door, 
some time before we were. 

“ Welcome,” said Hans. 

Then tranquilly, with the air of an automaton, without 
any more expression in one kiss than another, he embraced 
the host and hostess and their nineteen children. 

This ceremony concluded to the satisfaction of all parties, 
we all sat down to table, that is twenty -four of us, some¬ 
what crowded. Those who were best off had only two ju¬ 
veniles on their knees. 

As soon, however, as the inevitable soup was placed on the 
table, the natural taciturnity, common even to Icelandic ba¬ 
bies, prevailed over all else. Our host filled our plates with 
a portion of Lichen soup of Iceland moss, of by no means 
disagreeable flavor, an enormous lump of fish floating in 
sour butter. After that there came some “ skyr,” a kind of 
curds and whey, served with biscuits and juniper-berry 
juice. To drink, we had blanda, skimmed milk with water. 

I was hungry, so hungry, that by way of dessert I finished 
up with a basin of thick oaten porridge. 

As soon as the meal was over, the children disappeared, 
whilst the grown people sat around the fire-place, on which 
was placed turf, heather, cow dung and dried fish-bones. 
As soon as everybody was sufficiently warm, a general 
dispersion took place, all retiring to their respective 
couches. Our hostess offered to pull off our stockings and 
trousers, according to the custom of the country, but as we 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 61 

graciously declined to be so honored, she left us to our bed 
of dry fodder. 

Next day, at five in the morning, we took our leave of 
these hospitable peasants. My uncle had great difficulty 
in making them accept a sufficient and proper remunera¬ 
tion. 

Hans then gave the signal to start. 

We had scarcely got a hundred yards from Gardar, 
when the character of the country changed. The soil be¬ 
gan to be marshy and boggy, and less favorable to pro¬ 
gress. To the right, the range of mountains was pro¬ 
longed indefinitely like a great system of natural fortifica¬ 
tions, of which we skirted the glacis. We met with nu¬ 
merous streams and rivulets which it was necessary to ford> 
and that without wetting our baggage. As we advanced, 
the deserted appearance increased, and yet now and then 
we could see human shadows flitting in the distance. 
When a sudden turn of the track brought us within easy 
reach of one of these spectres, I felt a sudden impulse of 
disgust at the sight of a swollen head, with shining skin, 
utterly without .hair, and whose repulsive and revolting 
wounds could be seen through his rags. The unhappy 
wretches never came forward to beg; on the contrary, 
they ran away ; not so quick, however, but that Hans was 
able to salute them with the universal Ssellvertu. 

“ Spetelsk,” said he. 

“A leper,” explained my uncle. 

The very sound of such a word caused a feeling of re¬ 
pulsion. The horrible affection known as leprosy, which 
has almost vanished before the effects of modern science, 
is common in Iceland. It is not contagious but heredi¬ 
tary, so that marriage is strictly prohibited to these unfor¬ 
tunate creatures. 

These poor lepers did not tend to enliven our journey, 
the scene of which was inexpressibly sad and lonely. The 


62 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE 


OF THE EARTH. 


very last tufts of grassy vegetation appeared to die at our 
feet. Not a tree was to be seen, except a few stunted 
willows about as big as blackberry bushes. Now and 
then we watched a falcon soaring in the grey and misty 
air, taking his flight towards warmer and sunnier regions. 
I could not help feeling a sense of melancholy come over 
me. I sighed for my own Native Land, and wished to be 
back with Gretchen. 


We were compelled to cross several little fjords, and at 
last came to a real gulf. The tide was at its height, and 
we were able to go over at once, and reach the hamlet of 
Alftanes, about a mile farther. 

That evening, after fording the Alfa and the Heta, two 
rivers rich in trout and pike, we were compelled to ’pass 
the mght m a deserted house, worthy of being haunted by 
all the fays of Scandinavian mythology. The Kins- of 
Cold had taken up his residence 7 there^and madfus feel 
his presence all night. 

The following day was remarkable by its lack of any 
particular incidents. Always the same damp and swampy 
soil; the same dreary uniformity; the same sad and 
monotonous aspect of scenery. In the evening, having ac¬ 
complished the half of our projected journey, we slept at 
the Annexia of Krosolbt. 

For a whole mile we had under our feet nothing but 
lava. This disposition of the soil is called hraun: the 
crumbled lava on the surface was in some instances like 
s ip cables stretched out horizontally, in others coiled up 
in heaps; an immense field of lava came from the neigh¬ 
boring mountains, all extinct volcanoes, but whose re¬ 
mains showed what once they had been. Here and there 
could be made out the steam from hot water springs. 

There was no time, however, for us to take more than a 
cursory view of these phenomena. We had to go forward 
with what speed we might. Soon the soft and swampy soil 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 63 

again appeared under the feet of our horses, while at every 
hundred yards we came upon one or more small lakes. 
Our journey was now in a westernly direction; we had, in 
fact, swept round the great bay of Faxa, and the twin white 
summits of Sneffels rose to the clouds at a distance of less 
than five miles. 

The horses now advanced rapidly. The accidents and 
difficulties of the soil no longer checked them. I confess 
that fatigue began to tell severely upon me ; but my uncle 
was as firm and as hard as he had been on the first day. I 
could not help admiring both the excellent Professor and 
the worthy guide; for they appeared to regard this rugged 
expedition as a mere walk ! 

On Saturday, the 20th June, at six o’clock in the eve¬ 
ning, we reached Budir, a small town picturesquely si¬ 
tuated on the shore of the ocean; and here the guide asked 
for his money. My uncle settled with him immediately. 
It was now the family of Hans himself, that is to say, his 
uncles, his cousins-german, who offered us hospitality. We 
were exceedingly well received, and without taking too 
much advantage of the goodness of these worthy people, I 
should have liked very much to have rested with them af¬ 
ter the fatigues of the journey. But my uncle, who did 
not require rest, had no idea of anything of the kind; and 
despite the fact that next day was Sunday, I was com¬ 
pelled once more to mount my steed. 

The soil was again affected by the neighborhood of the 
mountains, whose granite peered out of the ground like 
tops of an old oak. We were skirting the enormous base 
of the mighty volcano. My uncle never took his eyes from 
off it; he could not keep from gesticulating, and looking 
at it with a kind of sullen defiance as much as to say 
“ That is the giant I have made up my mind to conquer.” 

After four hours of steady travelling, the horses stopped 
of themselves before the door of the presbytery of Stapi. 


64 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XL 

WE REACH MOUNT SNEFFELS.—THE “REYKXR.” 

Stapi is a town consisting of thirty huts, built on a 
large plain of lava, exposed to the rays of the sun, re¬ 
flected from the volcano. It stretches its humble tene¬ 
ments along the end of a little fjord, surrounded by a 
basaltic wall of the most singular character. 

Basalt is a brown rock of igneous origin. It assumes 
regular forms, which astonish by their singular appear¬ 
ance. Here we found Nature proceeding geometrically, 
and working quite after a human fashion, as if she had 
employed the plummet line, the compass and the rule. If 
elsewhere she produces grand artistic effects by piling up 
huge masses without order or connection—if elsewhere we 
see truncated cones, imperfect pyramids, with an odd suc¬ 
cession of lines; here, as if wishing to give a lesson in re¬ 
gularity, and preceding the architects of the early ages, 
she has erected a severe order of architecture, which 
neither the splendors of Babylon nor the marvels of 
Greece ever surpassed. 

I had often heard of the Giants’ Causeway in Ireland 
the Grotto of Fingal in one of the Hebrides, but the grand 
spectacle of a real basaltic formation had never yet come 
before my eyes. 

This at Stapi gave us an idea of one in all its wonderful 
beauty and grace. 

The wall of the fjord, like nearly the whole of the penin¬ 
sula, consisted of a series of vertical columns, in height 
about thirty feet. These upright pillars of stone, of the 
nest proportions, supported an archivault of horizontal 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 65 

columns which formed a kind of half-vaulted roof above 
the sea. At certain intervals, and below this natural 
basin, the eye was pleased and surprised l^y the sight of 
oval openings through which the outward waves came 
thundering in volleys of foam. Some banks of basalt, 
torn from their fastenings by the fury of the waves, lay 
scattered on the ground like the ruins of an ancient tem¬ 
ple—ruins eternally young, over which the storms of ages 
swept without producing any perceptible effect! 

This was the last stage of our journey. Hans had 
brought us along with fidelity and intelligence, and I be¬ 
gan to feel somewhat more comfortable when I reflected 
that he was to accompany us still farther on our way. 

When we halted before the house of the Rector, a small 
and incommodious cabin, neither handsome nor more com¬ 
fortable than those of his neighbors, I saw a man in the 
act of shoeing a horse, a hammer in his hand, and a leath¬ 
ern apron tied round his waist. 

“ Be happy,” said the eider-down hunter, using his na¬ 
tional salutation in his own language. 

“ Good-dag —good day! ” replied the former, in excel¬ 
lent Danish. 

“ Kyrkoherde,” cried Hans, turning round and intro¬ 
ducing him to my uncle. 

“ The Rector,” repeated the worthy Professor ; “ it ap¬ 
pears, my dear Harry, that this worthy man is the Rector, 
and is not above doing his own work.” 

During the speaking of these few words the guide in¬ 
timated to the Kyrkoherde what was the true state of the 
case. The good man, ceasing from his occupation, gave a 
kind of halloo, upon which a tall woman, almost a giantess, 
came out of the hut. She was at least six feet high, which 
in that region is something considerable. 

My first impression was one of horror. I thought she 
had come to give us the Icelandic kiss. I had, however, 


66 A JOURNEY 


TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


nothing to fear, for she did not even show much inclina¬ 
tion to receive us into her house. 

The room devoted to strangers appeared to me to be by 
far the worst inthe presbytery; it was narrow, dirty and 
offensive. There was, however, no choice about the matter. 
The Rector had no notion of practising the usual cordial 
and antique hospitality. Par from it. Before the day was 
over, I found we had to deal with a blacksmith, a fisher¬ 
man, a hunter, a carpenter, anything but a clergyman. 
It must be said in his favor that we had caught him on a 
week-day ; probably he appeared to greater advantage on 
the Sunday. 

These poor priests receive from the Danish Government 
a most ridiculously inadequate salary, and collect one 
quarter of the tithe of their parish—not more than sixty 
marks current, or about £3 10s. sterling. Hence the ne¬ 
cessity of working to live. In truth, we soon found that 
our host did not count civility among the cardinal virtues/ 
My uncle soon became aware of the kind of man he had 
to deal with. Instead of a worthy and learned scholar, he 
found a dull ill-mannered peasant. He therefore resolved 
to start on his great expedition as soon as possible. He 
did not care about fatigue, and resolved to spend a few 
days in the mountains. 


The preparations for our departure were made the very 
next day after our arrival at Stapi; Hans now hired three 
celanders to take the place of the horses—which could 
no longer carry our luggage. When, however, these 
worthy islanders had reached the bottom of the crater 
t ey were to go back and leave us to ourselves. This 
point was settled before they would agree to start. 

On tins occasion, my uncle partially confided in Hans, 
e eider-duck hunter, and gave him to understand that it 
was h,s intention to continue his exploration of the volcano 
to the last possible limits. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 67 

Hans listened calmly, and then nodded his head To 
go there, or elsewhere, to bury himself in the bowels of 
the earth, or to travel over its summits, was all the same 
to him! As for me, amused and occupied by the incidents 
of travel, I had begun to forget the inevitable future ; but 
now I was once more destined to realize the actual state of 
affairs. What was to be done? Run away? But if I 
really had intended to leave Professor Hardwigg to his 
fate, it should have been at Hamburg and not at the foot 
of Sneffels. 

One idea above all others, began to trouble me : a very 
terrible idea, and one calculated to shake the nerves of a 
man even less sensitive than myself. 

“ Let us consider the matter,” I said to myself; “ we are 
going to ascend the Sneffels mountain. Well and good. 
We are about to pay a visit to the very bottom of the 
crater. Good, still. Others have done it and did not 
perish from that course. 

“ That, however, is not the whole' matter to be consid¬ 
ered. If a road does really present itself by which to 
descend into the dark and subterraneous bowels of Mother 
Earth, if this thrice unhappy Saknussemm has really told 
the truth, we shall be most certainly lost in the midst of 
the labyrinth of subterraneous galleries of the volcano. 
Now, we have no evidence to prove that Sneffels is really 
extinct. What proof have we that an eruption is not 
shortly about to take place? Because the monster has 
slept soundly since 1229, does it follow that be is never to 
wake?” 

“ If he does wake what is to become of us?” 

These were questions worth thinking about, and upon 
them I reflected long and deeply. I could not lie down 
in search of sleep without dreaming of eruptions. The more 
I thought, the more I objected to be reduced to the state 
of dross and ashes. 


68 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

I could stand it no longer; so I determined at last to 
submit the whole case to my uncle, in the most adroit 
manner possible, and under the form of some totally irre¬ 
concilable hypothesis. 

I sought him. I laid before him my fears, and then 
drew back in order to let him get his passion over at his 
ease. 

“ I have been thinking about the matter,” he said, in 
the quietest tone in the world. 

What did he mean ? Was he at last about to listen to 
the voice of reason ? Did he think of suspending his pro¬ 
jects ? It was almost too much happiness to be true. 

I however made no remark. In fact, I was only too 
anxious not to interrupt him, and allowed him to reflect 
at his leisure. After some moments he spoke out. 

“ I have been thinking about the matter,” he resumed. 
“ Ever since we have been at Stapi, my mind has been al¬ 
most solely occupied with the grave question which has 
been submitted to me by yourself—for nothing would be 
unwiser and more inconsistent than to act with impru¬ 
dence.” 

“ I heartily agree with you, my dear uncle,” was my 
somewhat hopeful rejoinder. 

“ It is now six hundred years since Sneffels has spoken, 
but though now reduced to a state of utter silence, he may 
speak again. New volcanic eruptions are always preceded 
by perfectly well-known phenomena. I have closely ex¬ 
amined the inhabitants of this region; I have carefully 
studied the soil, and I beg to tell you emphatically, my 
dear Harry, there will be no eruption at present.” 

As I listened to his positive affirmations, I was stupefied 
and could say nothing. 

“ 1 see y° u doubt my word,” said my uncle; “ follow 
me.” 

I obeyed mechanically. 



THE ASCENT OF SNEFFELS. 





































































































• • 































































































































* 



































































































































A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 69 

Leaving the presbytery, the Professor took a road 
through an opening in the basaltic rock, which led far 
away from the sea. We were soon in open country, if we 
could give such a name to a place all covered with volca¬ 
nic deposits. The whole land seemed crushed under the 
weight of enormous stones—of trap, of basalt, of granite, 
of lava, and of all other volcanic substances. 

I could see many spouts of steam rising in the air. 
These white vapors, called in the Icelandic language “ rey- 
kir,” come from hot water fountains, and indicate by their 
violence the volcanic activity of the soil. Now the sight 
of these appeared to justify my apprehension. I was, 
therefore, all the more surprised and mortified when my 
uncle thus addressed me. 

“ You see all this smoke, Harry, my boy ? ” 

“ Yes, sir.” 

“ Well, as long as you see them thus, you have nothing 
to fear from the volcano.” 

“ How can that be ? ” 

“ Be careful to remember this,” continued the Professor. 
“ At the approach of an eruption these spouts of vapor 
redouble their activity—to disappear altogether during 
the period of volcanic eruption; for the elastic fluids, no 
longer having the necessary tension, seek refuge in the in¬ 
terior of the crater, instead of escaping through the fissures 
of the earth. If, then, the steam remains in its normal or 
habitual state, if their energy does not increase, and if you 
add to this, the remark, that the wind is not replaced by 
heavy atmospheric pressure and dead calm, you may be 
quite sure that there is no fear of any immediate eruption.” 

“ But--” 

“Enough, my boy. When science has sent forth her 
fiat—it is only to hear and obey.” 

I came back to the house quite downcast and disappoint¬ 
ed. My uncle had completely defeated me with his 


70 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


scientific arguments. Nevertheless, I had still one hope, 
and that was, when once we were at the bottom of the 
crater, that it would be impossible in default of a gallery 
or tunnel, to descend any deeper; and this, despite all the 
learned Saknussemms in the world. 

I passed the whole of the following night with a night¬ 
mare on my chest! and, after unheard-of miseries and 
tortures, found myself in the very depths of the earth, 
from which I was suddenly launched into planetary space, 
under the form of an eruptive rock! 

Next day, the 23d June, Hans calmly awaited us out¬ 
side the presbytery with his two companions loaded with 
provisions, tools, and instruments. Two iron-shod poles, 
two guns, and two large game bags, were reserved for my 
uncle and myself. Hans, who was a man who never for¬ 
got even the minutest precautions, had added to our 
baggage a large skin full of water, as an addition to our 
gourds. This assured us water for eight days. 

It was nine o’clock in the morning when we were quite 
ready. The rector and his huge wife or servant, I never 
knew which, stood at the door to see us off. They ap¬ 
peared to be about to inflict on us the usual final kiss of 
the Icelanders. To our supreme astonishment their adieu 
took the shape of a formidable bill, in which they even 
counted the use of the pastoral house, really and truly 
the most abominable and dirty place I ever was in. The 
worthy couple cheated and robbed us like a Swiss innkeeper, 
and made us feel, by the sum we had to pay, the splendors 
of their hospitality. 

My uncle, however, paid without bargaining. A man 
who had made up his mind to undertake a voyage into 
the Interior of the Earth, is not the man to haggle over a 
few miserable rix-dollars. 

This important matter settled, Hans gave the signal for 
departure, and some few moments later we had left Stapi. 



A JOURNEY t O'HE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 71 


CHAPTER XII. 

THE ASCENT OF MOUNT SNEFFELS. 

j, * E h,, S' e volcano which was the first stage of our 
img experiment, is above five thousand feet high Snef- 
tels is the termination of a long range of volcanic moun¬ 
tains, of a different character to the system of the island 
itself.. One of its peculiarities is its two huge pointed 
summits. From whence we started it was impossible to 
make out the real outlines of the peak against the grey 
field of sky. All we could distinguish was a vast dome 
of white, which fell downwards from the head of the giant. 

The commencement of the great undertaking filled me 
with |awe. Now that we had actually started, I began to 
believe in the reality of the undertaking! 

. Our party formed quite a procession. We walked in 
single file, preceded by Hans, the imperturbable eider- 
duck hunter. He calmly led us by narrow paths where 
two persons could by no possibility walk abreast. Con¬ 
versation was wholly impossible. We had all the more 
opportunity to reflect and admire the awful grandeur of 
the scene around. 

Beyond the extraordinary basaltic wall of the fjord 
of Stapi we found ourselves making our way through 
fibrous turf, over which grew a scanty vegetation of grass, 
the residuum of the ancient vegetation of the swampy pe¬ 
ninsula. The vast mass of this combustible, the field of 
which as yet is utterly unexplored, would suffice to warm 
Iceland for a whole century. This mighty turf pit, mea¬ 
sured from the bottom of certain ravines, is often not less 
than seventy feet deep, and presents to the eye the view 


72 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE F THE EARTH - 

of successive layers of black burned* rocky detritus, 
separated by thin streaks of porous sand™ 3 - 

The grandeur of the spectacle was undoii e( *> 38 wcl1 as 
its arid and deserted air. . 

As a true nephew of the great Professor HaFigg, and 
despite my pre-occupation and doleful fears of kt Mas 
to come, I observed with great interest the vast colfton 
of mineralogical curiosities spread out before me in ti 
vast museum of natural history. Looking back to my 
recent studies, I went over in thought the whole geological 
history of Iceland. 

This extraordinary and curious island must have made 
its appearance from out of the great world of waters at a 
comparatively recent date. Like-the coral islands of tie 
Pacific, it may, for aught we know, he still rising b slo; W 
and imperceptible degrees. . • / ; 

If this really be the case, its origin can be attribied .to 
only one cause—that of the continued action of sulejrjja- 
nean fires. 

This was a happy thought. 

If so, if this were true, away with the theories fjppir 
Humphrey Davy; away with the authority of the a^ch- 
ment of Arne Saknussemm; the wonderful pretenses to 
discovery on the part of my uncle—and to our journal 
' All must end in smoke. 

Charmed with the idea, I began more carefully 1 look 
about me. A serious study of the soil was necesi-ry tC> 
negative or confirm my hypothesis. I took in ever item, 
of what I saw, and I began to comprehend the suc<ssioi}i 
of phenomena which had preceded its formation. 

Iceland, being absolutely without sedimentary fil, i s 
composed exclusively of volcanic tufa; that is to.sajof An 
agglomeration of stones and of rocks of a porous tvtujre. 
Long before the existence of volcanoes, it was coposed, 
of a solid body of massive trap-rock lifted bodi. and 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 73 

slowly out of the sea, by the action of the centrifugal force 
at work in the earth. 

The internal fires, however, had not as yet hurst their 
bounds and flooded the exterior cake of Mother Earth with 
hot and raging lava. 

My readers must excuse this brief and somewhat pedan¬ 
tic geological lecture. But it is necessary to the complete 
understanding of what follows. 

At a later period in the world’s history, a huge and 
mighty fissure must, reasoning by analogy, have been dug 
diagonally from the south-west to the north-east of the 
island, through which by degrees flowed the volcanic crust. 
The great and wondrous phenomenon then went on with¬ 
out violence—the outpouring was enormous, and the seeth¬ 
ing fused matter, ejected from the bowels of the earth, 
spread slowly and peacefully in the form of vast level 
plains, or what are called mamelons or mounds. 

It was at this epoch that the rocks called feldspars, sye¬ 
nites, and porphyries appeared. 

But as a natural consequence of this overflow, the depth 
of the island increased. It can readily be believed what 
■ an enormous quantity of elastic fluids were piled up with¬ 
in its centre, when at last it afforded no other openings, 
after the process of cooling the crust had taken place. 

At length a time came when despite the enormous thick¬ 
ness and weight of the upper crust, the mechanical forces 
of the combustible gases below became so great, that they 
actually upheaved the weighty back and made for them¬ 
selves huge and gigantic shafts. Hence the volcanoes which 
suddenly arose through the upper crust, and next the cra¬ 
ters, which burst forth at the summit of these new crea¬ 
tions. 

It will be seen that the first phenomena in connection 
with the formation of the island were simply eruptive ; to 
these, however, shortly succeeded the volcanic phenomena. 



74 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

Through the newly-formed openings, escaped the mar¬ 
vellous mass of basaltic stones with which the plain we 
were now crossing was covered. We were trampling our 
way over heavy rocks of dark grey color, which, while 
cooling, had been moulded into six-sided prisms. In the 
“ back distance ” we could see a number of flattened cones, 
which formerly were so many fire-vomiting mouths. 

After the basaltic eruption was appeased and set at rest, 
the volcano, the force of which increased with that of the 
extinct craters, gave free passage to the fiery overflow of 
lava, and to the mass of cinders and pumice-stone, now 
scattered over the sides of the mountain, like dishevelled 
hair on the shoulders of a Bacchante: 

Here, in a nutshell, I had the whole history of the 
phenomena from which Iceland arose. All take their rise 
in the fierce action of interior fires, and to believe that the 
central mass did not remain in a state of liquid fire, white 
hot, was simply and purely madness. 

This being satisfactorily proved, (q. e. cl.) what insensate 
folly to pretend to penetrate into the interior of the mighty 
earth! 

This mental lecture delivered to myself while proceed¬ 
ing on a journey, did me good. I was quite re-assured as 
to the fate of our enterprise; and therefore went, like & 
brave soldier mounting a bristling battery, to the assault 
of old Sneffels. 

As we advanced, the road became every moment more 
difficult. The soil was broken and dangerous. The rocks 
broke and gave way under our feet, and we had to be scru¬ 
pulously careful in order to avoid dangerous and constant 
falls. 

Hans advanced as calmly as if he had been walking 
over Salisbury Plain; sometimes he would disappear be¬ 
hind huge blocks of stone, and we momentarily lost sight 
of him. There was a little period of anxiety and then 



. A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 75 

there was a shrill whistle, just to tell us where to look for 
him. 

Occasionally he would take it into his head to stop to 
pick up lumps of rock, and silently pile them up into 
small heaps, in order that we might not lose our way on our 
return. 

He had no idea of the journey we were about to under¬ 
take. 

At all events, the precaution was a good one; though 
how utterly useless and unnecessary—but I must not an¬ 
ticipate. 

Three hours of terrible fatigue, walking incessantly, 
had only brought us to the foot of the great mountain. 
This will give some notion of what we had still to undergo. 

Suddenly, however, Hans cried a halt—that is, he made 
signs to that effect—and a summary kind of breakfast 
was laid out on the lava before us. My uncle, who now 
was simply Professor Hardwigg, was so eager to advance, 
that he bolted his food like a greedy clown. This halt 
for refreshment was also a halt for repose. The Pro¬ 
fessor was therefore compelled to wait the good pleasure 
of his imperturbable guide, who did not give the signal 
for departure for a good hour. 

The three Icelanders, who were as taciturn as their 
comrade, did not say a word; but went on eating and 
drinking very quietly and soberly. 

From this, our first real stage, we began to ascend the 
slopes of the Sneffels volcano. Its magnificent snowy 
night-cap, as we began to call it, by an optical delusion 
very common in mountains, appeared to me to be close at 
hand; and yet how many long weary hours must elapse 
before we reached its summit. What unheard-of fatigue 
must we endure! 

The stones on the mountain side, held together by no 
cement of soil, bound together by no roots or creeping 


76 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


herbs, gave way continually under our feet, and went 
rushing below into the plains, like a series of small ava¬ 
lanches. 

In certain places the sides of this stupendous mountain 
were at an angle so steep that it was impossible to climb 
upwards, and we were compelled to get round these ob¬ 
stacles as best we might. 

Those who understand Alpine climbing will comprehend 
our difficulties. Often we were obliged to help each other 
along by means of our climbing poles. 

I must say this for my uncle, that he stuck as close to 
me as possible. He never lost sight of me, and on many 
occasions his arm supplied me with firm and solid support. 
He was strong, wiry, and apparently insensible to fatigue. 
Another great advantage with him was that he had the 
innate sentiment of equilibrium—for he never slipped 
or failed in his steps. The Icelanders, though heavily 
loaded, climbed with the agility of mountaineers. 

Looking up, every now and then, at the height of the 
great volcano of Sneffels, it appeared to me wholly im¬ 
possible to reach to the summit on that side; at all events, 
if the angle of inclination did not speedily change. 

Fortunately, after an hour of unheard-of fatigues, and 
of gymnastic exercises that would have been trying to an 
acrobat, we came to a vast field of ice, which wholly sur¬ 
rounded the bottom of the cone of the volcano. The 
natives called it the table-cloth, probably from some such 
reason as the dwellers in the Cape of Good Hope call 
their mountain Table Mountain, and their roads Table 
Bay. 

Here, to our mutual surprise, we found an actual flight 
of stone steps, which wonderfully assisted our ascent. 
This singular flight of stairs was, like everything else, 
volcanic. It had been formed by one of those torrents of 
stones cast up by the eruptions, and of which the Ice- 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 77 

landic name is stinl If this singular torrent had not 
been checked in its descent by the peculiar shape of the 
flanks of the mountain, it would have swept into the sea, 
and would have formed new islands. 

Such as it was, it served us admirably. The abrupt 
character of the slopes momentarily increased, but these 
remarkable stone steps, a little less difficult than those of 
the Egyptian pyramids, were the one simple natural 
means by which we were enabled to proceed. 

About seven in the evening of that day, after having 
clambered up two thousand of these rough steps, we found 
ourselves overlooking a kind of spur or projection of the 
mountain—a sort of buttress upon which the cone-like 
crater, properly so called, leaned for support. 

The ocean lay beneath us at a depth of more than three 
thousand two hundred feet—a grand and mighty spectacle. 
We had reached the region of eternal snows. 

The cold was keen, searching and intense. The wind 
blew with extraordinary violence. I was utterly ex¬ 
hausted. 

My worthy uncle, the Professor, saw clearly that my 
legs refused further service, and that, in fact, I was utter¬ 
ly exhausted. Despite his hot and feverish impatience, 
he decided, with a sigh, upon a halt. He called the eider- 
duck hunter to his side. That worthy, however, shook his 
head. 

“ Ofvanfor,” was his sole spoken reply. 

“It appears,” says my uncle with a woe-begone look, 

“ that we must go higher.” 

He then turned to Hans, and asked him to give some 
reason for this decisive response. 

“ Mistour,” replied the guide. 

"Ja mistour —yes, the mistour,” cried one of the Ice-r 
landic guides in a terrified tone. 

It was the first time he had spoken. 


78 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

“What does this mysterious word signify?” I anxiously 
inquired. 

“ Look,” said my uncle. 

I looked down upon the plain below, and I saw a vast, 
a prodigious volume of pulverized pumice-stone, of sand, 
of dust, rising to the heavens in the form of a mighty 
water-spout. It resembled the fearful phenomenon of a 
similar character known to the travellers in the desert of 
the great Sahara. 

The wind was driving it directly towards that side of 
Sneffels on which we were perched. This opaque veil 
standing up between us and the sun projected a deep 
shadow on the flanks of the mountain. If this sand-spout 
broke over us, we must all be infallibly destroyed, crushed 
in its fearful embraces. This extraordinary phenomenon, 
very common when the wind shakes the glaciers, and 
sweeps over the arid plains, is in the Icelandic tongue 
called mistour. 

“Hastigt, Hastigt!” cried our guide. 

Now I certainly knew nothing of Danish, but I tho¬ 
roughly understood that his gestures were meant to 
quicken us. 

The guide turned rapidly in a direction which would take 
us to the back of the crater, all the while ascending slightly. 

We followed rapidly, despite our excessive fatigue. 

A quarter of an hour later Hans paused to enable us to 
look back. The mighty whirlwind of sand was spreading 
up the slope of the mountain to the very spot where we 
had proposed to halt. Huge stones were caught up, cast 
into the air, and thrown about as during an eruption. 
We were happily a little out of the direction of the wind, 
and therefore out of reach of danger. But for the precau¬ 
tion and knowledge of our guide, our dislocated bodies, 
our crushed and broken limbs, would have been cast to 
the wind, like dust from some unknown meteor. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 79 

Hans, however, did not think it prudent to pass the 
night on the bare side of the cone. We therefore con¬ 
tinued our journey in a zigzag direction. The fifteen 
hundred feet which remained to be accomplished took us 
at least five hours. The turnings and windings, the no¬ 
thoroughfares, the marches and marches, turned that insig¬ 
nificant distance into at least three leagues. I never felt 
such misery, fatigue and exhaustion in my life. I was 
ready to faint from hunger and cold. The rarified air at 
the same time painfully acted upon my lungs. 

At last, when I thought myself at my last gasp, about 
eleven at night, it being in that region quite dark, we 
reached the summit of Mount Sneffels ! it was in an awful 
mood of mind, that despite my fatigue, before I descended 
into the crater which was to shelter us for the night, I 
paused to behold the sun rise at midnight on the very'day 
of its lowest declension, and enjoyed the spectacle of its 
ghastly pale rays cast upon the isle which lay sleeping at 
our feet! 

I no longer wondered at people travelling all the way 
from England to Norway, to behold this magical and 
wondrous spectacle. 


80 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XIII. 

THE SHADOW OF SCARTARIS. 

Our supper was eaten with ease and rapidity, after 
which everybody did the best he could for himself within 
the hollow of the crater. The bed was hard, the shelter 
unsatisfactory, the situation painful—lying in the open 
air, five thousand feet above the level of the sea! 

Nevertheless, it has seldom happened to me to sleep so 
well as I did on that particular night. I did not even 
dream. So much for the effects of what my uncle called 
“ wholesome fatigue.” 

Next day, when we awoke under the rays of a bright 
and glorious sun, we were nearly frozen by the keen air. 

I left my granite couch and made one of the party to en¬ 
joy a view of the magnificent spectacle which developed 
itself, panorama-like, at our feet. 

I stood upon the lofty summit of Mount Sneffels’ 
southern peak. Thence I was able to obtain a view of • 
the greater part of the island. The optical delusion, com¬ 
mon to all lofty heights, raised the shores of the island, 
while the central portions appeared depressed. It was by 
no means too great a flight of fancy to believe that a 
giant picture was stretched out before me. I could see 
the deep valleys that crossed each other in every direc¬ 
tion. I could see precipices looking like sides of wells, 
lakes that seemed to be changed into ponds, ponds that 
looked like puddles, and rivers that were transformed into 
petty brooks. To my right were glaciers upon glaciers, 
and multiplied peaks, topped with light clouds of smoke. 

The undulation of these infinite numbers of mountains, 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 81 

whose snowy summits make them look as if covered by 
foam, recalled to my remembrance the surface of a 
storm-beaten ocean. If I looked towards the west, the 
ocean lay before me in all its majestic grandeur, a con¬ 
tinuation as it were, of these fleecy hill-tops. 

Where the earth ended and the sea began it was impose 
sible for the eye to distinguish. 

I soon felt that strange and mysterious sensation which 
is awakened in the mind when looking down from lofty 
hill tops, and now I was able to do so without any feeling 
of nervousness, having fortunately hardened myself to that 
kind of sublime contemplation. 

I wholly forgot who I was, and where I was. I became 
intoxicated with a sense of lofty sublimity, without 
thought of the abysses into which my daring was soon 
about to plunge me. I was presently, however, brought 
back to the realities of life, by the arrival of the Professor 
and Hans, who joined me upon the lofty summit of the 
peak. 

My uncle, turning in a westerly direction, pointed out 
to me a light cloud of vapor, a kind of haze, with a faint 
outline of land rising out of the waters. 

“ Greenland! ” said he. 

“ Greenland ? ” cried I in reply. 

“ Yes,” continued my uncle, who always when explain¬ 
ing anything spoke as if he were in a Professor’s chair; 
" we are not more than thirty-five leagues distant from 
that wonderful land. When the great annual break up 
of the ice takes place, white bears come over to Iceland, 
carried by the floating masses of ice from the north. This, 
however, is a matter of little consequence. We are now 
on the summit of the great, the transcendent Sneffels, and 
here are its two peaks, north and south. Hans will tell 
you the name by which the people of Iceland call that on 
which we stand.” 


82 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


My uncle turned to the imperturbable guide, who 
nodded, and spoke as usual—one word. 

“ Scartaris.” 

My uncle looked at me with a proud and triumphant 
glance. 

“A crater,” he said, “you hear?” 

I did hear, but I was totally unable to make reply. 

The crater of Mount Sneffels represented an inverted 
cone, the gaping orifice apparently half a mile across; the 
depth indefinite feet. Conceive what this hole must have 
been like when full of flame and thunder and lightning. 
The bottom of the funnel-shaped hollow was about five 
hundred feet in circumference, by which it will be seen 
that the slope from the summit to the bottom was very 
gradual, and we were therefore clearly able to get there 
without much fatigue or difficulty. Involuntarily, I com¬ 
pared this crater to an enormous loaded cannon; and the 
comparison completely terrified me. 

To descend into the interior of a cannon,” I thought 
to myself, “when perhaps it is loaded, and will go off at 
the least shock, is the act of a madman.” 

But there was no longer any opportunity for me to hesi¬ 
tate. Hans, with a perfectly calm and indifferent air, took 
his usual post at the head of the adventurous little band. 

I followed without uttering a syllable. 

I felt like the lamb led to the slaughter. 

In order to render the descent less difficult, Hans took 
his way down the interior of the cone in rather a zio-zag 
fashion, making, as the sailors say, long tracks to the east¬ 
ward, followed by equally long ones to the west. It was 
necessary to walk through the midst of eruptive rocks 
some of which, shaken in their balance, went rolling down 
with thundering clamor to the bottom of the abyss. 
These continual falls awoke echoes of singular power and 
effect. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 83 

Many portions of the cone consisted of inferior glaciers.' 
Hans, whenever he met with one of these obstacles ad¬ 
vanced with a great show of precaution, sounding the soil 
with his long iron pole in order to discover fissures and 
layers of deep soft snow. In many doubtful or dangerous 
places, it became necessary for us to be tied together by a 
long rope in order that should any one of us be unfor¬ 
tunate enough to slip, he would be supported by his 
companions. This connecting link was doubtless a pru¬ 
dent precaution, Tut not by any means unattended with 
danger. 

Nevertheless, and despite all the manifold difficulties of 
the descent, along slopes with which our guide was wholly 
unacquainted, we made considerable progress without ac¬ 
cident. One of our great parcels of rope slipped from 
one of the Iceland porters, and rushed by a short cut to 
the bottom of the abyss. 

By mid-day we were at the end of our journey. I looked 
upwards, and saw only the upper orifice of the cone, which 
served as a circular frame to a very small portion of the 
sky—a portion which seemed to me singularly beautiful. 
Should I ever again gaze on that lovely sunlit sky! 

The only exception to this extraordinary landscape, was 
the Peak of Scartaris, which seemed lost in the great void 
of the heavens. 

The bottom of the crater was composed of three sepa¬ 
rate shafts, through which, during periods of eruption, 
when Snefiels was in action, the great central furnace sent 
forth its burning lava and poisonous vapors. Each of 
these chimneys or shafts gaped open-mouthed in our path. 
I kept as far away from them as possible, not even ven¬ 
turing to take the faintest peep downwards. 

As for the Professor, after a rapid examination of their 
disposition and characteristics, he became breathless and 
panting. He ran from one to the other like a delighted 


34 a JOURNEY 


TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

school-boy, gesticulating wildly, and uttering incompre' 
hensible and disjointed phrases in all sorts of languages. 

Hans, the guide, and his humbler companions seated 
themselves on some piles of lava and looked silently on. 
They clearly took my uncle for a lunatic; and—waited the 
result. 

Suddenly the Professor uttered a wild, unearthly cry. 
At first I imagined he had lost his footing, and was falling 
headlong into one of the yawning gulfs. Nothing of the 
kind. . I saw him, his arms spread out to their widest ex¬ 
tent, his legs stretched apart, standing upright before an 
enormous pedestal, high enough and black enough to bear 
a gigantic statue of Pluto. His attitude and mien were 
that of a man utterly stupefied. But his stupefaction was 
speedily changed to the wildest joy. 

“ Hari T ! Hari r ! come here!” he cried; “ make haste-^ 
wonderful—wonderful!” 

Unable to understand what he meant, I turned to obey 
his commands. Neither Hans, nor the other Icelanders 
moved a step. 

“ ! ” said the Professor, in something of the manner 

ot the -trench general, pointing out the pyramids to his 
army. 

And fully partaking his stupefaction, if not his joy, I 
read on the eastern side of the huge block'of stone, the 
same characters, half eaten away by the corrosive action 
Ot time, the name, to me a thousand times accursed— 

'ilk* hmhhhri 

“ Arne Saknussemm!” cried my uncle, “ now, unbeliever, 
do you begin to have faith ?” 

It was totally impossible for me to answer a single word. 

I went back to my pile of lava, in a state of silent awe. 

I he evidence was unanswerable, overwhelming ! 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 85 

In a few moments, however, my thoughts were far away, 
back in my German home, with Gretchen and the old 
cook. What would I have given for one of my cousin’s 
smiles, for one of the ancient domestic’s omelettes, and for 
my own feather bed! 

How long I remained in this state I know not. All I 
can say is, that when at last I raised my head from be¬ 
tween my hands, there remained at the bottom of the cra¬ 
ter only myself, my uncle and Hans. The Icelandic por¬ 
ters had been dismissed and were now descending the ex¬ 
terior slopes of Mount Sneffels, on their way to Stapi. 
How heartily did I wish myself with them! 

Hans slept tranquilly at the foot of a rock in a kind of 
rill of lava, where he had made himself a rough and ready 
bed. My uncle was walking about the bottom of the cra¬ 
ter like a wild beast in a cage. I had no desire, neither 
had I the strength, to move from my recumbent position. 
Taking example by the guide, I gave way to a kind of 
painful somnolency, during which I seemed both to hear 
and feel continued heavings and shudderings in the moun¬ 
tain. 

In this way we passed our first night in the interior of 
a crater. 

Next morning, a grey, cloudy, heavy sky hung like a 
funeral-pall over the summit of the volcanic cone. I did 
not notice it so much from the obscurity that reigned 
around us, as from the rage with which my uncle was 
devoured. 

I fully understood- the reason, and again a glimpse of 
hope made my heart leap with joy. I will briefly explain 
the cause. 

Of the three openings which yawned beneath our steps, 
only one could have been followed by the adventurous 
Saknussemm. According to the words of the learned Ice¬ 
lander, it was only to be known by that one particular 


86 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


mentioned in the cryptograph, that the shadow of Scar- 
taris fell upon it, just touching its mouth in the last days 
of the month of June. 

W e were, in fact, to consider the pointed peak as the 
stylus of an immense sun-dial, the shadow of which pointed 
on one given day, like the inexorable finger of fate, to the 
yawning chasm which led into the interior of the earth. 

Now, as often happens in these regions, should the sun 
fail to burst through the clouds, no shadow. Conse¬ 
quently, no chance of discovering the right aperture. 
We had already reached the 25th June. If the kindly 
heavens would only remain densely clouded for six more 
days, we should have to put off our voyage of discovery 
for another year, when certainly there would be one 
person fewer in the party. I already had sufficient of the 
mad and monstrous enterprise. 

It would be utterly impossible to depict the impotent 
rage of Professor Hardwigg. The day passed away, and 
not the faintest outline of a shadow could be seen at the 
bottom of the crater. Hans the guide never moved from 
his place. He must have been curious to know what we 
were about, if indeed he could believe we were about any¬ 
thing. As for my uncle, he never addressed a word to 
me. He was nursing his wrath to keep it warm! His 
eyes fixed on the black and foggy atmosphere, his com¬ 
plexion hideous with suppressed passion. Never had his 
eyes appeared so fierce, his nose so aquiline, his mouth so 
hard and firm. 

On the 26th no change for the better. A mixture of 
rain and snow fell during the whole day. Hans very 
quietly built himself a hut of lava into which he retired 
like Diogenes into his tub. I took a malicious delight in 
watching the thousand little cascades that flowed down the 
side of the cone, carrying with them at times a stream of 
stones into the “vasty deep ” below. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OP THE EARTH. 87 

My uncle was almost frantic: to be sure it was enough 
to make even a patient man angry. He had reached to a 
certain extent the goal of his desires, and yet he was likely 
to be wrecked in port. 

But if the heavens and the elements are capable of 
causing us much pain and sorrow, there are two sides to a 
medal. And there was reserved for Professor Hardwigg 
a biilliant and sudden surprise which was to compensate 
him for all his sufferings. 

Next day the sky was still overcast, but on Sunday, the 
26 th, the last day but one of the month, with a sudden 
change of wind and a new moon there came a change of 
weather. The sun poured its beaming rays to the very 
bottom of the crater. 

Each hillock, every rock, every stone, every ’asperity of 
the soil had its share of the luminous effulgence, and its 
shadow fell heavily on the soil. Among others, to his in¬ 
sane delight, the shadow of Scartaris was marked and 
clear, and moved slowly with the radiant star of day. 

My uncle moved with it in a state of mental ecstacy. 

At twelve o’clock exactly, when the sun had attained its 
highest altitude for the day, the shadow fell upon the edge 
of the central pit! 

“ Here, it is,” gasped the Professor in an agony of joy, 
“here it is—we have found it. Forward, my friends, into 
the Interior of the Earth.” 

I looked curiously at Hans to see what reply he would 
make to this terrific announcement. 

“Foriit,” said the guide tranquilly. 

u Eorward it is,” answered my uncle, who was now in 
the seventh heaven of delight. 

When we were quite ready, our watches indicated thir¬ 
teen minutes past one! 


88 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XIV. 

THE REAL JOURNEY COMMENCES. 

Our real journey had now commenced. 

Hitherto our courage and determination had overcome 
all difficulties. We were fatigued at times; and that was 
all. Now, unknown and fearful dangers we were about to 
encounter. 

I had not as yet ventured to take a glimpse down the 
horrible abyss into which in a few minutes more I was 
about to plunge. The fatal moment had, however, at last 
arrived. I had still the option of refusing or accepting 
a share in «this foolish and audacious enterprise. But I 
was ashamed to show more fear than the eider-duck 
hunter. Hans seemed to accept the difficulties of the 
journey so tranquilly, with such calm indifference, with 
such perfect recklessness of all danger, that I actually 
blushed to appear less of a man than he! 

Had I been alone with my uncle, I should certainly 
have sat down and argued the point fully; but in the 
presence of the guide I held my tongue. I gave one 
moment to the thought of my charming cousin, and then 
I advanced to the mouth of the central shaft. 

It measured about a hundred feet in diameter, which 
made about three hundred in circumference. I'leaned 
over a rock which stood on its edge, and looked down. 
My hair stood on end, my teeth chattered, my limbs 
trembled, I seemed utterly to lose my bentre of gravity, 
while my head was in a sort of whirl, like that of a 
drunken man. There is nothing more powerful than this 
attraction towards an abyss. I was about to fall head¬ 
long into the gaping well, when I was drawn back by a 
firm and powerful hand. It was that of Hans. I had 



THE DESCENT OF THE CRATEB. 







































































































































































































































































A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 89 

not taken lessons enough at the Frelser’s-kirk of Copenha¬ 
gen in the art of looking down from lofty eminences with¬ 
out blinking ! 

However, few as the minutes were during which I gazed 
down this tremendous and even wondrous shaft, I had a 
sufficient glimpse of it to give me some idea of its physical 
conformation. Its sides, which were almost as perpendicu¬ 
lar as those of a well, presented numerous projections 
which doubtless would assist our descent. 

It was a sort of wild and savage staircase, without 
bannister or fence. A rope fastened above, near the sur¬ 
face, would certainly support our weight and enable us to 
reach the bottom, but how, when we had arrived at its ut¬ 
most depth, were we to loosen it above? This was, I 
thought, a question of some importance. 

My uncle, however, was one of those men who are near¬ 
ly always prepared with expedients. He hit upon a very 
simple method of obviating this difficulty. He unrolled 
a cord about as thick as my thumb, and at least four 
hundred feet in length. He allowed about half of it to go 
down the pit and catch in a hitch over a great block of 
lava which stood on the edge of the precipice. This done, 
he threw the second half after the first. 

Each of us could now descend by catching the two cords 
in one hand. When about two hundred feet below, all 
the explorer had to do was to let go one end and pull 
away at the other, when the cord would come falling at 
his feet. In order to go down farther, all that was neces¬ 
sary was to continue the same operation. 

This was a very excellent proposition, and no doubt, a 
correct one. Going down appeared to me easy enough, it 
was the coming up again that now occupied my thoughts. 

“ Now,” said my uncle, as soon as he had completed 
this important preparation, “ let us see about the baggage. 
It must be divided into three separate parcels, and each 



90 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


of ua must carry cue on his back. I allude to the more 
important and fragile articles.” 

. worth y and ingenious uncle did not appear to con¬ 
sider that we came under that denomination. 

“Hans,” he continued, “you will take charge of the 
tools and some of the provisions; you, Harry, must take 
possession of another third of the provisions and of the 
arms. I will load myself with the rest of the eatables, 
and with the more delicate instruments.” 

But,” I exclaimed, “ our clothes, this mass of cord 
and ladders—who will undertake to carry them down ? ” 

“ Tiie y will go down of themselves.” 

“ And how so ? ” I asked. 

“ You shall see.” 

My uncle was not fond of half measures, nor did he 
like anything in the way of hesitation. Giving his orders 
to Hans he had the whole of the non-fragile articles made 
up into one bundle; and the packet, firmly and solidly 
lastened, was simply pitched over the edge of the gulf. 

I heard the moaning of the suddenly displaced air, and 
the noise of falling stones. My uncle leaning over the 
abyss followed the descent of his luggage with a perfectly 
self-satisfied air, and did not rise until it had completely 
disappeared from sight. ^ ^ 

“ N°w then,” he cried, “ it is our turn.” 

I put it in good faith to any man of common sense-was 
it Possible to hear this energetic cry without a shudder? 

The Professor fastened his case of instruments on his 
back. Hans took charge of the tools, I of the arms The 
descent then commenced in the following order: Hans 
went first, my uncle followed, and I went last. Our pro- 
gra« was made in profound silence—a silence only trou- 
ed by the fall of pieces of rock, which breaking from 
the jagged sides, fell with a roar into the depths below 
I allowed myself to slide, so to speak, holding franti- 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 91 

cally on the double cord with one hand and with the other 
keeping myself off the rocks by the assistance of my iron- 
shod pole. One idea was all the time impressed upon my 
brain. I feared that the upper support would fail me. 
The cord appeared to me far too fragile to bear the weight 
of three such persons as we were, with our luggage. I made 
as little use of it as possible, trusting to my own agility 
and doing miracles in the way of feats of dexterity and 
strength upon the projecting shelves and spurs of lava 
which my feet seemed to clutch as strongly as my hands. 

The guide went first I have said, and when one of the 
slippery and frail supports broke from under his feet he 
had recourse to his usual monosyllabic way of speaking. 

“ Gifakt-” 

“ Attention—look out,” repeated my uncle. 

In about half an hour we reached a kind of small ter¬ 
race formed by a fragment of rock projecting some dis¬ 
tance from the sides of the shaft. 

Hans now began to haul upon the cord on one side only, 
the other going as quietly upward as the other came down. 
It fell at last, bringing with it a shower of small stones, 
lava and dust, a disagreeable kind of rain or hail. 

While we were seated on this extraordinary bench I 
ventured once more to look downwards. With a sigh I 
discovered that the bottom was still wholly invisible. Were 
we, then, going direct to the interior of the earth ? 

The performance with the cord recommenced, and a 
quarter of an hour later we had reached to the depth of 
another two hundred feet. 

I have very strong doubts if the most determined geolo¬ 
gist would, during that descent have studied the nature of 
the different layers of earth around him. I did not 
trouble my head much about the matter ; whether we were 
among the combustible carbon, Silurians, or primitive soil, 

I neither knew nor cared to know. 




92 A JOURNEY TO THE 


CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


Not so the inveterate Professor. Pie must have taken 
notes all the way down, for, at one of our halts, he began 
a brief lecture. 

“ The farther we advance,” said he, “the greater is 
my confidence in the result. The disposition of these vol- 
cana strata absolutely confirms the theories of Sir Hum¬ 
phrey Davy. We are still within the region of the pri¬ 
mordial soil, the soil in which took place the chemical 
operation of metals becoming inflamed by coming in con¬ 
tact with the air and water. I at once regret the old and 
now for ever exploded theory of a central fire. At all. 
events, we shall soon know the truth.” 

Such was the everlasting conclusion to which he came. 
I, however, was very far from being in humor to discuss 
the matter. I had something else to think of. My si¬ 
lence was taken for consent; and still we continued to go 
down. 

At the expiration of three hours, we were, to all appear¬ 
ance, as far off as ever from the bottom of the well. When 
I looked upwards, however, I could see that the upper 
orifice was every minute decreasing in size. The sides of 
the shaft were getting closer and closer together, we were 
approaching the regions of eternal night! 

And still we continued to descend ! 

At length, I noticed that when pieces of stone were de¬ 
tached from the sides of this stupendous precipice, they 
were swallowed up with less noise than before. The final 
sound was sooner heard. We were approaching the bot¬ 
tom of the abyss ! 

As I had been very careful to keep account of all the 
changes of cord which took place, I was able to tell exact¬ 
ly what was the depth we had reached, as well as the time 
it had taken. 

We had shifted the rope twenty-eight times, each opera¬ 
tion taking a quarter of an hour, which in all made seven 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 92 

hours. To this had to be added twenty-eighty pauses; in 
all ten hours and a-half. We started at one, it was now, 
therefore, about eleven o’clock at night. 

It does not require great knowledge of arithmetic to 
know that twenty-eight times two hundred feet makes five 
thousand six hundred feet in all (more than an English 
mile.) 

While I was making this mental calculation a voice 
broke the silence. It was the voice of Hans. 

“ Halt! ” he cried. 

I checked myself very suddenly, just at the moment 
when I was about to kick my uncle on the head. 

“We have reached the end of our journey,” said the 
worthy Professor in a satisfied tone. 

“What, the interior of the earth?” said I, slipping 
down to his side. 

“ No, you stupid fellow! but we have reached the bot¬ 
tom of the well.” 

“ And I suppose there is no farther progress to be 
made ? ” I hopefully exclaimed. 

, “ Oh, yes, I can dimly see a sort of tunnel, which turns 
off obliquely to the right. At all events, we must see 
about that to-morrow. Let us sup now, and seek slumber 
as best we may.” 

I thought it time, but made no observations on that 
point. I was fairly launched on a desperate course, and 
all I had to do was to go forward hopefully and trusting- 

!y- 

It was not even now quite dark, the light filtering down 
in a most extraordinary manner. 

We opened the provision bag, ate a frugal supper, and 
each did his best to find a bed amid the pile of stones, dirt, 
and lava which had accumulated for ages at the bottom 
of the shaft. 

I happened to grope out the pile of ropes, ladders, and 




94 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

clothes which we had thrown down; and upon them I 
stretched myself: After such a day’s labor, my rouo-h bed. 
seemed as soft as down ! 

For a while I lay in a sort of pleasant trance. 

Presently, after lying quietly for some minutes, I opened 
my eyes and looked upwards. As I did so I made out a 
brilliant little dot, at the extremity of this long, gigantic 
telescope. 

It was a star without scintillating rays. According to 
my calculation, must be /9 in the constellation of the Little 
Bear. 

After this little bit of astronomical recreation, I dropped 
into a sound sleep. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 95 


CHAPTER XV. 

WE CONTINUE OUR DESCENT. 

At eight o’clock the next morning, a faint kind of dawn 
of day awoke us. The thousand and one prisms of the 
lava, collected the light as it passed and brought it to us 
like a shower of sparks. 

We were able with ease to see objects around us. 

“Well, Harry, my boy,” cried the delighted Professor, 
rubbing his hands together, “ what say you now ? Did you 
ever pass a more tranquil night in our house in the K6nig 
Strasse? No deafening sounds of cart-wheels, no cries 
of hawkers, no bad language from boatmen or watermen!” 

“ Well, uncle, we are quiet at the bottom of this well— 
but to me there is something terrible in this calm.” 

“ Why,” said the Professor, hotly, “ one would say you 
were already beginning to be afraid. How will you get 
on presently? Do you know, that as yet, we have not 
penetrated one inch into the bowels of the earth.” 

“What can you mean, sir?” was my bewildered and 
astonished reply. 

“I mean to say that we have only just reached the soil 
of the island itself. This long vertical tube, which ends 
at the bottom of the crater of Sneffels, ceases here just 
about on a level with the sea.” 

“ Are you sure, sir ?” 

“ Quite sure. Consult the barometer.” 

It was quite true that the mercury, after rising gradu¬ 
ally in the instrument, as long as our descent was taking 
place, had stopped precisely at twenty-nine degrees. 

“You perceive,” said the Professor, “we have as yet 



96 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


only to endure the pressure of air. I am curious to re¬ 
place the barometer by the manometer.” 

The barometer, in fact, was about to become useless— 
as soon as the weight of the air was greater than what 
was calculated as above the level of the ocean. 

“But,” said I, “is it not very much to be feared that 
this ever-increasing pressure may not in the end turn out 
very painful and inconvenient ?” 

‘No,’ said he. “We shall descend very slowly, and 
our lungs will be gradually accustomed to breathe com¬ 
pressed air. It is well known that aeronauts have gone 
so high as to be nearly without air at all—why, then 
should we not accustom ourselves to breathe when we have’ 
say a little too much of it ? For myself, I am certain I 
shall prefer it. Let us not lose a moment. Where is the 
packet which preceded us in our descent?” 

I smilingly pointed it out to my uncle. Hans had not 
seen it, and believed it caught somewhere above us: 
huppe ” as he phrased it. 

“Now” said my uncle, “let us breakfast, and break 
last like people who have a long day’s work before them ” 
Biscuit and dried meat, washed down by some mouth- 
Inls of water flavored with Schiedam, was the material of 
our luxurious meal. 

As soon as it was finished, my uncle took from his 
pocket a note-book destined to be filled by memoranda of 
oui trave s. He had already placed his instruments in 
order, and this is what he wrote :— 

Monday, July 1st. 

Chronometer, 8h. 17m. morning. 

Barometer, 29 degrees. 

Thermometer, 43° Fahr. 

Direction, E. S. E. 

This last observation referred to the obscure gallery 
and was indicated to us by the compass. 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 97 

“ Now Harry,” cried the Professor, in an enthusiastic 
tone of voice, “ we are truly about to take our first step 
into the Interior of the Earth; never before visited by 
man since the first creation of the world. You may con¬ 
sider, therefore, that at this precise moment our travels 
really commence.” 

As my uncle made this remark, he took in one hand the 
Ruhmkorf coil apparatus, which hung round his neck, and 
with the other he put the electric current into communi¬ 
cation with the worm of the lantern. And a bright light 
at once illumined that dark and gloomy tunnel! 

The effect was magical! 

Hans, who carried the second apparatus, had it also put 
into operation. This ingenious application of electricity 
to practical purposes enabled us to move along by the 
light of an artificial day, amid even the flow of the most 
inflammable and combustible gases. 

“Forward!” cried my uncle. Each took up his 
burden. Hans went first, my uncle followed, and I going 
third, we entered the sombre gallery ! 

Just as we were about to engulf ourselves in this dis¬ 
mal passage, I lifted up my head, and through the tube¬ 
like shaft saw that Iceland sky I was never to see again ! 

Was it the last I should ever see of any sky ? 

The stream of lava flowiug from the bowels of the 
earth in 1229, had forced itself a passage through the 
tunnel. It lined the whole of the inside with its thick 
and brilliant coating. The electric light added very 
greatly to the brillancy of the effect. 

The great difficulty of our journey now began. How 
were we to prevent ourselves from slipping down the 
steeply-inclined plane ? Happily some cracks, abrasures 
of the soil, and other irregularities, served the place of 
steps ; and we descended slowly; allowing our heavy lug¬ 
gage to slip on before, at the end of a long cord. 





98 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

But that which served as steps under our feet, became 
in other places stalactites. The lava, very porous in 
certain places, took the form of little round blisters. 
Crystals of opaque quartz, adorned with limpid drops of 
natural glass suspended to the roof like lustres, seemed to 
. take fire as we passed beneath them. One would have 
fancied that the genii of romance were illuminating their 
underground palaces to receive the sons of men. 

“ Magnificent, glorious !” I cried in a moment of in¬ 
voluntary enthusiasm, “ what a spectacle, uncle! Do you 
not admire these variegated shades of lava, which run 
through a whole series of colors, from reddish brown to 
pale yellow by the most insensible degrees? And -these 
• cr 7 s tals, they appear like luminous globes.” 

“You are beginning to see the charms of travel, Master 
Harry,” cried my uncle. “ Wait a bit, until we advance 
farther. What we have as yet discovered is nothing— 
onwards, my boy, onwards!” 

It would have been a far more correct and appropriate 
expression, had he said, “ let us slide,” for we were going 
down an inclined plane with perfect ease. The compass 
indicated that we were moving in a south-easterly direc¬ 
tion. The flow of lava had never turned to the right or 
the left. It had the inflexibility of a straight line. 

Nevertheless, to my surprise, we found no perceptible 
increase in heat. This proved the theories of Humphrey 
Bavy to be founded on truth, and more than once I found 
myself examining the thermometer in silent astonishment. 

Two hours after my departure it only marked 54 degrees 
Fahrenheit. I had every reason to believe from this^that 
our descent was far more horizontal than, vertical. As for 
discovering the exact depth to which we had attained, 
nothing could be easier. The Professor, as he advanced 
measured the angles of deviation and inclination; but he 
kept the result of his observations to himself. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 99 

About eight o’clock in the evening, my uncle gave the 
signal for halting. Hans seated himself on the ground. 
The lamps were hung to fissures in the lava rock. We 
were now in a large cavern where air was not wanting. 
On the contrary, it abounded. What could be the cause 
of this—to what atmospheric agitation could be ascribed 
this draught ? But this was a question which I did not 
care to discuss just then. Fatigue and hunger made me 
incapable of reasoning. An unceasing march of seven 
hours had not been kept up without great exhaustion. I 
was really and truly worn out; and delighted enough I 
was to hear the word Halt. 

Hgns laid out some provisions on a lump of f lava, and 
we each supped with keen relish. One thing, however 
caused us great uneasiness—our water reserve was already 
half exhausted. My uncle had full confidence in finding 
subterranean resources, but hitherto we had completely 
failed in so doing. I could not help calling my uncle’s 
attention to the circumstance. 

“ And you are surprised at this total absence of springs?” 
he said. 

“Doubtless—I am very uneasy on the point. We have 
certainly not enough water to last us five days.” 

“Be quite easy on that matter,” continued my uncle* 

“ I answer for it we shall find plenty of water—in fact, 
far more than we shall want.” 

“ But when ?” 

“ When we once get through this crust of lava. How 
can you expect springs to force their way through these 
solid stone walls ?” 

“ But what is there to prove that this concrete mass of 
lava does not extend to the centre of the earth ? I don’t 
think we have as yet done much in a vertical way.” 

“ What puts that into your head, my boy ?” asked my 
uncle, mildly. 



100 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


Well, it appears to me that if we had descended very 
far below the level of the sea—we should find it ratther 
hotter than we have.” 


“According to your system,” said my uncle; “ but What 
does the thermometer say ?” 

“ Scarcely 15 degrees by Reaumur, which is only an in¬ 
crease of 9 since our departure.” 

“ WelI > aud wllat conclusion does that bring you t<> F’ 
inquired the Professor. 

“The deduction I draw from this is very simple. Ac¬ 
cording to the most exact observations, the. augmentatim 
of the temperature of the interior of the earth is 1 degrie 
for every hundred feet. But certain local causes nny 
considerably modify this figure. Thus at Yakoust in Si¬ 
beria, it has been remarked that the heat increases a 
degree every thirty-six feet. The difference evidently de¬ 
pends on the conductibility of certain rocks. In the 
neighborhood of an extinct volcano, it has been remarked 
that the elevation of temperature was only 1 degree on 
every five-and-twenty feet. Let us, then, go upon this 
calculation—which is the most favorable—and calculated 
“ Calculate away, my boy.” 

“Nothing easier,” said I, pulling out my note-book and 
pencil. Nine times one hundred and twenty-five feet 
make a depth of eleven hundred and twenty-five feet.” 

cally^ ChlmedeS C ° Uld n0t haVe Spoke “ more geometri- 


“ Well ? ” 

“ Well, according to my observations, we are at least ! 
ten thousand feet below the level of the sea ” 

“ Can it be possible ? ” 

in figures 6 ” CalcUlation is correct > or there is no truth 


The calculations of the Professor were perfectly correct 
We were already six thousand feet deeper down in the 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 101 

bowels of the earth than any one had ever been before. 
The lowest known depth to which man had hitherto pene¬ 
trated was in the mines of Kitz-Bahl, on the Tyrol, and 
those of Wuttemburg in Bohemia. 

The temperature, which should have been eighty-one 
was in this place only fifteen. This was a matter fa 
serious consideration. 



102 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE 


OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XVI. 

THE EASTERN TUNNEL. 

. The next da y was Tuesday, the 2d of July—and at 
six o clock in the morning we resumed our journey. 

We still continued to follow the gallery of lava, a per¬ 
fect natural pathway, as easy of descent as some of those 
inclined planes which, in very old German houses, serve 
the purpose of staircases. This went on until seventeen 
minutes past twelve, the precise instant at which we re¬ 
joined Hans, who having been somewhat in advance, had 
suddenly stopped. 

At last,” cried my uncle, “ we have reached the end 
of the shaft.” 

I looked wonderingly about me. We were in the centre 
of four cross paths—sombre and narrow tunnels. The 
question now arose as to which it was wise to take; and 
this of itself was no small difficulty. 

My uncle, who did not wish to appear to have any hesi¬ 
tation about the matter before myself or the guide, at once 
made up his mind. He pointed quietly to the eastern tun¬ 
nel ; and, without delay, we entered within its gloomy re¬ 
cesses. 

Besides, had he entertained any feeling of hesitation it 
might have been prolonged indefinitely, for there was no 
indication by which to determine on a choice. It was ab¬ 
solutely necessary to trust to chance and good fortune! 

The descent of this obscure and narrow gallery was 
very gradual and winding. Sometimes we gazed through 
a succession of arches, its course very like the aisles of a 
Gothic cathedral. The great artistic sculptors and builders 




A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 103 

of the middle ages might have here completed their stu¬ 
dies with advantage. Many most beautiful and suggestive 
ideas of architectural beauty would have been discovered 
by them. After passing through this phase of the caver¬ 
nous way, we suddenly came, about a mile farther on, upon 
a square system of arch, adopted by the early Romans, 
projecting from the solid rock, and keeping up the weight 
of the roof. 

Suddenly we would come upon a series of low subter¬ 
ranean tunnels which looked like beaver holes, or the work 
of foxes. Through whose narrow and winding ways we 
had literally to crawl! 

The heat still remained at quite a supportable degree. 
With an involuntary shudder, I reflected on what the 
heat must have beeft when the volcano of Sneffels was 
pouring its smoke, flames, and streams of boiling lava— 
all of which must have come up by the road we were now 
following. I could imagine the torrents of hot seething 
stone darting on, bubbling up with accompaniments of 
smoke, steam, and sulphurous stench ! 

“ Only to think of the consequences,” I mused, “ if the 
old volcano were once more to set to work.” 

I did not communicate these rather unpleasant reflec¬ 
tions to my uncle. He not only would not have under¬ 
stood them, but would have been intensely disgusted. 
His only idea was to go ahead. He walked, he slid, he 
clambered over piles of fragments, he rolled down heaps 
of broken lava, with an earnestness and conviction it was 
impossible not to admire. 

At six o’clock in the evening, after a very wearisome 
journey, but one not so fatiguing as before, we had made 
six miles towards the southward, but had not gone more 
than a mile downwards. 

My uncle, as usual, gave the signal to halt. We ate 
our meal in thoughtful silence, and then retired to sleep. 




104 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

Our arrangements for the night were very primitive 
and simple A travelling rug, in which each rolled him- 
was all our bedding. We had no necessity to fear 
cold or any unpleasant visit. Travellers who bury them¬ 
selves in the wilds and depths of the African desert who 
eek profit and pleasure in the forests of the New World 
are compelled to take it in turn to watch during the 

solitude and* ' ^V“ regi ° U ° f the earth absolute 
ohtude and complete security, reigned supreme. 

wul 8 to fear either from 

foraclion “rif" T-‘ reP ° Se ’ ^ aW ° ke fresh and ready 
action. There being nothing to detain us, we started 

on our journey. We continued to burrow through the 

JriTwtr f ~ n ~ - -£ - 

g what soil we were making way. The tunnel 
moreover, instead of going down into the bowels of the 
earth, became absolutely horizontal. 

aete-l )k!\ th, J Ught ’ after some examination, that we were 

thTstete o?I UPTO f' Abontten °’ d °<* m the day 
i lngs becam e so clear, that finding the 

2r!nJw gUingI ^ ° bliged t0 slacken my pace 
and finally to come to a halt. ^ * 

r said tbe Professor quickly, “ what isthe matter’” 

reply ^ 18>I ^ tired,” was my earnest 

way,and’byTisyaroad e ?” <tlred a thr6e b ° Urs ’ 

:Sr 0Dgl1 ’ l dare Say ’ but ver ? fetiguing.” 

But how can that be, when all we have to do is 
downwards.” do ls 8° 

“I beg your pardon, sir. For some time n. .. , 

that we are going upwards.” . V6 notlce(J 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 105 

“ There can be no doubt about it. For the last half 
hour the slopes have been upward—and if we go on in 
this way much longer we shall find ourselves back in Ice¬ 
land” 

My uncle shook his head with the air of a man who 
does not want to be convinced. I tried to continue the 
conversation. He would not answer me, but once more 
gave the signal for departure. His silence I thought was 
only caused by concentrated ill-temper. 

However this might be, I once more took . up my load, 
and boldly and resolutely followed Hans, who was now in 
advance of my uncle. I did not like to be beaten or even 
distanced. I was naturally anxious not to lose sight of 
my companions. The very idea of being left behind, lost 
in that terrible labyrinth, made me shiver as with the 
ague. 

Besides, if the ascending path was more arduous and 
painful to clamber, I had one source of secret consolation 
and delight. It was to all appearance taking us back to 
the surface of the earth. That of itself was hopeful. 
Every step I took confirmed me in my belief, and I began 
already to build castles in the air in relation to my mar¬ 
riage with my pretty little cousin. 

About twelve o’clock there was a great and sudden 
change in the aspect of the rocky sides of the gallery. I 
first noticed it from the diminution of the rays of light 
which cast back the reflection of the lamp. From being 
coated with shining and resplendent lava, it became living 
rock. The sides were sloping walls, which sometimes be¬ 
came quite vertical. 

We were now in what the geological professors call a 
state of transition, in the period of Silurian stones, so 
called because this specimen of early formation is very 
common in England in the counties formerly inhabited by 
the Celtic nation known as Silures. 


100 A 


JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


“I can see, clearly now,” I cried; “the sediment from 
the waters which once covered the whole earth, formed 
during the second period of its existence, these schists and 
these calcareous rocks. We are turning our backs 
on the granitic rocks, and are like people from Hamburg 
who would go to Liibeck by way of Hanover.” 

I might just as well have kept my observations to my¬ 
self. My geological enthusiasm got the better, however 
of my cooler judgment, and Professor Hardwigg heard 
my observations. 

What is the matter now ?” he said, in a tone of great 
gravity. 6 

“ Well,” cried I, “do you not see these different layere 

s 0 trata1 C ” re0US *** ** ** indicatio * of slate 

“Well; what then?” 

“We have arrived at that period of the world’s exist¬ 
ence when the first plants and the first animals made their 
appearance.” 

“ You think so ? ” 

Yes, look; examine and judge for yourself.” 

I induced the Professor with some difficulty to cast the 
light of his lamp on the sides of the long winding gallery 
I expected some exclamation to burst from his lin s 

was very much mistaken. The worthy Professor never 
spoke a word. 

It was impossible to say whether he understood me or 
ot. Perhaps it was possible that in his pride—my uncle 
and a learned p rofessor-he did not like to own that he 
was wrong m having chosen the eastern tunnel, or was he 
etermined at any price to go to the end of it ? It was 

ro U ad e b e v w e h nt h We ^ l6ft ^ regi ° n ° f hva ’ aad * a ‘ £ 
road by which we were going could not take us back to 

the great crater of Mount Sneffels. 

As we went along I could not help ruminating on the 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 107 

whole question, and asked myself if I did not lay too great 
a stress on these sudden and peculiar modifications of the 
earth’s crust. 

After all, I was very likely to be mistaken—and it was 
within the range of probability and possibility, that we 
were not making our way through the strata of rocks 
which I believed I recognized piled on the lower layer of 
granitic formation. 

“ At all events, if I am right,” I thought to myself, “ I 
must certainly find some remains of primitive plants, and 
it will be absolutely necessary to give way to such indu¬ 
bitable evidence. Let us have a good search.” 

I accordingly lost no opportunity of searching, and had 
not gone more than about a hundred yards, when the evi¬ 
dence I sought for cropped up in the most incontestable 
manner before my eyes. It was quite natural that I 
should expect to find these signs, for during the Silurian 
period the seas contained no fewer than fifteen hundred 
different animal and vegetable species. My feet so long 
accustomed to the hard and arid lava soil, suddenly found 
themselves treading on a kind of soft dust, the remains 
of plants and shells. 

Upon the walls themselves I could clearly make out the 
outline, as plain as a sun picture, of the fucus and the 
lycopodes. The worthy and excellent Professor Hardwigg 
could not of course make any mistake about the matter; 
but I believe he deliberately closed his eyes, and continued 
on his way with a firm and unalterable step. 

I began to think that he was carrying his obstinacy a 
great deal too far. I could no longer act with prudence 
or composure. I stooped on a sudden and picked up an 
almost perfect shell, which had undoubtedly belonged to 
some animal very much resembling some of the present 
day. Having secured the prize, I followed in the wake 
of my uncle. 




108 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE 


OF THE EARTH. 


“ Ho you see this ?” I said. 

“ Well,” said the Professor, with the most imperturbable 
tranquillity, “it is the shell of a crustaceous animal of the 
extinct order of the trilobites; nothing more I assure 
you.” 

But, cried I, much troubled at his coolness, “ do you 
draw no conclusion from it?” 

Well, if I may ask, what conclusion do you draw from 
it yourself?” 

“ Well, I thought-” 

I know, my boy, what you would say, and you are 
right, perfectly and incontestably right. We have finally 
abandoned the crust of lava and the road by which the 
lava ascended. It is quite possible that I may have been 
mistaken, but I shall be unable to discover my error until 
I get to the end of this gallery.” 

“ You a - re q uite right as far as that is concerned,” I re- 
plied, “and I should highly approve of your decision, 
it we had not to fear the greatest of all dangers.” 

“ And what is that ?” 

“Want of water.” 

“ Well, my dear Henry, it can’t be helped. We must 
put ourselves on rations.” 

And on he went. 





A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 109 


CHAPTER XVII. 

DEEPER AND DEEPER—THE COAL MINE. 

In truth, we were compelled to put ourselves upon ra¬ 
tions. Our supply would certainly last not more than 
three days. I found this out about supper time. The 
worst part of the matter was, that in what is called the 
transition rocks, it was hardly to be expected we should 
meet with, water! 

I had read of the horrors of thirst, and I knew that 
where we were, a brief trial of its sufferings would put an 
end to our adventures—and our lives! But it was utterly 
useless to discuss the matter with my uncle. He would 
have answered by some axiom from Plato. 

During the whole of next day we proceeded on our 
journey through this interminable gallery, arch after 
arch, tunnel after tunnel. We journeyed without exchang¬ 
ing a word. We had become as mute and reticent as 
Hans our guide. 

The road had no longer an upward tendency; at all 
events, if it had, it was not to be made out very clearly. 
Sometimes there could be no doubt that we were going 
downwards. But this inclination was scarcely to be dis¬ 
tinguished, and was by no means reassuring to the Pro¬ 
fessor, because the character of the strata was in no wise 
modified, and the transition character of the rocks became 
more and more marked. 

It was a glorious sight to see how the electric light 
brought out the sparkles in the walls of the calcareous 
rocks, and the old red sandstone. One might have fancied 
oneself in one of those deep cuttings in Devonshire, which 




110 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

have given their name to this kind of soil. Some magnifi¬ 
cent specimens of marble projected from the sides of the 
gallery; some of an agate grey with white veins of varie¬ 
gated character, others of a yellow spotted color, with red 
veins; farther off might be seen samples , of color in which 
cherry-tinted seams were to be found in all their brightest 
shades. 

The greater number of these marbles were stamped with 
the. marks of primitive animals. Since the previous eve¬ 
ning, nature and creation had made considerable progress. 
Instead of the rudimentary trilobites, I perceived the 
remains of a more perfect order. Among others, the fish 
in which the eye of a geologist has been able to discover 
the first form of the reptile. 

The Devonian seas were inhabited by a vast number of 
animals of this species, which were deposited in tens of 
thousands in the rocks of new’ formation. 

It was quite evident to me that we were ascending the 
scale of animal life of which man forms the summit. My 
excellent uncle, the Professor, appeared not to take notice 
of these warnings. He was determined at any risk to 
proceed. 

He must have been in expectation of one of two things; 
either that a vertical well was about to open under his 
feet, and thus allow him to continue his descent, or that 
some insurmountable obstacle would compel us to stop 
and go back by the road we had so long travelled. But 
evening came again, and, to my horror, neither hope was 
doomed to be realized ! 

On Friday, after a night when I began to feel the 
gnawing agony of thirst, and when in consequence appe¬ 
tite decreased, oyr little band rose and once more followed 
the turnings and windings, the ascents and descents, of 
this interminable gallery. All were silent and gloomy. 

I could see that even my uncle had ventured too far. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. Ill 

After about ten hours of further progress—a progress 
dull and monotonous to the last degree—X remarked that 
the reverberation, and reflection of our lamps upon the 
sides of the tunnel had singularly diminished. The 
marble, the schist, the calcareous rocks, the red sandstone, 
had disappeared, leaving in their places a dark and 
gloomy wall, sombre and without brightness. When we 
reached a remarkably narrow part of the tunnel, I leaned 
my left hand against the rock. 

When I look my hand away, and happened to glance 
at it, it was quite black. We had reached the coal strata 
of the Central Earth. 

“ A coal mine!” I cried. 

“ A coal mine without miners/’ responded my uncle, a 
little severely. 

“ How can we tell ?” 

“ I can tell,” replied my uncle, in a sharp and doctorial 
tone. “ I am perfectly certain that this gallery through 
successive layers of coal, was not cut by the hand of man. 
But whether it is the work of nature or not is of little 
concern to us. The hour for our evening meal has come 
—let us sup.” 

Hans, the guide, occupied himself in preparing food. 
I had come to that point when I could no longer eat. All 
I cared about were the few drops of water which fell to 
my share. What I suffered it is useless to record. The 
guide’s gourd, not quite half full, was all that was left for 
us three! 

Having finished their repast, my two companions laid 
themselves down upon their rugs, and found in sleep a 
remedy for their fatigue and sufferings. As for me, I 
could not sleep, I lay counting the hours until morning. 

The next morning, Saturday, at six o’clock, we started 
again. Twenty minutes later we suddenly came upon a 
vast excavation. From its mighty extent I saw at once 


112 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

that the hand of man could have had nothing to do with 
this coal mine ; the vault above would have fallen in; as 
it was, it was only held together by some miracle of nature. 

This mighty natural cavern was about a hundred fept 
wide, by about a hundred and fifty high. The earth had 
evidently been cast apart by some violent subterranean 
commotion. The mass, giving way to some prodigious up¬ 
heaving of nature, had split in two, leaving the vast gap 
into which we inhabitants of the earth had penetrated for 
the first time. 

The whole singular history of the coal period was writ¬ 
ten on those dark and gloomy walls. A geologist would 
have been able easily to follow the different phases of its 
formation. The seams of coal were separated by strata 
of sandstone, a compact clay, which appeared to be crushed 
down by the weight from above. 

At that period of the world which preceded the secon¬ 
dary epoch, the earth was covered by a coating of enor¬ 
mous and rich vegetation, due to the double action of tro¬ 
pical heat and perpetual humidity. A vast atmospheric 
cloud of vapor surrounded the earth on all sides, prevent¬ 
ing the rays of the sun from ever reaching it. 

Hence the conclusion that these intense heats did not 
arise from this new source of caloric. 

Perhaps even the star of day was not quite ready for 
its brilliant work—to illumine a universe. Climates did 
not as yet exist, and a level heat pervaded the whole sur¬ 
face of the globe—the same heat existing at the north pole 
as at the equator. 

Whence did it come ? From the interior of the earth ? 

In spite of all the learned theories of Professor Hard- 
a fierce and vehement fire certainly burned within 
the entrails of the great spheroid. Its action was felt even 
to the very topmost crust of the earth; the plants then in 
existence being deprived of the vivifying rays of the sun, 





A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 113 

had neither buds, nor flowers, nor odor, but their roots 
drew a strong and vigorous life from the burning earth of 
early days. 

There were but few of what may be called trees—only 
herbaceous plants, immense turfs, briers, mosses, rare fa¬ 
milies, which however in those days were counted by tens 
and tens of thousands. 

It is entirely to this exuberant vegetation that coal owes 
its origin. The crust of the vast globe still yielded under 
the influence of the seething, boiling mass, which was for 
ever at work beneath. Hence arose numerous fissures, and 
continual falling in of the upper earth. The dense mass 
of plants being beneath the waters, soon formed them¬ 
selves into vast agglomerations. 

Then came about the action of natural chemistry; in 
the depths of the ocean the vegetable mass at first became 
turf, then, thanks to the influence of gases and subterra¬ 
nean fermentation, they underwent the complete process 
of mineralization. 

In this manner, in early days, were formed those vast 
and prodigious layers of coal, which an ever-increasing 
consumption must utterly use up in about three centuries 
more, if people do not find some more economic light than 
gas, and some cheaper motive power than steam. 

All these reflections, the memories of my school studies, 
came to my mind while I gazed upon these mighty accu¬ 
mulations of coal, whose riches however are scarcely likely 
to be ever utilized. The working of these mines could 
only be carried out at an expense that would never yield 
a profit. 

The matter, however, is scarcely worthy consideration, 
when coal is scattered over the whole surface of the globe, 
within a few yards of the upper crust. As I looked at 
these untouched strata, therefore, I knew they would re¬ 
main as long as the world lasts. 


114 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

While we still continued our journey, I alone forgot the 
length of the road, by giving myself up wholly to these 
geological considerations. The temperature continued to 
be very much the same as while we were travelling amid 
the lava and the schists. On the other hand my sense of 
smell was much affected by a very powerful odor. I 
immediately knew that the gallery was filled to overflow¬ 
ing with that dangerous gas the miners call fire-damp, the 
explosion of which has caused such fearful and terrible 
accidents, making a hundred "widows, and hundreds of 
orphans in a single hour. 

Happily, we were able to illume our progress by means 
of the Ruhmkorf apparatus. If we had been so rash and 
imprudent as to explore this gallery, torch in hand, a 
terrible explosion would have put an end to our travels, 
simply because no travellers would be left. 

Our excursion through this wondrous coal mine in the 
very bowels of the earth lasted until evening. My uncle 
was scarcely able to conceal his impatience and dissatisfac¬ 
tion at the road continuing still to advance in a horizontal 
direction. 

The darkness, dense and opaque, a few yards in advance 
and in the rear, rendered it impossible to make out what 
was the length of the gallery. For myself, I began to 
believe that it was simply interminable, and would go on 
in the same manner for months. 

Suddenly, at six o’clock, we stood in front of a wall. 
To the right, to the left, above, below, nowhere was there 
any passage. We had reached a spot where the rocks said 
in unmistakable accents—No Thoroughfare. 

I stood stupefied. The guide simply folded his arms. 
My uncle was silent. 

“Well, well, so much the better,” cried my uncle, at 
last, “I now know what we are about. We are de¬ 
cidedly not upon the road followed by Saknussemm. All 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 115' 

we have to do is to go back. Let us take one night’s good 
rest, and before three days are over, I promise you we 
shall have regained the point where the galleries divided.” 

“ Yes, we may, if our strength lasts as long,” I cried, in 
a lamentable voice. 

“ And why not ?” 

“ To-morrow, among us three, there will not be a drop 
of water. It is just gone.” 

And your courage with it,” said my uncle, speaking in 
a severe tone. 

What could I say ? I turned round on my side, and 
from sheer exhaustion fell into a heavy but troubled sleep. 
Dreams of water! And I awoke unrefreshed. 

I would have bartered a diamond mine for a glass of 
pure spring water! 


116 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XVIII. 

THE WRONG ROAD ! 

Xext day, our departure took place at a very early 
hour. There was no time for the least delay. According 
to my account, we had five days’ hard work to get back 
to the place where the galleries divided. 

I can never tell all the sufferings we endured upon our 
return. My uncle bore them like a man who has been in 
the wrong that is, with concentrated and suppressed an¬ 
ger ; Hans, with all the resignation of his pacific charac¬ 
ter ; and I I confess that I did nothing but complain, and 
despair. I had no heart for this bad fortune. 

But there was one consolation. Defeat at the outset 
would probably upset the whole journey! 

As I had expected from the first, our supply of water 
gave completely out on our first day’s march. Our pro¬ 
vision of liquids was reduced to our supply of schiedam; 
but this horrible—nay, I will say it—this infernal liquor 
burnt the throat, and I could not even bear the sight of it. 
I found the temperature to be stifling. I was paralyzed 
with fatigue. More than once I was about to fall insensi¬ 
ble to the ground. The whole party then halted, and the 
worthy Icelander and my excellent uncle did their best to 
console and comfort me. I could, however, plainly see 
that my uncle was contending painfully against the ex¬ 
treme fatigues of our journey, and the awful torture gene¬ 
rated by the absence of water. 

At length a time came when I ceased to recollect any¬ 
thing—when all was one awful, hideous, fantastic dream! 

At last, on Tuesday, the eighth of the month of July, 
after crawling on our hands and knees for many hours, 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 117 

more dead than alive, we reached the point of junction 
between the galleries. I lay like a log, an inert mass of 
human flesh on the arid lava soil. It was then ten in the 
morning. 

Hans and my uncle, leaning against the wall, tried to 
nibble away at some pieces of biscuit, while deep groans 
and sighs escaped from my scorched and swollen lips. 
Then I fell off . into a kind of deep lethargy. 

Presently I felt my uncle approach, and lift me up 
tenderly in his arms. 

“ Poor boy,” I heard him say in a tone of deep com¬ 
miseration. 

I was profoundly touched by these words, being by no 
means accustomed to signs of womanly weakness in the 
Professor. I caught his trembling hands in mine and 
gave them a gentle pressure. He allowed me to do so 
without resistance, looking at me kindly all the time. 
His eyes were wet with tears. 

I then saw him take the gourd which he wore at his 
side. To my surprise, or rather to my stupefaction, he 
placed it to my lips. 

“ Drink, my boy,” he said. 

Was it possible my ears had not deceived me? Was 
my uncle mad ? I looked at him, with, I am sure, quite 
an idiotic expression. I would not understand him. I 
too much feared the counteraction of disappointment. 

“ Drink,” he said again. 

Had I heard aright ? Before, however, I could ask 
myself the question a second time, a mouthful of water 
cooled my parched lips and throat—one mouthful, but I 
do believe it brought me back to life. 

I thanked my uncle by clasping my hands. My heart 
was too full to speak. 

“Yes,” said he, “one mouthful of water, the very last 
•—do you hear, my boy—the very last! I have taken 


118 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


care of it at the bottom of my bottle as the apple of my 
eye. Twenty times, a hundred times, I have resisted the 
fearful desire to drink it. But—no—no, Harry, I saved 
it for you.” 

“ My dear uncle,” I exclaimed, and the big tears rolled 
down my hot and feverish cheeks. 

“ Yes, my poor boy, I knew that when you reached this 
place, this cross road in the earth, you would fall down 
half dead, and I saved my last drop of water in order to 
restore you.” 

“ Thanks,” I cried; “ thanks from my heart.” 

As little as my thirst was really quenched, I had never¬ 
theless partially recovered my strength. The contracted 
muscles of my throat relaxed;—and the inflammation of 
my lips in some measure subsided. At all events, I was 
able to speak. 

“Well,” I said, “there can be no doubt now as to what 
we have to do. Water has utterly failed us ; our journey 
is therefore at an end. Let us return.” 


While I spoke thus, my uncle evidently avoided my 
face: he held down his head; his eyes were turned in 
every possible direction but the right one. 

‘ Yes, I continued, getting excited by my own words, 


we must go back to Sneffels. May heaven give us 
strength to enable us once more to revisit the light of day. 
Would that we now stood on the summit of the crater.” 

“Go back,” said my uncle speaking to himself— “and 
must it be so ? ” 

“ Go back—yes, and without losing a single moment,” 
I vehemently cried. 

For some moments there was silence under that dark 
and gloomy vault. 

So, my dear Harry,” said the Professor in a very singu¬ 
lar tone of voice, “ those few drops of water have not suf¬ 
ficed to restore your energy and courage.” 



THE LAST DEOP OP WATER 






































































































% 




































. ' 













































A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 119 

“ Courage! ” I cried. 

I see that you are quite as downcast as before—and still 
give way to discouragement and despair.” 

What, then, was the man made of, and what other pro¬ 
jects were entering his fertile and audacious brain! 

“ You are not discouraged,“ sir ? ” 

What! give up just as we are on the verge of success,” 
he cried, “ never, never shall it be said that Professor 
Hardwigg retreated.” 

“ Then we must make up our minds to perish,” I cried 
with a helpless sigh. 

“ No, Harry, my hoy, certainly not. Go, leave me, I am 
very far from desiring your death. Take Hans with you. 
I will go on alone.” 

“ You ask us to leave you ? ” 

“ Leave me, I say. I have undertaken this dangerous 
and perilous adventure. I will carry it to the end—or I 
will never return to the surface of Mother Earth. Go,— 
Harry—once more I say to you—go! ” 

My uncle as he spoke was terribly excited. His voice, 
which before had been tender, almost womanly, became 
harsh and menacing. He appeared to be struggling with 
desperate energy against the impossible. I did not wish to 
abandon him at the bottom of that abyss, while, on the 
other hand, the instinct of preservation told me to fly. 

Meanwhile, our guide was looking on with profound 
calmness and indifference. He appeared to be an uncon¬ 
cerned party, and yet he perfectly well knew what was go¬ 
ing on between us. Our gestures sufficiently indicated the 
different roads each wished to follow—and which each 
tried to influence the other to undertake. But Hans ap¬ 
peared not to take the slightest interest in what was really 
a question of life and death for us all, but waited quite 
ready to obey the signal which should say go aloft, or to 
resume his desperate journey into the interior of the earth. 




120 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

How then I wished with all my heart and soul that I 
could make him understand my words. My representa¬ 
tions, my sighs and groans, the earnest accents in which I 
should have spoken would have convinced that cold hard 
nature. Those fearful dangers and perils of which the 
stolid guide had no idea, I would have pointed them out to 
him—I would have, as it were, made him see and feel. 
Between us, we might have convinced the obstinate Pro¬ 
fessor. If the worst had come to the worst, we could have 
compelled him to return to the summit of Sneffels. 

I quietly approached Hans. I caught his hand in mine. 
He never moved a muscle. I indicated to him the road to 
the top of the crater. He remained motionless. My pant¬ 
ing form, my haggard countenance, must have indicated 
the extent of my sufferings. The Icelander gently shook 
his head and pointed to my uncle. 

“ Master,” he said. 

The word is Icelandic as well as English. 

“ The master! ” I cried, beside myself with fury—“mad¬ 
man ! no—I tell you he is not the master of our lives; we 
must fly! we must drag him with us! do you hear me ? 
Ho you understand me, I say ? ” 

I have already explained that I held Hans by the arm. 

I tried to make him rise from his seat. I struggled with 
him and tried to force him away. My uncle now interposed. 

“ My good Henry, be calm,” he said. “ You will obtain 
nothing from my devoted follower; therefore, listen to 
what I have to say.” 

I folded my arms, as well as I could, and looked my un¬ 
cle full in the face. 

“This wretched want of water,” he said, “is the sole 
obstacle to the success of my project. In the entire gal¬ 
lery, composed of lava, schist, and coal, it is true we found 
not one liquid molecule. It is quite possible that we may 
be more fortunate in the western tunnel.” 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 121 

My sole reply was to shake my head with an air of in¬ 
credulity. 

“ Listen to me to the end,” said the Professor in his well- 
known lecturing voice. “ While you lay yonder without 
life or motion, I undertook a reconnoitering journey into 
the conformation of this other gallery. I have discovered 
that it goes directly downwards into the bowels of the 
earth, and in a few hours will take us to the old granitic 
formation. In this we shall undoubtedly find innumerable 
springs. The nature of the rock makes this a mathemati¬ 
cal certainty, and instinct agrees with logic to say that it 
is so. Now, this is the serious proposition which I have to 
make to you. When Christopher Columbus asked of his 
men three days to discover the land of promise, his men 
ill, terrified, and hopeless, yet gave him three days—and 
the New World was discovered. Now I, the Christopher 
Columbus of this subterranean region, only ask of you one 
more day. If, when that time is expired, I have not found 
the water of which we are in search, I swear to you, I will 
give up my mighty enterprise and return to the earth’s 
surface.” 

Despite my irritation and despair, I knew how much it 
cost my uncle to make this proposition, and to hold such 
conciliatory language. Under the circumstances, what 
could I do, but yield ? 

“ Well,” I cried, “ let it be as you wish, and may heaven 
reward your superhuman energy. But as, unless we dis¬ 
cover water, our hours are numbered, let us lose no time, 
but go ahead.” 


122 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XIX. 

THE WESTERN GALLERY—A NEW ROUTE. 

Our descent was now resumed by means of the second 
gallery. Hans took up his post in front as usual. We 
had not gone more than a hundred yards when the Pro¬ 
fessor carefully examined the walls. 

“ This is the primitive formation—we are on the right 
road—onwards is our hope!” 

When the whole earth got cool in the first hours of the 
world’s morning, the diminution of the volume of the earth 
produced a state of dislocation in its upper crust, followed 
by ruptures, crevasses and fissures. The passage was a 
fissure of this kind, through which, ages ago, had flowed 
the eruptive granite. The thousand windings and turnings 
formed an inextricable labyrinth through the ancient soil. 

As we descended, successions of layers composing the 
primitive soil appeared with the utmost fidelity of detail. 
Geological science considers this primitive soil as the base 
of the mineral crust, and it has recognised that it is com¬ 
posed of three different strata or layers, all resting on the 
immovable rock known as granite. 

Xo mineralogists had ever found themselves placed in 
such a marvellous position to study nature in all her real 
and naked beauty. The sounding rod, a mere machine, 
could not bring to the surface of the earth the objects of 
value for the study of its internal structure, which we were 
about to see with our own eyes, to touch with our own 
hands. 

Remember that I am writing this after the journey. 

Across the streak of the rocks, colored by beautiful 
green tints, wound metallic threads of copper, of manga- 




A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 123 

nese, with traces of platinum and gold. I could not help 
gazing at these riches buried in the entrails of mother 
earth, and of which no man would have the enjoyment to 
the end of time! These treasures—mighty and inexhaust¬ 
ible, were buried in the morning of the earth’s history, at 
such awful depths, that no crowbar or pickaxe will ever 
drag them from their tomb! 

The light of our Buhmkorf’s coil, increased tenfold by 
the myriad of prismatic masses of rock, sent their jets of 
fire in every direction, and I could fancy myself travelling 
through a huge hollow diamond, the rays of which pro¬ 
duced myriads of extraordinary effects. 

Towards six o’clock, this festival of light began sensibly 
and visibly to decrease, and soon almost ceased. The 
sides of the gallery assumed a crystallized tint, with a 
sombre hue; white mica began to commingle more free’y 
with feldspar and quartz, to form what may be called the 
true rock—the stone which is hard above all, that supports, 
without being crushed, the four stories of the earth’s soil. 

We were walled by an immense prison of granite ! 

It was now eight o’clock, and still there was no sign of 
water. The sufferings I endured were horrible. My uncle 
now kept at the head of our little column. Nothing could 
induce him to stop. I, meanwhile, had but one real 
thought. My ear was keenly on the watch to catch the 
sound of a spring. But no pleasant sound of falling water 
fell upon my listening ear. 

But at last the time came when my limbs refused to 
longer carry me. I contended heroically against the ter¬ 
rible tortures I endured, because I did not wish to compel 
my uncle to halt. To him I knew this would be the last 
fatal stroke. 

Suddenly I felt a deadly faintness come over me. My 
eyes could no longer see; my knees shook. I gave one 
despairing cry—and fell! 


124 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

“ Help, help, I am dying! ” 

My uncle turned and slowly retraced his steps. He 
looked at me with folded arms, and then allowed one sen¬ 
tence to escape, in hollow accents, from his lips— 

“ All is over.” 

The last thing I saw was a face fearfully distorted with 
pain and sorrow; and then my eyes closed. 

When I again opened them, I saw my companions lying 
near me, motionless, wrapped in their huge travelling rugs. 
Were they asleep or dead ? For myself, sleep was wholly 
out of the question. My fainting fit over, I was wakeful 
as the lark. I suffered too much for sleep to visit my eye¬ 
lids—the more, that I thought myself sick unto death— 
dying. The last words spoken by my uncle seemed to be 
buzzing in my ears —all is over! And it was probable 
that he was right. In the state of prostration to which I 
was reduced, it was madness to think of ever again seeing 
the light of day. 

Above were miles upon miles of the earth’s crust. As 
I thought of it, I could fancy the whole weight resting on 
my shoulders. I was crushed, annihilated! and exhausted 
myself in vain attempts to turn in my granite bed. 

Hours upon hours passed away. A profound and 
terrible silence reigned around us—a silence of the tomb. 
Nothing could make itself heard through these gigantic 
walls of granite. The very thought was stupendous. 

Presently, despite my apathy, despite the kind of deadly 
calm into which I was cast, something aroused me. It 
was a slight but peculiar noise. While I was watching 
intently, I observed that the tunnel was becoming dark 
Then gazing through the dim light that remained, I 
thought I saw the Icelander taking his departure, lamp in 
hand. 

Why had he acted thus ? Did Hans the guide mean to 




A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 125 

abandon us? My uncle lay fast asleep—or dead. I tried 
to cry out, and arouse him. My voice, feebly issuing 
from my parched and fevered lips, found no echo in that 
fearful place. My throat was dry, my tongue stuck to the 
roof of my mouth. The obscurity had by this time be¬ 
come intense, and at last even the faint sound of the guide’s 
footsteps was lost in the blank distance. My soul seemed 
filled with anguish, and death appeared welcome, only let 
it come quickly. 

“ Hans is leaving us,” I cried. “ Hans—Hans, if you 
are a man, come back.” 

These words were spoken to myself. They could not be 
heard aloud. Nevertheless, after the first few mo¬ 
ments of terror were over, I was ashamed of my suspi¬ 
cions against a man, who hitherto had behaved so admira¬ 
bly. Nothing in his conductor character justified suspi¬ 
cion. Moreover, a moment’s reflection re-assured me. 
His departure could not be a flight. Instead of ascending 
the gallery, he was going deeper down into the gulf. Had 
he had any bad design, his way would have been upwards. 

This reasoning calmed me a little and I began to hope! 

The good, and peaceful, and imperturbable Hans would 
certainly not have arisen from his sleep without some seri¬ 
ous and grave motive. Was he bent on a voyage of dis¬ 
covery? During the deep, still silence of the night had he 
at last heard that sweet murmur ab<?ut which we were all 
so anxious? 


126 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XX. 

WATER, WHERE IS IT ? A BITTER DISAPPOINTMENT. 

During a long, long, weary hour, there crossed my 
Wildly delirious brain all sorts of reasons as to what could 
have aroused our quiet and faithful guide. The most ab¬ 
surd and ridiculous ideas passed through my head, each 
more impossible than the other. I believe I was either 
half or wholly mad. 

Suddenly, however, there arose, as it were from the 
depths of the earth, a voice of comfort. It was the sound 
of footsteps ! Hans was returning. 

Presently the uncertain light began to shine upon the 
walls of the passage, and then it came in view far down 
the sloping tunnel. At length Hans himself appeared. 

He approached my uncle, placed his hand upon his 
shoulder, and gently awakened him. My uncle, as soon 
as he saw who it was, instantly rose. 

“ Well! ” exclaimed the Professor. 

“ Vatten,” said the hunter. 

I did not know a single word of the Danish language, 
and yet by a sort of mysterious instinct I understood what 
the guide had said. 

“ Water, water! ” I crie’d, in a wild and frantic tone, 
clapping my hands, and gesticulating like a madman. 

“Water!” murmured my uncle, in a voice of deep 
emotion and gratitude. “ Hvar ? ” (where.) 

“Nedat” (below.) 

“ Where ? below ! ” I understood every word. I had 
caught the hunter by the hands, and I shook them 
heartily, while he looked on with perfect calmness. 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 127 

The preparations for our departure did not take long, 
and we were soon making a rapid descent into the tunnel. 

An hour later we had advanced a thousand yards, and 
descended two thousand feet. 

At this moment I heard an accustomed and well-known 
sound running along the floors of the granite rock—a kind 
of dull and sullen roar, like that of a distant waterfall. 

During the first half-hour of our advance, not finding 
the discovered spring, my feelings of intense suffering ap¬ 
peared to return. Once more I began to lose all hope. 
My uncle, however, observing how down-hearted I was 
again becoming, took up the conversation. 

“ Hans was right,” he exclaimed, enthusiastically; “that 
is the dull roaring of a torrent.” 

“A torrent,” I cried, delighted at even hearing the 
welcome words. 

“ There’s not the slightest doubt about it,” he replied, 
“ a subterranean river is flowing beside us.” 

I made no reply, but hastened on, once more animated 
by hope. I began not even to feel the deep fatigue which 
hitherto had overpowered me. The very sound of this 
glorious murmuring water already refreshed me. We 
could hear it increasing in volume every moment. The 
torrent, which for a long time could be heard flowing over 
our heads, now ran distinctly along the left wall, roaring, 
rushing, spluttering, and still falling. 

Several times I passed my hand across the rock hoping 
to find some trace of humidity—of the slightest percola¬ 
tion. Alas! in vain. 

Again a half hour passed in the same weary toil. Again 
we advanced. 

It now became evident that the hunter, during his ab¬ 
sence, had not been able to carry his researches any far¬ 
ther. Guided by an instinct peculiar to the dwellers in 
mountain regions and water finders, he “ smelt ” the living 


128 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

spring through the rock. Still he had not seen the precious 
liquid. He had neither quenched his own thirst, nor 
brought us one drop in his gourd. 

Moreover, we soon made the disastrous discovery, that 
if our progress continued, we should soon be moving away 
from the torrent, the sound of which gradually diminished. 
We turned back. Hans halted at the precise spot where 
the sound of the torrent appeared nearest. 

I could bear the suspense and suffering no longer, and 
seated myself against the wall, behind which I could hear 
the water seething and effervescing not two feet away. But 
a solid wall of granite still separated us from it! 

Hans looked keenly at me, and, strange enough, for 
once I thought I saw a smile on his imperturbable face. 

He rose from a stone on which he had been seated, and 
took up the lamp. I could not help rising and following 
He moved slowly along the firm and solid granite wall. I 
watched him with mingled curiosity and eagerness. Pre¬ 
sently he halted and placed his ear against the dry stone, 
moving slowly along and listening with the most extreme 
care and attention. I understood at once that he was 
searching for the exact spot where the torrent’s roar was 
most plainly heard. This point he soon found in the 
lateral wall on the left side, about three feet above the 
level of the tunnel floor. 

I was in a state of intense excitement. I scarcely dared 
believe what the eider-duck hunter was about to do. It 
was, however, impossible in a moment more not to both 
understand and applaud, and even to smother him in my 
embraces, when I saw him raise the heavy crowbar and 
commence an attack upon the rock itself. 

“ Saved,” I cried. 

“Yes,” cried my uncle, even more excited and delighted 
than myself; “Hans is quite right. Oh, the worthy, excel¬ 
lent man! We should never have thought of such an idea.” 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 129 

And nobody else, I think, would have done so. Such 
a process, simple as it seemed, would most certainly not 
have entered our heads. Nothing could be more danger¬ 
ous than to begin to work with pickaxes in that particular 
part of the globe. Supposing while he was at work a 
break-up. were to take place, and supposing the torrent 
once having gained an inch were to take an ell, and come 
pouring bodily through the broken rock! 

Not one of these dangers were chimerical. They were 
only too real. But at that moment no fear of falling in 
of roof, or even of inundation was capable of stopping us. 
Our thirst was so intense, that to quench it we would 
have dug below the bed of old Ocean itself. 

Hans went quietly to work—a work which neither my 
uncle nor I would have undertaken at any price. Our 
impatience was so great, that if we had once begun with 
pickaxe and crowbar, the rock would soon have split into 
a hundred fragments. The guide, on the contrary, calm, 
ready, moderate, wore away the hard rock by little steady 
blows of his instrument, making no attempt at a larger 
hole than about six inches. As I stood, I heard, or I 
thought I heard, the roar of the torrent momentarily in¬ 
creasing in loudness, and at times I almost felt the 
pleasant sensation of water upon my parched lips. 

At the end of what appeared an age, Hans had made a 
hole, which enabled his crowbar to enter two feet into the 
solid rock. He had been at work exactly an hour. It 
appeared a dozen. I was getting wild with impatience. 
My uncle began to think of using more violent measures. 

I had the greatest difficulty in checking him. He had in¬ 
deed just got hold of his crowbar when a loud and wel¬ 
come hiss was heard. Then a stream, or rather jet of 
water burst through the wall and came out with such 
force as to hit the opposite side! 

-Hans, the guide, who was half upset by the shock, was 


130 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

scarcely able to keep down a cry of pain and grief. I 
understood his meaning when plunging my hands into the 
sparkling jet I myself gave a wild and frantic cry. The 
water was scalding hot! 

“ Boiling,” I cried, in bitter disappointment. 

“Well, never mind,” said my uncle, “it will soon get 
cool.” 

The tunnel began to be filled by clouds of vapor, while 
a small stream ran away into the interior of the earth. In 
a short time we had some sufficiently cool to drink. We 
swallowed it in huge mouthfuls. 

Oh what exalted delight—what rich and incomparable 
luxury! What was this water, whence did it come ? To 
us what was that.? The simple fact was—it was water; 
and, though still with a tinge of warmth about it, it 
brought back to the heart, that life which, but for it, must 
surely have faded away. I drank greedily, almost with¬ 
out tasting it. 

When, however, I had almost quenched my ravenous 
thirst, I made a discovery. 

“ Why, it is ferruginous water.” 

“ Most excellent stomachic,” replied my uncle, “ and 
highly mineralized. Here is a journey worth twenty to 
Spa.” 

“ It’s very good,” I replied. 

“ I should think so. Water found six miles under 
ground. There is a peculiarly inky flavor about it, which 
is by no means disagreeable. Hans may congratulate 
himself on having made a rare discovery. What do you 
say, nephew, according to the usual custom of travellers, 
to name the stream after him ? ” 

“ Good,” said I. 

And the name of “ Hans-bach ” was at once agreed 
upon. 

Hans was not a bit more proud after hearing our de* 
















































































# 






































































V 

































































































































































































THE BOILING- JET. 






















































A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 131 

termination than he was before. After haying taken a 
very small modicum of the welcome refreshment, he had 
seated himself in a corner with his usual imperturbable 
gravity. 

“Now,” said I, “it is not worth while letting this water 
run to waste.” 

“ What is the use,” replied my uncle, “ the source from 
which this river rises is inexhaustible.” 

“Never mind,” I continued, “let us fill our goat skin 
and gourds, and then try to stop the opening up.” 

My advice, after some hesitation, was followed or at¬ 
tempted to be followed. Hans picked up all the broken 
pieces of granite he had knocked out, and using some tow 
he happened to have about him, tried to shut up the fissure 
he had made in the wall. All he did was to scald his 
hands. The pressure was too great, and all our attempts 
were utter failures. 

“ It is evident,” I remarked, “ that the upper surface of 
these springs is situated at a very great height above—as 
we may fairly infer from the great pressure of the jet.” 

“ That is by no means doubtful,” replied my uncle, “ if 
this column of water is about thirty-two thousand feet high, 
the atmospheric pressure must be something enormous. 
But a new idea has just struck me.” 

“ And what is that ? ” 

“ Why be at so much trouble to close this aperture ? ” 

“ Because-” 

I hesitated and stammered, having no real reason. 

“ When our water bottles are empty, we are not at all 
sure that we shall be able to fill them,” observed my uncle. 

“ I think that is very probable.” 

“ Well, then, let this water run. It will, of course, na¬ 
turally follow in our track, and will serve to guide and re¬ 
fresh us.” 

“ I think the idea a good one,” I cried, in reply, “ and 



132 A JOURNEY 


TO THE CENTRE OF TPIE EARTH. 


With this rivulet as a companion, there is no further reason 
why we should not succeed in our marvellous project.” 

Ah, my boy,” said the professor, laughing, “ after all 
you are coming round.” 


“ More than that, I am now confident of ultimate suc¬ 
cess. Forward.” 

“One moment, nephew mine. Let us begin by taking 
some hours of repose.” 6 

I had utterly forgotten that it was night. The chrono¬ 
meter, however, informed me of the fact. Soon we were 
sufficiently restored and refreshed, and had all fallen into 
a profound sleep. 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 133 


CHAPTER XXI. 

UNDER THE OCEAN. 

By the next day we had nearly forgotten our past suf¬ 
ferings. The first sensation I experienced was surprise at 
not being thirsty, and I actually asked myself the reason. 
The running stream, which flowed in rippling wavelets at 
my feet, was the satisfactory reply. 

We breakfasted with a good appetite, and then drank 
our fill of the excellent water. I felt myself quite a new 
man, ready to go anywhere my uncle chose to lead. I 
began to think. Why should not a man as seriously con¬ 
vinced as my uncle, succeed, with so excellent a guide as 
worthy Hans, and so devoted a nephew as myself? These 
were the brilliant ideas which now invaded my brain. 
Had the proposition now been made to go back to the 
summit of Mount Sneffels, I should have declined the offer 
in a most indignant manner. 

But fortunately there was no question of going up. We 
were about to descend farther into the interior of the earth. 

“Let us be moving,” I cried, awakening the echoes of 
the old world. 

We resumed our march on Thursday at eight o’clock in 
the morning. The great granite tunnel going round by 
sinuous and winding ways, presented every now and then 
sharp turns, and in fact had all the appearance of a laby¬ 
rinth. Its direction, however, was in general towards the 
south-west. My uncle made several pauses in order to 
consult his compass. 

The gallery now began to trend downwards in a hori¬ 
zontal direction, with about two inches of fall in every 
furlong. The murmuring stream flowed quietly at our 


134 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

feet.. I could not but compare it to some familiar spirit, 
guiding us through the earth, and I dabbled my fingers in 
its tepid water, which sang like a naiad as we progressed. 
My good humor began to assume a mythological cha¬ 
racter. 

As for my uncle he began to complain of the horizontal 
character of the road. His route he found began to be 
indefinitely prolonged, instead of “ sliding down the celes¬ 
tial ray,” according to his expression. 

But we had no choice; and as long as our road led 
towards the centre—however little progress we made, 
there was no reason to complain. 

Moreover, from time to time the slopes were much 
greater; the naiad sang more loudly, and we began to dip 
downwards in earnest. 

As yet, however, I felt no painful sensation. I had not 
got over the excitement of the discovery of water. 

That day and the next we did a considerable amount 
of horizontal, and relatively very little vertical, travelling. 

On Friday evening, the tenth of July, according to our 
estimation, we ought to have been thirty leagues to the 
southeast of Reykjawik, and about two leagues and a- 
half deep. We now received a rather startling surprise. 

Under our feet there opened a horrible well. My uncle 
was so delighted that he actually clapped his hands—as 
he saw how steep and sharp was the descent. 

Ah, ah!” he cried, in rapturous delight; “ this will 
take us a long way. Look at the projections of the rock. 
Hah ! he exclaimed, “ it’s a fearful staircase !” 

Hans, however, who in all our troubles had never given 
up the ropes, took care so to dispose of them as to prevent 
any accidents. Our descent then began. I dare not call 
it a perilous descent, for I was already too familiar with 
that sort of work to look upon it as anything but a verv 
ordinary affair. J 






A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 135 

This well was a kind of narrow opening in the massive 
granite of the kind known as a fissure. The contraction 
of the terrestrial scaffolding, when it suddenly cooled, had 
been evidently the cause. If it had ever served in former 
times as a kind of funnel through which passed the erup¬ 
tive masses vomited by Sneffles, I was at a loss to explain 
how it had left no mark. We were, in fact, descending a 
spiral, something like those winding staircases in use in 
modern houses. 

We were compelled every quarter of an hour or there¬ 
abouts to sit down in order to rest our legs. Our calves 
ached. We then seated ourselves on some projecting rock 
with our legs hanging over, and gossipped while we ate a 
mouthful—drinking still from the pleasantly-warm run¬ 
ning stream which had not deserted us. 

It is scarcely necessary to say, that in this curiously-shaped 
fissure the Hansbach had become a cascade to the detriment 
of its size. It was still however sufficient, and more, for 
our wants. Besides we knew that, as soon as the declivity 
ceased to be so abrupt, the stream must resume its peace¬ 
ful course. At this moment it reminded me of my uncle, his 
impatience and rage, while when it flowed more peacefully, 
I pictured to myself the placidity of the Icelandic guide. 

During the whole of two days, the sixth and seventh 
of July, we followed the extraordinary spiral staircase of 
the fissure, penetrating two leagues farther into the crust 
of the earth, which placed us five leagues below the level 
of the sea. On the eighth, however, at twelve o’clock in 
the day, the fissure suddenly assumed a much more gentle 
slope still trending in a south-east direction. 

The road now became comparatively easy, and at the 
same time dreadfully monotonous. It would have been 
difficult for matters to have turned out otherwise. Our pe¬ 
culiar journey had no chance of being diversified by land¬ 
scape and scenery. At all events, such was my idea. 


136 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


At length, on Wednesday the fifteenth, we were actually 
seven leagues (twenty-one miles,) below the surface of the 
earth, and fifty leagues distant from the mountain of Snef- 
fels. Though, if the truth be told, we were very tired, our 
health had resisted all suffering, and was in a most satis¬ 
factory state. Our traveller’s box of medicaments had not 
even been opened. 

My uncle was careful to note every hour the indications 
of the compass, of the manometer, and of the thermometer, 
all which he afterwards published in his elaborate philoso¬ 
phical and scientific account of our remarkable voyage. He 
was therefore able to give an exact relation of the situa¬ 
tion. When, therefore, he informed me that we were fifty 
leagues in a horizontal direction distant from our starting- 
point, I could not suppress a loud exclamation. 

“ What is the matter now ? ” cried my uncle. 

“Nothing very important, only an idea has entered my 
head,” was my reply. 

“ Well, out with it, my boy.” 

“ It is my opinion that if your calculations are correct 
we are no longer under Iceland.” 

“ Do you think so ? ” 

“We can very easily find out,” I replied, pulling out 
the map and compasses. 

“You see,” I said, after careful measurement, “that I 
am not mistaken. We are far beyond Cape Portland; 
and those fifty leagues to the south-east will take us into 
the open sea.” 

“ Under the open sea,” cried my uncle, rubbing his 
hands with a delighted air. 

“Yes,” I cried, “no doubt old ocean flows over our 
heads.” 

“ Well, my dear boy, what can be more natural. Do you 
not know that in the neighborhood of Newcastle there are 
coal mines which have been worked far out under the sea?’ 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 137 

Now my worthy uncle the Professor, no doubt regarded 
this discovery as a very simple fact, hut to me the idea 
was by no means a pleasant one. And yet when one came 
to think the matter over seriously, what mattered it whe¬ 
ther the plains and mountains of Iceland were suspended 
over our devoted heads, or the mighty billows of the At¬ 
lantic Ocean ? The whole question rested on the solidity 
of the granite roof above us. However, I soon got used 
to the idea, for the passage now level, now running down, 
and still always to the south-east, kept going deeper and 
deeper into the profound abysses of Mother Earth. 

Three days later, on the eighteenth day of July, on a 
Saturday, we reached a kind of vast grotto. My uncle 
here paid Hans his usual rix-dollars, and it was decided 
that the next day should be a day of rest. 




138 A JOURNEY TO 


THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XXII. 

SUNDAY BELOW GROUND. 

I AWOKE on Sunday morning without any sense of hurry 
and bustle attendant on an immediate departure. Though 
the day to be devoted to repose and reflection was spent 
under such strange circumstances, and in so wonderful a 
place, the idea was a pleasant one. Besides, we all began 
to get used to this kind of existence. I had almost ceased 
to think of the sun, of the moon, of the stars, of the trees, 
houses, and towns; in fact, about any terrestrial necessi¬ 
ties.. In our peculiar position we were far above such re¬ 
flections. 

The grotto was a vast and magnificent hall. Along its 
granitic soil the stream flowed placidly and pleasantly. So 
great a distance was it now from its fiery source, that its 
water was scarcely lukewarm, and could be drank without 
delay or difficulty. 

After a frugal breakfast, the Professor made up his 
mind to devote some hours to putting his notes and calcu- 
lations in order. 

“In the first place,” he said, “ I have a good many to 
verify and prove, in order that we may know our exact 
position. I wish to be able on our return to the upper 
regions, to make a map of our journey, a kind of vertical 
section of the globe, which will be as it were the profile 
oi the expedition.” 

“ That would indeed be a curious work, uncle; but can 
you make your observations with anything like certainty 
and precision ? J 

“ I can. I have 


never on one occasion failed to note 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 139 

with great care the angles and slopes. I am certain as to 
having made no mistake. Take the compass and examine 
how she points.” 

I looked at the instrument with care. 

“East one quarter south-east.” 

“ Yery good,” resumed the Professor, noting the obser¬ 
vation, and going through some rapid calculations. “ I 
make out that we have journeyed two hundred and fifty 
miles from the point of our departure.” 

“ Then the mighty waves of the Atlantic are rolling 
over our heads ? ” 

“ Certainly.” 

“ And at this very moment it is possible that fierce tem¬ 
pests are raging above, and that men and ships are bat> 
tling against the angry blasts just over our heads ? ” 

“ It is quite within the range of possibility,” rejoined 
my uncle smiling. 

“ And that whales are playing in shoals, thrashing the 
bottom of the sea, the roof of our adamantine prison ? ” 

“Be quite at rest on that point; there is no danger of 
their breaking through. But to return to our calcula¬ 
tions. We are to the south-east, two hundred and fifty 
miles from the base of Sneffels, and, according to my pre¬ 
ceding notes, I think we have gone sixteen leagues in a 
downward direction.” 

“ Sixteen leagues—fifty miles! ” I cried. 

“ I am sure of it.” 

“ But that is the extreme limit allowed by science for 
the thickness of the earth’s crust,” I replied, referring to 
my geological studies. 

“ I do not contravene that assertion,” was his quiet an¬ 
swer. 

“ And at this stage of our journey, according to all 
known laws on the increase of heat, there should be here 
a temperature of fifteen hundred degrees of Reaumur.” 




140 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

“ There should be—you say, my boy.” 

“ In which case this granite would not exist, but be in a 
state of fusion.” 

“ But you perceive, my boy, that it is not so, and that 
facts, as usual, are very stubborn things, overruling all 
theories.” 

“ I am forced to yield to the evidence of my senses, but* 
I am nevertheless very much surprised.” 

“ What heat does the thermometer really indicate ? ” 
continued the philosopher. 

“ Twenty-seven six-tenths.” 

“So that science is wrong by fourteen hundred and 
seventy-four degrees and four-tenths. According to 
which, it is demonstrated that the proportional increase in 
temperature is an exploded error. Humphrey Havy here 
shines forth in all his glory. He is right, and I have 
acted wisely to believe him. Have you any answer to 
make to this statement ? ” 

Had I chosen to have spoken, I might have said a 
great deal. I in no way admitted the theory of Hum¬ 
phrey Davy—I still held out for the theory of proportion¬ 
al increase of heat, though I did not feel it. 

I was far more willing to allow that this chimney of an 
extinct volcano was covered by lava of a kind refractory to 
heat—in fact a bad conductor—which did not allow the 
great increase of temperature to percolate through its sides. 
The hot water jet supported my view of the matter. 

But without entering on a long and useless discussion, 
or seeking for new arguments to controvert my uncle, I 
contented myself with taking up facts as they were. 

“ Well, sir, I take for granted that all your calculations 
are correct, but allow me to draw from them a rigorous 
and definite conclusion.” 

“Go on, my boy—have your say,” cried my uncle, 
good-humoredly. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 14 } 

“ At the place where we now are, under the latitude of 
Iceland, the terrestrial depth is about fifteen hundred and 
eighty-three leagues.” 

“ Fifteen hundred, eighty-three and a quarter.” 

“ Well, suppose we say sixteen hundred in round num¬ 
bers. Now, out of a voyage of sixteen hundred leagues 
we have completed sixteen.” 

“ As you say, what then ? ” 

“ At the expense of a diagonal journey of no less than 
eighty-five leagues.” 

“ Exactly.” 

We have been twenty days about it.” 

“ Exactly twenty days.” 

“Now sixteen is the hundredth part of our contem¬ 
plated expedition. If we go on in this way we shall be 
two thousand days, that is about five years and a half, 
going down.” 

The professor folded his arms, listened, but did not 
speak. 

“ Without counting that if a vertical descent of sixteen 
leagues costs us a horizontal of eighty-five, we shall have 
to go about eight thousand leagues to the south-east, and 
we must therefore come out somewhere in the circumfer¬ 
ence long before we can hope to reach the centre.” 

“ Bother your calculations,” cried my uncle in one of 
his old rages. “ On what basis do they, rest ? How do 
you know that this passage does not takes- us direct to the 
end we require? Moreover, I have in my favor, fortu¬ 
nately, a precedent. What I have undertaken to do, 
another has done, and he having succeeded, why should I 
not be equally successful ? ” 

“ I hope, indeed, you will, but still, I suppose I may be 
allowed to-” 

“ You are allowed to hold your tongue,” cried Professor 
Hardwigg, “ when you talk so unreasonably as this.” 




142 A JOURNEY TO' THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


I saw at once that the old doctorial Professor was still 
alive in my uncle—and fearful to rouse his angry pas¬ 
sions, I dropped the unpleasant subject. 

“Now, then,” he explained, “consult the manometer. 
What does that indicate ? ” 

“ A considerable amount of pressure.” 

“ Very good. You see, then, that by descending slowly, 
and by gradually accustoming ourselves to the density of 
this lower atmosphere, we shall not suffer. 

“Well, I suppose not, except it may be a certain 
amount of pain in the ears,” was my rather grim reply. 

That, my dear boy, is nothing, and you will easily get 
rid of that source of discomfort by bringing the exterior 
air in communication with the air contained in your 
lungs.” 

Perfectly, said I, for I had quite made up my mind 
in no wise to contradict my uncle. “ I should fancy al¬ 
most that I should experience a certain amount of sat¬ 
isfaction in making a plunge into this dense atmosphere. 
Have you taken note of how wonderfully sound is pro¬ 
pagated ?” 

“Of course I have. There can be no doubt that a 
journey into the interior of the earth would be an excellent 
cure for deafness.” 

“But then, uncle,” I ventured mildly to observe, “this 
density will continue to increase.” 

“Yes—according to a law which, however, is scarcely 
defined. It is true that the intensity of weight will diminish 
just in proportion to the depth to which we go You 
know very well that it is on the surface of the earth that 
its action is most powerfully felt, while on the contrary in 
the very centre of the earth bodies cease to have any 
weight at all.” J 

I know that is the case, but as we progress will not the 
atmosphere finally assume the density of water?” 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 14# 


“ I know it; when placed under the pressure of seven 
hundred and ten atmospheres,” cried my uncle with im¬ 
perturbable gravity. 

“And when we are still lower down?” I asked with 
natural anxiety. 


“ Well, lower down, the density will become even greater 
still.” 

Then how shall we be able to make our way through 
this atmospheric fog ?” 

Well, my worthy nephew, we must ballast ourselves 
by filling our pockets with stones,” said Professor Hard* 
wigg. 

Faith, uncle, you have an answer for everything,” was 
my only reply. 


I began to feel that it was unwise in me to go any far¬ 
ther into the wide field of hypotheses for I should certainly 
have revived some difficulty, or rather impossibility that 
would have enraged the Professor. 


It was evident, nevertheless, that the air under a pres¬ 
sure which might be multiplied by thousands of atmos¬ 
pheres, would end by becoming perfectly solid, and that 
then admitting our bodies resisted the pressure, we should 
have to stop, in spite of all the reasonings in the world. 
Facts overcome all arguments. 

But I thought it best not to urge this argument. My 
uncle would simply have quoted the example of Saknus- 
semm. Supposing the learned Icelander’s journey ever 
really to have taken place—there was one simple answer 
to be made:— 

In the sixteenth century neither the barometer nor the 
manometer had been invented—how, then, could Saknus- 
semm have been able to discover when he did reach the 
centre of the earth ? 

This unanswerable and learned objection I, however, 
kept to myself, and bracing up my courage awaited the 



144 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

course of events—little aware of how adventurous yet were 
to be the incidents of our remarkable journey. 

The rest of this day of leisure and repose was spent in 
calculation and conversation. I made it a point to agree 
with the Professor in everything; but I envied the perfect 
indifference of Hans, who without taking any such trouble 
about the cause and effect, went blindly onwards wherever 
destiny chose to lead therm 


A JOURKEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 145 


CHAPTEK XXIII. 

ALONE. 

It must in all truth be confessed, things as yet had gone 
on well, and I should have acted in bad taste to have com¬ 
plained. If the true medium of our difficulties did not 
increase, it was within the range of possibility that we 
might ultimately reach the end of our journey. Then 
what glory would be ours! I began in the newly-aroused 
ardor of my soul to speak enthusiastically to the Professor. 
Well, was I serious? The whole state in which we ex¬ 
isted was a mystery—and it was impossible to know whe¬ 
ther or not I was in earnest. 

For several days after our memorable halt, the slopes 
became more rapid—some were even of a most frightful 
character—almost vertical, so that we were for ever going 
down into the solid interior mass. During some days, we 
actually descended a league and a-half, even two leagues 

towards the centre of the earth. The descents were suffi- 

* 

ciently perilous, and while we were engaged in them we 
learned fully to appreciate the marvellous coolness of our 
guide Hans. Without him we should have been wholly 
lost. The grave and impassible Icelander devoted him¬ 
self to us with the most incomprehensible sang froid and 
ease; and, thanks to him, many a dangerous pass was got 
over, where, but for him, we should inevitably have stuck 
fast. 

His silence increased every day. I think that we began 
to be influenced by this peculiar trait in his character. It 
is certain that the inanimate objects by which you are 
surrounded have a direct action on the brain. It must be 



146 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

that a man who shuts himself up between four walls must 
lose the faculty of associating ideas and words. How 
many persons condemned to the horrors of solitary con¬ 
finement have gone mad—simply because the thinking fa¬ 
culties have lain dormant! 

During the two weeks that followed our last interesting 
conversation, there occurred nothing worthy of being espe¬ 
cially recorded. 

I have, while writing these memoirs, taxed my memory 
in vain for one incident of travel during this particular 
period. 

But the next event to be related is terrible indeed. Its 
very memory, even now, makes my soul shudder, and my 
blood run cold. 

It was on the seventh of August. Our constant and 
successive descents had taken us quite thirty leagues into 
the interior of the earth, that is to say that there were 
above us thirty leagues, nearly a hundred miles, of rocks, 
and oceans, and continents, and towns, to say nothing of 
living inhabitants. We were in a south-easterly direction, 
about two hundred leagues from Iceland. 

On that memorable day the tunnel had begun to assume 
an almost horizontal course. 

I was on this occasion walking on in front. My uncle 
had charge of one of the Kuhmkorf coils, I had possession 
of the other. By means of its light I was busy examining 
the different layers of granite. I was completely absorbed 
in my work. 

Suddenly halting and turning round, I found that I was 
alone! 

“Well,” thought I to myself, “ I have certainly been 
walking too fast—or else Hans and my uncle have stopped 
to rest. The best thing I can do is to go back and find 
them. Luckily, there is very little ascent to tire me.” 

I accordingly retraced my steps, and while doing so, 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 147 

walked for at least a quarter of an hour. Rather uneasy, 
I paused and looked eagerly around. Not a living soul. 
I called aloud. No reply. My voice was lost amid the 
myriad cavernous echoes it aroused*! 

I began for the first time to feel seriously uneasy. A 
cold shiver shook my whole body, and perspiration, chill 
and terrible, burst upon my skin. 

“ I must be calm,” I said, speaking aloud, as boys whis¬ 
tle to drive away fear. “ There can be no doubt that I 
shall find my companions. There cannot be two roads. 
It is certain that I was considerably ahead; all I have to 
do is to go back.” 

Having come to this determination I ascended the tun¬ 
nel for at least half an hour, unable to decide if I had ever 
seen certain landmarks before. Every now and then I 
paused to discover if any loud appeal was made to me, 
well knowing that in that dense and intensified atmosphere 
I should hear it a*long way off. But no. The most ex¬ 
traordinary silence reigned in this immense gallery. Only 
the echoes of my own footsteps could be heard. 

At last I stopped. I could scarcely realize the fact of 
my isolation. I was quite willing to think that I had 
made a mistake, but not that I was lost. If I had made 
a mistake, I might find my way: if lost—I shuddered to 
think of it. 

“ Come, come,” said I to myself, “ since there is only 
one road, and they must come by it, we shall at last meet. 
All I have to d^ is still to go upwards. Perhaps, how¬ 
ever, not seeing me, and forgetting I was ahead, they may 
have gone back in search of me. Still even in this case, 
if I make haste, I shall get up to them. There can be no 
doubt about the matter.” 

But as I spoke these last words aloud, it would have 
been quite clear to any listener—had there been one—that 
I was by no means convinced of the fact. Moreover, in 


148 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

order to associate together these simple ideas and to re¬ 
unite them under the form of reasoning, required some 
time. I could not all at once bring my brain to think. 

Then another dread doubt fell upon my soul. After 
all, was I ahead. Of course I was. Hans was no doubt 
following behind preceded by my uncle. I perfectly 
recollected his having stopped for a moment to strap his 
baggage on his shoulder. I now remembered this trifling 
detail. It was, I believed, just at that very moment that 
I had determined to continue my route. 

“ Again,” thought I, reasoning as calmly as was possible, 
“there is another sure means of not losing my way, a 
thread to guide me through the labyrinthine subterraneous 
retreat—one which I had forgotten—my faithful river.” 

This course of reasoning roused my drooping spirits, 
and I resolved to resume my journey without further 
delay. No time was to be lost. 

It was at this moment that I had. reason to bless the 
thoughtfulness of my uncle, w T hen he refused to allow the 
eider hunter to close the orifices of the hot spring—that 
small fissure in the great mass of granite. This beneficent 
spring after having saved us from thirst during so many 
days would now enable me to regain the right road. 

Having come to this mental decision, I made up my 
mind, before I started upwards, that ablution would cer¬ 
tainly do me a great deal of good. 

I stopped to plunge my hands and forehead in the 
pleasant water of the Hansbach stream, blessing its pres¬ 
ence as a certain consolation. 

Conceive my horror and stupefaction!—I was treading 
a hard, dusty, shingly road of granite. The stream on 
which I reckoned had wholly disappeared! 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 149 


CHAPTER XXIV. 

LOST ! 

No words in any human language can depict my utter 
despair. I was literally buried alive; with no other ex¬ 
pectation before me but to die in all the slow horrible tor¬ 
ture of hunger and thirst. 

Mechanically I crawled about, feeling the dry and arid 
rock. Never to my fancy had I ever felt anything so dry. 

But, I frantically asked myself, how had I lost the 
course of the flowing stream ? There could be no doubt it 
had ceased to flow in the gallery in which I now was. 
Now I began to understand the cause of the strange silence 
which prevailed when last I tried if any appeal from my 
companions might perchance reach my ear. 

It so happened that when I first took an imprudent step 
in the wrong direction, I did not perceive the absence of 
the all-important stream. 

It was now quite evident that when we halted, another 
tunnel must have received the waters of the little torrent, 
and that I had unconsciously entered a different gallery. 
To what unknown depths had my companions gone? 
Where was I ? 

How to get back! Clue or landmark there was abso¬ 
lutely none! My feet left no signs on the granite and 
shingle. My brain throbbed with agony as I tried to dis¬ 
cover the solution of this terrible problem. My situation, 
after all sophistry and reflection, had finally to be summed 
up in three awful words— 

Lostl lost!! LOST!!! 

Lost at a depth which, to my finite understanding, ap¬ 
peared to be immeasurable. 


150 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

These thirty leagues of the crust of the earth weighed 
upon my shoulders like the globe on the shoulders of 
Atlas. I felt myself crushed by the awful weight. It 
was indeed a position to drive the sanest man to madness! 

I tried to bring my thoughts back to the things of the 
world so long forgotten. It was with the greatest difficulty 
that I succeeded in doing so. Hamburg, the house on 
the Konigstrasse, my dear cousin Gretchen—all that world 
which had before vanished like a shadow floated before 
my now vivid imagination. 

There they were before me, but how unreal. Under 
the influence of a terrible hallucination I saw the whole 
incidents of our journey pass before me like the scenes of 
a panorama. The ship and its inmates, Iceland, M* 
Fridriksson, and the great summit of Mount Sneflels ! I 
said to myself that if in my position, I retained the most 
faint and shadowy outline of a hope it would be a sure 
sign of approaching delirium. It were better to give way 
wholly to despair! 

In fact, did I but reason with calmness and philosophy, 
what human power was there in existence able to take me 
back to the surface of the earth, and ready too, to split 
asunder, to rend in twain, those huge and mighty vaults 
which stand above my head ? Who could enable me to 
find my road—and regain my companions? 

Insensate folly and madness to entertain even a shadow 
of hope! 

“ Oh, uncle!” was my despairing cry. 

This was the only w T ord of reproach which came to my 
lips; for I thoroughly understood how deeply and sorrow¬ 
fully the worthy Professor would regret my loss, and how 
in his turn he would patiently seek for me. 

When I at last began to resign myself to the fact that 
no further aid was to be expected from man, and knowing 
that I was utterly powerless to do anything for my own 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 151 

salvation, I kneeled with earnest fervor and asked assis¬ 
tance from Heaven. The remembrance of my innocent 
childhood, the memory of my mother, known only in my 
infancy, came welling forth from my heart. I had re¬ 
course to prayer. And little as I had right to be remem¬ 
bered by Him whom I had forgotten in the hour of pros¬ 
perity, and whom I so tardily invoked, I prayed earnestly 
and sincerely. 

This renewal of my youthful faith brought about a 
much greater amount of calm, and I was enabled to con¬ 
centrate all my strength and intelligence on the terrible 
realities of my unprecedented situation. 

I had about me that which I had at first wholly forgot¬ 
ten—three days’ provisions. Moreover, my water bottle 
was quite full. Nevertheless, the one thing which it was 
impossible to do was to remain alone. Try to find my com¬ 
panions I must, at any price. But which course should I 
take ? Should I go upwards, or again descend ? Doubtless 
it was right to retrace my steps in an upward direction. 

By doing this with care and coolness, I must reach the 
point where I had turned away from the rippling stream. 
I must find the fatal bifurcation or fork. Once at this 
spot, once the river at my feet, I could, at all events, re¬ 
gain the awful crater of Mount Snefiels. Why had I not 
thought of this before ? This, at last, was a reasonable 
hope of safety. The most important thing, then, to be 
done was to discover the bed of the Hansbach. 

After a slight meal and a draught of water, I rose like 
a giant refreshed. Leaning heavily on my pole, I began 
the ascent of the gallery. The slope was very rapid and 
rather difficult. But I advanced hopefully and carefully, 
like a man who at last is making his way out of a forest, 
and knows there is only one road to follow. 

During one whole hour nothing happened to check my 
progress. As I advanced I tried to recollect the shape of 


152 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

the tunnel—to recall to my memory certain projections of 
rocks—to persuade myself that I had followed certain 
winding routes before. But no one particular sign could I 
bring to mind, and I was soon forced to allow that this gal¬ 
lery would never take me back to the point at which I had 
separated myself from my companions. It was absolutely 
without issue—a mere blind alley in the earth. 

The moment at length came when, facing the solid rock, 
I knew my fate, and fell inanimate on the arid floor! 

To describe the horrible state of despair and fear into 
which I then fell would now be vain and impossible. My 
last hope, the courage which had sustained me, drooped 
before the sight of this pitiless granite rock! 

Lost in a vast labyrinth, the sinuosities of which spread 
in every direction, without guide, clue or compass, it was a 
vain and useless task to attempt flight. All that remained 
to me was to lie down and die. To lie down and die the 
most cruel and horrible of deaths! 

In my state of mind, the idea came into my head that 
one day perhaps, when my fossil bones were found, their 
discovery so far below the level of the earth might give 
rise to solemn and interesting scientific discussions. 

I tried to cry aloud, but hoarse, hollow and inarticulate 
sounds alone could make themselves heard through my 
parched lips. I literally panted for breath. 

In the midst of all these horrible sources of anguish 
and despair, a new horror took possession of my soul. My 
lamp, by falling down, had got out of order. I had no 
means of repairing it. Its light was already becoming 
paler and paler, and soon would expire. 

With a strange sense of resignation and despair, I 
watched the luminous current in the coil getting less and 
less. A procession of shadows moved flashing along the 
granite wall. I scarcely dared to lower my eyelids, fear¬ 
ing to lose the last spark of this fugitive light. Every in- 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 153 

stant it seemed to me that it was about to vanish and to 
leave me for ever—in utter darkness! 

At last, one final trembling flame remained in the lamp; 
I followed it with all my power of vision; I gasped for 
breath; I concentrated upon it all the power of my soul, 
as upon the last scintillation of light I was ever destined 
to see: and then I was to be lost for ever in Cimmerian 
and tenebrous shades. 

A wild and plaintive cry escaped my lips. On earth 
during the most profound and comparatively complete 
darkness, light never allows a complete destruction and 
extinction of its power. Light is so diffuse, so subtle, that 
it permeates everywhere, and whatever little may remain, 
the retina of the eye will succeed in finding it. In this 
place nothing—not the faintest ray of light. It mazed me! 

My head was now wholly lost. I raised my arms, try¬ 
ing the effects of the feeling in getting against the cold 
stone wall. It was painful in the extreme. Madness 
must have taken possession of me. I knew not what I 
did. I began to run, to fly, rushing at haphazard in this 
inextricable labyrinth, always going downwards, running 
wildly underneath the terrestrial crust, like an inhabitant 
of the subterranean furnaces, screaming, roaring, howling, 
until bruised by the pointed rocks, falling and picking my¬ 
self up all covered with blood, seeking madly to drink the 
blood which dripped from my torn features, mad because 
this blood only trickled over my face, and watching al¬ 
ways for this horrid wall which ever presented to me the 
fearful obstacle against which I could not dash my head. 

Where was I going ? It was impossible to say. I was 
perfectly ignorant of the matter. 

Several hours passed in this way. After a long time, 
having utterly exhausted my strength, I fell a heavy inert 
mass along the side of the tunnel, and lost all conscious¬ 
ness of existence! 


154 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XXV. 

THE WHISPERING GALLERY. 

When at last I came back to a sense of life and being, 
my face was wet; but wet as I soon knew with tears. 
How long this state of insensibility lasted, it is quite im¬ 
possible for me now to say. I had no means left to me of 
taking any account of time, Xever since the creation of 
the world, had such a solitude as mine existed. I was 
completely abandoned. 

After my fall I lost much blood. I felt myself flooded 
with the life-giving liquid. My first sensation was per¬ 
haps a natural one. Why was I not dead? Because I 
was alive, there was something left to do. I tried to 
make up my mind to think no ' longer. As far as I was 
able, I drove away all ideas, and utterly overcome by 
pain and grief, I crouched against the granite wall. 

I just commenced to feel the fainting coming on again, 
and the sensation that this was the last struggle before 
complete annihilation,—when, on a sudden, a violent up¬ 
roar reached my ears. It had some resemblance to the 
prolonged rumbling voice of thunder, and I clearly distin¬ 
guished sonorous voices, lost one after the other, in the dis¬ 
tant depths of the gulf. 

Whence came this noise? Naturally, it was to be sup¬ 
posed from new phenomena which were taking-place in 
the bosom of the solid mass of Mother Earth ! The explo¬ 
sion of some gaseous vapors, or the fall of some solid, of 
the granitic or other rock. 

Again I listened with deep attention. I was extremely 
anxious to hear if this strange and inexplicable sound was 
likely to be renewed ! A whole quarter of an hour elapsed 


f 



♦ 


THE WHISPER HEARD, 













































































































































» 



' - 




















































V 




































































' 












k 


















♦ 



































« 
























\ 

























































































































■* * 




























r • 1 -■ 


■i . 


. , -n 


• * 










•«*. - 
















A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 155 

in painful expectation. Deep and solemn silence reigned 
in the tunnel. So still that I could hear the beatings of 
my own heart! I waited, waited, waited with a strange 
kind of hopefulness. 

Suddenly my ear, which leant accidentally against the 
wall, appeared to catch as it were the faintest echo of a 
sound. I thought that I heard vague, incoherent and dis¬ 
tant voices. I quivered all over with excitement and hope! 

“ It must be hallucination,” I cried. “It cannot be ! it 
is not true ! ” 

But no ! By listening more attentively, I really did 
convince myself that what I heard was truly the sound of 
human voices. To make any meaning out of the sound, 
however, was beyond my power. I was too weak even to 
hear distinctly. Still it was a positive fact that some one 
was speaking. Of that I was quite certain. 

There was a moment of fear. A dread fell upon my 
soul that it might be my own words brought back to me 
by a distant echo. Perhaps without knowing it, I might 
have been crying aloud. I resolutely closed my lips, and 
once more placed my ear to the huge granite wall. 

Yes, for certain. It was in truth the sound of human 
voices. 

I now by the exercise of great determination dragged 
myself along the sides of the cavern, until I reached a 
point where I could hear more distinctly. But though I 
could detect the sound, I could only make out uncertain, 
strange, and incomprehensible words. They reached my 
ear as if they had been spoken in a low tone—murmured, 
as it were, afar off. 

At last, I made out the word forlorad repeated several 
times in a tone betokening great mental anguish and sor¬ 
row. 

What could this word mean, and who was speaking it ? 
It must be either my uncle or the guide Hans I If, there- 


156 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

fore, I could hear them, they must surely be able to hear 
me. 

“ Help,” I cried at the top of my voice; “ help, I am 
dying! ” 

I then listened with scarcely a breath; I panted for the 
slightest sound in the darkness—a cry, a sigh, a question ! 
But silence reigned supreme. No answer came! In this 
way some minutes passed. A whole flood of ideas flashed 
through my mind. I began to fear that my voice weak¬ 
ened by sickness and suffering could not reach my compa¬ 
nions who were in search of me. 

“ It must be them,” I cried ; “ what other men can by 
possibility be buried a hundred miles below the level of 
the earth ? ” The mere supposition was preposterous. 

I began, therefore, to listen again with the most breath¬ 
less attention. As I moved my ears along the side of the 
place I was in, I found a mathematical point as it were, 
where the voices appeared to attain their maximum of in¬ 
tensity. The word forlorad again distinctly reached my 
ear. Then came again that rolling noise like thunder 
which had awakened me out of torpor. 

“ I begin to understand,” I said to myself after some lit¬ 
tle time devoted to reflection ; “ it is not through the solid 
mass that the sound reaches my ears. The walls of my 
cavernous retreat are of solid granite, and the most fearful 
explosion would not make uproar enough to penetrate 
them. The sound must come along the gallery itself. The 
place I was in must possess some peculiar acoustic proper¬ 
ties of its own.” 

Again I listened ; and this time—yes, this time—I heard 
my name distinctly pronounced : cast as it were into space. 

It was my uncle the Professor who was speaking. He 
was in conversation with the guide, and the word which 
had so often reached my ears, forlorad, was a Danish ex¬ 
pression. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 157 

Then I understood it all. In order to make myself 
heard, I too must speak as it were along the side of the 
gallery, which would carry the sound of my voice just as 
the wire carries the electric fluid from point to point. 

But there was no time to lose. If my companions were 
only to remove a few feet from where they stood, the acous¬ 
tic effect would be over, my Whispering Gallery would be 
destroyed. I again therefore crawled towards the wall, 
and said as clearly and distinctly as I could— 

“ Uncle Hardwigg.” 

I then awaited a reply. 

Sound does not possess the property of travelling with 
such extreme rapidity. Besides the density of the air at 
that depth from light and motion, was very far from add¬ 
ing to the rapidity of circulation. Several seconds elapsed, 
which to my excited imagination, appeared ages; and 
these wo.rds reached my eager ears, and moved my wildly 
beating heart— 

“ Harry, my boy, is that you ?” 

A short delay between question and answer. 

“ Yes—yes.” 

“ Where are you ?” 

“ Lost 1” 

“ And your lamp ?” 

“ Out” 

“ But the guiding stream ?” 

“ Is lost!” 

“ Keep your courage, Harry. We will do our best ” 

“ One moment, my un,cle,” I cried ; “ I have no longer 
strength to answer your questions. But—for heaven’s 
sake—do you—continue—to speak—to me !” 

Absolute silence I felt, would be annihilation. 

“ Keep up your courage,” said my uncle. “ As you are 
so weak do not speak. We have been searching for you 
in all directions, both by going upwards and downwards 


158 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

in the gallery. My dear boy, I had begun to give over all 
hope—and you can never know what bitter tears of sorrow 
and regret I have shed. At last, supposing you to be still 
on the road beside the Hansbach we again descended, 
firing off guns as signals. Now, however, that we have 
found you, and that our voices reach each other, it may 
be a long time before we actually meet. We are convers¬ 
ing by means of some extraordinary acoustic arrangement 
of the labyrinth. But do not despair, my dear boy. It 
is something gained even to hear each other.” 

While he was speaking my brain was at work reflecting. 
A certain undefined hope, vague and shapeless as yet, 
made my heart beat wildly. In the first place, it was ab¬ 
solutely necessary for me to know one thing. I once more 
therefore leaned my head against the wall, which I almost 
touched with my lips, and again spoke. 

“ Uncle.” 

“ My boy,” was his ready answer. 

“ It is of the utmost consequence that we should know 
how far we are asunder.” 

“ That is not difficult.” 

“You have your chronometer at hand?” I asked. 

“ Certainly.” 

“ Well, take it into your hand. Pronounce my name, 
noting exactly the second at which you speak. I will 
reply as soon as I hear your words—and you will then 
note exactly the moment at which my reply reaches you.” 

“ Very good ; and the mean time between my question 
and your answer will be the time occupied by my voice in 
reaching you.” 

“ That is exactly what I mean, uncle,” was my eager reply. 

“ Are you ready ?” 

“Yes.” 

“Well, make ready, I am about to pronounce your 
name,” said the Professor. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 159 

I applied my ear close to the sides of the cavernous 
gallery, and as soon as the word Harry reached my ear, I 
turned round, and placing my lips to the wall, repeated 
the sound. 

“ Forty seconds,” said my uncle. “ There has elapsed 
forty seconds between the two words. The sound, there¬ 
fore, takes twenty seconds to ascend. Now, allowing a 
thousand and twenty feet for every second—we have 
twenty thousand four hundred feet—a league and a half 
and one-eighth.” 

These words fell on my soul like a kind of death-knell. 

“A league and a-half,” I muttered in a low and despair¬ 
ing voice. 

“ It shall be got over, my boy,” cried my uncle in a 
cheery tone ; “ depend on us.” 

“ But do you know whether to ascend or descend ?” I 
asked faintly enough. 

“We have to descend, and I will tell you why. You 
have reached a vast open space, a kind of bare cross road, 
from which galleries diverge in every direction. That in 
which you are now lying, must necessarily bring you to 
this point, for it appears that all these mighty fissures, 
these fractures of the globe’s interior radiate from the vast 
cavern which we at this moment occupy. Rouse yourself, 
then, have courage and continue your route. Walk if you 
can, if not drag yourself along—slide, if nothing else is 
possible. The slope must be rather rapid—and you will 
find strong arms to receive you at the end of your journey. 
Make a start, like a good fellow.” 

These words served to rouse some kind of courage in 
my sinking frame. 

“ Farewell for the present, good uncle, I am about to 
take my departure. As soon as I start, our voices will 
cease to commingle. Farewell, then, until we meet 
again.” 


160 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

“ Adieu, Harry—until we say Welcome.” Such were 
the last words which reached my anxious ears, before I 
commenced my weary and almost hopeless journey. 

This wonderful and surprising conversation which took 
place through the vast mass of the earth’s labyrinth, these 
words exchanged, the speakers being about five miles apart 
—ended with hopeful and pleasant expressions. I breathed 
one more prayer to Heaven, I sent up words of thanks¬ 
giving—believing in my inmost heart that He had led me 
to the only place where the voices of my friends could 
reach my ears. 

This apparently astounding acoustic mystery is easily 
explainable by simple natural laws; it arose from the con- 
ductibility of the rock. There are many instances of this 
singular propagation of sound which are not perceptible 
in its less mediate positions. In the interior gallery of St. 
Paul’s, and amid the curious caverns in Sicily, these phe¬ 
nomena are observable. The most marvellous of them all 
is known as the Ear of Dionysius. 

These memories of the past, of my early reading and 
studies, came fresh to my thoughts. Moreover, I began to 
reason that if my uncle and I could communicate at so 
great a distance, no serious obstacle could exist between 
us. All I had to do was to follow the direction whence 
the sound had reached me; and, logically putting it, I 
must reach him if my strength did not fail. 

I accordingly rose to my feet. I soon found, however, 
that I could not walk; that I must drag myself along. 
The slope as I expected, was very rapid; but I allowed 
myself to slip down. 

Soon the rapidity of the descent began to assume fright¬ 
ful proportions; and menaced a fearful fall. I clutched 
at the sides ; I grasped at projections of rocks; I threw 
myself backwards. All in vain. My weakness was so 
great I could do nothing to save myself. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 161 
Suddenly earth failed me. 

I was first launched into a dark, and gloomy void. I 
then struck against the projecting asperities of a vertical 
gallery, a perfect well. My head bounded against a 
pointed rock, and I lost all knowledge of existence. As 
far as I was concerned, death had claimed me for his own. 


162 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE oe the earth. 


CHAPTER XXVI. 

A RAPID RECOVERY. 

When I returned to the consciousness of existence, I 
found myself surrounded by a kind of semi-obscurity, 
lying on some thick and soft coverlids. My uncle was 
watching—his eyes fixed intently on my countenance, a 
grave expression on his face; a tear in his eye. At the 
first sigh which struggled from my bosom he took hold of 
my hand. When he saw my eyes open and fix themselves 
upon his, he uttered a loud cry of joy. 

“ He lives! he lives! ” 

“Yes, my good uncle,” I whispered. 

“ My dear boy,” continued the grim Professor, clasping 
me to his heart, “you are saved!” . 

I was deeply and unaffectedly touched by the tone in 
which these words were uttered, and even more by the 
kindly care which accompanied them. The Professor, 
however, was one of those men who must be severely tried 
in order to induce any display of affection or gentle emo¬ 
tion. At this moment our friend Hans, the guide, joined 
us. He saw my hand in that of my uncle, and I venture 
to say that, taciturn as he was, his eyes beamed with lively 
satisfaction. 

“ God dag,” he said. 

“Good day, Hans, good day,” I replied, in as hearty a 
tone as I could assume, “ and now, uncle, that we are to¬ 
gether, tell me where we are. I have lost all idea of our 
position, as of everything else.” 

' “ To-morrow, Harry, to-morrow,” he replied. “ To-day 
you are far too weak. Your head is surrounded with 
bandages and poultices that must not be touched. Sleep, 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 163 

my boy, sleep, and to-morrow you will know all that you 
require.” 

“But,” I cried, “let me know what o’clock it is—what 
day it is ? ” 

“It is now eleven o’clock at night, and this is once more 
Sunday. It is now the ninth of the month of August. 
And I distinctly prohibit you from asking any more ques¬ 
tions until the tenth of the same.” 

I was, if the truth were told, very weak indeed, and my 
eyes soon closed involuntarily. I did require a good 
night s rest, and I went off reflecting at the last moment 
that my perilous adventure in the interior of the earth, in 
total darkness, had lasted four days! 

On the morning of the next day, at my awakening, I 
began to look around me. My sleeping-place, made offall 
our travelling bedding, was in a charming grotto, adorned 
with magnificent stalagmites, glittering in all the colors of 
the rainbow, the floor of soft and silvery sand. 

A dim obscurity prevailed. No torch, no lamp was 
lighted, and yet certain unexplained beams of light pene¬ 
trated from without, and made their way through the 
opening of the beautiful grotto. 

I, moreover, heard a vague and indefinite murmur, like 
the ebb and flow of waves upon a strand, and sometimes I 
verily believed I could hear the sighing of the wind. 

I began to believe that, instead of being awake, I must 
be dreaming. Surely my brain had not been affected by 
my fall, and all that occurred during the last twenty-four 
hours was not the frenzied visions of madness ? And yet 
after some reflection, a trial of my faculties, I came to the 
conclusion that I could not be mistaken. Eyes and ears 
could not surely both deceive me. 

It is a ray of the blessed daylight,” I said to myself, 

“ which has penetrated through some mighty fissure in the 
rocks. But what is the meaning of this murmur of waves, 


164 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

this unmistakable moaning of the salt sea billows ? I can 
hear, too, plainly enough, the whistling of the wind. But 
can I be altogether mistaken ? If my uncle, during my 
illness, has but carried me back to the surface of the 
earth! Has he, on my account, given up his wondrous 
expedition, or in some strange manner has it come to an 
end?” 

I was puzzling my brain over these and other questions, 
when the Professor joined me. 

“ Good-day, Harry,” he cried in a joyous tone. “ I 
fancy you are quite well.” 

“ I am very much better,” I replied, actually sitting up 
in my bed. 

“ I knew that would be the end of it, as you slept both 
soundly and tranquilly. Hans and I have each taken 
turn to watch, and every hour we have seen visible signs 
of amelioration.” 

“ You must be right, uncle,” was my reply, “for I feel 
as if I could do justice to any meal you could put before 
me. I am really hungry.” 

“ You shall eat, my boy, you shall eat. The fever has 
left you. Our excellent friend Hans has rubbed your 
wounds and bruises, with I know not what ointment, of 
which the Icelanders alone possess the secret. And they 
have healed your bruises in the most marvellous manner. 
Ah, he’s a wise fellow, is Master Hans.” 

While he was speaking, my uncle was placing before 
me several articles of food, which despite his earnest injunc¬ 
tions, I readily devoured. As soon as the first rage of 
hunger was appeased, I overwhelmed him with questions, 
to which he now no longer hesitated to give answers. 

I then learned, for the first time, that my providential 
fall had brought me to the bottom of an almost perpen¬ 
dicular gallery. As I came down, amidst a perfect shower 
of stones, the least of which falling on me would have 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 165 

crushed me to death, they came to the conclusion that I 
had carried with me an entire dislocated rock. Riding as 
it were on this terrible chariot, I was cast headlong into my 
uncle’s arms. And into them X fell, insensible and covered 
with blood. 

“It is indeed a miracle,” was the Professor’s final re¬ 
mark, “ that you were not killed a thousand times over. 
But let us take care never to separate; for surely we should 
risk never meeting again.” 

“ Let us take care never again to separate.” 

These words fell with a sort of chill upon my heart. 
The journey, then, was not over. I looked at my uncle 
with surprise and astonishment. My uncle, after an in¬ 
stant’s examination of my countenance, said— 

“ What is the matter, Harry ?” 

“ 1 waut to as k you a very serious question. You sav 
that I am all right in health ?” 

“ Certainly you are.” 

And all my limbs are sound and capable of new exer¬ 
tion ?” I asked. 

“ Most undoubtedly.” 

“ Lat what about my head ?” was my next anxious 
question. 

“ Well, your head, except that you have one or two con¬ 
tusions, is exactly where it ought to be—on your shoulder,” 
said my uncle, laughing. 

“ Well, my own opinion is that my head is not exactly 
right. In fact, I believe myself slightly delirious.” 

“ What makes you think so?” 

“ I will explain why I fancy I have lost my senses,” I 
cried; “ have we not returned to the surface of mother earth?” 

“ Certainly not.” 

“ Then truly I must be mad, for do I not see the light 
of day? do I not hear the whistling of the wind? and can 
I not distinguish the wash of a great sea ?” 


166 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

“And that is all that makes you uneasy?” said my 
uncle, with a smile. 

“Can you explain?” 

“ I will not make any attempt to explain ; for the whole 
matter is utterly inexplicable. But you shall see and judge 
for yourself. You will then find that geological science is 
as yet in its infancy—and that we are doomed to enlighten 
the world.” 

“ Let us advance, then,” I cried eagerly, no longer able 
to restrain my curiosity. 

“ Wait a moment, my dear Harry,” he responded; “you 
must take precautions after your illness before going into 
the open air.” 

“ The open air ? ” 

“ Yes, my boy. I have to warn you that the wind is 
rather violent—and I have no wish for you to expose 
yourself without necessary precautions.” 

“ But I beg to assure you that I am perfectly recovered 
from my illness.” 

“ Have just a little patience, my boy. A relapse would 
be inconvenient to all parties. We have no time to lose— 
as our approaching sea voyage may be of long duration.” 

“ Sea voyage ? ” I cried, more bewildered than ever. 

“Yes. You must take another day’s rest, and we shall 
be ready to go on board by to-morrow,” replied my uncle, 
with a peculiar smile. 

Go on board ! The words utterly astonished me. 

Go on board—what and how ? Had we come upon a 
river, a lake, had we discovered some inland sea ? Was a 
vessel lying at anchor in some part of the interior of the 
earth ? 

My curiosity was worked up to the very highest pitch. 
My uncle made vain attempts to restrain me. When at 
last, however, he discovered that my feverish impatience 
would do more harm than good—and that the satisfaction 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 167 

of my wishes could alone restore me to a calm state of 
mind, he gave way. 

I dressed myself rapidly-and then taking the precau- 
ion to please my uncle, of wrapping myself in one of the 
coverlets, I rushed out of the grotto. 


108 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XXVII. 

THE CENTRAL SEA. 

At first I saw absolutely nothing. My eyes, wholly 
unused to the effulgence of light, could not bear the sud¬ 
den brightness; and I was compelled to close them. 
When I was able to re-open them, I stood still, far more 
stupefied than astonished. Not all the wildest effects of 
imagination could have conjured up such a scene ! 

“ The sea—the sea,” I cried. 

“ Yes,” replied my uncle, in a tone of pardonable pride; 
“ The Central Sea. No future navigator will deny the 
fact of my having discovered it; and hence of acquiring a 
right of giving it a name.” 

It was quite true. A vast, limitless expanse of water, 
the end of a lake if not of an ocean, spread before us, un¬ 
til it was lost in the distance. The shore, which was very 
much indented, consisted of a beautiful soft golden sand, 
mixed with small shells, the long deserted home of some 
of the creatures of a past age. The waves broke inces¬ 
santly, and with a peculiarly sonorous murmur—to be 
found in under-ground localities. A slight frothy flake 
arose as the wind blew along the pellucid waters; and 
many a dash of spray was blown into my face. The 
mighty superstructure of rock which rose above to an in¬ 
conceivable height, left only a narrow opening—but 
where we stood, there was a large margin of strand. On 
all sides were capes and promontories and enormous cliffs, 
partially worn by the eternal breaking of the w T aves, 
through countless ages ! And as I gazed from side to side, 
the mighty rocks faded away like a fleecy film of cloud. 



THE CENTBAE SEA 







































































































































A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF* THE EARTH. 169 

It was in reality an ocean, with all the usual character¬ 
istics of an inland sea, only horribly wild—so rigid, cold 
and savage. 

One thing startled and puzzled me greatly. How was 
it that I was able to look upon that vast sheet of water in¬ 
stead of being plunged in utter darkness ? The vast land¬ 
scape before me was lit up like day. But there was want¬ 
ing the dazzling brilliancy, the splendid irradiation of the 
sun ; the pale cold illumination of the moon; the bright¬ 
ness of the stars. The illuminating power in this subter¬ 
raneous region, from its trembling and flickering charac¬ 
ter, its clear dry whiteness, the very slight elevation of its 
temperature, its great superiority to that of the moon, was 
evidently electric ; something in the nature of the aurora 
borealis, only that its phenomena were constant, and able 
to light up the whole of the ocean cavern. 

The tremendous vault above our heads, the sky, so to 
speak, appeared to be composed of a conglomeration of 
nebulous vapors, in constant motion. I should originally 
have supposed, that under such an atmospheric pressure 
as must exist in that place, the evaporation of water could 
not really take place, and yet from the action of some 
physical law, which escaped my memory, there were heavy 
and dense clouds rolling along that mighty vault, par¬ 
tially concealing the roof. Electric currents produced as- 
tonishing play of light and shade in the distance, es¬ 
pecially around the heavier clouds. Deep shadows were 
cast beneath, and then suddenly, between two clouds, there 
would come a ray of unusual beauty, and remarkable in¬ 
tensity. And yet it was not like the sun, for it gave no 
heat. 

The effect was sad and excruciatingly melancholy. In¬ 
stead of a noble firmament of blue, studded with stars, 
there was above me a heavy roof of granite, which seemed 
to crush me. 


170 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

Gazing around, I began to think of the theory of the 
English captain, who compared the earth to a vast hollow 
sphere in the interior of which the air is retained in a 
luminous state by means of atmospheric pressure, while 
two stars, Pluto and Proserpine, circled there in their 
mysterious orbits. After all, suppose the old fellow was 
right! 

In truth, we were imprisoned—bound as it w r ere, in a 
vast excavation. Its width it was impossible to make out; 
the shore, on either hand, widening rapidly until lost to 
sight; while its length was equally uncertain. A haze on 
the distant horizon bounded our view. As to its height 
we could see that it must be many miles to the roof. 
Looking upward, it was impossible to discover where the 
stupendous roof began. The lowest of the clouds must 
have been floating at an elevation of two thousand yards, 
a height greater than that of terrestrial vapors, which cir¬ 
cumstance was doubtless owing to the extreme density of 
the air. 

I use the word cavern in order to give an idea of the 
place. I cannot describe its awful grandeur; human 
language fails to convey an idea of its savage sublimity. 
Whether this singular vacuum had or had not been caused 
by the sudden cooling of the earth when in a state of 
fusion, I could not say. I had read of most wonderful 
and gigantic caverns—but none in any way like this. 

The great grotto of Guachara, in Columbia, visited by 
the learned Humboldt; the vast and partially explored 
Mammoth Cave in Kentucky; what were these holes in 
the earth to that in which I stood in speechless admira¬ 
tion ! with its vapory clouds, its electric light, and the 
mighty ocean slumbering in its bosom ! Imagination, not 
description, can alone give an idea of the splendor and 
vastness of the cave. 

I gazed at these marvels in profound silence. Words 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 171 

were utterly wanting to indicate the sensations of wonder 
I experienced. I seemed, as I stood upon that mysterious 
shore, as if I were some wandering inhabitant of a distant 
planet, present for the first time at the spectacle of some 
terrestrial phenomena belonging to another existence. To 
give body and existence to such new sensations, would 
have required the coinage of new words—and here my 
feeble brain found itself wholly at fault. I looked on, I 
thought, I reflected, I admired, in a state of stupefaction 
not altogether unmingled with fear! 

The unexpected spectacle restored some color to my 
pallid cheeks. I seemed to be actually getting better 
under the influence of this novelty. Moreover, the viva¬ 
city of the dense atmosphere, reanimated my body, by in¬ 
flating my lungs with unaccustomed oxygen. 

It will be readily conceived that after an imprisonment 
of forty-seven days, in a dark and miserable tunnel, it was 
with infinite delight that I breathed this saline air. It was 
like the genial, reviving influence of the salt sea waves. 

My uncle had already got over the first surprise. 

With the Latin poet Horace his idea was that— 

“ Not to admire is all the art I know, 

To make man happy and to keep him so.” 

“ Well,” he said, after giving me time thoroughly to 
appreciate the marvels of this underground sea, “ do you 
feel strong enough to walk up and down ? ” 

“ Certainly,” was my ready answer, “ nothing would give 
me greater pleasure.” 

“ Well then, my boy,” he said, “ lean on my arm, and we 
will stroll along the beach.” 

I accepted his offer eagerly, and we began to walk along 
the shores of this extraordinary lake. To our left were 
abrupt rocks, piled one upon the other,—a stupendous ti¬ 
tanic pile; down their sides leapt innumerable cascades, 


172 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

which at last, becoming limpid and murmuring streams, 
were lost in the waters of the lake. Light vapors, which 
rose here and there, and floated in fleecy clouds from rock 
to rock, indicated hot springs, which also poured their su¬ 
perfluity into the vast reservoir at our feet. 

Among them I recognized our old and faithful stream, 
the Hansbach, which, lost in that wild basin, seemed as if 
it had been flowing since the creation of the world. 

“We shall miss our excellent friend,” I remarked, with 
a deep sigh. 

“Bah! ” said my uncle, testily, “what matters it. That 
or another, it is all the same.” 

• I thought the remark ungrateful, and felt almost in¬ 
clined to say so; but I forbore. 

At this moment my attention was attracted by an unex¬ 
pected spectacle. After we had gone about five hundred 
yards, we suddenly turned a steep promontory, and found 
ourselves close to a lofty forest! It consisted of straight 
trunks with tufted tops, in shape like parasols. The air 
seemed to have no effect upon these trees—which in spite 
of a tolerable breeze remained as still and motionless as if 
they had been petrified. 

I hastened forward. I could find no name for these sin¬ 
gular formations. Did they not belong to the two thou¬ 
sand and more known trees—or were we to make the 
discovery of a new growth ? By no means. When we at 
last reached the forest, and stood beneath the trees, my 
surprise gave way to admiration. 

In truth, I was simply in the presence of a very ordi¬ 
nary product of the earth, of singular and gigantic 
proportions. My uncle unhesitatingly called them by their 
real names. 

“ It is only,” he said, in his coolest manner, “ a forest of 
mushrooms.” 

On close examination I found that he was not mistaken. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 173 

Judge of the development attained by this product of 
damp hot soils. I had heard that the lycoperdon giganteum 
reaches nine feet in circumference, but here were white 
mushrooms, nearly forty feet high, and with tops of equal 
dimensions. They grew in countless thousands—the light 
could not make its way through their massive substance, 
and beneath them reigned a gloomy and mystic darkness. 

Still I wished to go forward. The cold in the shades of 
this singular forest was intense. For nearly an hour we 
wandered about in this darkness visible. At length I left 
the spot, and once more returned to the shores of the lake, 
to light and comparative warmth. 

But the amazing vegetation of subterraneous land was 
not confined to gigantic mushrooms. New wonders awaited 
us at every step. We had not gone many hundred yards, 
when we came upon a mighty group of other trees with dis¬ 
colored leaves—the common humble trees of mother earth, 
of an exorbitant and phenomenal size: lycopodes a hun¬ 
dred feet high; flowering ferns as tall as pines; gigantic 
grasses! 

“ Astonishing, magnificent, splendid!” cried my uncle; 
“ here we have before us the whole Flora of the second 
period of the world, that of transition. Behold the humble 
plants of our gardens, which in the first ages of the world 
were mighty trees. Look around you, my dear Harry. 
No botanist ever before gazed on such a sight! ” 

M'y uncle’s enthusiasm, always a little more than was 
required, was now excusable. 

“ You are right, uncle,” I remarked. “ Providence ap¬ 
pears to have designed the preservation in this vast and 
mysterious hot-house of antediluvian plants, to prove the 
sagacity of learned men in figuring them so marvellously 
on paper.” 

“ Well said, my boy—very well said; it is indeed a 
mighty hot-house;—but you would also be within the 


174 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

bounds of reason and common sense, if you also added—a 
vast menagerie.” 

I looked rather anxiously around. If the animals were 
as exaggerated as the plants, the matter would certainly 
be serious. 

“ A menagerie ? ” 

“ Doubtless. Look at the dust we are treading under 
foot—behold the bones with which the whole soil of the 
sea shore is covered-” 

“ Bones,” I replied, “ yes, certainly, the bones of ante¬ 
diluvian animals.” 

I stooped down as I spoke, and picked up one or two 
singular remains, relics of a by-gone age. It was easy to give 
a name to these gigantic bones, in some instances as big as 
trunks of trees. 

“ Here is, clearly, the lower jaw-bone of a mastodon,” I 
cried, almost as warmly and enthusiastically as my uncle, 
“ here are the molars of the dinotherium; here is a leg- 
bone which belonged to the megatherium. You are right, 
uncle, it is indeed a menagerie.; for the mighty animals to 
which these bones once belonged, have lived and died on 
the shores of this subterranean sea, under the shadow of 
these plants. Look, yonder are whole skeletons—and 
yet-” 

“ And yet, nephew ? ” said my uncle, noticing that I 
suddenly came to a full stop. 

“ I do not understand the presence of such beasts in 
granite caverns, however vast and prodigious,” was my 
reply. 

“ Why not?” said my uncle, with very much of his old 
professional impatience. 

“ Because it is well known that animal life only existed 
on earth during the secondary period, when the sedimen¬ 
tary soil was formed by the alluviums, and thus replaced 
the hot and burning rocks of the primitive age.” 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 175 

“ I have listened to you earnestly and with patience, 
Harry, and I have a simple and clear answer to your ob¬ 
jections : and that is, that this itself is a sedimentary soil.” 

“ How can that be at such enormous depth from the sur¬ 
face of the earth ? ” 

“ The fact can be explained both simply and geologi¬ 
cally. At a certain period, the earth consisted only of an 
elastic crust, liable to alternative upward and downward 
movements in virtue of the law of attraction. It is very 
probable that many a landslip took place in those days, 
and that large portions of sedimentary soil were cast into 
huge and mighty chasms.” 

v Quite possible,” I drily remarked. “ But uncle, if these 
antediluvian animals formerly lived in these subterranean 
regions, what more likely that one of these huge monsters 
may at this moment be concealed behind one of yonder 
mighty rocks.” 

As I spoke, I looked keenly around, examining with care 
every point of the horizon ; but nothing alive appeared to 
exist on these deserted shores. 

I now felt rather fatigued, and told my uncle so. The 
walk and excitement were too much for me in my weak 
state. I therefore seated myself at the end of a promon¬ 
tory, at the foot of which the waves broke in incessant 
rolls. I looked round a bay formed by projections of vast 
granitic rocks. At the extreme end was a little port pro¬ 
tected by huge pyramids of stones. A brig and three or 
four schooners might have lain there with perfect ease. 
So natural did it seem, that every minute my imagination 
induced me to expect a vessel coming- out under all sail 
and making for the open sea under the influence of a 
warm southerly breeze. 

But the fantastic illusion never lasted more than a 
minute. We were the only living creatures in this sub¬ 
terranean world ! 


176 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

During certain periods there was an utter cessation of 
wind, when a silence deeper, more terrible than the silence 
of the desert fell upon these solitary and arid rocks—and 
seemed to hang like a leaden weight upon the waters of 
this singular ocean. I sought, amid the awful stillness, to 
penetrate through the distant fog, to tear down the veil 
which concealed the mysterious distance. What unspoken 
words were murmured by my trembling lips—what 
questions did I wish to ask and did not! Where did this 
sea end—to what did it lead ? Should we ever be able 
to examine its distant shores ? 

But my uncle had no doubts about the matter. He was 
convinced that our enterprise w r ould in the end be success¬ 
ful. For my part, I was in a state of painful indecision— 
I desired to embark on the journey and to succeed, and 
still I feared the result. 

After we had passed an hour or more in silent contem¬ 
plation of the wondrous spectacle, we rose and went down 
towards the bank on our way to the grotto, which I was 
not sorry to gain. After a slight repast, I sought refuge 
in slumber, and at length, after many and tedious strug¬ 
gles, sleep came over my weary eyes. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 177 


CHAPTER XXVIII. 

LAUNCHING THE RAFT. 

On the morning of the next day, to my great surprise, 1 
awoke completely restored. I thought a bath would be 
delightful after my long illness and sufferings. So, soon 
after rising, I went and plunged into the waters of this new 
Mediterranean. The bath was cool, fresh and invigo¬ 
rating. 

I came back to breakfast with an excellent appetite. 
Hans, our worthy guide, thoroughly understood how to 
cook such eatables as we were able to provide; he had 
both fire and water at discretion, so that he was enabled 
slightly to vary the weary monotony of our ordinary re¬ 
past. 

Our morning meal was like a capital English breakfast, 
with coffee by way of a wind up. And never had this 
delicious beverage been so welcome and refreshing. 

My uncle had sufficient regard for my state of health 
not to interrupt me in the enjoyment of the meal, but he 
was evidently delighted when I had finished. 

“ Now then,” said he, “ come with me. It is the height 
of the tide, and I am anxious to study its curious phe¬ 
nomena.” 

“ What,” I cried, rising in astonishment, “ did you say 
the tide, uncle ? ” 

“ Certainly I did.” 

“ You do not mean to say,” I replied, in a tone of re¬ 
spectful doubt, “ that the influence of the sun and mooD 
is felt here below.” 

“ And pray why not ? Are not all bodies influenced by 
the law of universal attraction? Why should this vast 


178 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

underground sea be exempt from the general law, the rule 
of the universe ? Besides, there is nothing like that which 
is proved and demonstrated. Despite the great atmos¬ 
pheric pressure down here, you will notice that this inland 
sea rises and falls with as much regularity as the Atlantic 
itself.” 

As my uncle spoke, we reached the sandy shore, and 
saw and heard the waves breaking monotonously on the 
beach. They were evidently rising. 

This is truly the flood,” I cried, looking at the water at 
my feet. 

. “ Yes > m y excellent nephew,” replied my uncle, rubbing 
his hands with the gusto of a philosopher, “ and you see 
by these several streaks of foam, that the tide rises at least 
ten or twelve feet.” 

“ It is indeed marvellous.” 

“ By no means,” he responded; “ on the contrary, it is 
quite natural.” 

“ ma y a PPear so in your eyes, my dear uncle,” was 
my reply, “ but the whole phenomena of the place appear 
to me to partake of the marvellous. It is almost impossi¬ 
ble to believe that which I see. Who in his wildest 
dreams could have imagined that, beneath the crust of our 
earth, there could exist a real ocean, with ebbing and flow¬ 
ing tides, with its changes of winds, and even its storms. 

I for one should have laughed the suggestion to scorn.” 

“But, Harry, my boy, why not?” inquired my uncle, 
with a pitying smile, “ is there any physical reason in op¬ 
position to it ?” ^ 

“ Well, if we give up the great theory of the central heat 
of the earth, I certainly can offer no reasons why anything 
should be looked upon as impossible.” 

“Then you will own,” he added, “that the system of 

bir Humphrey Davy is wholly justified by what we have 
seen { 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 179 

I allow that it is and that point once granted, I cer¬ 
tainly can see no reason for doubting the existence of seas and 
other wonders, even countries, in the interior of the globe.” 

That is so but of course these varied countries are 
uninhabited ?” 

“ Well > 1 g rant that it is more likely than not: still, I 
do not see why this sea should not have given shelter’to 
some species of unknown fish.” 

Hitherto we have not discovered any, and the proba¬ 
bilities are rather against our ever doing so,” observed the 
Professor. 

I was losing my skepticism in the presence of these 
wonders. 

“ Well, I am determined to solve the question. It is my 
intention to try my luck with my fishing line and hook.” 

“ Certainly; make the experiment,” said my uncle, 
pleased with my enthusiasm. “ While we are about it, it 
will certainly be only proper to discover all the secrets of 
this extraordinary region.” 

. “ But > after all > where are we now?” I asked ; “all this 
time I have quite forgotten to ask you a question, which, 
doubtless, your philosophical instruments have long since 
answered.” 

“ Well,” replied the Professor, “examining the situation 
from only one point of view, we are now distant three 
hundred and fifty leagues from Iceland.” 

“ So much ?” was my exclamation. 

“I have gone over the matter several times, and am 
sure not to have made a mistake of five hundred yards,” 
replied my uncle positively. 

And as to the direction—are we still going to the 
south-east ?” 

Yes, with a western declination * of nineteen degrees, 

* The declination is the variation of the needle from the true meridian 
of a place. 


180 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

forty-two minutes, just as it is above. As for the inclina¬ 
tion* I have discovered a very curious fact.” 

“What may that be, uncle? Your information in¬ 
terests me.” 

“ Why that the needle, instead of dipping towards the 
pole as it does on earth, in the northern hemisphere, has 
an upward tendency.” 

“ This proves,” I cried, “ that the great point of magne¬ 
tic attraction lies somewhere between the surface of the 
earth and the spot we have succeeded in reaching.” 

“ Exactly, my observant nephew,” exclaimed my uncle, 
elated and delighted, “ and it is quite probable that if we 
succeed in getting toward the polar regions—somewhere 
near the seventy-third degree of latitude, where Sir James 
Ross discovered the magnetic pole, we shall behold the 
needle point directly upward. We have therefore dis¬ 
covered by analogy, that this great centre of attraction is 
not situated at a very great depth.” 

“Well,” said I, rather surprised, “ this discovery will 
astonish experimental philosophers. It was never sus¬ 
pected.” 

“ Science, great, mighty and in the end unerring,” re¬ 
plied my uncle dogmatically, “science has fallen into 
many errors—errors which have been fortunate and useful 
rather than otherwise, for they have been the stepping- 
stones to truth.” 

After some further discussion, I turned to another 
matter. 

“ Have you any idea of the depth we have reached ?” 

“We are now,” continued the Professor, “exactly thirty- 
five leagues—above a hundred miles—down into the in¬ 
terior of the earth.” 

“ So,” said I, after measuring the distance on the map, 

* Inclination is the dip of the magnetic needle with a tendency to incline 
towards the earth. 


A journeV to the centre of the earth. 181 

we are now beneath the Scottish Highlands, and have 
over our heads the lofty Grampian hills.” 

“You are quite right,” said the Professor laughing, “it 
sounds very alarming, the weight being heavy—but the 
vault which supports this vast mass of earth and rock is 
solid and safe—the mighty Architect of the Universe has 
constructed it of solid materials. Man, even in his high¬ 
est flights of vivid and poetic imagination, never thought 
of such things! What are the finest arches of our bridges, 
what the vaulted roofs of our cathedrals, to that mighty 
dome above us, and beneath which floats an ocean with its 
storms and calms and tides!” 

“ I admire it all as much as you can, uncle, and have 
no fear that our granite sky will fall upon our heads. 
But now that we have discussed matters of science and dis¬ 
covery, what are your future intentions ? Are you not think¬ 
ing of getting back to the surface of our beautiful earth ?” 

This was said more as a feeler than with any hope of 
success. 

“ Go back, nephew,” cried my uncle in a tone of alarm, 
“ you are not surely thinking of anything so absurd or 
cowardly. No, my intention is to advance and continue 
our journey. We have as yet been singularly fortunate, 
and henceforth I hope we shall be more so.” 

“But,” said I, “how are we to cross yonder liquid 
plain ?” 

“ It is not my intention to leap into it head foremost, or 
even to swim across it, like Leander over the Hellespont. 
But as oceans are, after all, only great lakes, inasmuch as 
they are surrounded by land, so does it stand to reason, that 
this central sea is circumscribed by granite surroundings.” 

“ Doubtless,” was my natural reply. 

“ Well, then, do you not think that when once we reach 
the other end, we shall find some means of continuing oui 
journey ?” 


182 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF *DHE EARTH. 

“ Probably, but what extent do you allow to this inter¬ 
nal ocean ? ” 

“ Well, I should fancy it to extend about forty or fifty 
leagues—more or less.” 

“ But even supposing this approximation to be a correct 
one—what then ? ” I asked. 

“ My dear boy, we have no time for further discussion. 
We shall embark to-morrow.” 

I looked around with surprise and incredulity. I could 
see nothing in the shape of boat or vessel. 

“ What! ” I cried, “ we are about to launch out upon 
an unknown sea; and where, if I may ask, is the vessel 
to carry us ? ” 

“ Well, my dear boy, it will not be exactly what you 
would call a vessel. For the present we must be content 
with a good and solid raft.” 

“ A raft,” I cried, incredulously, “ but down here a raft 
is as impossible of construction as a vessel—and I am at 
a loss to imagine—” 

“ My good Harry—if you were to listen instead of talk¬ 
ing so much, you would hear,” said my uncle, waxing a 
little impatient. 

“ I should hear ? ” 

“ Yes—certain knocks with the hammer, which Hans is 
now employing to make the raft. He has been at work 
for many hours.” 

“ Making a raft ? ” 

“ Yes.” 

“ But where has he found trees suitable for such a con¬ 
struction ? ” 

“ He found the trees all ready to his hand. Come, and 
you shall see our excellent guide at work.” 

More and more amazed at what I heard and saw, I fol¬ 
lowed my uncle like one in a dream. 

After a walk of about a quarter of an hour, I saw Hans at 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 183 

work on the other side of the promontory which formed our 
natural port. A few minutes more and I was beside him. 
To my great surprise, on the sandy shore lay a half-finished 
raft. It was made from beams of a very peculiar wood, and 
a great number of limbs, joints, boughs, and pieces lay 
about, sufficient to have constructed a fleet of ships and boats. 
I turned to my -uncle, silent with astonishment and awe. 
“Where did all this wood come * from 2” I cried; 
“ what wood is it?” 

“Well, there is pine-wood, fir, and the palms of the 
northern regions, mineralized by the action of the sea,” he 
replied, sententiously. • 

“ Can it be possible ? ” 

“ Yes,” said the learned Professor, “ what you see is 
called fossil wood.” 

“ But then,” cried I, after reflecting for a moment, 
“ like the lignites, it must be as hard and as heavy as iron, 
and therefore will certainly not float.” 

“ Sometimes that is the case. Many of these woods 
have become true anthracites, but others again, like those 
you see before you, have only undergone one phase of 
fossil transformation. But there is no proof like demon¬ 
stration,” added my uncle, picking one or two of these 
precious waifs and casting them into the sea. 

The piece of wood, after haying disappeared for a mo¬ 
ment, came to the surface, and floated about with the 
oscillation produced by wind and tide. 

“ Are you convinced ? ” said my uncle, with a self- 
satisfied smile. 

“I am convinced,” I cried, “ that what I see is incredible.’’ 
The fact was that my journey into the interior of the 
earth was rapidly changing all preconceived notions, and 
day by day preparing me for the marvellous. 

I should not have been surprised to have seen a fleet of 
native canoes afloat upon that silent sea. 


184 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

The very next evening, thanks to the industry and abili¬ 
ty of Hans, the raft was finished. It was about ten feet 
long and five feet wide. The beams bound together with 
stout ropes, were solid and firm, and once launched by our 
united efforts, the improvised vessel floated tranquilly upon 
the v ars of what the Professor had well named the Cen¬ 
tral Sea. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 185 


CHAPTER XXIX. 


ON THE WATERS.—A RAFT VOYAGE. 


. d b 

On the 13th of August we were up betimes.^ There 
was no time to be lost. We now had to inaugurate a new 
kind of locomotion, which would have the tage of 

being rapid and not fatiguing. palms 

A mast, made of two pieces of wood fastei the se^ether, 
to give' additional strength, a yard made from . r one, 
the sail a linen sheet from our bed. We were ^rtunately 
in no want of cordage, and the whole on trial appeared 
solid and seaworthy. 

At six o’clock in the morning, when the eager and en¬ 
thusiastic Professor gave the signal to embark, the victuals, 
the luggage, all our instruments, our weapons, and a goodly 
supply of sweet water, which we had collected from springs 
in the rocks, were placed on the raft. 

Hans had, with considerable ingenuity, contrived a 
rudder, which enabled him to guide the floating apparatus 
with ease. He took the tiller, as a matter of course. The 
worthy man was as good a sailor as he was a guide and 
duck-hunter. I then let go the painter which held us to 
the shore, the sail was brought to the wind, and we made 
a rapid offing. 

Our sea voyage had at length commenced; and once 
more we were making for distant and unknown regions. 

Just as we were about to leave the little port where the 
raft had been constructed, my uncle, who was very strong 
as to geographic nomenclature, wanted to give it a name, 
and among others, suggested mine. 

“Well,” said I, “before you decide I have another to 


propose.” 


186 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

“ Well; out with it.” 

“I should like to call it Gretchen. Port Gretehen will 
sound very well on our future map.” 

“Well then, Port Gretchen let it be,” said the'Professor. 

And thus it was that the memory of my dear girl was 
attached to our adventurous and memorable expedition. 

When we left the shore the wind was blowing from the 
northward and eastward. We went directly before the 
wind at a much greater speed than might have been ex¬ 
pected from a raft. The dense layers of atmosphere at 
that depth had great propelling power and acted upon the 
sail with considerable force. 

At tlfeend of an hour, my uncle, who had been taking 
careful observations, was enabled to judge of the rapidity 
with which we moved. It was far beyond anything seen 
in the upper world. 

“ If,” he said, “ we continue to advance at our present 
rate, we shall have travelled at least thirty leagues in 
twenty-four hours. With, a mere raft this is an almost 
incredible velocity.” 

I certainly was surprised, and without making any reply 
went forward upon the raft. Already the northern shore 
was fading away on the edge of the horizon. The two 
shores appeared to separate more and more, leaving a wide 
and open space for our departure. Before me I could see 
nothing but the vast and apparently limitless sea—upon 
which we floated—the only living objects in sight. 

Huge and dark clouds cast their grey shadows below— 
shadows which seemed to crush that colorless and sullen 
water by their weight. Anything more suggestive of gloom 
and of regions of nether darkness I never beheld. Silvery 
rays of electric light, reflected here and there upon some 
small spots of water, brought up luminous sparkles in the 
long wake of our cumbrous bark. Presently we were 
wholly out of sight of land, not a vestige could be seen, 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 187 

nor any indication of where we were going. So still and 
motionless did we seem without any distant point to fix 
our eyes on, that but for the phosphoric light at the wake 
of the raft I should have fancied that we were still and 
motionless. 

But I knew that we were advancing at a very rapid rate. 

About twelve o’clock in the day, vast collections of sea¬ 
weed were discovered surrounding us on all sides. I was 
aware of the extraordinary vegetative power of these 
plants, which have been known to creep along the bottom 
of the great ocean, and stop the advance of large ships. 
But never jvere seaweeds ever seen, so gigantic and won¬ 
derful as those of the Central Sea. I could well imagine 
how, seen at a distance, tossing and heaving on the summit 
of the billows, the long lines of Algse have been taken for 
living things, and thus have been the fertile sources of the 
belief in sea serpents. 

Our raft swept past great specimens of fucse or sea- 
wrack, from three to four thousand feet in length, im¬ 
mense, incredibly long, looking like snakes that stretched 
out far beyond our horizon. It afforded me great amuse¬ 
ment to gaze on their variegated ribbon-like endless 
lengths. Hour after hour passed without our coming to 
the termination of these floating weeds. If my astonish¬ 
ment increased, my patience was well-nigh exhausted. 

What natural force could possibly have produced such 
abnormal and extraordinary plants? What must have 
been the aspect of the globe, during the first centuries of 
its formation, when under the combined action of heat 
and humidity, the vegetable kingdom occupied its vast 
surface to the exclusion of everything else ? 

These were considerations of never-ending interest for 
the geologist and the philosopher. 

All this while we were advancing on our journey; and 
at length night came; but as I had remarked the evening 


188 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

before, the luminous state of the atmosphere was in no¬ 
thing diminished. Whatever was the cause, it was a phe¬ 
nomenon upon the duration of which we could calculate 
with certainty. 

As soon as our supper had been disposed of, and some 
little speculative conversation indulged in, I stretched my¬ 
self at the foot of the mass, and presently went to sleep. 

Hans remained motionless at the tiller, allowing the 
raft to rise and fall on the waves. The wind being aft, 
and the sail square, all he had to do was to keep his oar 
in the centre. 

Ever since we had taken our departure from the newly- 
named Port Gretchen, my worthy uncle had directed me 
to keep a regular log of our day’s navigation, with in¬ 
structions to put down even the most minute particulars, 
every interesting and curious phenomenon, the direction 
of the wind, our rate of sailing, the distance we went; in a 
word, every incident of our extraordinary voyage. 

From our log, therefore, I tell the story of our voyage 
on the Central Sea. 

Friday, August 14th. A steady breeze from the north¬ 
west. Raft progressing with extreme rapidity, and going 
perfectly straight. Coast still dimly visible about thirty 
leagues to leeward. Nothing to be seen beyond the hori¬ 
zon in front. The extraordinary intensity of the light 
neither increases nor diminishes. It is singularly station¬ 
ary. The weather remarkably fine; that is to say, the 
clouds have ascended very high, and are light and fleecy, 
and surrounded by an atmosphere resembling silver in 
fusion. 

Thermometer + 32 degrees centigrade. 

About twelve o’clock in the day our guide Hans having 
prepared and baited a hook, cast his line into the subter¬ 
ranean waters. The bait he used was a small piece of 
meat, by means of which he concealed his hook. Anxious 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. l8 f J 

as I was, I was for a Jong time doomed to disappointment. 
Were these waters supplied with fish or not? That was 
tdie important question. No—was my decided answer. 
Ihen there came a sudden and rather hard tug. Hans 
coolly drew it in, and with it a fish, which struggled vio- 
lently to escape. 

A fish, cried my uncle, putting on his spectacles to 
examine it. 

“ It is a sturgeon!” I cried, “ certainly a small sturgeon.” 
The Professor examined the fish carefully, noting every 
characteristic; and he did not coincide in my opinion. 
The fish had a flat head, round body, and the lower ex¬ 
tremities covered with bony scales; its mouth was wholly 
without teeth, the pectoral fins, which were highly devel¬ 
oped, sprouted direct from the body, which properly 
speaking had no tail. The animal certainly belonged to 
the order in which naturalists class the sturgeon, but it 
differed from that fish in many essential particulars. 

My uncle, after all, was not mistaken. After a long 
and patient examination, he said— 

“ This fish, my dear boy, belongs to a family which has 
been extinct for ages, and of which no trace has ever been 
found on earth, except fossil remains in the Devonian 
strata.” 

“ You do not mean to say,” I cried, “that we have cap¬ 
tured a live specimen of a fish belonging to the primitive 
stock that existed before the deluge ?” 

“We have,” said the Professor, who all this time was 
continuing his observations, “ and you may see by careful 
examination that these fossil fish have no identity with 
existing species. To hold in one’s hand, therefore, a living 
specimen of the order, is enough to make a naturalist 
happy for life.” 

“ But,” cried I, “to what family does it belong?” 

To the order of Granoides—an order of fish having 


190 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

angular scales, covered with bright enamel—forming one 
of the family of the Cephalaspides, of the genus ” 

“ Well, sir,” I remarked, as I noticed my uncle hesi¬ 
tated to conclude. 

“To the Genus Pterychtis—yes, I am certain of it. 
Still, though I am confident of the correctness of my sur¬ 
mise, this fish offers to our notice a remarkable peculi¬ 
arity, never known to exist in any other fish but those 
which are the natives of subterranean waters, wells, lakes, 
in caverns, and such like hidden pools.” 

“ And what may that be ?” 

“ It is blind.” 

“ Blind!” I cried, much surprised. 

“Not only blind,” continued the Professor, “but abso¬ 
lutely without organs of sight.” 

I now examined our discovery for myself. It was sin¬ 
gular, to be sure, but it was really a fact. This, however, 
might be a solitary instance, I suggested. The hook was 
baited again and once more thrown into the water. This 
subterranean ocean must have been tolerably well supplied 
with fish, for in two hours we took a large number of 
Pterychtis, as well as other fish belonging to another sup¬ 
posed extinct family—the Dipterides (a genus of fish, 
furnished with two fins only, whence the name), though 
my uncle could not class it exactly. All, without excep¬ 
tion, however, were blind. This unexpected capture en¬ 
abled us to renew our stock of provisions in a very satis¬ 
factory way. 

We were now convinced that this Subterranean Sea 
contained only fish known to us as fossil specimens—and 
fish and reptiles alike, were all the more perfect the 
farther back they dated their origin. 

We began to hope that we should find some of those 
Saurians which science has succeeded in reconstructing 
from bits of bone or cartilage. 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTIJ. 191 

I took up the telescope and carefully examined the 
horizon—looked over the whole sea; it was utterly and 
entirely deserted. Doubtless we were still too near the 
coast. 

After an examination of the ocean, I looked upward, 
towards the strange and mysterious sky. Why should not 
one of the birds, reconstructed by the immortal Cuvier, 
flap his stupendous wings aloft in the dull strata of sub¬ 
terranean air ? It would, of course, find quite sufficient 
food from the fish in the sea. I gazed for some time upon 
the void above. It was as silent and as deserted as the 
shores we had but lately left. 

Nevertheless, though I could neither see nor discover 
anything, my imagination carried me away into wild 
hypotheses. I was in a kind of waking dream. I thought 
I saw on the surface of the water those enormous antedilu¬ 
vian turtles as big as floating islands. Upon those dull 
and sombre shores passed a spectral row of the marnini- 
fers of early days, the great Leptotherium found in the 
cavernous hollow of the Brazilian hills, the Mesico- 
therium, a native of the glacial regions of Siberia. 

Farther on, the pachydermatous Lophrodon, that gi¬ 
gantic tapir, which concealed itself behind rocks, ready 
to do battle for its prey with the Anoplotherium, a 
singular animal partaking of the nature of the rhinoceros, 
the horse, the hippopotamus and the camel. 

There was the giant Mastodon, twisting and turning his 
horrid trunk, with which he crushed the rocks of the shore 
to powder, while the Megatherium—his back raised like a 
cat in a passion, his enormous claws stretched out, dug 
into the earth for food, at the same time that he awoke 
the sonorous echoes of the whole place with his terrible 
roar. 

Higher up still, the first monkey ever seen on the face 
of the globe clambered, gamboling and playing up the 


192 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

granite hills. Still farther away, ran the Pterodactyl, 
with the winged hand, gliding or rather sailing through 
the dense and compressed air like a huge bat. 

Above all, near the leaden granitic sky, were immense 
birds, more powerful than the casoar, giants to the ostrich, 
which spread their mighty wings and fluttered against the 
huge stone vault of the inland sea. 

I thought, such was the effect of my imagination, that I 
saw this whole tribe of antediluvian creatures. I carried 
myself back to far ages, long before man existed—when, 
in fact, the earth was in too imperfect a state for him to 
live upon it. 

My dream was of countless ages before the existence of 
man. The mammifers first disappeared, then the mighty 
birds, then the reptiles of the secondary period, presently 
the fish, the Crustacea, the molluscs, and finally the verte- 
brata. The zoophytes of the period of transition in their 
turn sank into annihilation. 

The whole panorama of the world’s life before the his¬ 
toric period, seemed to be born over again, and mine was 
the only human heart .that beat in this unpeopled world ! 
There were no more seasons; there were no more climates; 
the natural heat of the world increased unceasingly, and 
neutralized that of the great radiant Sun. 

Vegetation was exaggerated in an extraordinary man¬ 
ner. I passed like a shadow in the midst of brushwood 
as lofty as the giant trees of California, and trod under¬ 
foot the moist and humid soil, reeking with a rank and 
varied vegetation. 

I leaned against the huge column-like trunks of giant 
trees, to which those of Canada were as ferns. Whole 
ages passed, hundreds upon hundreds of years were concen¬ 
trated into a single day. 

Next, unrolled before me like a panorama, came the 
great and wondrous series of terrestrial transformations. 




THE ANTEDILUVIAN WORLD. 

































































































































































































4 

























l 



































































































• 























' 




























































































A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 193 

Plants disappeared; the granitic rocks lost all trace of 
solidity; the liquid state was suddenly substituted for that 
which had before existed. This was caused by intense 
heat acting on the organic matter of the earth. The 
waters flowed over the whole surface of the globe; they 
boiled; they were volatilized, or turned into vapor; a 
kind of steam-cloud wrapped the whole earth, the globe 
itself becoming at last nothing but one huge sphere of gas, 
indescribable in color, between white heat and red, as big 
and as brilliant as the sun. 

In the very centre of this prodigious mass, fourteen 
hundred thousand times as large as our globe, I was 
whirled round in space, and brought into close conjunc¬ 
tion with the planets. My body was subtilized, or rather 
became volatile, and commingled in a state of atomic va¬ 
por, with the prodigious clouds, which rushed forward 
like a mighty comet into infinite space! 

What an extraordinary dream! Where would it finally 
take me? My feverish hand began to write down the mar¬ 
vellous details—details more like the imaginings of a 
lunatic than anything sober and real. I had during this 
period of hallucination forgotten everything—the Profes¬ 
sor, the guide, and the raft on which we were floating. 
My mind was in a state of semi-oblivion. 

“ What is the matter, Harry ? ” said my uncle, sudden- 

ty- 

My eyes, which were wide opened like those of a som¬ 
nambulist, were fixed upon him, but I did not see him, 
nor could I clearly make out anything around me. 

“ Take care, my boy,” again cried my uncle, “ you will 
fall into the sea.” 

As he uttered these words, I felt myself seized on the 
other side by the firm hand of our devoted guide. Had it 
not been for the presence of mind of Hans, I must infalli¬ 
bly have fallen into the waves and been drowned. 


194 : A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

“Have you gone mad? ” cried my uncle, shaking me on 
the other side. 

“ What—what is the matter ? ” I said at last, coming 
to myself. 

“ Are you ill, Henry ? ” continued the Professor in an 
anxious tone. 

“No—no; but I have had an extraordinary dream. It, 
however, has passed away. All now seems well,” I added, 
looking around me with strangely puzzled eyes. 

“ All right,” said my uncle; “ a beautiful breeze, a splen¬ 
did sea. We are going along at a rapid rate, and if I am 
not out in my calculations we shall soon see land. I 
shall not be sorry to exchange the narrow limits of our 
raft for the mysterious strand of the Subterranean Ocean.” 

As my uncle uttered these words, I rose and carefully 
scanned the horrizon. But the line of water was still con¬ 
founded with the lowering clouds that hung aloft, and in 
the distance appeared to touch the edge of the water. 


/. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 195 


CHAPTER XXX. 
terrific saurian combat. 

Saturday, August 15. The sea still retains its uni- 
foim monotony. The same leaden hue, the same eternal 
glare from above. No indication of land being in sight. 
The horizon appears to retreat before us, more and more 
as we advance. 

My head, still dull and heavy from the effects of my 
extraordinary dream, which I cannot as yet banish from 
my mind. 

The Professor, who has not dreamed, is, however, in one 
of his morose and unaccountable humors. Spends his 
time in scanning the horizon, at every point of the com¬ 
pass. His telescope is raised every moment to his eyes, 
and when he finds nothing to give any clue to our where¬ 
abouts, he assumes a Napoleonic attitude and walks 
anxiously. 

I remarked that my uncle, the Professor, had a strong 
tendency to resume his old impatient character, and I 
could not but make a note of this disagreeable circum¬ 
stance in my Journal. I saw clearly that it had required 
all the influence of my danger and suffering, to extract 
from him one scintillation of humane feeling. Now that 
I was quite recovered, his original nature had conquered 
and obtained the upper hand. 

And, after all, what had he to be angry and annoyed 
about, now more than at any other time ? Was not the 
journey being accomplished under the most favorable cir¬ 
cumstances ? Was not the raft progressing with the most 
marvellous rapidity ? 


196 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

What, then, could be the matter? After one or two 
preliminary hems, I determined to inquire. 

You seem uneasy, uncle,” said I, when for about the 
hundredth time he put down his telescope and walked up 
and down, muttering to himself. 

No, I am not uneasy,” he replied in a dry harsh tone, 
“ by no means.” 

“ Perhaps I should have said impatient,” I replied, 
softening the force of my remark. 

“ Enough to make me so, I think.” 

“ And yet we are advancing at a rate seldom attained 
by a raft,” I remarked. 

WEat matters that ? ” cried my uncle. “ I am not 
vexed at the rate we go at, but I am annoyed to find the 
sea so much vaster than I expected.” 

I then recollected that the Professor, before our depar* 
ture, had estimated the length of this Subterranean Oceam 
as at most about thirty leagues. Now we had travelled at 
least over thrice that distance without discovering any 
trace of the distant shore. I began to understand my 
uncle’s anger. 

“We are not going down,” suddenly exclaimed the Pro¬ 
fessor. “We are not progressing with our great dis¬ 
coveries. All this is utter loss of time. After all, I did 
not come from home to undertake a party of pleasure. 
This voyage on a raft over a pond annoys and wearies 
me.” 

He called this adventurous journey a party of pleasure, 
and this great Inland Sea a pond ! 

“ But,” argued I, “ if we have followed the route indi¬ 
cated by the great Saknussemm, we cannot be going far 
wrong.” 

That is the question/ as the great, the immortal 
Shakspeare, has it. Are we following the route indicated 
by that wondrous sage ? Did Saknussemm ever fall in 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 197 


with this great sheet of water ? If he did, did he cross it ? 

1 begin to fear that the rivulet we adopted for a guide has 
led us wrong.” 

“ In any case, we can never regret having come thus 
far. It is worth the whole journey to have enjoyed this 
magnificent spectacle—it is something to have seen.” 

“ ? • < : are n T othin S about seeing, nor about magnificent 
spectacles I came down into the interior of the earth 
with an object, and that object I mean to attain. Don’t 

ta k to me about admiring scenery, or any other sentimen- 
tal trash.” 

After this I thought it well to hold my tongue, and 
allow the Professor to bite his lips until the blood came, 
without further remark. 

At six o’clock in the evening, our matter-of-fact guide, 
Hans, asked for his week’s salary, and receiving his three 
rix-dollars, put them carefully in his pocket. He was 
perfectly contented and satisfied. 

Sunday, 16th August. Nothing new to record. The 


same weather as before. The wind has a slight tendency to 
freshen up, with signs of an approaching gale. When I 
awoke, my first observation was in regard to the intensity 
of the light. I keep on fearing, day after day, that the 
extraordinary electric phenomenon should become first 
obscured, and then go wholly out, leaving us in total 
darkness. Nothing, however, of the kind occurs. The 
shadow of the raft, its mast and sails, is clearly distin¬ 
guished on the surface of the water. 

This wondrous sea is, after all, infinite in its extent. It 
must be quite as wide as the Mediterranean—or perhaps 
even as the great Atlantic Ocean. Why, after all, should 
it not be so ? 


My uncle has on more than one occasion, tried deep sea 
soundings. He tied the cross of one of our heaviest crow¬ 
bars to the extremity of a cord, which he allowed to run 


198 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


out to the extent of two hundred fathoms. We had the 
greatest difficulty in hoisting in our novel kind of lead. 

When the crowbar was finally dragged on board, Hans 
called my attention to some singular marks upon its sur¬ 
face. The piece of iron looked as if it had been crushed 
between two very hard substances. 

I looked at our worthy guide with an inquiring glance. 

“ Tander,” said he. 

Of course I was at a loss to understand. I turned round 
towards my uncle, absorbed in gloomy reflections. I had 
little wish to disturb him from his reverie. I accordingly 
turned once more towards our worthy Icelander. 

Hans very quietly and significantly opened his mouth 
once or twice, as if in the act of biting, and in this way 
made me understand his meaning. 

‘ Teeth! ” cried I, with stupefaction, as I examined the 
bar of iron with more attention. 

Yes. There can be no doubt about the matter. The 
indentations on the bar of iron are the marks of teeth! 
What jaws must the owner of such molars be possessed of! 
Have we, then, come upon a monster of unknown species, 
which still exists within the vast waste of waters—a 
monster more voracious than a shark, more terrible and 
bulky than the whale. I am unable to withdraw my eyes, 
from the bar of iron, actually half crushed! 

Is, then, my dream about to come true—a dread and 
terrible reality? 

All day my thoughts were bent upon these speculations, 
and my imagination scarcely regained a degree of calm¬ 
ness and power of reflection until after a sleep of manv 
hours. J 

This day, as on other Sundays, we observed as a day of 
rest and pious meditation. 

Monday, August 17th. I have been trying to realize 
from memory the particular instincts of those antediluvian 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 199 

animals of the secondary period, which succeeding to the 
mollusca, to the Crustacea, and to the fish, preceded the 
appearance of the race of mammifers. The generation of 
reptiles then reigned supreme upon the earth. These 
hideous monsters ruled everything in the seas of the 
secondary period, which formed the strata of which the 
Jura mountains are composed. Nature has endowed them 
with perfect organization. What a gigantic structure was 
theirs; what vast and prodigious strength they possessed! 

The existing Saurians, which include all such reptiles as 
lizards, crocodiles, and alligators, even the largest and 
most formidable of their class, are but feeble imitations of 
their mighty sires, the animals of ages long ago. If there 
were giants in the days of old, there were also gigantic 
animals. 

I shuddered as I evolved from my mind the idea and 
recollection of these awful monsters. No eye of man had 
seen them in the flesh. They took their walks abroad 
upon the face of the earth thousands of ages before man 
came into existence, and their fossil bones, discovered in 
the limestone, have allowed us to reconstruct them ana¬ 
tomically, and thus to get some faint idea of their colossal 
formation. 

I recollect once seeing in the great Museum of Ham¬ 
burg the skeleton of one of these wonderful Saurians. It 
measured no less than thirty feet from the nose to the tail. 
Am I, then, an inhabitant of the earth of the present day, 
destined to find myself face to face with a representative of 
this antediluvian family? I can scarcely believe it possi¬ 
ble ; can hardly believe it true. And yet these marks of 
powerful teeth upon the bar of iron! can there be a doubt 
from their shape that the bite is the bite of a crocodile? 

My eyes stare wildly and with terror upon the subterra¬ 
nean sea. Every moment I expect one of these monsters 
to rise from its vast cavernous depths. 


'200 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

I fancy that the worthy Professor in some measure 
shares my notions, if not my fears, for, after an attentive 
examination of the crowbar, he cast his eyes rapidly over 
the mighty and mysterious ocean. 

“ What could possess him to leave the land,” I thought, 
as if the depth of this water was of any importance to us. 
No doubt he has disturbed some terrible monster in his 
watery home, and perhaps we may pay dearly for our 
temerity.” 

Anxious to be prepared for the worst, I examined our 
weapons, and saw that they were in a fit state for use. My 
uncle looked on at me and nodded his head approvingly. 
He, too, has noticed what we have to fear. 

Already the uplifting of the waters on the surface indi¬ 
cates that something is in motion below. The danger ap¬ 
proaches. It comes nearer and nearer. It behooves us to 
be on the watch. 

Tuesday, August 18. Evening came at last, the hour, 
when the desire for sleep caused our eyelids to be heavy. 
Night there is not, properly speaking, in this place, any 
more than there is in summer in the arctic regions. Hans, 
however, is immovable at the rudder. When he snatches 
a moment of rest I really cannot say. I take advantage 
of his vigilance to take some little repose. 

But two hours after I was awakened from a heavy sleep 
by an awful shock. The raft appeared to have struck 
upon a sunken rock. It was lifted right out of the water 
by some wondrous and mysterious power, and then started 
off twenty fathoms distant. 

“Eh, what is it?” cried my uncle starting up, “are we 
shipwrecked, or what ?” 

Hans raised his hand and pointed to where, about two 
hundred yards off, a huge black mass was moving up and 
down.. I looked with awe. My worst fears were realized. 

It is a colossal monster!” I cried, clasping my hands. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OE THE EARTH. 201 

Yes/’ cried the agitated Professor, “and there yonder 
is a huge sea lizard of terrible size and shape.” 

-A nd farther on behold a prodigious crocodile. Look 
at his hideous jaws, and that row of monstrous teeth. Ha! 
he has gone.” 

“ A whale! a whale!” shouted the Professor, “I can see 
her enormous fins. See, see, how she blows air and water!” 

Two liquid columns rose to a vast height above the level 
of the sea, into which they fell with a terrific crash, waking 
up the echoes of that awful place. We stood still—sur¬ 
prised, stupefied, terror-stricken at the sight of this group 
of fearful marine monsters, more hideous in the reality 
than in my dream. They were of supernatural dimen¬ 
sions; the very smallest of the whole party could with ease 
have crushed our raft and ourselves with a single bite. 

Hans seizing the rudder which had flown out of his hand, 
puts it hard a-weather in order to escape from such dan¬ 
gerous vicinity; but no sooner does he do so, than he finds 
he is flying from Scylla to Charybdis. To leeward is a 
turtle about forty feet wide, and a serpent quite as long, 
with an enormous and hideous head peering from out the 
waters. 

Look which way we will, it is impossible for us to fly. 
The fearful reptiles advanced upon us; they turned and 
twisted about the raft with awful rapidity. They formed 
around our devoted vessel a series of concentric circles. I 
took up my rifle in desperation. But what effect can a 
rifle-ball produce upon the armor scales with which the 
bodies of these horrid monsters are covered ? 

We remain still and dumb from utter horror. They 
advance upon us, nearer and nearer. Our fate appears 
certain, fearful and terrible. On one side the mighty cro¬ 
codile, on the other the great sea serpent. The rest of the 
fearful crowd of marine prodigies have plunged beneath 
the briny waves and disappeared ! 


202 A JOURNEY TO THU CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


I am about at all risks to fire, and try the effect of a 
shot. Hans, the guide, however, interfered by a sign to 
check me. The two hideous and ravenous monsters passed 
within fifty fathoms of the raft, and then made a rush at 
one another—their fury and rage preventing them from 
seeing us. 

The combat commenced. We distinctly made out 
every action of the two hideous monsters. 

But to my excited imagination the other animals ap¬ 
peared about to take part in the fierce and deadly struggle 
—the monster, the whale, the lizard, and the turtle. I 
distinctly saw them every moment. I pointed them out 
to the Icelander. But he only shook his head. 

“ Tva,” lie said. 

What two only does he say. Surely he is mistaken,” 

I cried, in a tone of wonder. 

He is quite right,” replied my uncle coolly and philo¬ 
sophically, examining the terrible duel with his telescope 
and speaking as if he were in a lecture room. 

“ How can that be ? ” 

“ Yes ’ 1S so * Tlie first of these hideous monsters has 
the snout of a porpoise, the head of a lizard, the teeth of a 
crocodile; and it is this that has deceived us. It is the most 
fearful of all antediluvian reptiles, the world-renowned 
Ichthyosaurus or Great Fish Lizard.” 

“ And the other ? ” 

“ The other is a monstrous serpent, concealed under the 
hard vaulted shell of the turtle, the terrible enemy of its 
fearful rival, the Plesiosaurus, or Sea Crocodile.” 

Hans was quite right. The two monsters only, disturbed 
the surface of the s.ea! 

At last have mortal eyes gazed upon two reptiles of the 
great primitive ocean ! I see the flaming redeyes of the 
Ichthyosaurus, each as big, or bigger than a man’s head. 
Nature in its infinite wisdom had gifted this wondrous 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OE THE EARTH. 203 

marine animal with an optical apparatus of extreme 
power, capable of resisting the pressure of the heavy 
layers of water which rolled over him in the depth of the 
ocean where he usually fed. It has by some authors truly 
been called the whale of the Saurian race, for it is as big 
and quick in its motions as our king of the seas. This one 
measures not less than a hundred feet in length, and I can 
form some idea of his girth, when I see him lift his prodi¬ 
gious tail out of the waters. His jaw is of awful size and 
strength, and according to the best-informed naturalists, it 
does not contain less than a hundred and eighty-two teeth. 

The other was the mighty Plesiosaurus, a serpent with 
a cylindrical trunk, with a shorty stumpy tail, with fins 
like a bank of oars in a Homan galley. 

Its whole body covered by a carapace or shell, and its 
neck, as flexible as that of a swan, rose more than thirty 
feet above the waves, a tower of animated flesh ! 

These animals attacked one another with inconceivable 
fury. Such a combat was never seen before by mortal 
eyes, and to us who did see it, it appeared more like the 
phantasmagoric creation of a dream than anything else. 
They raised mountains of water, which dashed in sj:>ray 
over the raft, already tossed to and fro by the waves. 
Tw r enty times we seemed on the point of being upset and 
hurled headlong into the waves. Hideous hisses appeared 
to shake the gloomy granite roof of that mighty cavern— 
hisses which carried terror to our hearts. The awful com¬ 
batants held each other in a tight embrace. I could not 
make out one from the other. Still the combat could not 
last for ever; and woe unto us, whichsoever became the 
victor. 

One hour, two hours, three hours passed away, without 
any decisive result. The struggle continued with the same 
deadly tenacity, but without apparent result. The deadly 
opponents now approached, now drew away from the raft. 


204 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

Once or twice we fancied they were about to leave us alto¬ 
gether, but instead of that, they came nearer and nearer. 

We crouched on the raft ready to fire at them at a 
moment’s notice, poor as the prospect of hurting or terri¬ 
fying them was. Still we were determined not to perish 
without a struggle. 

Suddenly the Ichthyosaurus and the Plesiosaurus dis¬ 
appeared beneath the waves, leaving behind them a mael¬ 
strom in the midst of the sea. We were very nearly drawn 
down by the indraught of the water! 

Several minutes elapsed before anything was again seen. 
Was this wonderful combat to end in the depths of the 
ocean? Was the last act of this terrible drama to take 
place without spectators ? 

It was impossible for us to say. 

Suddenly, at no great distance from us, an enormous 
mass rises out of the waters—the head of the great Plesi¬ 
osaurus. The terrible monster is now wounded unto death. 

I can see nothing now of his enormous body. All that 
could be distinguished was his serpent-like neck, which he 
twisted and curled in all the agonies of death. Now he 
struck the waters with it as if it had been a gigantic whip, 
and then again wriggled like a worm cut in two. The 
water was spurted up to a great distance in all directions. 
A great portion of it swept over our raft and nearly blinded 
us. But soon the end of the beast approached nearer and 
nearer; his movements slackened visibly; his contortions 
almost ceased; and at last the body of the mighty snake 
hay an inert, dead mass on the surface of the now calm and 
placid waters. 

As for the Ichthyosaurus, has he gone down to his 
mighty cavern under the sea to rest, or will he reappear to 
destroy us ? 

This question remained unanswered. And we had 
breathing time. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 205 


CHAPTER XXXI. 

THE SEA MONSTER. 

Wednesday, August 19. iortunately the wind, which 
at the present blows with great violence, has allowed us to 
escape from the scene of the unparalleled and extraordi¬ 
nary struggle. Hans with his usual imperturbable calm 
remained at the helm. My uncle, who for a short time 
had been withdrawn from his absorbing reverie by the 
novel incidents of this sea-fight, fell back again apparently 
into a brown study. All this time, however, his eyes were 
fixed impatiently on the wide-spread ocean. 

Our voyage now became monotonous and uniform. Hull 
as it has become, I have no desire to have it broken by 
any repetition of the perils and adventures of yesterday. 

Thursday, August 20. The wind is now X. X. E., and 
blows very irregularly. It has changed to fitful gusts. 
The temperature is exceedingly high. We are now pro¬ 
gressing at the average rate of about ten miles and a half 
per hour. 

About twelve o’clock a distant sound as of thunder fell 
upon our ears. I make a note of the fact without even 
venturing a suggestion as to its cause. It was one con¬ 
tinued roar as of a sea falling over mighty rocks. 

“ Far off in the distance,”, said the Professor dogmatic¬ 
ally, “ there is some rock or some island against which the 
sea, lashed to fury by the wind, is breaking violently.” 

Hans, without saying a word, clambered to the top of 
the mast, but could make out nothing. The ocean was 
level in every direction as far as the eye could reach. 

Three hours passed away without any sign to indicate 
what might be before us. The sound began to assume 
that of a mighty cataract. 


206 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

I expressed my opinion on this point strongly to my 
uncle. He merely shook his head. I, however, am 
strongly impressed by a conviction that I am not wrong. 
Are we advancing towards some mighty waterfall which 
shall cast us into the abyss? Probably this mode of de¬ 
scending into the abyss may be agreeable to the Professor, 
because it would be something like the vertical descent he 
is so eager to make. I entertain a very different opinion. 

Whatever be the truth, it is certain that not many 
leagues distant there must be some very extraordinary 
phenomenon, for as we advance the roar becomes something 
mighty and stupendous. Is it in the water, or iii the air ? 

I cast hasty glances aloft at the suspended vapors, and 
I seek to penetrate their mighty depths. But the vault 
above is tranquil. The clouds, which are now elevated to 
the very summit, appear utterly still and motionless, and 
completely lost in the irradiation of electric light. It is 
necessary, therefore, to seek for the cause of this phenom¬ 
enon elsewhere. 

I examine the horizon, now perfectly calm, pure and 
free from all haze. Its aspect still remains unchanged. 
But if this awful noise proceeds from a cataract—if, so to 
speak in plain English, this vast interior ocean is precipi¬ 
tated into a lower basin—if these tremendous roars are 
produced by the noise of falling waters, the current would 
increase in activity, and its increasing swiftness would give 
me some idea of the extent of the peril with which we are 
menaced. I consult the current. It simply does not 
exist: there is no such thing. An empty bottle cast into 
the water lies to leeward without motion. 

About four o’clock Hans rises, clambers up the mast 
and reaches the truck itself. From this elevated position 
his looks are cast around. They take in a vast circumfer¬ 
ence of the ocean. At last, his eyes remain fixed. His 
face expresses no astonishment, but his eyes slightly dilate. 



A MAJESTIC GEYSEB. 


THE GEYSEB OF THE CENTRAL SEA 























































































































« 


























































































































A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 207 

“ He has seen something at last/’ cried my uncle. 

“ I think so,’’ I replied. 

. ^ ans came down, stood beside us and pointed with his 
right hand to the south. 

“ Her nere,” he said. 

“ There,” replied my uncle. 

And seizing his telescope he looked at it with great 
attention for about a minute, which to me appeared an 
age. I knew not what to think or expect. 

“ Yes > yes,” he cried in a tone of considerable surprise 
“ there it is.” 

“ What ?” I asked. 

“ A tremendous spurt of water rising out of the waves.” 
“ Some ot h er marine monster,” I cried, already alarmed. 
“ Perhaps.” 

“ Then let us steer more to the westward, for we know 
what we have to expect from antediluvian animals,” was 
my eager reply. 

“Go ahead,” said my uncle. 

I turned towards Hans. Hans was at the tiller steering 
with his usual imperturbable calm. 

Nevertheless, if from the distance which separated us 
from this creature, a distance which must be estimated at 
not less than a dozen leagues, and this spurting of water 
proceeded from the pranks of some antediluvian animal, 
his dimensions must be something preternatural. To fly 
is, therefore, the course to be suggested by ordinary pru¬ 
dence. But we have not come into that part of the world 
to be prudent. Such is my uncle’s determination. 

We, accordingly, continued to advance. The nearer we 
come, the loftier is the spouting water. WTat monster can 
fill himself with such huge volumes of water, and then un¬ 
ceasingly spout them out in such lofty jets ? 

At eight o’clock in the evening, reckoning as above 
ground, where there is day and night, we are not more 




208 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

than two leagues from the mighty beast. Its long, black, 
enormous, mountainous body, lies on the top of the water 
like an island. But then sailors have been said to have 
gone ashore on sleeping whales, mistaking them for land- 
Is it illusion, or is it fear ? Its length cannot be less than 
a thousand fathoms. What, then, is this cetaceous mon¬ 
ster of which no Cuvier ever thought ? 

It is quite motionless and presents the appearance of 
sleep. The sea seems unable to lift him upwards; it is 
rather the waves which break on his huge and gigantic 
frame. The water-spout, rising to a height of five hun¬ 
dred feet, breaks in spray with a dull, sullen roar. 

We advance, like senseless lunatics, towards this mighty 
mass. 

I honestly confess that I was abjectly afraid. I declared 
that I would go no farther. I threatened in my terror to 
cut the sheet of the sail. I attacked the Professor with 
considerable acrimony, calling him foolhardy, mad, I know 
not what. He made no answer. 

Suddenly the imperturbable Hans once more pointed 
his finger to the menacing object. 

“Holme!” 

“ An island ! ” cried my uncle. 

“ An island ? ” I replied, shrugging my shoulders at this 
poor attempt at deception. 

“ Of course it is,” cried my uncle, bursting into a loud 
and joyous laugh. 

“ But the water spout ? ” 

“ Geyser,” said Hans. 

“ Yes, of course—a geyser,” replied my uncle, still 
laughing, “a geyser like those common in Iceland. Jets 
like this are the great wonders of the country.” 

At first I would not allow that I had been so grossly 
deceived. What could be more ridiculous than to have 
taken an island for a marine monster ? But kick as one 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 209 

may, one must yield to evidence, and I was finally con¬ 
vinced of my error. It was nothing, after all, but a 
natural phenomenon. 

As we approached nearer and nearer, the dimensions of 
the liquid sheaf of waters became truly grand and stu¬ 
pendous. The island had, at a distance, presented the 
appearance of an enormous whale, whose head rose high 
above the waters. The geyser, a word the Icelanders pro¬ 
nounce geysir, and which signifies fury, rose majestically 
from its summit. Dull detonations are heard every now 
and then, and the enormous jet, taken as it were with 
sudden fury, shakes its plume of vapor, and bounds into 
the first, layer of the clouds. It is alone. Neither spurts 
of vapor nor hot springs surround it, and the whole volca¬ 
nic power of that region is concentrated in one sublime 
column. The rays of electric light mix with this dazzling 
sheaf, every drop as it falls assuming the prismatic colors 
of the rainbow. 

“ Let us go on shore,” said the Professor, after some 
minutes of silence. 

It is necessary, however, to take great precaution, in 
order to avoid the weight of falling waters, which would 
cause the raft to founder in an instant. Hans, however, 
steers admirably, and brings us to the other extremity of 
the island. 

I was the first to leap on the rock. My uncle followed, 
while the eider-duck hunter remained still, like a man 
above any childish sources of astonishment. We were 
now walking on granite mixed with silicious sandstone ; 
the soil shivered under our feet like the sides of boilers in 
which over-heated steam is forcibly confined. It is burn¬ 
ing. We soon came in sight of the little central basin 
from which rose the geyser. I plunged a thermometer 
into the water which ran bubbling from the centre, and it 
marked a heat of a hundred and sixty-three degrees ! 


210 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

This water, therefore, came from some place where the 
heat was intense. This was singularly in contradiction 
with the theories of Professor Hardwigg. I could not 
help telling him my opinion on the subject. 

“Well,” said he sharply, “and what does this prove 
against my doctrine ? ” 

“ Nothing,” replied I drily, seeing that I was running 
my head against a foregone conclusion. 

Nevertheless, I am compelled to confess that until now 
we have been most remarkably fortunate, and that this 
voyage is being accomplished in most favorable conditions 
of temperature; but it appears evident, in fact, certain, 
that we shall sooner or later arrive at one of those regions, 
where the central heat will reach its utmost limits, and 
will go far beyond all the possible gradations of thermo¬ 
meters. 

Visions of the Hades of the ancients, believed to be in 
the centre of the earth, floated through my imagination. 

We shall, however, see what we shall see. That is the 
Professor’s favorite phrase now. Having christened the 
volcanic island by the name of his nephew, the leader of 
the expedition turned away and gave the signal for em¬ 
barkation. 

I stood still, however, for some minutes, gazing upon 
the magnificent geyser. I soon was able to perceive that 
the upward tendency of the water was irregular; now it 
diminished in intensity, and then, suddenly it regained 
new vigor, which I attributed to the variation of the pres¬ 
sure of the accumulated vapors in its reservoir. 

At last we took our departure, going carefully round 
the projecting, and rather dangerous, rocks of the southern 
side. Hans had taken advantage of this brief halt to re¬ 
pair the raft. Not before it was required. 

Before we took our final departure from the island, how¬ 
ever, I made some observations to calculate the distance 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 211 

we had gone over, and I put them down in my Journal. 
Since we left Port Gretchen, we had travelled two hun¬ 
dred and seventy leagues—more than eight hundred miles 
on this great inland sea; we were, therefore, six hun¬ 
dred and twenty leagues from Iceland, and exactly under 
England. 


212 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XXXII. 

THE BATTLE OF THE ELEMENTS. 

Friday, August 21st. This morning the magnificent 
-geyser had wholly disappeared. The wind had freshened 
up, and we were fast leaving the neighbourhood of Henry’s 
Island. Even the roaring sound of the mighty column 
was lost to the ear. 

The weather, if, under the circumstances, we may use 
such an expression, is about to change very suddenly. The 
atmosphere is being gradually loaded with vapors, which 
carry with them the electricity formed by the constant 
evaporation of the saline waters; the clouds are slowly but. 
sensibly falling towards the sea, and are assuming a dark 
olive texture ; the electric rays can scarcely pierce through 
the opaque curtain which has fallen like a drop-scene be¬ 
fore this wondrous theatre, on the stage of which another 
and terrible drama is soon to be enacted. This time it is 
no fight of animals ; it is the fearful battle of the elements. 

I feel that I am very peculiarly influenced, as all crea¬ 
tures are on land when a deluge is about to take place. 

The cumuli, a perfectly oval kind of cloud, piled upon 
the south, presented a most awful and sinister appear¬ 
ance ; with the pitiless aspect often seen before a storm. 
The air is extremely heavy; the sea is comparatively 
calm. 

In the distance, the clouds have assumed the appear¬ 
ance of enormous balls of cotton, or rather pods, piled one 
above the other in picturesque confusion. By degrees, 
they appear to swell out, break, and gain in number what 
they lose in grandeur; their heaviness is so great that they 
are unable to lift themselves from the horizon; but under 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 213 

the influence of the upper currents of air, they are gradu¬ 
ally broken up, become much darker, and then present the 
appearance of one single layer of a formidable character; 
now and then a lighter cloud, still lit up from above, re¬ 
bounds upon this grey carpet, and is lost in the opaque 
mass. 

There can be no doubt that the entire atmosphere is 
saturated with electric fluid; I am myself wholly impreg¬ 
nated ; my hairs literally stand on end as if under the in¬ 
fluence of a galvanic battery. If one of my companions 
ventured to touch me, I think he would receive rather a 
violent and unpleasant shock. 

About ten o’clock in the morning, the symptoms of the 
storm became more thorough and decisive; the wind ap¬ 
peared to soften down as if to take breath for a renewed 
attack; the vast funereal pall above us looked like a huge 
bag—like the cave of AColus, in which the storm was col¬ 
lecting its forces for the attack. 

I tried all I could not to believe in the menacing signs 
of the sky, and yet I could not avoid sayings as it were in¬ 
voluntarily— 

“ I believe we are going to have bad weather.” 

The Professor made me no answer. He was in a horri¬ 
ble, in a detestable humor—to see the ocean stretching in¬ 
terminably before his eyes. On hearing my words he 
simply shrugged his shoulders. 

“We shall have a tremendous storm,” I said again, 
pointing to the horizon. “ These clouds are falling lower 
and lower upon the sea, as if to crush it.” 

A great silence prevailed. The wind wholly ceased. 
Nature assumed a dead calm, and ceased to breathe. 
Upon the mast, where I noticed a sort of slight ignis fatuus, 
the sail hangs in loose heavy folds. The raft is motion¬ 
less in the midst of a dark heavy sea—without undulation, 
without motion. It is as still as glass. But as we are 


214 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

making no progress, what is the use of keeping up the 
sail, which may be the cause of our perdition if the 
tempest should suddenly strike us without warning. 

“ Let us lower the sail,” I said, “ it is only an act of 
common prudence.” 

“ No—no,” cried my uncle, in an exasperated tone, “ a 
hundred times, no. Let the wind strike us and do its 
worst, let the storm sweep us away where it will—only let 
me see the glimmer of some coast—of "some rocky cliffs, 
even if they dash our raft into a thousand pieces. No! 
keep up the sail—no matter what happens.” 

These words were scarcely uttered, when the southern 
horizon underwent a sudden and violent change. The 
long accumulated vapors were resolved into water, and the 
air required to fill up the void produced became a wild 
and raging tempest. 

It came from the most distant corners of the mighty 
cavern. . It raged from every point of the compass. It 
roared; it yelled; it shrieked with glee as of demons let 
loose. The darkness increased and became indeed dark¬ 
ness visible. 

The raft rose and fell with the storm, and bounded over 
the waves. My uncle was cast headlong upon the deck. 

I with great difliculty dragged myself towards him. He 
was holding on with might and main to the end of a 
cable, and appeared to gaze with pleasure and delight at 
the spectacle of the unchained elements. 

. Hans neyer moy ed a muscle. His long hair driven 
hither and thither by the tempest and scattered wildly 
over his motionless face, gave him a most extraordinary 
appearance for every single hair was illuminated by 
little sparkling sprigs. 

His countenance presents the extraordinary appearance 
of an antediluvian man, a true contemporary of the me* 
gatherium. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 215 

Still the mast holds good against the storm. The sail 
spreads out and fills like a soap bubble about to burst. 
The raft rushes on at a pace impossible to estimate, but 
still less swiftly than the body of water displaced beneath 
it, the rapidity of which may be seen by the lines which 
fly right and left in the wake. 

“ The sail, the sail! ” I cried, making a trumpet of my 
hands, and then endeavoring to lower it. 

“ Let it alone! ” said my uncle, more exasperated than 
ever. 

“ JSfej” said Hans, gently shaking his head. 

Nevertheless, the rain formed a roaring cataract before 
this horizon of which we were in search, and to which we 
were rushing like madmen. 

But before this wilderness of waters reached us, the 
mighty veil of cloud was torn in twain; the sea began to 
foam wildly; and the electricity, produced by some vast 
and extraordinary chemical action in the upper layer of 
cloud, is brought into play. To the fearful claps of thun¬ 
der are added dazzling flashes of lightning, such as I had 
never seen. The flashes crossed one another, hurled from 
every side; wdiile the thunder came pealing like an echo. 
The mass of vapor becomes incandescent; the hail-stones 
which strike the metal of our boots and our weapons, are 
actually luminous; the waves as they rise appear to be 
fire-eating monsters, beneath which seethes an intense fire, 
their crests surmounted by combs of flame. 

My eyes are dazzled, blinded by the intensity of light, 
my ears are deafened by the awful roar of the elements. 
I am compelled to hold on to the mast, which bends like 
a reed beneath the violence of the storm, to which none 
ever before seen by mariners bore any resemblance. 

* * * * * 

Here my travelling notes become very incomplete, loose 
and vague. I have only been able to make out one or 




216 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

two fugitive observations, dotted down in a mere mechani¬ 
cal way. But even their brevity, even their obscurity, 
show the emotions which overcame me. 

Sunday, August 23d. Where have we got to ? In what 
region are we wandering? We are still carried forward 
with inconceivable rapidity. 

The night has been fearful, something not to be de¬ 
scribed. The storm shows no signs of cessation. We exist 
in the midst of an uproar which has no name. The deto¬ 
nations as of artillery are incessant. Our ears literally 
bleed. We are unable to exchange a word, or hear each 
other speak. 

The lightning never ceases to flash for a single instant. 
I can see the zigzags after a rapid dart, strike the arched 
roof of this mightiest of mighty vaults. If it were to give 
way and fall upon us! Other lightnings plunge their forked 
streaks in every direction, and take the form of globes of 
fire, which explode like bomb-shells over a beleaguered 
city. The general crash and roar do not apparently in¬ 
crease ; it has already gone far beyond what human ear 
can appreciate. If all the powder-magazines in the world 
were to explode together, it would be impossible for us to 
hear worse noise. 

There is a constant emission of light from the storm- 
clouds ; the electric matter is incessantly released; evi¬ 
dently the gaseous principles of the air are out of order; 
innumerable columns of water rush up like waterspouts, 
and fall back upon the surface of the ocean in foam. 

Whither are we going? My uncle still lies at full 
length upon the raft, without speaking—without taking 
any note of time. 

The heat increases. I look at the thermometer, to my 
surprise it indicates —The exact figure is here rubbed out in 
my manuscript . 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 217 

Monday, August 24. This terrible storm will never 
end. Why should not this state of the atmosphere, so 
dense and murky, once modified, again remain definitive ? 

We are utterly broken and harassed by fatigue. Hans 
remains just as usual. The raft runs to the south-east in¬ 
variably. We have now already run two hundred leagues 
from the newly-discovered island. 

About twelve o’clock the storm became worse than 
ever. We are obliged now to fasten every bit of cargo 
tightly on the deck of the raft, or everything would be 
swept away. We tie ourselves to the mast, each man 
lashing the other. The waves drive over us, so that 
several times we are actually under water. 

We had been under the painful necessity of abstaining 
from speech for three days and three nights. We opened 
our mouths, we moved our lips, but no sound came. Even 
when we placed our mouths to each other’s ears it was the 
same. 

The wind carried the voice away. 

My uncle once contrived to get his head close to mine 
after several almost vain endeavors. He appeared to my 
nearly exhausted senses to articulate some word. I had a 
notion, more from intuition than anything else, that he 
said to me, “ we are lost.” 

I took out my note book, from which under the most 
desperate circumstances I never parted, and wrote a few 
words as legibly as I could- 

“ Take in sail.” 

With a deep sigh he nodded his head and acquiesced. 

His head had scarcely time to fall back in the position 
from which he had momentarily raised it, than a disc or 
ball of fire appeared on the very edge of the raft—our 
devoted, our doomed craft. The mast and sail are carried 
away bodily, and I see them swept away to a prodigious 
height like a kite. 



218 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

We were frozen, actually shivered with terror. The 
ball of fire, half white, half azure-colored, about the size 
of a ten-inch bomb-shell, moved along, turning with pro¬ 
digious rapidity to leeward of the storm. It ran about 
here, there and everywhere, it clambered up one of the 
bulwarks of the raft, it leaped upon the sack of provi¬ 
sions, and then finally descended lightly, fell like a foot 
ball and landed on our powder barrel. 

Hoirible situation. An explosion of course was now 
inevitable. 

By heaven’s mercy, it is not so. 

The dazzling disc moves on one side, it approaches 
Hans, who looked at it with singular fixity; then it ap¬ 
proached my uncle, who cast himself on his knees to avoid 
it; it came towards me, as I stood pale and shuddering in 
the dazzling light and heat; it pirouetted round my feet, 
which I endeavored to withdraw. 

An odor of nitrous gas filled the whole air; it penetrated 
to the throat, to the lungs. I felt ready to choke. 
t Why ls tliat 1 cannot withdraw my feet ? Are they 
riveted to the flooring of the raft ? 

No. 

The fall of the electric globe has turned all the iron on 
board into loadstones—the instruments, the tools, the arms 
are clanging together with awful and horrible noise; the 
nails of my heavy boots adhere closely to the plate of iron 
incrustated in the wood. I cannot withdraw my foot. 

It is the old story over again of the mountain of 
adamant. 

At last, by a violent and almost superhuman effort, I tear 
it away just as the ball which is still executing its gyratory 

motions is about to run round it and drag me with it_if_ 

O what intense stupendous light! The globe of fire 
bursts—we are enveloped in cascades of living fire, which 
flood the space around with luminous matter. 



THE BALL OF FIRE 






































































































A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 219 

Then all went out and darkness once more fell upon the 
deep ! I had just time to see my uncle once more cast ap¬ 
parently senseless on the flooring of the raft, Hans at the 
helm, “spitting fire” under the influence of the elec¬ 
tricity which seemed to have gone through him. 

Whnher are we going, I ask? and echo answers, 
Whither ? ’ 

Tuesday, August 25. I have just come out of a long 
fainting fit. The awful and hideous storm still continues; 
the lightning has increased in vividness, and pours out its 
fiery wrath like a brood of serpents let loose in the atmos¬ 
phere. 

Are we still upon the sea? Yes, and being carried 
along with incredible velocity. 

We have passed under England, under the Channel, 
under France, probably under the whole extent of Europe' 

* * * * * * 

Another awful clamor in the .distance. This time it is 
certain that the sea is breaking upon the rocks at no great 
distance. Then- 


220 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XXXIII. 

OUR ROUTE REVERSED. 

Here ends what I call My Journal of our voyage on 
board the raft, which Journal was happily saved from the 
wreck. I proceed with my narrative as I did before I 
commenced my daily notes. 

What happened when the terrible shock took place, 
when the raft was cast upon the rocky shore, it would be 
impossible for me now to say. I felt myself precipitated 
violently into the boiling waves, and if I escaped from a 
certain and cruel death, it was wholly owing to the de¬ 
termination of the faithful Hans, who clutching me by 
the arm, saved me from the yawning abyss. 

The courageous Icelander then carried me in his power¬ 
ful arms, far out of the reach of the waves, and laid me 
down upon a burning expanse of sand, where I found 
myself some time afterwards in the company of my uncle 
the Professor. 

Then he quietly returned towards the fatal rocks, 
against which the furious waves were beating, in order to 
save any stray waifs from the wreck. This man was 
always practical and thoughtful. I could not utter a 
word ; I was quite overcome with emotion; my whole 
body was broken and bruised with fatigue; it took hours 
before I was anything like myself. 

Meanwhile, there fell a fearful deluge of rain, drenching 
as to the skin. Its very violence, however, proclaimed the 
approaching end of the storm. Some overhanging rocks, 
afforded us a slight protection from the torrents. 

Under this shelter, Hans prepared some food, which, 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 221 

however, I was unable to touch; and, exhausted by the 
three weary days and nights of watching, we fell into a 
deep and painful sleep. My dreams were fearful, but at 
last exhausted nature asserted her supremacy, and I slum¬ 
bered. 

Next day when I awoke the change was magical. The 
weather was magnificent. Air and sea, as if by mutual 
consent, had regained their serenity. Every trace of the 
storm, even the faintest, had disappeared. I was saluted 
on my awakening by the first joyous tones I had heard 
from the Professor for many a day. His gaiety, indeed, 
was something terrible. 

“ Well, my lad,” he cried, rubbing his hands together, 
“ have you slept soundly ? ” 

Might it not have been supposed that we were in the 
old house on the Konigstrasse; that I had just come 
down quietly to my breakfast, and that my marriage with 
Gretchen was to take place that very day ? My uncle’s 
coolness was exasperating. 

Alas, considering how the tempest had driven us in an 
easterly direction, we had passed under the whole of Ger¬ 
many, under the city of Hamburg where I had been so 
happy, under the very street which contained all I loved 
and cared for in the world. 

It was a positive fact that I was only separated from 
her by a distance of forty leagues. But these forty 
leagues were of hard impenetrable granite ! 

All these dreary and miserable reflections passed 
through my mind, before I attempted to answer my 
uncle’s question. 

“ Why, what is the matter ? ” he cried, “ cannot you 
say whether you have slept well or not ? ” 

“ I have slept very well,” was my reply, “ but every 
bone in my body aches. I suppose that will lead to 
nothing.” 


222 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


“ Nothing at all, my boy. It is only the result of the 
fatigue of the last few days—that is all.” 

“ You appear—if I may be allowed to say so—to be 
very jolly this morning,” I said. 

“ Delighted, my dear boy, delighted. Was never happier 
in my life. We have at last reached the wished-for port.” 

“ The end of our expedition ? ” cried I, in a tone of con¬ 
siderable surprise. 

“ No ; but to the confines of that sea which I began to 
fear would never end, but go round the whole world. We 
will now tranquilly resume our journey by land, and once 
again endeavor to dive into the centre of the Earth.” 

“My dear uncle,” I began, in a hesitating kind of way, 
“ allow me to ask you one question ? ” 

“ Certainly, Harry; a dozen if you think proper.” 

“ One will suffice. How about getting back ? ” I asked. 

“ How about getting back ? What a question to ask. 
We have not as yet reached the end of our journey.” 

I know that. All I want to know is, how you pro¬ 
pose we shall manage the return voyage ? ” 

“ In the most simple manner in the world,” said the im¬ 
perturbable Professor. “ Once we reach the exact centre of 
this sphere, either we shall find a new road by which to 
ascend to the surface, or we shall simply turn round and 
go back by the way we came. I have every reason to be¬ 
lieve that while we are travelling forward, it will not close 
behind us.” 

“ Then one of the first matters to see to will be to repair 
the raft,” was my rather melancholy response. 

“ Of course. We must attend to that above all things,” 
continued the Professor. 

“ Then comes the all-important question of provisions,” 

I urged. “ Have we anything like enough left to enable 
us to accomplish such great, such amazing, designs as you 
contemplate carrying out?” 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 223 

“ I have seen into the matter, and my answer is in the 
affirmative. Hans is a very clever fellow, and I have reason 
to believe that he has saved the greater part of the cargo. 
But the best way to satisfy your scruples, is to come and 
judge for yourself.” 

Saying which, he led the way out of the kind of open 
grotto in which we had taken shelter. I had almost begun 
to hope that which I should rather have feared, and this 
was the impossibility of such a. shipwreck leaving even the 
slightest signs of what it had carried as freight. I was, 
however, thoroughly mistaken. 

As soon as I reached the shores of this inland sea, I 
found Hans standing gravely in the midst of a large num¬ 
ber of things laid out in complete order. My uncle wrung 
his hands with deep and silent gratitude. His heart was 
too full for speech. 

This man, whose superhuman devotion to his employers, 
I not only never saw surpassed, nor even equalled, had 
been hard at work all the time we slept, and at the risk 
of his life had succeeded in saving the most precious arti¬ 
cles of our cargo. 

Of course, under the circumstances, we necessarily ex¬ 
perienced several severe losses. Our weapons had wholly 
vanished. But experience had taught us to do without 
them. The provision of powder had, however, remained 
intact, after having narrowly escaped blowing us all to 
atoms in the storm. 

“ Well,” said the Professor, who was now ready to make 
the best of everything, “ as we have no guns, all we have 
to do is to give up all idea of hunting.” 

“Yes, my dear sir, we can do without them, but what 
about all our instruments ? ” 

“ Here is the manometer, the most useful of all, and 
which I gladly accept in lieu of the rest. With it alone I 
can calculate the depth as we proceed; by its means alone 


224 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

I shall be able to decide when we have reached the centre 
of the earth. Ha, ha! but for this little instrument we 
might make a mistake, and run the risk of coming out at 
the antipodes! ” 

All this was said amid bursts of unnatural laughter. 

“ But the compass,” I cried, “ without that what can we 
do?” 

Here it is safe and sound ! ” he cried, with real joy, 
ah, ah, and here we have the chronometer and the ther¬ 
mometers. Hans the hunter is indeed an invaluable man!” 

It was impossible to deny this fact. As far as the nauti¬ 
cal aud other instruments were concerned, nothing was 
wanting. Then on further examination, I found ladders, 
cords, pickaxes, crowbars, and shovels, all scattered about 
on the shore. 

There was, however, finally the most important question 
of all, and that was, provisions. 

“ But what are we to do for food ? ” I asked. 

“ Let us see to the commissariat department,” replied 
my uncle gravely. 

The boxes which contained our supply of food for the 
voyage were placed in a row along the strand, and were in 
a capital state of preservation ; the sea had in every case 
respected their contents, and to sum up in one sentence, 
taking into consideration, biscuits, salt meat, schiedam and 
dried fish, we could still calculate on having about four 
months’ supply, if used with prudence and caution. 

“ Four months,” cried the sanguine Professor, in high 
glee, “ then we shall have plenty of time both to go and to 
come, and with what remains I undertake to give a grand 
dinner to my colleagues of the Johanneum.” 

I sighed. I should by this time have used myself to 
the temperament of my uncle, and yet this man astonished 
me more and more every day. He was the greatest 
human enigma I ever had known. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 225 

“ Now,” said he, “ before we do anything else we must 
lay in a stock of fresh water. The rain has fallen in 
abundance, and filled the hollows of the granite. There 
- is a rich supply of water, and we have no fear of suffering 
from thirst, which in our circumstances is of the last im¬ 
portance. As for the raft, I shall recommend Hans to 
repair it to the best of his abilities; though I have every 
reason to believe we shall not require it again.” 

“ How is that ?” I cried, more amazed than ever at my 
uncle’s style of reasoning. 

“ I have an idea, my dear boy; it is none other than 
this simple fact: we shall not come out by the same open¬ 
ing as that by which we entered.” 

I began to look at my uncle with vague suspicion. An 
idea had more than once taken possession of me; and this 
was, that he was going mad. And yet, little did I think 
how true and prophetic his words were doomed to be. 

“ And now,” he said, “ having seen to all these matters 
of detail, to breakfast.” 

I followed him to a sort of projecting cape, after he had 
given his last instructions to our guide. In this original 
position, with dried meat, biscuit, and a delicious cup of 
tea, we made a satisfactory meal—I may say one of the 
most welcome and pleasant I ever remember. Exhaus¬ 
tion, the keen atmosphere, the state of calm after so much 
agitation, all contributed to give me an excellent appetite. 
Indeed, it contributed very much to producing a pleasant 
and cheerful state of mind. 

While breakfast was in hand, and between the sips of 
warm tea, I asked my uncle if he had any idea of how we 
now stood in relation to the world above. 

“ For my part,” I added, “ I think it will be rather 
difficult to determine.” 

“ Well, if we were compelled to fix the exact spot,” said 
my uncle, “ it might be difficult, since during the three 


226 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

days of that awful tempest I could keep no account either 
of the quickness of our pace, or of the direction in which 
the raft was going. Still, we will endeavor to approximate 
to the truth. We shall not, I believe, be so very far out.” 

“ Well, if I recollect rightly,” I replied, “our last obser¬ 
vation was made at the Geyser island.” 

“Harry’s Island, my boy! Harry’s Island. Do not 
decline the honor of having named it; given your name 
to an island discovered by us, the first human beings who 
trod it since the creation of the world!” 

“ Let it be so, then. At Harry’s Island we had already 
gone over two hundred and seventy leagues of sea, and we 
were, I believe, about six hundred leagues, more or less 
from Iceland.” 

“ Good. I am glad to see that you remember so well. 
Let us start from that point, and let us count four days of 
storm, during which our rate of travelling must have been 
very great. I should say that our velocity must have been 
about eighty leagues to the twenty-four hours.” 

I agreed that I thought this a fair calculation. There 
were then three hundred leagues to be added to the grand 
total. 

“Yes, and the Central Sea must extend at least six 
hundred leagues from side to side. Do you know, my 
boy, Harry, that we have discovered an inland lake larger 
than the Mediterranean ?” 

“ Certainly, and we only know of its extent in one way. 
It may be hundreds of miles in length.” 

“Very likely.” 

“ Then,” said I, after calculating for some minutes, “ if 
your previsions are right, we are at this moment exactly 
under the Mediterranean itself.” 

“ Do you think so ?” 

“Yes, I am almost certain of it. Are we not nine 
hundred leagues distant from Reykjawik ?” 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 227 

“ That is perfectly true, and a famous bit of road we 
have travelled, my boy. But why we should be under the 
Mediterranean more than under Turkey or the Atlantic 
Ocean can only be known when we are sure of not having 
deviated from our course; and of this we know nothing.” 

“I do not think we were driven very far from our 
course: the wind appears to me to have been always about 
the same. My opinion is that this shore must be situated 
to the southeast of Port Gretchen.” 

“ Good—I hope so. It will, however, be easy to decide 
the matter by taking the bearings from our departure by 
means of the compass. Come along, and we will consult 
that invaluable invention.” 

The Professor now walked eagerly in the direction of the 
rock where the indefatigable Hans had placed the instru¬ 
ments in safety. My uncle was gay and light-hearted; he 
rubbed his hands, and assumed all sorts of attitudes. He 
was to all appearance once more a young man. Since I 
had known him never had he been so amiable and pleasant. 
I followed him, rather curious to know whether I had 
made any mistake in my estimation of our position. 

As soon as we had reached the rock, my uncle took the 
compass, placed it horizontally before him and looked 
keenly at the needle. 

As he had at first shaken it to give it vivacity, it oscil¬ 
lated considerably, and then slowly assumed its right 
position under the influence of the magnetic power. 

The Professor bent his eyes curiously over the wondrous 
instrument. A violent start immediately showed the ex¬ 
tent of his emotion. 

He closed his eyes, rubbed them, and took another and 
a keener survey. 

Then he turned slowly round to me, stupefaction de¬ 
picted on his countenance. 

“ What is the matter?” said I, beginning to be alarmed. 


228 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

He could not speak. He was too overwhelmed for 
words. He simply pointed to the instrument. 

I examined it eagerly according to his mute directions, 
and a loud cry of surprise escaped my lips. The needle 
of the compass pointed due north, in the direction we ex¬ 
pected was the south! 

It pointed to the shore instead of to the high seas. 

I shook the compass; I examined it with a curious and 
anxious eye. It was in a state of perfection. No blemish 
in any way explained the phenomenon. Whatever posi¬ 
tion we forced the needle into, it returned invariably to the 
same unexpected point. 

It was useless attempting to conceal from ourselves the 
fatal truth. 

There could be no doubt about it, unwelcome as was the 
fact, that during the tempest, there had been a sudden 
slant of wind, of which we had been unable to take any 
account, and thus the raft had carried us back to the shores 
we had left, apparently for ever, so many days before! 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE 


EARTH. 229 


CHAPTER XXXIV. 

A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY. 

It would be altogether impossible for me to give any 
idea of the utter astonishment which overcame the Pro¬ 
fessor on making this extraordinary discovery. Amaze¬ 
ment, incredulity, and rage were blended in such a way as 
to alarm me. 

During the whole course of my life I had never seen a 
man at first so chapfallen ; and then so furiously indignant. 

The terrible fatigues of our sea voyage, the fearful 
dangers we had passed through, had all, all, gone for 
nothing. We had to begin them all over again. 

Instead of progressing, as we fondly expected, during a 
voyage of so many days, we had retreated. Every hour 
of our expedition on the raft had been so much lost time! 

Presently, however, the indomitable energy of my uncle 
overcame every other consideration. 

“So,” he said, between his set teeth, “ fatality will play 
me these terrible tricks. The elements themselves conspire 
to overwhelm me with mortification. Air, fire, and water 
combine their united efforts to oppose my passage. Well, 
they shall see what the earnest will of a determined man 
can do. I will not yield, I will not retreat even one inch; 
and we shall see who shall triumph in this great contest— 
man or nature.” 

Standing upright on a rock, irritated and menacing, 
Professor Hardvvigg, like the ferocious Ajax, seemed to 
defy the fates. I, however, took upon myself to interfere, 
and to impose some sort of check upon such insensate 
enthusiasm. 



230 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

« Listen to me, uncle,” I said, in a firm but temperate 
tone of voice, “there must be some limit to ambition here 
below. It is utterly useless to struggle against the impos 
sible. Pray listen to reason. We are utterly unprepared 
for a sea voyage; it is simple madness to think of per¬ 
forming a journey of five hundred leagues upon a wretched 
pile of beams, with a counterpane for a sail, a paltry stick 
for a mast, and a tempest to contend with. As we are 
totally incapable of steering our frail craft, we shall be¬ 
come the mere plaything of the storm, and it is acting the 
part of madmen if we, a second time, run any risk upon 
this dangerous and treacherous Central Sea.” 

These are only a few of the reasons and arguments I put 
together—reasons and arguments which to me appeared 
unanswerable. I was allowed to go on without interrup¬ 
tion for about ten minutes. The explanation to this I 
soon discovered. The Professor was not even listening, 
and did not hear a word of all my eloquence. 

“ To the raft!” he cried, in a hoarse voice, when I paused 
for a reply. 

Such was the result of my strenuous effort to resist his 
iron will. I tried again; I begged and implored him; I 
got into a passion; but I had to deal with a will more de¬ 
termined than my own. I seemed to feel like the waves 
which fought and battled against the huge mass of granite 
at our feet, which had smiled grimly for so many ages at 
their puny efforts. 

Hans, meanwhile, without taking part in our discussion, 
had been repairing the raft. One would have supposed 
that he instinctively guesse^ at the further projects of 
my uncle. 

By means of some fragments of cordage, he had again 
made the raft sea-worthy. 

While I had been speaking he had hoisted a new mast and 
sail, the latter already fluttering and waving in the breeze. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 231 

The worthy Professor spoke a few words to our imper- 
turbable guide, who immediately began to put our baggage 
on board, and to prepare for our departure. The atmos¬ 
phere was now tolerably clear and pure, and the north-east 
wind blew steadily and serenely. It appeared likely to 
last for some time. 

What, then, could I do? Could I undertake to resist 
the iron will of two men? It was simply impossible; if 
even I could have hoped for the support of Hans. This, 
however, was out of the question. It appeared to me that 
the Icelander had set aside all personal will and identity. 
He was a picture of abnegation. 

I could hope for nothing from one so infatuated with and 
devoted to his master. All I could do, therefore, was to 
swim with the stream. 

In a mood of stolid and sullen resignation, I was about 
to take my accustomed place on the raft, when my uncle 
placed his hand upon my shoulder. 

“ There is no hurry, my boy,” he said, “ we shall not 
start until to-morrow.” 

I looked the picture of resignation to the dire will of 
fate. 

“ Under the circumstances,” he said, “ I ought to neg¬ 
lect no precautions. As fate has cast me upon these 
shores, I shall not leave without having completely ex¬ 
amined them.” 

In order to understand this remark, I must explain that 
though we had been driven back to the northern shore, we 
had landed at a very different spot from that which had 
been our starting point. 

Port Gretchen must, we calculated, be very much to the 
westward. Nothing, therefore, was more natural and rea¬ 
sonable than that we should reconnoitre this new shore 
upon which we had so unexpectedly landed. 

“ Let us go on a journey of discovery,” I cried. 


232 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

And leaving Hans to his important operation, we started 
on our expedition. The distance between the foreshore at 
high-water and the foot of the rocks was considerable. It 
would take about half-an-hour’s walking to get from one 
to the other. 

As we trudged along, our feet crushed innumerable 
shells of every shape and size—once the dwelling-place of 
animals of every period of creation. 

I particularly noticed some enormous shells—carapaces 
(turtle and tortoise species) the diameter of which ex¬ 
ceeded fifteen feet. 

They had in past ages belonged to those gigantic glyp- 
todons of 'the pliocene period, of which the modern turtle 
is but a minute specimen. In addition, the whole soil was 
covered by a vast quantity of stony relics, having the ap¬ 
pearance of flints worn by the action of the waves, and ly¬ 
ing in successive layers one above the other. I came to 
the conclusion that in past ages the sea must have covered 
the whole district. Upon the scattered rocks, now lying 
far beyond its reach, the mighty waves of ages had left 
evident marks of their passage. 

On reflection, this appeared to me partially to explain 
the existence of this remarkable ocean, forty leagues below 
the surface of the earth’s crust. According to my new, 
and perhaps fanciful, theory, this liquid mass must be 
gradually lost in the deep bowels of the earth. I had also 
no doubt that this mysterious sea was fed by infiltration 
of the ocean above, through imperceptible fissures. 

Nevertheless, it was impossible not to admit that these 
fissures must now be nearly choked up, for if not, the ca¬ 
vern, or rather the immense and stupendous reservoir 
would have been completely filled in a short space of time. 
Perhaps even this water, having to contend against the ac¬ 
cumulated subterraneous fires of the interior of the earth, 
had become partially vaporized. Hence the explanation 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 233 

of those heavy clouds suspended over our heads, and the 
superabundant display of that electricity which occasioned 
such terrible storms in this deep and cavernous sea. 

This lucid explanation of the phenomena we had wit¬ 
nessed appeared to me quite satisfactory. However great 
and mighty the marvels of nature may seem to us, they 
are always to be explained by physical reasons. Every¬ 
thing is subordinate to some great law of nature. 

It now appeared clear that we were walking upon a kind 
of sedimentary soil, formed like all the soils of that period, 
so frequent on the surface of the globe, by the subsidence 
of the waters. The Professor, who was now in his element, 
carefully examined every rocky fissure. Let him only find 
an opening and it directly became important to him to ex¬ 
amine its depth. 

For a whole mile we followed the windings of the Cen¬ 
tral Sea, when suddenly an important change took place 
in the aspect of the soil. It seemed to have been rudely 
cast up, convulsionized, as it were, by a violent upheaving 
of the lower strata. In many places, hollows here, and 
hillocks there, attested great dislocations at some other 
period of the terrestrial mass. 

We advanced with great difficulty over the broken 
masses of granite mixed with flint, quartz and alluvial de¬ 
posits, when a large field, more even than a field, a plain 
of bones, appeared suddenly before our eyes! It looked 
like an immense cemetery, where generation after genera¬ 
tion had mingled their mortal dust. 

Lofty barrows of early remains rose at intervals. They 
undulated away to the limits of the distant horizon and 
were lost in a thick and brown fog. 

On that spot, some three square miles in extent, was ac¬ 
cumulated the whole history of animal life—scarcely one 
creature upon the comparatively modern soil of the upper 
and inhabited world had there existed. 


234 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

Nevertheless, we were drawn forward by an all-absorb¬ 
ing and impatient curiosity. Our feet crushed with a dry 
and crackling sound the remains of those prehistoric fossils, 
for which the museums of great cities quarrel, even when 
they obtain only rare and curious morsels. A thousand 
such naturalists as Cuvier would not have sufficed to re¬ 
compose the skeletons of the organic beings which lay in 
this magnificent osseous collection. 

I was utterly confounded. My uncle stood for some 
minutes with his arms raised on high towards the thick 
granite vault which served us for a sky. His mouth was 
wide open ; his eyes sparkled wildly behind his spectacles 
(which he had fortunately saved), his head bobbed up and 
down and from side to side, while his whole attitude and 
mien expressed unbounded astonishment. 

He stood in the presence of an endless, wondrous and 
inexhaustibly rich collection of antediluvian monsters, 
piled up for his own private and peculiar satisfaction. 

Fancy an enthusiastic lover of books carried suddenly 
into the very midst of the famous library of Alexandria 
burned by the sacrilegious Omar, and which some miracle 
had restored to its pristine splendor! Such was some¬ 
thing of the state of mind in which uncle Hardwigg was 
now placed. 

For some time he stood thus, literally aghast at the 
magnitude of his discovery. 

But it was even a greater excitement when, darting 
wildly over this mass of organic dust, he caught up a 
Baked skull and addressed me in a quivering voice— 

“ Harry, my boy—Harry—this is a human head ! ” 

“ A human head, uncle! ” I said, no less amazed and 
tupified than himself. 

“Yes, nephew. Ah! Mr. Milne-Edwards—ah! Mr. 
De Quatrefages—why are you not here where I am—I, 
Professor Hardwigg.! ” 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 235 


CHAPTER XXXV. 

DISCOVERY UPON DISCOVERY. 

In order fully to understand the exclamation made by 
my uncle, and his allusions to these illustrious and learned 
men, it will be necessary to enter into certain explanations 
in regard to a circumstance of the highest importance to 
palaeontology or the science of fossil life, which had taken 
place a short time before our departure from the upper 
regions of the earth. 

On the 28th of March, 1863, some navigators under 
the direction of M. Boucher de Perthes, were at work in 
the great quarries of Moulin-Quignon, near Abbeville, in 
the department of the Somme, in France. While at 
work, they unexpectedly came upon a human jawbone 
buried fourteen feet below the surface of the soil. It was 
the first fossil of the kind that had ever been brought to 
the light of day. Near this unexpected human relic were 
found stone hatchets and carved flints, colored and clothed 
by time in one uniform brilliant tint of verdigris. 

. The report of this extraordinary and unexpected dis¬ 
covery spread not only all over France, but over England 
and Germany. Many learned men belonging to various 
scientific bodies, and noteworthy among others, Messrs. 
Milne-Edwards and De Quatrefages, took the affair very 
much to heart, demonstrated the incontestable authenticity 
of the bone in question, and became—to use the phrase 
( then recognized in England—the most ardent supporters 
of the “jawbone question.” 

To the eminent geologists of the United Kingdom who 
looked upon the fact as certain—Messrs. Falconer, Buck, 
Carpenter and others—were soon united the learned men 



236 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

of Germany, and among those in the first rank, the most 
eager, the most enthusiastic, was my worthy uncle, Pro¬ 
fessor Hardwigg. 

The authenticity of a human fossil of the quaternary 
period seemed then to be incontestably demonstrated, and 
even to be admitted by the most skeptical. 

This system or theory, call it what you will, had, it is 
true, a bitter adversary in M. Elie de Beaumont. This 
learned man, who holds such a high place in the scientific 
world, holds that the soil of Moulin-Quignon does not 
belong to the diluvium, but to a much less ancient strata, 
and, in accordance with Cuvier in this respect, he would 
by no means admit that the human species was cotempor- 
rary with the animals of the quaternary epoch. My worthy 
uncle, Professor Hardwigg, in concert with the great 
majority of geologists, had held firm, had disputed, dis¬ 
cussed, and finally, after considerable talking and writing, 
M. Elie de Beaumont had been pretty well left alone in 
his opinions. 

We were familiar with all the details of this discussion, 
but were far from being aware then that since our depar¬ 
ture the matter had entered upon a new phase. Other 
similar jawbones, though belonging to individuals of 
varied types and very different natures, had been found in 
the movable gray sands of certain grottoes in France, 
Switzerland, and Belgium; together with arms, utensils, 
tools, bones of children, of men in the prime of life, and 
of old men. The existence of men in the quaternary 
period became, therefore, more positive every day. 

But this was far from being all. New remains, dug up 
from the pliocene or tertiary deposits, had enabled the 
more far-seeing or audacious among learned men to assign 
even a far greater degree of antiquity to the human race. 
These remains, it is true, were not those of men; that is, 
were not the bones of men, but objects decidedly having 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 237 

served the human race, shin bones, thigh bones of fossil 
animals, regularly scooped out, and in fact sculptured- 
bearing the unmistakable signs of human handy-work. 

By means of these wondrous and unexpected dis¬ 
coveries, man ascended endless centuries in the scale of 
time; he, in fact, preceded the mastodon; became the 
cotemporary of the elephas meridionalis —the southern ele¬ 
phant ; acquired an antiquity of over a hundred thousand 
years—since that is the date given by the most eminent 
geologists to the pliocene period of the earth. Such was 
then the state of palseontologic science, and what we more¬ 
over knew, sufficed to explain our attitude before this 
great cemetery of the plains of the Hardwigg Ocean. 

It will now be easy to understand the Professor’s 
mingled astonishment and joy when, on advancing about 
twenty yards, he found himself in the presence of, I may • 
say face to face with, a specimen of the human race 
actually belonging to the quarternary period! 

It was indeed a human skull, perfectly recognizable. 
Had a soil of very peculiar nature, like that of the ceme¬ 
tery of St. Michel at Bordeaux, preserved it during 
countless ages? This was the question I asked myself, 
but which I was wholly unable to answer. But this head 
with stretched and parchmenty skin, with the teeth whole, 
the hair abundant, was before our eyes as in life! 

I stood mute, almost paralyzed with wonder and awe 
before this dread apparition of another age. My uncle, 
who on almost every occasion was a great talker, remained 
for a time completely dumbfounded. He was too full of 
emotion for speech to be possible. After a while, however, 
we raised up the body to which the skull belonged. We 
stood it on end. It seemed, to our excited imaginations, 
to look at us with its terrible hollow eyes. 

After some minutes of silence, the man was vanquished 
by the Professor. Human instincts succumbed to scien- 


238 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

tific pride and exultation. Professor Hardwigg, carried 
away by his enthusiasm, forgot all the circumstances of 
our journey, the extraordinary position in which we were 
placed, the immense cavern which stretched far away over 
our heads. There can be no doubt that he thought him¬ 
self at the Institution addressing his attentive pupils, for 
he put on his most doctorial style, waved his hand, and 
began— 

“Gentlemen, I have the honor on this auspicious occa¬ 
sion to present to you a man of the quarternary period of 
our globe. Many learned men have denied his very exist¬ 
ence, while other able persons, perhaps of even higher 
authority, have affirmed their belief in the reality of his 
life. If the St. Thomases of palaeontology were present, 
they would reverentially touch him with their fingers and 
believe in his existence, thus acknowledging their obstinate 
heresy. I know that science should be careful in relation 
to all discoveries of this nature. I am not without having 
heard of the many Barnums and other quacks who have 
made a trade of such like pretended discoveries. I have, 
of course, heard of the discovery of the knee-bones of 
Ajax, of the pretended finding of the body of Orestes by 
the Spartiates, and of the body of Asterius, ten spans long, 
fifteen feet—of which we read in Pausanias. 

“I have read everything in relation to the skeleton of 
Trapani, discovered in the fourteenth century, and which 
many persons chose to regard as that of Polyphemus, and 
the history of the giant dug up during the sixteenth cen¬ 
tury in the environs of Palmyra. You are as well aware 
as I am, gentlemen, of the existence of the celebrated ana¬ 
lysis made near Lucerne, in 1577, of the great bones 
which the celebrated Doctor Felix Plater declared belonged 
to a giant about nineteen feet high. I have devoured 
all the treatises of Cassanion, and all those memoirs, pamph¬ 
lets, speeches, and replies, published in reference to the 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OP THE EARTH. 239 

skeleton of Teutobochus, king of the Cimbri, the invader 
of Gaul, dug out of a gravel pit in Dauphiny, in 1613. In 
the eighteenth century I should have denied, with Peter 
Campet, the existence of the preadamites of Scheuchzer. I 
have had in my hands the writing called Gigans—” 

Here my uncle was afflicted by the natural infirmity 
wdiich prevented him from pronouncing difficult words in 
public. It was not exactly stuttering, but a strange sort 
of constitutional hesitation. 

“ The writing named Gigans—” he repeated. 

He, however, could get no further. 

“ Giganteo -” 

Impossible! The unfortunate word would not come out. 
There would have been great laughter at the Institution, 
had the mistake happened there. 

“ Gigantosteology!” at last exclaimed Professor Hard- 
wigg, between two savage growls. 

Having got over our difficulty, and getting more and 
more excited— 

“ Yes, gentlemen, I am well acquainted with all these 
matters, and know, also, that Cuvier and Blumenbach fully 
recognized in these bones, the undeniable remains of mam¬ 
moths of the quaternary period. But after what we now 
see, to allow a doubt is to insult scientific inquiry. There 
is the body ; you can see it; you can touch it. It is not a 
skeleton, it is a complete and uninjured body, preserved 
with an anthropological object.” 

I did not attempt to controvert this singular and astound¬ 
ing assertion. 

“ If I could but wash this corpse in a solution of sul¬ 
phuric acid,” continued my uncle, “ I would undertake to 
remove all the earthy particles,' and these resplendent 
shells, which are incrusted all over this body. But I am 
without this precious dissolving medium. Nevertheless, 
such as it is, this body will tell its own history.” 



240 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

Here the Professor held up the fossil body, and exhibited 
it with rare dexterity. No professional showman could 
have shown more activity. 

“ As on examination you will see,” my uncle continued, 
“ it is only about six feet in length, which is a long way 
from the pretended giants of early days. As to the par¬ 
ticular race to which it belonged, it is incontestably Cau¬ 
casian. It is of the white race, that is, of our own. The 
skull of this fossil being is a perfect ovoid without any 
remarkable or prominent development of the cheek bones, 
and without any projection of the jaw. It presents no in¬ 
dication of the prognathism which modifies the facial 
angle.* Measure the angle for yourselves, and you will 
find that it is just ninety degrees. But I will advance still 
farther on the road of inquiry and deduction, and I dare 
venture to say that this human sample or specimen belongs 
to the Japhetic family, which spread over the world from 
India to the uttermost limits of western Europe. There 
is no occasion, gentlemen, to smile at my remarks.” 

Of course nobody smiled. But the excellent Professor 
was so accustomed to beaming countenances at his lectures, 
that he believed he saw all his audience laughing during 
the delivery of his learned dissertation. 

“ Yes,” he continued, with renewed animation, “this is a 
fossil man, a contemporary of the mastodons, with the bones 
of which this whole amphitheatre is covered. But if I am 
called on to explain how he came to this place, how these 
various strata by wkich he is covered have fallen into this 
vast cavity, I can undertake to give you no explanation. 
Doubtless, if we carry ourselves back to the quaternary 
epoch, we shall find that great and mighty convulsions 

* The facial angle is formed by two planes—one more or less vertical 
which is in a straight line with the forehead and the incisors; the other 
horizontal, which passes through the organs of hearing, and the lower nasal 
bone. Prognathism, in anthropological language, means that particular 
projection of the jaw which modifies the facial angle. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 241 

tool£ place in the crust of the earth; the continually cool¬ 
ing operation, through which the earth had to pass, pro¬ 
duced fissures, landslips, and chasms, through which a large 
portion of the earth made its way. I come to no absolute 
conclusion, but there is the man, surrounded by the works 
of his hands, his hatchets, and his carved flints, which 
belong to the stony period ; and the only rational supposi¬ 
tion is, that, like myself, he visited the centre of the earth 
as a travelling tourist, a pioneer of science. At all events, 
there can be no doubt of his great age, and of his being 
one of the oldest race of human beings.” 

The Professor with these words ceased his oration, and I 
burst forth into loud and “ unanimous ” applause. Be¬ 
sides, after all, my uncle was right. Much more learned 
men than his nephew would have found it rather hard to 
refute his facts and arguments. 

Another circumstance soon presented itself. This fossi¬ 
lized body was not the only one in this vast plain of bones 
—the cemetery of an extinct world. Other bodies were 
found, as we trod the dusty plain, and my uncle was able 
to choose the most marvellous of these specimens in order 
to convince the most incredulous. 

In truth, it was a' surprising spectacle, the successive re¬ 
mains of generations and generations of men and animals 
confounded together in one vast cemetery. But a great 
question now presented itself to our notice, and one we 
were actually afraid to contemplate in all its bearings. 

Had these once animated beings been buried so far be¬ 
neath the soil by some tremendous convulsion of nature, 
after they had been earth to earth and ashes to ashes, or had 
they lived here below, in this subterranean world, under 
this factitious sky, born, married, and given in marriage, 
and dying at last, just like ordinary inhabitants of the earth ? 

Up to the present moment, marine monsters, fish, and 
such like animals, had alone been seen alive 1 


242 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

The question which rendered us rather uneasy, was a 
pertinent one. Were any of these men of the abyss wan¬ 
dering about the deserted shores of this wondrous sea of 
the centre of the earth ? 

This was a question which rendered me very uneasy and 
uncomfortable. How, should they really be in existence, 
would they receive us men from above ? 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 243 


CHAPTER XXXVI. 

WHAT IS IT? 

For ft long and weary hour we tramped over this great 
bed of bones. We advanced regardless of everything, 
drawn on by ardent curiosity. What other, marvels did 
this great cavern contain—what other wondrous treasures 
for the scientific man ? My eyes were quite prepared for 
any number of surprises, my imagination lived in expec¬ 
tation of something new and wonderful. 

The borders of the great Central Ocean had for some 
time disappeared behind the hills that were scattered over 
the ground occupied by the ‘plain of bones. The imprudent 
and enthusiastic Professor, who did not care whether he 
lost himself or not, hurried me forward. We advanced 
silently, bathed in waves of electric fluid. 

By reason of a phenomenon which I cannot explain, and 
thanks to its extreme diffusion, now complete, the light 
illumined equally the sides of every hill and rock. Its 
seat appeared to be nowhere, in no determined force, and 
produced no shade whatever. 

The appearance presented was that of a tropical coun¬ 
try at mid-day in summer—in the midst of the equatorial 
regions and under the vertical rays of the sun. 

All signs of vapor had disappeared. The rocks, the 
distant mountains, some confused masses of far-off forests, 
assumed a weird and mysterious aspect under this equal 
distribution of the luminous fluid ! 

We resembled, to a certain extent, the mysterious per¬ 
sonage in one of Hoffmann’s fantastic tales—the man who 
lost his shadow. 


244 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

After we had walked about a mile farther, we came to 
the edge of a vast forest, not, however, one of the vast 
mushroom forests we had discovered near Port Gretchen. 

It was the glorious and wild vegetation of the tertiary 
period, in all its superb magnificence. Huge palms, of a 
species now unknown, superb palmacites—a genus of fossil 
palms from the coal formation—pines, yews, cypress, and 
conifers or cone-bearing trees, the whole bound together by 
an inextricable and complicated mass of creeping plants. 

A beautiful carpet of mosses and ferns grew beneath the 
trees. Pleasant brooks murmured beneath umbrageous 
boughs, little worthy of this name, for no shade did they 
give. Upon their borders grew small tree-like shrubs, 
such as are seen in the hot countries on our own inhabited 
globe. 

The one thing wanted to these plants, these shrubs, these 
trees—was color! For ever deprived of the vivifying 
warmth of the sun, they were vapid and colorless. All 
shade was lost in one uniform tint, of a brown and faded 
character. The leaves were wholly devoid of verdure, and 
the flowers, so numerous during the tertiary period which 
gave them birth, were without color and without perfume, 
something like paper discolored by long exposure to the 
atmosphere. 

My uncle ventured beneath the gigantic groves. I fol¬ 
lowed him, though not without a certain amount of appre¬ 
hension. Since nature had shown herself capable of pro¬ 
ducing such stupendous vegetable productions, why might 
we not meet with mammals (animals with breasts) as 
large, and therefore dangerous. 

I particularly remarked, in the clearings left by trees 
that had fallen and been partially consumed by time, 
many leguminous (bean-like) shrubs, such as the maple 
and other eatable trees, dear to ruminating animals. Then 
there appeared confounded together and intermixed, the 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 245 

trees of such varied lands, specimens of the vegetation of 
every part of the globe; there was the oak near the palm 
tree, the Australian eucalyptus, an interesting class of the 
order Myrtacece —‘leaning against the tall Norwegian pine, 
the poplar of the north, mixing its branches with those of 
the New Zealand kauris. It was enough to drive the most 
ingenious classifier of the upper regions out of his mind, 
and to upset all his received ideas about botany. 

Suddenly I stopped short and restrained my uncle. 

The extreme diffuseness of the light enabled me to see 
the smallest objects in the distant copses. I thought I saw 
—no, I really did see with my own eyes,—immense, 
gigantic animals moving about under the mighty trees. 
Yes, they were truly gigantic animals, a whole herd of 
mastodons, not fossils, but living, and exactly like those 
discovered in 1801, on the marshy banks of the great 
Ohio, in North America. 

Yes, I could see these enormous elephants, whose trunks 
were tearing down large boughs, and working in and out 
the trees like a legion of serpents. I could hear the sounds 
of the mighty tusks uprooting huge trees ! 

The boughs crackled, and the whole masses of leaves 
and green branches went down the capacious throats of 
these terrible monsters! 

That wondrous dream, when I saw the ante-historical 
times revivified, when the tertiary and quaternary periods 
passed before me, was now realized! 

And there we were alone, far down in the bowels of the 
earth, at the mercy of its ferocious inhabitants! 

My uncle paused, full of wonder and astonishment. 

“ Come/’ he said at last, when his first surprise was over, 

“ come along, my boy, and let us see them nearer.” 

“No,” replied I, restraining his efforts to drag me 
forward, “we are wholly without arms. What should we 
do in the midst of that flock of gigantic quadrupeds? 


246 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

Come away, uncle, I implore you. No human creature 
can with impunity brave the ferocious anger of these 
monsters.” 

“No human creature,” said my uncle, suddenly lower¬ 
ing his voice to a mysterious whisper, “ you are mistaken, 
my dear Henry. Look! look yonder! It seems to me 
that I behold a human being—a being like ourselves—a 
man! ” 

I looked, shrugging my shoulders, decided to push in¬ 
credulity to its very last limits. But whatever might have 
been my wish, I was compelled to yield to the weight of 
ocular demonstration. 

Yes no t more than a quarter of a mile off, leaning 
against the trunk of an enormous tree, was a human being 

a Proteus of these subterranean regions, a new son of 
Neptune keeping this innumerable herd of mastodons. 

Immanis pecoris custos, immanis ipse /* 

Yes it was no longer a fossil whose corpse we had 
raised from the ground in the great cemetery, but a giant 
capable of guiding and driving these prodigious monsters. 
His height was above twelve feet. His head, as big as 
the head of a buffalo, was lost in a mane of matted hair. 
It was indeed a huge mane, like those which belonged to 
the elephants of the earlier ages of the world. 

In his hand was a branch of a tree, which served as a 
crook for this antediluvian shepherd. 

We remained profoundly still, speechless with surprise. 

But we might at any moment be seen by him. Nothing 
remained for us but instant flight. 

“ Come, come!” I cried, dragging my uncle along; and, 
foi the first time, he made no resistance to my wishes. 

A quarter of an hour later we were far away from that 
terrible monster! 


* The keeper of gigantic cattle, himself a giant! 


GIGANTIC INHABITANTS, 






































































































































































t 




















































































































































































A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 247 

Now that I think of the matter calmly, and that I 
reflect upon it dispassionately; now that months, years, 
have passed since this strange and unnatural adventure 
befell us,—what am I to think, what am I to believe? 

No, it is utterly impossible! Our ears must have 
deceived us, and our eyes have cheated us! we have not 
seen what we believed we had seen. No human being 
could by any possibility have existed in that subterranean 
world! No generation of men could inhabit the lower 
caverns of the globe without taking note of those who peo¬ 
pled the surface, without communication with them, It 
was folly, folly, folly! nothing else! 

I am rather inclined to admit the existence of some 
animal resembling in structure the human race—of some 
monkey of the first geological epochs, like that discovered 
by M. Lartet in the ossiferous deposit of Sansan. 

But this animal, or being, whichsoever it was, surpassed 
in height all things known to modern science. Never 
mind. However unlikely it may be, it might have been 
a monkey—but a man, a living man, and with him a 
whole generation of gigantic animals, buried in the entrails 
of the earth—it was too monstrous to be believed 1 


248 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XXXVII. 

THE MYSTERIOUS DAGGER. 

During this time, we had left the bright and transpa¬ 
rent forest far behind us. We were mute with astonish¬ 
ment, overcome by a kind of feeling which was next door 
to apathy. We kept running in spite of ourselves. It 
was a perfect flight, which resembled one of those horrible 
sensations we sometimes meet with in our dreams. 

Instinctively we made our way towards the Central Sea, 
and I cannot now tell what wild thoughts passed through 
my mind, nor of what follies I might have been guilty, 
but for a very serious pre-occupation which brought me 
back to practical life. 

Though I was aware that we were treading on a soil 
quite new to us, I, however, every now and then noticed 
certain aggregations of rock, the shape of which forcibly 
reminded me of those near Port Gretchen. 

This confirmed, moreover, the indications of the com¬ 
pass and our extraordinary and unlooked-for, as well as 
involuntary, return to the north of this great Central Sea. 
It was so like our starting point, that I could scarcely 
doubt the reality of our position. Streams and cascades, 
fell in hundreds over the numerous projections of the 
rocks. 

I actually thought I could see our faithful and mono¬ 
tonous Hans and the wonderful grotto in which I had 
come back to life after my tremendous fall. 

Then, as we advanced still farther, the position of the 
cliffs, the appearance of a stream, the unexpected profile 
of a rock, threw me again into a state of bewildering 
doubt. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 249 

After some time, I explained my state of mental inde¬ 
cision to my uncle. He confessed to a similar feeling of 
hesitation. He was totally unable to make up his mind 
in the midst of this extraordinary but uniform panorama. 

“There can be no doubt,” I insisted, “ that we have not 
landed exactly at the place whence we first took our depar¬ 
ture ; but the tempest has brought us above our starting 
point. I think, therefore, that if we follow the coast we 
shall once more find Port Gretchen.” 

“ I n that case,” cried my uncle, “ it is useless to con¬ 
tinue our exploration. The very best thing we can do is 
to make our way back to the raft. Are you quite sure, 
Harry, that you are not mistaken ? ” 

“ It is difficult,” was my reply, “ to come to any deci¬ 
sion, for all these rocks are exactly alike. There is no 
marked difference between them. At the same time, 
the impression on my mind is, that I recognize the pro¬ 
montory at the foot of which our worthy Hans constructed 
the raft. We are, I am nearly convinced, near the little 
port: if this be not it,” I added, carefully examining a 
creek which appeared singularly familiar to my mind. 

“ My dear Harry—if this were the case, we should find 
traces of our own footsteps, some signs of our passage; and 
I can really see nothing to indicate our having passed this 
way.” 

“ But I see something,” I cried, in an impetuous tone of 
voice, as I rushed forward and eagerly picked up some¬ 
thing which shone in the sand under my feet. 

“ What is it ? ” cried the astonished and bewildered Pro¬ 
fessor. 

“ This,” was my reply. 

And I handed to my startled relative a rusty dagger, 
of singular shape. 

“ What made you bring with you so useless a weapon ?” 
he exclaimed. “ It was needlessly hampering yourself.” 


250 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

“ I bring it ?—it is quite new to me. I never saw it be¬ 
fore—are you sure it is not out of your collection ? ” 

“ Not that I know of,” said the Professor, puzzled. “ I 
have no recollection of the circumstance. It was never 
my property.” 

“ This is very extraordinary,” I said, musing over the 
novel and singular incident. 

“Not at all. There is a very simple explanation, 
Harry. The Icelanders are known to keep up the use of 
these antiquated weapons, and this must have belonged to 
Hans, who has let it fall without knowing it.” 

I shook my head. That dagger had never been in the 
possession of the pacific and taciturn Hans. I knew him 
and his habits too well. 

“ Then what can it be—unless it be the weapon of some 
antediluvian warrior,” I continued, “ of some living man, 
a contemporary of that mighty shepherd from whom we 
have just escaped? But no—mystery upon mystery—this 
is no weapon of the stony epoch, nor even of the bronze 
period. It is made of excellent steel-” 

Ere I could finish my sentence, my uncle stopped me 
short from entering upon a whole train of theories, and 
spoke in his most cold and decided tone of voice. 

“ Calm yourself, my dear boy, and endeavor to use your 
reason. This weapon, upon which we have fallen so unex¬ 
pectedly, is a true dague, one of those worn by gentlemen 
in their belts during the sixteenth century. Its use was 
to give the coup de grace , the final blow, to the foe who 
would not surrender. It is clearly of Spanish workman¬ 
ship. It belongs neither to you, nor to me, nor the eider¬ 
down hunter, nor to any of the living beings who may 
still exist so marvellously in the interior of the earth.” 

“What can you mean, uncle?” I said, now lost in a 
host of surmises. 

“ Look closely at it,” he continued; “ these jagged edges 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 251 

were never made by the resistance of human blood and 
bone. The blade is covered with a regular coating of iron- 
mould and rust, which is not a day old, not a year old, 

not a century old, but much more-” 

The Professor began*to get quite excited, according to 
custom, and was allowing himself to be carried away by 
his fertile imagination. I could have said something. He 
stopped me. 

Harry, he cried, “ we are now on the verge of a great 
discovery. This blade of a dagger you have so marvel¬ 
lously discovered, after being abandoned upon the sand for 
more than a hundred, two hundred, even three hundred 
years, has been indented by some one endeavoring to carve 
an inscription on these rocks.” 

“ But this poignard never got here of itself,” I ex¬ 
claimed, it could not have twisted itself. Some one, 
therefore, must have preceded us upon the shores of this 
extraordinary sea.” 

“ Yes, a man.” 

“ But what man has been sufficiently desperate to do 
such a thing.” 

“ A man who has somewhere written his name with this 
very dagger—a man who has endeavored once more to in¬ 
dicate the right road to the interior of the earth. Let us 
look around, my boy. You know not the importance of 
your singular and happy discovery.” 

Prodigiously interested, we walked along the wall of 
rock, examining the smallest fissures, which might finally 
expand into the much wished for gully or shaft. 

We at last reached a spot where the shore became ex¬ 
tremely narrow. The sea almost bathed the foot of the 
rocks, which were here very lofty and steep. There was 
scarcely a path wider than two yards at any point. At 
last, under a huge overhanging rock, we discovered the 
entrance of a dark and gloomy tunnel. 



252 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


There, on a square tablet of granite, which had been 
smoothed by rubbing it with another stone, we could see 
two mysterious, and much worn letters, the two initials of 
the bold and extraordinary traveller who had preceded us 
on our adventurous journey. 



“ A. S.,” cried my uncle; “ you see I was right. Arne 
Saknussemm, always Arne Saknussemm! ” 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 253 


CHAPTER XXXVIII. 

NO OUTLET—BLASTING THE ROCK. 

Ever since the commencement of our marvellous jour¬ 
ney, I had experienced many surprises, had suffered from 
many illusions. I thought that I was case-hardened against 
all surprises and could neither see nor hear anything to 
amaze me again. 

I was like a man who, having been round the world, 
finds himself wholly blast and proof against the mar- 
vellous. 

When, however, I saw these two letters, which had been 
engraven three hundred years before, I stood fixed in an 
attitude of mute surprise. 

Not only was there the signature of the learned and 
enterprising alchemist written in the rock, but I held in 
my hand the very identical instrument with which he had 
laboriously engraved it. 

It was impossible, without showing an amount of in¬ 
credulity scarcely becoming a sane man, to deny the ex¬ 
istence of the traveller, and the reality of that voyage 
which I believed all along to have been a myth—the 
mystification of some fertile brain. 

While these reflections were passing through my mind, 
my uncle, the Professor, gave way to an access of feverish 
and poetical excitement. 

“ Wonderful and glorious Genius, great Saknussemm,” 
he cried, “ you have left no stone unturned, no resource 
omitted, to show to other mortals the way into the interior 
of our mighty globe, and your fellow-creatures can find 
the trail left by your illustrious footsteps, three hundred 




254 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

years ago, at the bottom of these obscure subterranean 
abodes. You have been careful to secure for others the 
contemplation of these wonders and marvels of creation. 
Your name engraved at every important stage of your 
glorious journey, leads the hopeful traveller direct to the 
great and mighty discovery to which you devoted such 
energy and courage. The audacious traveller, who shall 
follow your footsteps to the last, will doubtless find your 
initials engraved with your own hand upon the centre of 
the earth. I will be that audacious traveller— I , too, will 
sign my name upon the very same spot, upon the central 
granite stone of this wondrous work of the Creator. But 
in justice to your devotion, to your courage, and to your 
being the first to indicate the road, let this Cape, seen by 
you upon the shores of this sea discovered by you, be 
called of all time, Cape Saknussemm.” 

This is what I heard, and I began to be roused to the 
pitch of enthusiasm indicated by those words. A fierce 
excitement roused me. I forgot everything. The dangers 
of the voyage, and the perils of the return journey, were 
now as nothing! 

What another man had done in ages past, could I felt 
be done again ; I was determined to do it myself, and now 
nothing that man had accomplished appeared to me im¬ 
possible. 

“ Forward—forward,” I cried in a burst of genuine and 
hearty enthusiasm. 

I had already started in the direction of the sombre and 
gloomy gallery, when the Professor stopped me; he, the 
man so rash and hasty, he, the man so easily roused to the 
highest pitch of enthusiasm, checked me, and asked me to 
be patient and show more calm. 

“ Let us return to our good friend, Hans,” he said; 
“ we wil1 then bring the raft down to this place.” 

I must say that though I at once yielded to my uncle’s 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 255 

request, it was not without dissatisfaction, and I hastened 
along the rocks of that wonderful coast. 

“Do you know, my dear uncle,” I said, as we walked 
along, “ that we have been singularly helped by a con¬ 
currence of circumstances, right up to this very moment.” 

“So you begin to see it, do you, Harry ?” said the Pro- 
fessor, with a smile. 

“ Doubtless,” I responded, “and strangely enough, even 
the tempest has been the means of putting us on the right 
road. Blessings on the tempest! It brought us safely 
back to the very spot from which fine weather would have 
driven us forever. Supposing we had succeeded in reach¬ 
ing the southern and distant shores of this extraordinary 
sea, what would have become of us? The name of 
Saknussemm would never have appeared to us, and at this 
moment we should have been cast away upon an inhospi¬ 
table coast, probably without an outlet.” 

Yes, Harry, my boy, there is certainly something provi¬ 
dential in that wandering at the mercy of wind and waves 
towards the south : we have come back exactly north ; and 
what is better still, we fall upon this great discovery of 
Cape Saknussemm. I mean to say, that it is more than 
surprising; there is something i*n it which is far beyond 
my comprehension. The coincidence is unheard-of; mar¬ 
vellous!” 

“ What matter! It is not our duty to explain facts, but 
to make the best possible use of them.” 

“ Doubtless, my boy; but if you will allow me-” 

said the really-delighted Professor. 

“ Excuse me, sir, but I see exactly how it will be; we 
shall take the northern route; we shall pass under the 
northern regions of Europe, under Sweden, under Ptussia, 
under Siberia, and who knows where—instead of burying 
ourselves under the burning plains and deserts of Africa, 
or beneath the mighty waves of the ocean ; and that is all, 


256 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


at this stage of our journey, that I care to know. Let us 
advance, and Heaven will be our guide ! ” 

“Yes, Harry, you are right, quite right; all is for the 
best. Let us abandon this horizontal sea, which could 
never have led to anything satisfactory. We shall descend, 
descend, and everlastingly descend. Do you know, my 
dear boy, that to reach the interior of the earth we have 
only five thousand miles to travel! ” 


^ “Bah !” I cried, carried away by a burst of enthusiasm, 
“ the distance is scarcely worth speaking about. The thing 
is to make a start.” 

My wild, mad, and incoherent speeches continued until 
we rejoined our patient and phlegmatic guide. All was, we 
found, prepared for an immediate departure. There was’not 
a single parcel but what was in its proper place. We all 
took up our posts on the raft, and the sail being hoisted, 
Hans received his directions, and guided the frail barque 
towards Cape Saknussemm, as we had definitely named it. 

The wind was very un&vorable to a craft that was un¬ 
able to sail close to the wind. It was constructed to go 
before the blast. We were continually reduced to pushing 
ourselves forward by means of poles. On several occasions 
the rocks ran far out into deep water and we were com¬ 
pelled to make a long round. At last, after three long and 
weary hours of navigation, that is to say, about six o’clock 
in the evening, we found a place at which we could land. 

I jumped on shore first. In my present state of excite¬ 
ment and enthusiasm, I was always first. My uncle and 
the Icelander followed. The voyage from the port to this 
point of the sea had by no means calmed me It had 
rather produced the opposite effect. I even proposed to 
burn our vessel, that is to destroy our raft, in order to 
completely cut off our retreat. But my uncle sternly op¬ 
posed this wild project. I began to think him particularly 
lukewarm and unenthusiastic. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 257 

“ At an y rate > m y dear uncle,” I said, “ let us start with- * 
out delay.” 

u Yes, my boy, I am quite as eager to do so as you can 
be. But, in the first place, let us examine this mysterious 
gallery, in order to find if we shall need to prepare and 
mend our ladders.” 

My uncle now began to see to the efficiency of our 
Kuhmkorf's coil, which would doubtless soon be needed ; 
the raft, securely fastened to a rock, was left alone. More¬ 
over, the opening into the new gallery was not twenty 
paces distant from the spot. Our little troop, with myself 
at the head, advanced. 

_ The orifice, which was almost circular, presented a 
diameter of about five feet; the sombre tunnel was cut in 
the living rock, and coated on the inside by the different 
material which had once passed through it in a state of 
fusion. The lower part was about level with the water, so 
that we were able to penetrate to the interior without 
difficulty. 

We followed an almost horizontal direction; when, at 
the end of about a dozen paces, our further advance was 
checked by the interposition of an enormous block of 
granite rock. 

“ Accursed stone! ” I cried, furiously, on perceiving 
that we were stopped by what seemed an insurmountable 
obstacle. 

In vain we looked to the right, in vain we looked to the 
left: in vain examined it above and below. There ex¬ 
isted no passage, no sign of any other tunnel. I experi¬ 
enced the most bitter and painful disappointment. So en¬ 
raged was I that I would not admit the reality of any 
obstacle. I stooped to my knees; I looked under the 
mass of stone. No hole, no interstice. I then looked 
above. The same barrier of granite! Hans, with the 
lamp, examined the sides of the tunnel in every direction. 



258 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


♦ But all in vain ! It was necessary to renounce all hope of 
passing through. 

I had seated myself upon the ground. My uncle walked 
angrily and hopelessly up and down. He was evidently 
desperate. 

“ But,” I cried, after some moments’ thought, “ what 
about Arne Saknussemm ? ” 

You are right,” replied my uncle, “ he can never have 
been checked by a lump of rock.” 

Yo ten thousand times no,” I cried, with extreme 
vivacity. “ This huge lump of rock, in consequence of 
some singular concussion, or process, one of those magnetic 
phenomena which have so often shaken the terrestrial 
crust, has in some unexpected way closed up the passage. 
Many and many years have passed away since the return 
of Saknussemm, and the fall of this huge block of granite. 
Is it not quite evident that this gallery was formerly the 
outlet for the pent-up lava in the interior of the earth, and 
that these eruptive matters then circulated freely ? Look 
at these recent fissures in the granite roof; it is evidently 
formed of pieces of enormous stone, placed here as if by 
the hand of a giant, who had worked to make a strong and 
substantial arch. One day, after an unusually strong 
shock, the vast rock which stands in our way, and which 
was doubtless the key of a kind of arch, fell through to a 
level with the soil and has barred our further progress. 
We are right, then, in thinking that this is an unexpected 
obstacle, with which Saknussemm did not meet; and if we 
do not upset it in some way, we are unworthy of following 
in the footsteps of the great discoverer ; and incapable of 
finding our way to the Centre of the Earth ! ” 

In this wild way I addressed my uncle. The zeal of 
the Professor, his earnest longing for success, had become 
part and parcel of my being. I wholly forgot the past; 

I utterly despised the future. Nothing existed for me up- 



THE FEARFUL EXPLOSION 











































































































































A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH 259 

on the surface of this spheroid in the bosom of which I was 
engulfed, no towns, no country, no Hamburg, no Konig- 
strasse, not even my poor Gretchen, who by this time 
would believe me utterly lost in the interior of the earth l 
“ Wel1 ” cried my uncle, roused to enthusiasm by my 
| words, “ let us go to work with pick-axes, with crowbars, 
with anything that comes to hand—but down with these 
terrible walls.” 

# “ is far t0 ° tQ ugh and too big to be destroyed by a 
pick-axe or crowbar,” I replied. 

“ What then ?” 

As I said, it is useless to think of overcoming such a 
difficulty by means of ordinary tools.” 

“ What then ? ” 

What else but gunpowder, a subterranean mine ? Let 
us blow up the obstacle that stands in our way.” 

“ Gunpowder!” 

“Yes; all we have to do is to get rid of this paltry 
obstacle.” 

“To work, Hans, to work!” cried the Professor. 

The Icelander went back to the raft, and soon returned 
with a huge crowbar, with which he began to dig a hole in 
the rock, which was to serve as a mine. It was by no 
means a slight task. It was necessary for our purpose to 
make a cavity large enough to hold fifty pounds of fulmi¬ 
nating gun cotton, the expansive power of which is four 
times as great as that of ordinary gunpowder. 

I had now roused myself to an almost miraculous state 
of excitement. While Hans was at work, I actively as¬ 
sisted my uncle to prepare a long wick, made from damp 
gunpowder, the mass of which we finally enclosed in a bag 
of linen. 

“ are bound to go through,” I cried, enthusiastically. 

“ We are bound to go through,” responded the Professor, 
tapping me on the back. 






260 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

At midnight, our work as miners was completely finished; 
the charge of fulminating cotton was thrust into the hol¬ 
low, and the match, which we had made of considerable 
length, was ready. 

A spark was now sufficient to ignite this formidable 
engine, and to blow the rock to atoms ! 

“ We will now rest until to-morrow.” 

It was absolutely necessary to resign myself to my fate, 
and to consent to wait for the explosion for six weary 
hours! 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 261 


CHAPTER XXXIX. 

THE EXPLOSION AND ITS RESULTS. 

The next day, which was the twenty-seventh of August, 
was a date celebrated in our wondrous, subterranean jour- 
ney. 

I never think of it even now, but I shudder wi£h horror. 
My heart beats wildly at the very memory of that awful 
day. 

From this time forward, our reason, our judgment, our 
human ingenuity, have nothing to do with the course of 
events. We are about to become the plaything of the 
great phenomena of the earth! 

At six o’clock we were all up and ready. The dreaded 
moment was arriving when we were about to seek an 
opening into the interior of the earth by means of gun¬ 
powder. What would be the consequences of breaking 
through the crust of the earth ? 

I begged that it might be my duty to set fire to the mine. 
I looked upon it as an honor. • This task once performed, 
I could rejoin my friends upon the raft, which had not 
been unloaded. As soon as we were all ready, we were to 
sail away to some distance to avoid the consequences of the 
explosion, the effects of which would certainly not be con¬ 
centrated in the interior of the earth. 

The slow match we calculated to burn for about ten 
minutes, more or less, before it reached the chamber in 
which the great body of powder was confined. I should 
therefore have plenty of time to reach the raft and put off 
to a safe distance. 

I prepared to execute my self-allotted task—not, it must 
be confessed, without considerable emotion. 


262 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

After a hearty repast, my uncle and the hunter-guide 
embarked on board the raft, while I remained alone upon 
the desolate shore. 

I was provided with a lantern which was to enable me 
to set fire to the wick of the infernal machine. 

*’ Go, my boy,” said my uncle, “ and Heaven be with 
you. But come back as soon as you can. I shall be all 
impatience.” 

“Be easy on that matter,” I replied, “there is no fear 
of my delaying on the road.” 

Having said this, I advanced toward the opening of the 
sombre gallery. My heart beat wildly. I opened my 
lantern and seized the extremity of the wick. 

The Professor, who was looking on, held his chronome¬ 
ter in his hand. 

“ Are you ready? ” cried he. 

“ Quite ready.” 

“ Well, then, fire away ! ” 

I hastened to put the light to the wick, which crackled 
and sparkled, hissing and spitting like a serpent; then, 
running as fast as I could, I returned to the shore. 

“ Get on board my lad, and you, Hans, shove off,” cried 
my uncle. 

By a vigorous application of his pole Hans sent us fly¬ 
ing over the water. The raft was quite twenty fathoms 
distant. 

It was a moment of palpitating interest, of deep anxiety. 
My uncle, the Professor, never took his eyes off the chro¬ 
nometer. 

“Only five minutes more,” he said in a low tone, “only 
four, only three.” 

My pulse went a hundred to the minute. I could hear 
my heart beating. 

“Only two, one! Now, then, mountains of granite, 
crumble beneath the power of man!” 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 263 

What happened after that ? As to the terrific roar of 
the explosion, I do think I heard it. But the form 
of the rocks completely changed in my eyes—they seemed 
to be drawn aside like a curtain. I saw a fathomless, a 
bottomless abyss, which yawned beneath the turgid waves. 
The sea, which seemed suddenly to have gone mad, then 
became one great mountainous mass, upon the top of 
which the raft rose perpendicularly. 

We were all thrown down. In less than a second the 
light gave place to the most profound obscurity. Then I 
felt all solid support give way not to my feet, but to the 
raft itself. I thought it was going bodily down a tremend¬ 
ous well. I tried to speak, to question my uncle. Nothing 
could be heard but the roaring of the mighty waves. We 
clung together in utter silence. 

Despite the awful darkness, despite the noise, the sur¬ 
prise, the emotion, I thoroughly understood what had 
happened. 

Beyond the rock which had been blown up, there existed 
a mighty abyss. The explosion had caused a kind oi 
earthquake in this soil, broken by fissures and rents. 
The gulf, thus suddenly thrown open, was about to swal¬ 
low the inland sea, which, transformed into a mighty tor¬ 
rent, was dragging us with it. 

One only idea filled my mind. We were utterly and 
completely lost! 

One hour, two hours—what more I cannot say, passed 
in this manner. We sat close together, elbow touching 
elbow, knee touching knee ! We held one another’s hands 
not to be thrown off the raft. We were subjected to the 
most violent shocks, whenever our sole dependence, a frail 
wooden raft, struck against the rocky sides of the channel. 
Fortunately for us, these concussions became less and less 
frequent, which made me fancy that the gallery was getting 
wider and wider. There could be now no doubt that we 



264 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

had chanced upon the road once followed by Saknussemm, 
but instead of going down in a proper manner, we had, 
through our own imprudence, drawn a whole sea with us! 

These ideas presented themselves to my mind in a very 
vague and obscure manner. I felt rather than reasoned. 
I put my ideas together only confusedly, while spinning 
along like a man going down a waterfall. To judge by 
the air which, as it were, whipped my face, we must have 
been rushing at a perfectly lightning rate. 

To attempt under these circumstances to light a torch 
was simply impossible, and the last remains of our electric 
machine, of our Ruhmkorf’s coil, had been destroyed dur¬ 
ing the fearful explosion. 

I was therefore very much confused to see at last a 
bright light shining close to me. The calm countenance 
of the guide seemed to gleam upon me. The clever and 
patient hunter had succeeded in lighting the lantern; and 
though, in the keen and thorough draught, the flame 
flickered and vacillated and w 7 as nearly put out, it served 
partially to dissipate the awful obscurity. 

The gallery into which we had entered was very wide. 
I was, therefore, quite right in that part of my conjecture. 
The insufficient light did not allow us to see both of the 
walls at the same time. The slope of waters, which was 
carrying us away, was far greater than that of the most 
rapid river of America. The whole surface of the stream 
seemed to be composed of liquid arrows, darted forward 
with extreme violence and power. I can give no idea of 
the impression it made upon me. 

The raft, at times, caught in certain whirlpools, and 
rushed forward, yet turned on itself all the time. How it 
did not upset I shall never be able to understand. When 
it approached the sides of the gallery, I took care to throw 
upon them the light of the lantern, and I was able to 
judge of the rapidity of motion by looking at the project- 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF TIIE EARTH. 265 

icg masses of rock, which as soon as seen were again in¬ 
visible. So rapid was our progress, that points of rock, at 
a considerable distance one from the other, appeared like 
portions of transverse lines, which enclosed us in a kind 
of net, like that of a line of telegraphic wires. 

I believe we were now going at a rate of not less than 
a hundred miles an hour. 

My uncle and I looked at one another with wild and hag¬ 
gard eyes; we clung convulsively to the stump of the mast, 
which, at the moment when the catastrophe took place, 
had snapped short off. We turned our backs as much as 
possible to the wind, in order not to be stifled by a rapidity 
of motion which nothing human could face and live. 

And still the long monotonous hours went on. The 
situation did not change in the least, though a discovery 
I suddenly made seemed to complicate it very much. 

When we had slightly recovered our equilibrium, I 
proceeded to examine our cargo. I then made the unsat¬ 
isfactory discovery that the greater part of it had utterly 
disappeared. 

I became alarmed, and determined to discover what 
were our resources. My heart beat at the idea, but it was 
absolutely necessary to know on what we had to depend. 
With this view, I took the lantern and looked around. 

Of all our former collection of nautical and philosophi¬ 
cal instruments there remained only the chronometer and 
the compass. The ladders and ropes were reduced to a 
small piece of rope fastened to the stump of the mast. Not 
a pickaxe, not a crowbar, not a hammer, and, far worse 
than all, no food—not enough for one day! 

This discovery was a prelude to a certain and horrible 
death. 

Seated gloomily on the raft, clasping the stump of the 
mast mechanically, I thought of all I had read as to suffer¬ 
ings from starvation. 


266 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

I remembered everything that history had taught me 
on the subject, and I shuddered at the remembrance of 
the agonies to be endured. 

Maddened at the prospects of enduring the miseries of 
starvation, I persuaded myself that I must be mistaken. 
I examined the cracks in the raft; I poked between the 
joints and beams; I examined every possible hole and 
corner. The result was—simply nothing! 

Our stock of provisions consisted of nothing but a piece 
of dry meat and some soaked and half-mouldy biscuits. 

I gazed around me scared and frightened. I could not 
understand the awful truth. And yet of what consequence 
was it in regard to any new danger ? Supposing that we had 
had provisions for months, and even for years, how could 
we ever get out of the awful abyss into which we were 
being hurled by the irresistible torrent we had let loose? 

Why should we trouble ourselves about the sufferings 
and tortures to be endured from hunger, when death 
stared us in the face under so many other swifter and per¬ 
haps even more horrid forms ? 

It was very doubtful, under the circumstances in which 
we were placed, if we should have time to die of inanition. 

But the human frame is singularly constituted. 

I knew not how it was; but, from some singular hallu¬ 
cination of the mind, I forgot the real, serious and imme¬ 
diate danger to which we were exposed, to think of the 
menaces of the future, which appeared before us in all 
their naked terror. Besides, after all, suggested Hope, 
perhaps we might finally escape the fury of the raging tor¬ 
rent, and once more revisit the glimpses of the moon, oR 
the surface of our beautiful mother earth. 

How was it to be done? I had not the remotest idea. 
Where were we to come out ? No matter, so that we did. 

One chance in a thousand is always a chance, while 
death from hunger gave us not even the faintest glimpse 






THE TOECH-LIGHT PASSAGE. 


z 




































































■ u ‘ 










# 








* 










































































































- 


' 




. 






■ 









A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 267 

of hope. It left to the imagination nothing but blank 
horror, without the faintest chance of escape! 

I had the greatest mind to reveal all to my uncle, to 
explain to him the extraordinary and wretched position to 
which we were reduced, in order that, between the two, 
we might make a calculation as to the exact space of time 
which remained for us to live. 

It was, it appeared to me, the only thing to be done. 
But I had the courage to hold my tongue, to gnaw at my 
entrails like the Spartan boy. I wished to leave him all 
his coolness. 

At this moment, the light of the lantern slowly fell, 
and at last went out! 

The wick had wholly burnt to an end. The obscurity 
became absolute. It wak no longer possible to see through 
the impenetrable darkness! There was one torch left, 
but it was impossible to keep it alight. Then, like a 
child, I shut my eyes, that I might not see the darkness. 

After a great lapse of time, the rapidityof our journey 
increased. I could feel it by the rush of air upon my face. 
The slope of the waters was excessive. I began to feel 
that we were no longer going down a slope; we were fall¬ 
ing. I felt as one does in a dream, going down bodily— 
falling ; falling; falling! 

I felt that the hands of my uncle and Hans were vigor¬ 
ously clasping my arms. 

Suddenly, after a lapse of time scarcely appreciable, I 
felt something like a shock. The raft had not struck a 
hard body, but had suddenly been checked in its course. 
A waterspout, a liquid column of water, fell upon us. I 
felt suffocating. I was being drowned. 

Still the sudden inundation did not last. In a few 
seconds I felt myself once more able to breathe. My 
uncle and Hans pressed my arms, and the raft carried us 
all three away. 


268 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XL. 

THE APE GIGANS. 

It is difficult for me to determine what was the real 
time, but I should suppose, by after calculation, that it 
must have been ten at night. 

I lay in a stupor, a half dream, during which I saw 
visions of astounding character. Monsters of the deep 
were side by side with the mighty elephantine shepherd. 
Gigantic fish and animals seemed to form stransre conjunc¬ 
tions. 

The raft took a sudden turn, whirled round; entered 
another tunnel; this time illumined in a most singular 
manner. The roof was formed of porous stalactite, through 
which a moon-lit vapor appeared to pass, casting its bril¬ 
liant light upon our gaunt and haggard figures. The 
light increased as we advanced, while the roof ascended; 
until at last, we were once more in a kind of water cavern, 
the lofty dome of which disappeared in a luminous cloud! 

A rugged cavern of small extent appeared to offer a 
halting place to our weary bodies. 

My uncle and the guide moved as men in a dream. I 
was afraid to waken them, knowing the danger of such a 
sudden start. I seated myself beside them to watch. 

As I did so, I became aware of something moving in the 
distance, which at once fascinated my eyes. It was float- 
ing, apparently, upon the surface of the water, advancing 
by means of what at first appeared paddles. I looked 
with glaring eyes. One glance told me that it was some¬ 
thing monstrous. 

Put what? 




A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 269 

It was the great Shark Crocodile of the early writers on 
geology. About the size of an ordinary whale, with 
hideous jaws and two gigantic eyes, it advanced. Its 
eyes fixed on me with terrible sternness. Some indefinite 
warning told me that it had marked me for its own. 

I attempted to rise—to escape, no matter where, but my 
knees shook under me; my limbs trembled violently; I 
almost lost my senses. And still the mighty monster ad¬ 
vanced. My uncle and the guide made no effort to save 
themselves. 

With a strange noise, like none other I had ever heard, 
the beast came on. His jaws were at least seven feet 
apart, and his distended mouth looked large enough to 
have swallowed a boatful of men. 

We were about ten feet distant, when I discovered that 
much as his body resembled that of a crocodile, his mouth 
was wholly that of a shark. 

His twofold nature now became apparent. To snatch 
us up at a mouthful it was necessary for him to turn on 
his back, which motion necessarily caused his legs to kick 
up helplessly in the air. 

I actually laughed even in the very jaws of death! 

But next minute, with a wild cry, I darted away into 
the interior of the cavern, leaving my unhappy comrades 
to their fate! This cavern was deep and dreary. After 
about a hundred yards, I paused and looked around. 

The whole floor, composed of sand and malachite, was 
strewn with bones, freshly-gnawed bones of reptiles and 
fish, with a mixture of mammalia. My very soul grew 
sick as my body shuddered with horror. I had truly, ac¬ 
cording to the old proverb, fallen out of the frying-pan 
into the fire. Some beast larger and more ferocious even 
than the Shark-Crocodile inhabited this den. 

What could I do ? The mouth of the cave was guarded 
by one ferocious monster, the interior was inhabited by 



270 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

something too hideous to contemplate. Flight was im¬ 
possible! 

One only resource remained, and that was to find some 
small hiding-place to which the fearful denizens of the 
cavern could not penetrate. I gazed wildly around, and 
at last discovered a fissure in the rock, to which I rushed 
in the hope of recovering my scattered senses. 

Crouching down, I waited shivering as in an ague fit. 
No man is brave in presence of an earthquake, or a burst¬ 
ing boiler, or an exploding torpedo. I could not be ex¬ 
pected to feel much courage in presence of the fearful fate 
that appeared to await me. 

An hour passed. I heard all the time a strange rum¬ 
bling outside the cave. 

What was the fate of my unhappy companions ? It 
was impossible for me to pause to inquire. My own 
wretched existence was all I could think of. 

Suddenly a groaning, as of fifty bears in a fight, fell 
upon my ears—hisses, spitting, moaning, hideous to hear 
—and then I saw— 

Never, were ages to pass over my head, shall I forget 
the horrible apparition. 

It was the Ape Gigans ! 

Fourteen feet high, covered with coarse hair, of a 
blackish brown, the hair on the arms, from the shoulder 
to the elbow joints, pointing downwards, while that from 
the wrist to the elbow pointed upwards, it advanced. Its 
arms were as long as its body, while its legs were pro¬ 
digious. It had thick, long, and sharply-pointed teeth— 
like a mammoth saw. 

It struck its breast as it came on smelling and sniffing, 
reminding me of the stories we read in our early childhood 
of giants who ate the flesh of men and little boys! 

Suddenly it stopped. My heart beat wildly, for I was 
conscious that, somehow or other, the fearful monster had 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 27l 

smelt me out and was peering about with his hideous eyes 
to try and discover my whereabouts. 

My reading, which as a rule is a blessing, but which on 
this occasion, seemed momentarily to prove a curse, told 
me the real truth. It was the Ape Gigans, the Antedilu- 
vian Gorilla. 

Yes ! . This awful monster, confined by good fortune to 
the interior of the earth, was the progenitor of the hideous 
monster of Africa. 

He glared wildly about, seeking something—doubtless 
myself. I gave myself up for lost. No hope of safety or 
escape seemed to remain. 

At this moment, just as my eyes appeared to close in 
death, there came a strange noise from the entrance of 
the cave; and turning, the Gorilla evidently recognized 
some enemy more worthy his prodigious size and strength. 
It was the huge Shark-Crocodile, which perhaps having 
disposed of my friends, was coming in search of further 
prey. 

The Gorilla placed himself on the defensive, and clutch¬ 
ing a bone some seven or eight feet in length, a perfect 
club, aimed a deadly blow at the hideous beast, which 
reared upwards and fell with all its weight upon its ad¬ 
versary. 

A terrible combat, the details of which it is impossible 
to give, now ensued. The struggle was awful and fero¬ 
cious. I however, did not wait to witness the result. Re¬ 
garding myself as the object of contention, I determined 
to remove from the presence of the victor. I slid down 
from my hiding-place, reached the ground, and gliding 
against the wall, strove to gain the open mouth of the 
cavern. 

But I had not taken many steps when the fearful clamor 
ceased, to be followed by a mumbling and groaning which 
appeared to be indicative of victory. 


272 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

I looked back and saw the huge ape, gory with blood, 
coming after me with glaring eyes, with dilated nostrils 
that gave forth two columns of heated vapor. I could 
feel his hot and fetid breath on my neck ; and with a 
horrid jump—awoke from my nightmare sleep. 

Yes—it was all a dream. I was still on the raft with 
my uncle and the guide. 

The relief was not instantaneous, for'under the influence 
of the hideous nightmare my senses had become numbed. 
After a while, however, my feelings were tranquillized. 
The first of my perceptions which returned in full force was 
that of hearing. I listened with acute and attentive ears. 
All was still as death. All I comprehended was silence. 
To the roaring of the waters, which had filled the gallery 
with awful reverberations, succeeded perfect peace. 

After some little time my uncle spoke, in a low and 
scarcely audible tone— 

“ Harry, boy, where are you ? ” 

“ I am here,” was my faint rejoinder. 

“Well, don’t you see what has happened? We are go¬ 
ing upwards.” 

“ My dear uncle, what can you mean ? ” was my half 
delirious reply. 

“Yes, I tell you we are ascending rapidly. Our down 
ward journey is quite checked.” 

I held out my hand, and, after some little difficulty, 
succeeded in touching the wall. My hand w T as in an in¬ 
stant covered with blood. The skin was torn from the 
flesh. We were ascending with extraordinary rapidity. 

“ The torch—the torch ! ” cried the Professor, wildly; 
“ it must be lighted.” 

Hans, the guide, after many vain efforts, at last suc¬ 
ceeded in lighting it, and the flame having now nothing 
to prevent its burning, shed a tolerably clear light. We 
were enabled to form an approximate idea of the truth. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 273 

It is just as I thought,” said my uncle, after a moment 
or two of silent attention. “We are in a narrow well 
about four fathoms square. The waters of the great in¬ 
land sea, having reached the bottom of the gulf, are now 
forcing themselves up the mighty shaft. As a natural 
consequence, we are being cast up on the summit of the 
waters.” 

“ Tiiat I can see,” was my lugubrious reply; “ but where 
will this shaft end, and to what fall are we likely to be 
exposed ? ” 

“ Of that I am as ignorant as yourself. All I know is,, 
that we should be prepared for the worst. We are going 
up at a fearfully rapid rate. As far as I can judge, we are 
ascending at the rate of two fathoms a second, of a hun¬ 
dred and twenty fathoms a minute, or rather more than 
three and a-half leagues an hour. At this rate, our fate 
will soon be a matter of certainty.” 

“ No doubt of it,” was my reply. “ The great concern I 
have now, however, is to know whether this shaft has any 
issue. It may end in a granite roof—in which case we 
shall be suffocated by compressed air, or dashed to atoms 
against the top. I fancy, already, that the air is begin¬ 
ning to be close and condensed. I have a difficulty in 
breathing.” 

This might be fancy, or it might be the effect of our 
rapid motion, but I certainly felt a great oppression of the 
chest. 

“ Henry,” said the Professor, “ I do believe that the situ¬ 
ation is to a certain extent desperate. There remain, how¬ 
ever, many chances of ultimate safety, and I have, in my own 
mind, been revolving them over, during your heavy but- 
agitated sleep. I have come to this logical conclusion— 
whereas we may at any moment perish, so at any moment 
we may be saved! We need, therefore, prepare ourselves 
for whatever may turn up in the great chapter of accidents.” 




274 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

“ But what would you have us do ? ” I cried; “ are we 
not utterly helpless ? ” 

“ No! While there is life there is hope. At all events, 
there is one thing we can do—eat, and thus obtain strength 
to face victory or death.” 

As he spoke, I looked at my uncle with a haggard 
glance. I had put off the fatal communication as long as 
possible. It was now forced upon me, and I must tell him 
the truth. Still I hesitated. 

“Eat,” I said, in a deprecating tone as if there were no 
hurry. 

“Yes, and at once. I feel like a starving prisoner,” he 
said, rubbing his yellow and shivering hands together. 

And, turning round to the guide, he spoke some hearty, 
cheering words, as I judged from his tone, in Danish. 
Hans shook his head in a terribly significant manner. I 
tried to look unconcerned. 

“ What! ” cried the Professor, “ you do not mean to say 
that all our provisions are lost?'*'* 

“Yes,” was my lowly-spoken reply, as I held out some¬ 
thing in my hand, “ this morsel of dried meat is all that 
remains for us three.” 

My uncle gazed at me as if he could not fully appreci¬ 
ate the meaning of my words. The blow seemed to stun 
him by its severity. I allowed him to reflect for some 
moments. 

“ Well,” said I, after a short pause, “what do you think 
now? Is there any chance of our escaping from our horri¬ 
ble subterranean dangers? Are we not doomed to perish 
in the great hollows of the Centre of the Earth ? ” 

But my pertinent questions brought no answer. My 
uncle either heard me not, or appeared not to do so. 

And in this way a whole hour passed. Neither of us 
cared to speak. For myself, I began to feel the most 
fearful and devouring hunger. My companions, doubtless, 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 275 

felt the same horrible tortures, but neither of them would 
touch the wretched morsel of meat that remained. It lay 
there, a last remnant of all our great preparations for the 
mad and senseless journey ! 

I looked back, with wonderment, to my own folly. 
Fully was I aware that, despite his enthusiasm, and the 
ever-to-be-hated scroll of Saknussemm, my uncle should 
never have started on his perilous voyage. What memories 
of the happy past, what previsions of the horrible future, 
now filled my brain! 


276 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XLI. 

HUNGER. 

Hunger, prolonged, is temporary madness f 

The brain is at work without its required food, and the 
most fantastic notions fill the mind. Hitherto I had never 
known what hunger really meant. I was likely to under¬ 
stand it now. 

And yet, three months before I could tell my terrible 
story of starvation, as I thought it. As a boy I used to 
make frequent excursions in the neighborhood of the Pro¬ 
fessor’s house. 

My uncle always acted on system, and he believed that, 
in addition to the day of rest and worship, there should be 
a day of recreation. In consequence, I was always free to 
do as I liked on a Wednesday. 

Now, as I had a notion to combine the useful and the 
agreeable, my favorite pastime was birds’ nesting. I had 
one of the best collections of eggs in all the town. They 
were classified, and under glass cases. 

There was a certain wood, which, by rising at early morn, 
and taking the cheap train, I could reach at eleven in the 
morning. Here I would botanize or geologize at my will. 
My uncle was always glad of specimens for his herbarium, 
and stones to examine. When I had filled'my wallet, I 
proceeded to search for nests 

After about two hours of hard work, I, one day sat 
down by a stream to eat my humble but copious lukch 
How the remembrance of the spiced sausage, the wheaten 
loaf, and the beer, made my mouth water now! I would 
have given every prospect of worldly wealth for such a 
meal. Rut to my story. 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 277 

While seated thus at my leisure, I looked up at the 
ruins of an old castle, at no great distance. It was the 
remains of an historical dwelling, ivy-clad, and now fall¬ 
ing to pieces. 

While looking, I saw two eagles circling about the sum¬ 
mit of a lofty tower. I soon became satisfied that there 
was a nest. Now, in all my collection, I wanted eggs of 
the native eagle and the large owl. 

My mind was made up. I would reach the summit of 
that tower, or perish in the attempt. I went nearer, and 
surveyed the ruins. The old staircase, years before, had 
fallen in. The outer walls were, however, intact. There 
was no chance that w r ay, unless I looked to the ivy solely 
for support. This was, as I soon found out, futile. 

There remained the chimney, which still went up to the 
top, and had once served to carry off the smoke from 
every story of the tower. 

Up this I determined to venture. It was narrow, 
'rough, and therefore the more easily climbed. I took off 
my coat and crept into the chimney. Looking up, I saw 
a small, light opening, proclaiming the summit of the 
chimney. 

Up—up I went, for some time using my hands and 
knees, after the fashion of a chimney sweep. It was slow 
work, hut, there being continual projections, the task was 
comparatively easy. In this way, I reached half way. 
The chimney now became narrower. The atmosphere was 
close, and, at last, to end the matter, I stuck fast. I could 
ascend no higher. 

There could be no doubt of this, and there remained 
no resource but to descend, and give up my glorious prey 
in despair. I yielded to fate and endeavored to descend. 
But I could not move. Some unseen and mysterious ob¬ 
stacle intervened and stopped me. In an instant the full 
horror of my situation seized me. 


278 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

I was unable to move either way, and was doomed to a 
terrible and horrible death, that of starvation. In a boy’s 
mind, however, there is an extraordinary amount of 
elasticity and hope, and I began to think of all sorts of 
plans to escape my gloomy fate. 

In the first place, I required no food just at present, 
having had an excellent meal, and was therefore allowed 
time for reflection. My first thought was to try and move 
the mortar with my hand. Had I possessed a knife, 
something might have been done, but that useful instru¬ 
ment I had left in my coat pocket. 

I soon found that all efforts of this kind were vain and 
useless, and that all I could hope to do was to wriggle 
downwards. 

But though I jerked and struggled, and strove to turn, 
it was all in vain. I could not move an inch, one way or 
the other. And time flew rapidly. My early rising pro¬ 
bably contributed to the fact that I felt sleepy, and gradu¬ 
ally gave way to the sensation of drowsiness. 

I slept, and awoke in darkness, ravenously hungry. 

Night had come, and still I could not move. I was 
tight bound, and did not succeed in changing my position 
an inch. I groaned aloud. Never since the days of my 
happy childhood, when it was a hardship to go from meal 
to meal without eating, had I really experienced hunger. 
The sensation was as novel as it was painful. I began 
now to lose my head and to scream and cry out in my 
agony. Something appeared, startled by my noise. It 
was a harmless lizard, but it appeared to me a loathsome 
reptile. Again I made the old ruins resound with my 
cries, and finally so exhausted myself that I fainted. 

How long I lay in a kind of trance or sleep I cannot say, 
but when again I recovered consciousness it was day. How 
ill I felt, how hunger still gnawed at me, it would be hard to 
say. I was too weak to scream now, far too weak to struggle. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 279 

Suddenly I was startled by a roar. 

“ Are you there, Henry ?” said the voice of my uncle ; 
“ are you there, my boy ?” 

I could only faintly respond, but I also made a desperate 
effort to turn. Some mortar fell. To this I owed my 
being discovered. When the search took place, it was 
easily seen that mortar and small pieces of stone had re¬ 
cently fallen from above. Hence my uncle’s cry. 

“ Be calm,” he cried, “ if we pull down the whole ruin, 
you shall be saved.” 

They were delicious words, but I had little hope. 

Soon however, about a quarter of an hour later, I heard 
a voice above me, at one of the upper fire-places. 

“ Are you below or above ? ” 

“ Below,” was my reply. 

In an instant a basket was lowered with milk, a biscuit, 
and an egg. My uncle was fearful to be too ready with 
his supply of food. I drank the -milk first, for thirst had 
nearly deadened hunger. I then, much refreshed, ate my 
bread and hard egg. 

They were now at work at the wall. I could hear a pick¬ 
axe. Wishing to escape all danger from this terrible wea¬ 
pon I made a desperate struggle, and the belt, which sur- 
' rounded my waist and which had been hitched on a stone, 
gave way. I was free, and only escaped falling down by 
a rapid motion of my hands and knees. 

In ten minutes more I was in my uncle’s arms, after 
being two days and nights in that horrible prison. My 
occasional delirium prevented me from counting time. 

I was weeks recovering from that awful starvation ad¬ 
venture : and yet what was that to the hideous sufferings I 
now endured ? 

After dreaming for some time, and thinking of this and 
other matters, I once more looked around me. We were 
still ascending with fearful rapidity. Every now and 


“280 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

then the air appeared to check our respiration as it does 
that of aeronauts when the ascension of the balloon is too 
rapid. But if they feel a degree of cold in proportion to 
the elevation they attain in the atmosphere, we experi¬ 
enced quite a contrary effect. The heat began to increase 
in a most threatening and exceptional manner. I cannot 
tell exactly the mean, but I think it must have reached 
122 degrees of Fahrenheit. 

What was the meaning of this extraordinary change in 
the temperature ? As far as we had hitherto gone, facts 
had proved the theories of Davy and of Lidenbrock to be 
correct. Until now, all the peculiar conditions of refrac¬ 
tory rocks, of electricity of magnetism, had modified the 
general laws of nature, and bad created for us a moderate 
temperature; for the theory of the central fire, remained, 
in my eyes, the only explainable one. 

Were we, then, going to reach a position in ■which these 
phenomena were to be carried out in all their rigor, and 
in which the heat would reduce the rocks to a state of fu¬ 
sion? 

Such was my not unnatural fear, and I did not conceal 
the fact from my uncle. My way of doing so might be 
cold and heartless, but I could not help it. 

“ If we are not drowned, or smashed into pancakes, and 
if we do not die of starvation, we have the satisfaction of 
knowing that we must be burned alive.” 

My uncle, in presence of this brusque attack, simply 
shrugged his shoulders, and resumed his reflections— 
whatever they might be. 

An hour passed away, and except that there was a 
slight increase in the temperature no incident modified 
the situation. My uncle at last, of his own accord, broke 
silence. 

“Well, Henry, my boy,” he said, in a cheerful way, “ we 
must make up our minds.” 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 281 

“Make up our minds to what?” I asked, in considera- 
ble surprise. 

Well to something. We must at whatever risk re¬ 
cruit our physical strength, if we make the fatal mistake 
of husbanding our little remnant of food, we may proba¬ 
bly prolong our wretched existence a few hours—but 
we shall remain weak to the end.” 

“ Yes >” 1 growled, “ to the end. That, however, will not 
keep us long waiting.” 

“ Well, only let a chance of safety present itself—only 
allow that a moment of action be necessary,—where shall 
we find the means of action if we allow ourselves to be 
reduced to physical weakness by inanition?” 

“ When this piece of meat is devoured, uncle, what hope 
w 7 ill there remain unto us ?” 

“ Ncme, m y dear Henry, none. But will it do you any 
good to devour it with your eyes? You appear to me to 
reason like one without will or decision, like a being with¬ 
out energy.” 

Then, cried I, exasperated to a degree which is 
scarcely to be explained, “ you do not mean to tell me—— 
that you—that you—have not lost all hope.’” 

Certainly not,” replied the Professor, with consummate 
coolness. 

“ You mean to tell m.e, uncle, that we shall get out of 
this monstrous subterranean shaft ?” 

“ While there is life there is hope. I beg to assert, 
Henry, that as long as a man’s heart beats, as long as a 
man’s flesh quivers, I do not allow that a. being gifted with 
thought and will can allow himself to despair.” 

What a nerve! The man placed in a position like that 
we occupied must have been very brave to speak like this. 

“ Well,” I cried, “ what do you mean to do ?” 

“ Eat what remains of the food we have in our hands; 
let us swallow the last crumb. It will be, heaven willihg, 


282 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

our last repast. Well, never mind—instead of being ex¬ 
hausted skeletons, we shall be men.” 

“ True,” muttered I in a despairing tone, “ let us take 
our fill.” 

“We must,” replied my uncle, with a deep sigh—“ call 
it what you will.” 

My uncle took a piece of the meat that remained, and 
some crusts of biscuit which had escaped the wreck. He 
divided the whole into three parts. 

Each had one pound of food to last him as long as he 
remained in the interior of the earth. 

Each now acted in accordance with his own private 
character. 

My uncle, the Professor, ate greedily, but evidently 
without appetite, eating simply from some mechanical 
motion. I put the food inside my lips, and hungry as I 
was, chewed my morsel without pleasure, and without 
satisfaction. 

Hans the guide, just as if he had been eider-down hunt¬ 
ing, swallowed every mouthful, as though it were a usual 
affair. He looked like a man equally prepared to enjoy 
superfluity or total want. 

Hans, in all probability, was no more used to starvation 
than ourselves, but his hardy Icelandic nature had pre¬ 
pared him for many sufferings. .As long as he received his 
three rix-dollars every Saturday night, he was prepared 
for anything. 

The fact was, Plans never troubled himself about much 
except his money. Pie had undertaken to serve a certain 
man at so much per week, and no matter what evils befell 
his employer or himself, he never found fault or grumbled, 
so long as his wages were duly paid. 

Suddenly my uncle roused himself. He had seen a smile 
on the face of our guide. I could not make it out. 

“ What is the matter?” said my uncle. 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 28 ? 

“ Schiedam,” said the guide, producing a bottle of this 
precious fluid. 

We drank. My uncle and myself will own to our dying 
day that hence we derived strength to exist until the last 
bitter moment. That precious bottle of Hollands was in 
reality only half-full; but, under the circumstances, it was 
nectar. 

It took some minutes for myself and my uncle to form 
a decided opinion on the subject. The worthy Professor 
swallowed about half a pint and did not seem able to 
drink any more. 

“ Fortrafflig,” said Hans, swallowing nearly all that was 
left. 

“ Excellent—very good,” said my uncle, with as much 
gusto as if he had just left the steps of the club at 
Hamburg. 

I had begun to feel as if there had been one gleam of 
hope. Now all thought of the future vanished! 

We had consumed our last ounce of food, and it was 
five o’clock in the morning! 


284 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


CHAPTER XLII. 

THE VOLCANIC SHAFT. 

Man’s constitution is so peculiar, that his health is 
purely a negative matter. No sooner is the rage of hunger 
Appeased, than it becomes difficult to comprehend the 
meaning of starvation. It is only when you suffer that 
you really understand. 

As to any one who has not endured privation having 
any notion of the matter, it is simply absurd. 

AVith us, after a long fast, some mouthfuls of bread and 
meat, a little mouldy biscuit and salt beef triumphed over 
all our previous gloomy and saturnine thoughts*. 

Nevertheless, after this repast each gave way to his own 
reflections. I wondered what were those of Hans—the 
man of the extreme north, who was yet gifted with the 
fatalistic resignation of Oriental character. But the ut¬ 
most stretch of the imagination would not allow me to 
realize the truth. As for my individual self, my thoughts 
had ceased to be anything but memories of the past,!nd 
were all connected with that upper world which I never 
should have left. I saw it all now, the beautiful house in 
the Konigstrasse, my poor Gretchen, the good Martha; - 
they all passed before my mind like visions of the past! 
Every time any of the lugubrious groanings which were to 
be distinguished in the hollows around fell upon my ears 
I fancied I heard the distant murmur of the great cities 
above my head. 

As for my uncle, always thinking of his science, he 
examined the nature of the shaft by means of a torch 
He closely examined the different strata one above the 
other, m order to recognize his situation by geological 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 256 

theory. This calculation, or rather this estimation, could 
by no means be anything but approximate. But a learned 
man, a j)hilosopher, is nothing if not a philosopher, when 
he keeps his ideas calm and collected; and certainly the 
Professor possessed this quality to perfection. 

I heard him, as I sat in silence, murmuring words of 
geological science. As I understood his object and his 
meaning, I could not but interest myself despite my pre¬ 
occupation in that terrible hour. 

“ Eruptive granite,” he said to himself, “ we are still in 
the primitive epoch. But we are going up—going up, 
still going up. But who knows ? Who knows ? ” 

Then he still hoped. He felt along the vertical sides 
of the shaft with his hand, and some few minutes later, he 
would go on again in the following style— 

“ This is gniess. This is mocashites—silicious mineral. 
Good again; this is the epoch of transition, at all events, 
we are close to them—and then, and then—” 

What could the Professor mean ? Could he, by any 
conceivable means, measure the thickness of the crust of 
the earth suspended above our heads ? Did he possess any 
possible means of making any approximation to this cal¬ 
culation ? No. 

The manometer was wanting, and no summary estima¬ 
tion could take the place of it. 

And yet, as we progressed, the temperature increased in 
the most extraordinary degree, and I began to feel as if I 
were bathed in a hot and burning atmosphere. Never 
before had I felt anything like it. I could only compare 
it to the hot vapor from an iron foundry, when the liquid 
iron is in a state of ebullition and runs over. By degrees, 
and one after the other, Hans, my uncle, and myself had 
taken off our coats and waistcoats. They were unbear¬ 
able. Even the slightest garment was not only uncomfort¬ 
able, but the cause of extreme suffering. 


286 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


“ Are we ascending to a living fire ?” I cried; when, to 
my horror and astonishment, the heat became greater 
than before. 

“ no,” said my uncle, “ it is simply impossible, quite 
impossible.” 

“And yet,” said I, touching the side of the shaft with 
my naked hand, “this wall is literally burning.” 

At this moment, feeling as I did that the sides of this 
extraordinary wall were red hot, I plunged my hands into 
the water to cool them. I drew them back with a cry of 
despair. 

“ The water is boiling!” I cried. 

My uncle, the Professor, made no reply other than a 
gesture of rage and despair. 

Something very like the truth had probably struck his 
imagination. 

But I could take no share in either what was going on, 
or in his speculations. An invincible dread had taken 
possession of my brain and soul. I could only look for¬ 
ward to an immediate catastrophe, such a catastrophe as 
not even the most vivid imagination could have thought 
of An idea, at first vague and uncertain, was gradually 
being changed into certainty. 

I tremulously rejected it at first, but it forced itself upon 
me by degrees with extreme obstinacy. It was so terrible 
an idea that I scarcely dared to whisper it to myself. 

And yet all the while certain, and as it were, involun¬ 
tary observations determined my convictions. By the 
doubtful glare of the torch, I could make out some singu¬ 
lar changes in the granitic strata; a strange and terrible 
phenomenon was about to be produced, in which electri- 
city played a part. 

Then this boiling water, this terrible and excessive heat? 

I determined as a last resource to examine the compass. 

The compass had gone mad! 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 287 

Yes, wholly stark staring mad. The needle jumped 
from pole to pole with sudden and surprising jerks, ran 
round, or as it is said, boxed the compass, and then ran 
suddenly back again as if it had the vertigo. 

I was aware that, according to the best acknowledged 
theories, it was a received notion that the mineral crust 
of the globe is never, and never has been, in a state of 
complete repose. 

The modifications caused by the decomposition of inter¬ 
nal matter, the agitation consequent on the flowing of 
extensive liquid currents, the excessive action of magne¬ 
tism which tends to shake it incessantly, at a time when 
even the multitudinous beings on its surface do not suspect 
the seething process to be going on. 

Still this phenomenon would not have alarmed me 
alone; it would not have aroused in my mind a terrible, 
an awful idea. 

But other facts could not allow my self-delusion to last. 
Terrible detonations, like heaven’s artillery, began to 
multiply themselves with fearful intensity. I could only 
compare them with the noise made by hundreds of heavily- 
laden chariots being madly driven over a stone pavement. 
It was a continuous roll of heavy thunder. 

And then the mad compass, shaken by the wild electric 
phenomena, confirmed me in my rapidly-formed opinion. 
The mineral crust was about to burst, the heavy granite 
masses were about to rejoin, the fissure was about to close, 
the void was about to be filled up, and we poor atoms to 
be crushed in its awful embrace! 

“ Uncle, uncle! ” I cried, “ we are wholly, irretrievably 
lost! ” 

“ What, then, my young friend, is your new cause of 
terror and alarm ? ” he said, in his calmest manner. 

“ What fear you now ?” 

“ What do I fear pow! ” I cried, in fierce and angry 


288 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

tones. “ Do you not see that the walls of the shaft are in 
motion? do you not see that the solid granite masses are 
cracking? do you not feel the terrible, torrid heat? do 
you not observe the awful boiling water on which we float? 
do you not remark this mad needle? every sign and por¬ 
tent of an awful earthquake ? ” 

My uncle coolly shook his head. 

“ An earthquake,” he replied in the most calm and pro¬ 
voking tone. 

“ Yes.” 

“ My nephew, I tell you that you are utterly mistaken,” 
he continued. 

“ Do you not, can you not, recognize all the well-known 
symptoms-” 

"Of an earthquake? by no means. I am expecting 
something far more important.” 

" My brain is strained beyond endurance—what, what 
do you mean ? ” I cried. 

"An eruption, Harry.” 

“An eruption,” I gasped. “We are, then, in the 
volcanic shaft of a crater in full action and vigor.” 

" I have every reason to think so,” said the Professor in 
a smiling tone, " and I beg to tell you that it is the most 
fortunate thing that could happen to us.” 

The most fortunate thing! Had my uncle really and 
truly gone mad ? What did he mean by these awful 
words—what did he mean by this terrible calm, this 
solemn smile ? 

“ What! ” cried I, in the height of my exasperation, "we 
are on the way to an eruption, are we? Fatality has cast 
us into a well of burning and boiling lava, of rocks on fire, 
of boiling water, in a word, filled with every kind of erup¬ 
tive matter? We are about to be expelled, thrown up, 
vomited, spit out of the interior of the earth, in common 
with huge blocks of granite, with showers of cinders and 



A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 289 

ecorise, in a wild whirlwind of flame, and you say—the 
most fortunate thing which could happen to us.” 

Yes, replied the Professor, looking at me calmly from 
under his spectacles, “ it is the only chance which remains 
to us of ever escaping from the interior of the earth to the 
light of day.” 

It is quite impossible that I can put on paper the 
thousand strange, wild thoughts which followed this extra¬ 
ordinary announcement. 

But my uncle was right, quite right, and never had he 
appeared to me so audacious and so convinced as when he 
looked me calmly in the face and spoke of the chances of 
an eruption—of our being cast upon mother earth once 
more through the gaping crater of a volcano! 

Nevertheless, while we were speaking we were still as¬ 
cending ; we passed the whole night going up, or to speak 
more scientifically, in an ascensional motion. The fearful 
noise redoubled ; I was ready to suffocate. I seriously be¬ 
lieved that my last hour was approaching, and yet, so 
strange is imagination, all I thought of was some childish 
hypothesis or other. In such circumstances you do not 
choose your own thoughts. They overcome you. 

It was quite evident that we were being cast upwards by 
eruptive matter; under the raft there was a mass of boil¬ 
ing water, and under this was a heaving mass of lava, and 
an aggregate of rocks which on reaching the summit of 
the water would be dispersed in every direction. 

That we were inside the chimney of a volcano there 
could no longer be the shadow of a doubt. Nothing more 
terrible could be conceived ! 

But on this occasion, instead of Sneffels, an old and 
extinct volcano, we were inside a mountain of fire in full 
activity. Several times I found myself asking, what 
mountain was it, and on what part of the world we should 
be shot out. As if it were of any consequence ! 


290 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

In the northern regions, there could be no reasonable 
doubt about that. Before it went decidedly mad, the 
compass had never made the slightest mistake. From the 
cape of Saknussemm, we had been swept away to the 
northward many hundreds of leagues. Now the question 
was, were we once more under Iceland—should we be 
belched forth on to the earth through the crater of Mount 
Hecla, or should we re-appear through one of the other 
seven fire-funnels of the island? Taking in my mental 
vision a radius of five hundred leagues to the westward, I 
could see under this parallel only the little-known volca¬ 
noes of the north-west coast of America. 

To the east one only existed somewhere about the 
eightieth degree of latitude, the Esk, upon the island of 
Jean Mayen, not far from the frozen regions of Spitzbergen. 

It was not craters that were wanting, and many of them 
were big enough to vomit a^ whole army; all I wished to 
know was the particular one towards which we were 
making with such fearful velocity. 

I often think now of my folly: as if I should ever have 
expected to escape! 

Towards morning, the ascending motion became greater 
and greater. If the degree of heat increased instead of 
decreasing, as we approached the surface of the earth, it 
was simply because the causes were local and wholly due 
to volcanic influence. Our very style of locomotion left in 
my mind no doubt upon the subject. An enormous force, 
a force of some hundred of combined atmospheres pro¬ 
duced by vapors accumulated and long compressed in the 
interior of the earth, were hoisting us upwards with irre¬ 
sistible power. 

But though we were approaching the light of day, to 
what fearful dangers were we about to be exposed ? 

Instant death appeared the only fate which we could ex¬ 
pect or contemplate. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 291 

Soon a dim, sepulchral light penetrated the vertical 
gallery, which became wider and wider. I could make 
out to the right and left long dark corridors like immense 
tunnels, from which awful and horrid vapors poured out. 
Tongues of fire, sparkling and crackling, appeared about 
to lick us up. 

The hour had come ! 

“Look, uncle, look! ” I cried. 

“Well, what you see are the great sulphurous flames. 
Nothing more common in connection with an eruption.” 

“ But if they lap us round! ” I angrily replied. 

“ They will not lap us round,” was his quiet and serene 
answer. 

“ But it will be all the same in the end if they stifle us,” 
I cried. 

“We shall not be stifled. The gallery is rapidly be¬ 
coming wider and wider, and if it be necessary, we will 
presently leave the raft and take refuge in some fissure in 
the rock.” 

“ But the water, the water, which is continually ascend¬ 
ing ? ” I despairingly replied. 

“ There is no longer any water, Harry,” he answered, 
“but a kind of lava paste, which is heaving us up, in com¬ 
pany with itself, to the mouth of the crater.” 

In truth, the liquid column of water had wholly disap¬ 
peared to give place to dense masses of boiling eruptive 
matter. The temperature was becoming utterly insup¬ 
portable, and a thermometer exposed to this atmosphere 
would have marked between 189 and 190 degrees Fahren¬ 
heit. 

Perspiration rushed from every pore. But for the ex¬ 
traordinary rapidity of our ascent we should have been 
stifled. 

Nevertheless, the Professor did not carry out his propo¬ 
sition of abandoning the raft; and he did quite wisely. 


292 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

Those few ill-joined beams offered, any way, a solid 
surface—a support which elsewhere must have utterly 
failed us. 

Towards eight o’clock in the morning a new incident 
startled us. The ascensional movement suddenly ceased. 
The raft became still and motionless. 

“ What is the matter now ? ” I said, querulously, very 
much startled by this change. 

“ A simple halt,” replied my uncle. 

“ Is the eruption about to fail ? ” I asked. 

“ I hope not.” 

Without making any reply, I rose. I tried to look 
around me. Perhaps the raft, checked by some projecting 
rock, opposed a momentary resistance to the eruptive 
mass. In this case, it was absolutely necessary to release 
it as quickly as possible. 

Nothing of the kind had occurred. The column of 
cinders, of scoriae, of broken rocks and earth, had wholly 
ceased to ascend. 

“ I tell you, uncle, that the eruption has stopped,” was 
my oracular decision. 

“Ah,” said my uncle, “you think so, my boy. You 
are wrong. Do not be in the least alarmed ; this sudden 
moment of calm will not last long, be assured. It has al¬ 
ready endured five minutes, and before we are many 
minutes older we shall be continuing our journey to the 
mouth of the crater.” 

All the time he was speaking the Professor continued to 
consult his chronometer, and he was probably right in his 
prognostics. Soon the raft resumed its motion, in a very 
rapid and disorderly way, which lasted two minutes or 
thereabout; and then again it stopped as suddenly as 
before. 

“ Good,” said my uncle, observing the hour, “ in ten 
minutes we shall start again.” 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 293 

“ In ten minutes ? ” 

“ Yes—precisely. We have to do with a volcano, the 
eruption of which is intermittent. We are compelled to 
breathe just as it does.” 

Nothing could be more true. At the exact minute he 
had indicated, we were again launched on high with ex¬ 
treme rapidity. Not to be cast off the raft, it was neces¬ 
sary to hold on to the beams. Then the hoist again ceased. 

Many times since have I thought of this singular phe¬ 
nomenon without being able to find for it any satisfactory 
explanation. Nevertheless, it appeared quite clear to me, 
that we were not in the principal chimney of the volcano, 
but in an accessory conduit, where we felt the counter 
shock of the great and principal tunnel filled by burning 
lava. 

It is impossible for me to say how many times this ma¬ 
noeuvre was repeated. All that I can remember is, that 
on every ascensional motion, we were hoisted up with 
ever-increasing velocity, as if we had been launched from 
a huge projectile. During the sudden halts w T e were 
nearly stifled; during the moments of projection the hot 
air took away our breath. 

I thought for a moment of the voluptuous joy of sud¬ 
denly finding myself in the hyperborean regions with the 
cold 30 degrees below zero! 

My exalted imagination pictured to itself the vast 
snowy plains of the arctic regions, and I was impatient to 
roll myself on the icy carpet of the north pole. 

By degrees my head, utterly overcome by a series of 
violent emotions, began to give way to hallucination. I 
was delirious. Had it not been for the powerful arms of 
Hans the guide, I should have broken my head against 
the granite masses of the shaft. 

I have, in consequence, kept no account of what followed 
for many hours. I have a vague and confused remem- 


294 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

brance of continual detonations, of the shaking of the huge 
granitic mass, and of the raft going round like a spinning- 
top. It floated on the stream of hot lava, amidst a falling 
cloud of cinders. The huge flames roaring, wrapped us 
around. 

A storm of wind which appeared to be cast forth from 
an immense ventilator roused up the interior fires of the 
earth. It was a hot incandescent blast! 

At last I saw the figure of Hans as if enveloped in the 
huge halo of burning blaze, and no other sense remained 
to me but that sinister dread which the condemned victim 
may be supposed to feel when led to the mouth of a can¬ 
non, at the supreme moment when the shot is fired and his 
limbs are dispersed into empty space. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 295 


CHAPTER XLIII. 

DAYLIGHT AT LAST. 

When I opened my eyes I felt the hand of the guide 
clutching me firmly by the belt. With his other hand he 
supported my uncle. I was not grievously wounded, but 
bruised all over in the most remarkable manner. 

After a moment I looked around, and found that I was 
down on the slope of a mountain not two yards from 
a yawning gulf into which I should have fallen had I 
made the slightest false step. Hans had saved me from 
death, while I rolled insensible on the flanks of the crater. 

“ Where are we ? ” dreamily asked my uncle, who lite¬ 
rally appeared to be disgusted at having returned to 
earth. 

The eider-down hunter simply shrugged his shoulders as 
a mark of total ignorance. 

“ In Iceland?” said I, not positively but interrogatively. 

“ Nej” said Hans. 

“ How do you mean ? ” cried the Professor ; “ no—what 
are your reasons ? ” 

“ Hans is wrong,” said I, rising. 

After all the innumerable surprises of this journey, a 
yet more singular one was reserved to us. I expected to 
see a cone covered by snow, by extensive and wide-spread 
glaciers, in the midst of the arid deserts of the extreme 
northern regions, beneath the full rays of a polar sky, be¬ 
yond the highest latitudes. 

But contrary to all our expectations, I, my uncle, and 
the Icelander, were cast upon the slope of a mountain cal¬ 
cined by the burning rays of a sun which was literally 
baking us with its fires. 

I could not believe my eyes, but the actual heat which 


296 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

affected my body allowed me no chance of doubting. We 
came out of the crater half naked, and the radiant star 
from which we had asked nothing for two months, was 
good enough to be prodigal to us of light and warmth—a 
light and warmth we could easily have dispensed with. 

When our eyes were accustomed to the light we had lost 
sight of so long, I used them to rectify the errors of my 
imagination. Whatever happened, we should have been at 
Spitzbergen, and I was in no humor to yield to anything 
but the most absolute proof. 

After some delay, the Professor spoke. 

“ Hem ! ” he said, in a hesitating kind of way, “ it really 
does not look like Iceland. ” 

“ But supposing it were the island of Jean Mayen? ” I 
ventured to observe. 

Not in the least, my boy. This is not one of the vol¬ 
canoes of the north, with its hills of granite and its crown 
of snow.” 

“Nevertheless-” 

Look, look, my boy,” said the Professor, as dogmati¬ 
cally as usual. 

Right above our heads, at a great height, opened the 
crater of a volcano from which escaped, from one quarter 
of an hour to the other, with a very loud explosion, a lofty 
jet of flame mingled with pumice stone, cinders, and lava. 

I could feel the convulsions of nature in the mountain, 
whidh breathed like a huge whale, throwing up from time 
to time fire and air through its enormous vents. 

Below, and floating along a slope of considerable angu¬ 
larity, the stream of eruptive matter spread away to a 
depth which did not give the volcano a height of three 
hundred fathoms. 

Its base disappeared in a perfect forest of green trees, 
among which I perceived olives, fig trees, and vines loaded 
with rich grapes. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OP THE EARTH. 297 

Certainly this was not the ordinary aspect of the Arctic 
regions. About that there could not be the slightest doubt. 

When the eye was satisfied at its glimpse of this ver¬ 
dant expanse, it fell upon the waters of a lovely sea or 
beautiful lake, which made of this enchanted land an island 
of not many leagues in extent. 

On the side of the rising sun was to he seen a little port, 
crowded with houses, and near which the boats and vessels 
of peculiar build were floating upon azure waves. 

Beyond, groups of islands rose above the liquid plain, 
so numerous and close together as to resemble a vast bee¬ 
hive. 

Towards the setting sun, some distant shores were to be 
made out on the edge of the horizon. Some presented the 
appearance of blue mountains of harmonious conforma¬ 
tion; upon others, much more distant, there appeared a 
prodigiously lofty cone, above the summit of which hung 
dark and heavy clouds. 

Towards the north, an immense expanse of water sparkled 
beneath the solar rays, occasionally allowing the extremity 
of a mast or the convexity of a sail bellying to the wind, 
to be seen. 

The unexpected character of such a scene added an 
hundredfold to its marvellous beauties. 

“ Where can we be ?” I asked, speaking in a low and 
solemn voice. 

Hans shut his eyes with an air of indifference, and my 
uncle looked on without clearly understanding. 

“ Whatever this mountain may be,” he said, at last, “ I 
must confess it is rather warm. The explosions do not 
leave off, and I do not think it is worth while to have left 
the interior of a volcano and remain here to receive a huge 
piece of rock upon one’s head. Let us carefully descend 
the mountain and discover the real state of the case. To 
confess the truth, I am dying of hunger and thirst.” 


298 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 

Decidedly the Professor was no longer a truly reflec¬ 
tive character. For myself, forgetting all my necessities, 
ignoring my fatigues and sufferings, I should have re¬ 
mained still for several hours longer—but it was necessary 
to follow my companions. 

The slope of the volcano was very steep and slippery; 
we slid over piles of ashes, avoiding the streams of hot lava 
which glided about like fiery serpents. Still, while we 
were advancing, I spoke with extreme volubility, for my 
imagination was too full not to explode in words. 

“We are in Asia!” I exclaimed; “we are on the coast 
of India, in the great Malay islands, in the centre of 
Oceana. We have crossed the one half of the globe to 
come out right at the antipodes of Europe!” 

“ But the compass!” exclaimed my uncle; “ explain that 
to me !” 

“ Yes,—the compass,” I said, with considerable hesita¬ 
tion. “ I grant that is a difficulty. According to it, we have 
always been going northward.” 

“Then it lied.” 

“ Hem to say it lied is rather a harsh word,” was my 
answer. 

“ Then we are at the north pole—” 

“ The pole—no—well—well I give it up,” was my reply. 
The plain truth was, that there was no explanation pos¬ 
sible. I could make nothing of it. 

And all the while we were approaching this beautiful 
verdure, hunger and thirst tormented me fearfully. Hap¬ 
pily, after two long hours’ march, a beautiful country 
spread out before us, covered by olives, pomegranates, and 
vines, which appeared to belong to anybody and everybody. 

In the state of destitution into which we had fallen, we 
were not particular to a grape. 

What delight it was to press these delicious fruits to our 
lips, and to bite at grapes and pomegranates fresh from the 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 299 

vine. Not far off, near some fresh and mossy grass, under 
the delicious shade of some trees, I discovered a spring of 
fresh watei, into which we voluptuously laved our faces, 
hands, and feet. 

While we were all giving way to the delights of new¬ 
found pleasures, a little child appeared between two tufted 
olive trees. 

“ Ah,” cried I, “ an inhabitant of this happy country.” 

The little fellow was poorly dressed, weak and suffering, 
and appeared terribly alarmed at our appearance. Half 
naked, with tangled, matted and ragged beards, we did 
look supremely ill-favored; and unless the country was a 
bandit land, we were not unlikely to alarm the inhabitants! 

Just as the boy was about to take to his heels, Hans ran 
after him, and brought him back, despite his cries and 
kicks. 

My uncle tried to look as gentle as possible, and then 
spoke in German. 

“ What is the name of this mountain, my friend ? ” 

The child made no reply. 

“ Good,” said my uncle, with a very positive air of con¬ 
viction, “ we are not in Germany.” 

He then made the same demand in English, of which 
language he was an excellent scholar. 

The child shook its head and made no reply. I began 
to be considerably puzzled. 

«Is he dumb ? ” cried the Professor, who was rather 
proud of his polyglot knowledge of languages, and 
making the same demand in French. 

The boy only stared in his face, 

“ I must perforce try him in Italian,” said my uncle, 
with a shrug. 

“ Dove noi siamo ? ” 

“ Yes, tell me where we are?” I added, impatiently and 
eagerly. 


300 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 
Again the boy remained silent. 

“My fine fellow, do you or do you not mean to speak?” 
cried my uncle, who began to get angry. He shook him. 
and spoke another dialect of the Italian language. 

“ C° me si noma questa isola ?” —what is the name of 
this island ? 

“Stromboli” replied the rickety little shepherd, dashing 
away from Hans and disappearing in the olive groves. 

We thought little enough about him. 

Stromboli! What effect on the imagination did these 
few words produce ! We were in the centre of the Medi¬ 
terranean ; amidst the Eastern archipelago of mythologi¬ 
cal memory; in the ancient Strongylos, where ^lolus kept 
the wind and the tempest chained up. And those blue 
mountains, which rose towards the rising of the sun, were 
the mountains of Calabria. 

And that mighty volcano which rose on the southern 
horizon was Etna, the fierce and celebrated Etna! 
“Stromboli! Stromboli!” I repeated to myself. 

My uncle played a regular accompaniment to my ges¬ 
tures and words. We were singing together like an 
ancient chorus. 

. ^ w ^ at a journey—what a marvellous and extraor- 
dmary journey! Here we had entered the earth by one 
volcano, and we had come out by another. And this 
other was situated more than twelve hundred leagues from 
Sneffels, from that drear country of Iceland cast away on 
the confines of the earth. The wondrous chances of this 
expedition had transported us to the most harmonious and 
beautiful of earthly lands. We had abandoned the region 
of eternal snows for that of infinite verdure, and had left 
over our heads the grey fog of the icy regions to come 
back to the azure sky of Sicily! 

After a delicious repast of fruits and fresh water, we 
again continued our journey in order to reach the port of 



OUR CONDITION AT THE END OF THE JOURNEY 































































■ •,* - 





































































































































































































































' ■ 














* - 


















A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 301 

Stromboli. To say how we had reached the island would 
scarcely have been prudent. The superstitious character 
of the Italians would have beeil at work, and we should 
have been called demons vomited from the infernal regions. 
It was therefore necessary to pass for humble and unfortu¬ 
nate shipwrecked travellers. It was certainly less strik¬ 
ing and romantic, but it was decidedly safer. 

As we advanced, I could hear my worthy uncle mutter¬ 
ing to himself— 

“ But the compass. The compass most certainly marked 
north. This is a fact I cannot explain in any way.” 

“ Well, the fact is,” said I, with an air of disdain, “we 
must not explain anything. It will be much more easy.” 

“I should like to see a professor of the Johanneum 
Institution, who is unable to explain a cosmic phenomenon 
—it would indeed be strange.” 

And speaking thus ; my uncle, half naked, his leathern 
purse round his loins, and his spectacles upon his nose, 
became once more the terrible Professor of Mineralogy. 

An hour after leaving the wood of olives, we reached 
the fort of San Vicenza, where Hans demanded the price 
of his thirteenth week of service. My uncle paid him, 
with very many warm shakes of the hand. 

At that moment, if he did not indeed quite share our 
natural emotion, he allowed his feelings so far to give way 
as to indulge in an extraordinary expression for him. 

With the tips of two fingers he gently pressed our hands 
and smiled. 


302 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EAR TH. 


CHAPTER XLIV. 

THE JOURNEY ENDED. 

This is the final conclusion of a narrative which will be 
probably disbelieved even by people who are astonished 
at nothing. I am, however, armed at all points against 
human incredulity. 

We were kindly received by the Strombolite fishermen, 
who treated us as shipwrecked travellers. They gave us 
clothes and food. After a delay of forty-eight hours, on 
the 31st of September a little vessel took us to Messina, 
where a few days of delightful and complete repose re¬ 
stored us to ourselves. 

On Friday, the 4th October, we embarked in the Vol- 
turus, one of the postal packets of the Imperial Messagerie 
of France; and three days later we landed at Marseilles, 
having no other care on our minds but that of our pre¬ 
cious but erratic compass. This inexplicable circumstance 
tormented me terribly. On the 9th of October, in the 
evening, we reached Hamburg. 

What was the astonishment of Martha, what the joy of 
Gretchen! I will not attempt to define it. 

“ Now then, Harry, that you really are a hero/’ she 
said, there is no reason why you should ever leave me 
again.” 

I looked at her. She was weeping tears of joy. 

I leave it to be imagined if the return of Professor 
Hardwigg made or did not make a sensation in Hamburg. 
Thanks to the indiscretion of Martha, the news of his de¬ 
parture for the Interior of the Earth had been*', read 
over the whole world. 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 303 

No one would believe it—and when they saw him come 
back in safety they believed it all the less. 

But the presence of Hans and many stray scraps of in¬ 
formation by degrees modified public opinion. 

Then my uncle became a great man, and I the nephew 
of a great man; which, at all events, is something. Ham¬ 
burg gave a festival in our honor. A public meeting of 
the Johanneum Institution was held, at which the Pro¬ 
fessor related the whole story of his adventures, omitting 
only the facts in connection with the compass. 

That same day he deposited in the archives of the town 
the document he had found written by Saknussemm, and 
he expressed his great regret that circumstances, stronger 
than his will, did not allow him to follow the Icelandic 
traveller’s track into the very Centre of the Earth. He 
was modest in his glory, but his reputation only increased. 

So much honor necessarily created for him many 
envious enemies. Of course they existed, and as his theo¬ 
ries, supported by certain facts, contradicted the system 
of science upon the question of central heat, he main¬ 
tained his own views both with pen and speech against the 
learned of every country. Although I still believe in the 
theory of central heat, I confess that certain circum¬ 
stances, hitherto very ill defined, may modify the laws of 
such natural phenomena. 

At the moment when these questions were being dis¬ 
cussed with interest, my uncle received a rude shock—one 
that he felt very much. Hans, despite everything he 
could say to the contrary, quitted Hamburg; the man to 
whom we owed so much would not allow us to pay our 
deep debt of gratitude. He was taken with nostalgia; a 
love for his Icelandic home. 

“ Farvel,” said he, one day, and with this one short word 
of qgfieu, he started for Reykjawik, which he soon reached 

jafety. 



304 A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OF THE EARTH. 


We were deeply attached to our brave eider-duck 
hunter. His absence will never cause him to be forgotten 
by those whose lives he saved, and I hope, at some not 
distant day, to see him again. 

To conclude, I may say that our Journey into the In¬ 
terior of the Earth created an enormous sensation through¬ 
out the civilized world. It was translated and printed in 
many languages. All the leading.journals published ex¬ 
tracts from it, which were commentated, discussed, at¬ 
tacked, and supported with equal animation by those who 
believed in its episodes, and by those who were utterly in¬ 
credulous. 

Wonderful! My uncle enjoyed during his lifetime all 
the glory he deserved; and he was even offered a large 
sum of money, by Mr. Barnum, to exhibit himself in the 
United States; while I am credibly informed by a traveller 
that he is to be seen in waxwork at Madame Tussaud’s! 

But one care preyed upon his mind, a care which ren¬ 
dered him very unhappy. One fact remained inexplica¬ 
ble—that of the compass. For a learned man to be baf¬ 
fled by such an inexplicable phenomenon was very aggra¬ 
vating. But heaven was merciful, and in the end my 
Uncle was happy. 

One day, while he put some minerals belonging to his 
collection in order, I fell upon the famous compass and 
examined it keenly. 

For six months it had lain unnoticed and untouched. 

I looked at it with curiosity, which soon became sur¬ 
prise. I gave a loud cry. The Professor, who was at 
hand, soon joined me. 

“ What is the matter ?” he cried. 

“ The compass! ” 

“ What then?” 

“Why its needle points to the south and not to the 
north.” 


A JOURNEY TO THE CENTRE OP THE EARTH. 305 

“ My dear boy, you must be dreaming.” 

“ I am not dreaming. See the poles are changed.” 

“ Changed! ” 

My uncle put on his spectacles, examined the instru¬ 
ment, and leaped with joy, shaking the whole house. 

A clear light fell upon our minds. 

“ Here it is! ” he cried, as soon as he had recovered the 
use of his speech, “ after we had once passed Cape Sak- 
nussemm, the needle of this compass pointed to the south¬ 
ward instead of the northward.” 

“ Evidently.” 

“ Our error is now easily explained. But to what phe¬ 
nomenon do we owe this alteration in the needle! ” 

“Nothing more simple.” 

“ Explain yourself, my boy. I am on thorns.” 

“ During the storm, upon the Central Sea, the ball of 
fire which made a magnet of the iron in our raft, turned 
our compass topsy-turvy.” 

“ Ah ! ” cried the Professor, with a loud and ringing 
laugh, “ it was a trick pf that inexplicable electricity.” 

From that hour my uncle was the happiest of learned 
men, and I the happiest of ordinary mortals. For my 
pretty Yirland girl, abdicating her position as ward, took 
her place in the house in King Street (Konigstrasse) in 
the double quality of niece and wife. 

AVe need scarcely mention that her uncle was the illus¬ 
trious Professor Hardwigg, corresponding member of all 
the scientific, geographical, mineralogical and geological 
societies of the five quarters of the globe. 


THE END. 





























> 







































V 






























- - 
























































mm 



















' 






















* 


























- 





























- 











Works of Jules Verne , 

PUBLISHED BY 

Scribner, Armstrong & Co. 

THE COMPLETE AND AUTHORIZED EDITIONS. 

CAUTION. 

The public are cautioned against any editions of the works named below 
which do not bear the imprint of SCRIBNER, ARMSTRONG & CO. 
Any edition of these particular works published under other imprints are 
pirated, and cannot fail to be inferior in every particular. Editions 
bearing our imprint are issued under a direct arrangement with the 
French and English publishers of JULES VERNE, and are authorized 
in text and complete in illustration. 


MERIDIANA: 

The Adventures of Three Englishmen and Three Rus¬ 
sians in South Africa. By Jules Verne. Translated from the 
French. With 48 illustrations. One vol. i2mo, cloth, gilt side and 
back. Price, 75 cents. The only edition authorized in text and 
complete in illustrations. 

FROM THE EARTH TO THE MOON 

In 97 Hours and 20 Minutes and a Trip Around It. Eighty 
full-page illustrations, beautifully bound in cloth, black and gilt. 
Price, $3.00. 

A JOURNEY to the CENTRE of the EARTH. 
Translated from the French of Jules Verne, author of “ From the 
Earth to the Moon Direct ,” “ The Mysterious Island &c., &c. 
With fifty-two illustrations by Riou. 

Popular edition , 20 illustrations , 75 c. Complete edition, 53 illustra¬ 
tions, on super-calendered paper, handsomely bound in cloth, black and 
g'ilt, beveled boards, $3.00. 

SCRIBNER, ARMSTRONG & CO., 

654 BROADWAY, NEW YORK 





-A. CAPITAL STORY 

— BY — 

JULES VERNE 

Author °f “A Journey to the Centre of the'Earth." 



THE I 

TO TELE 





In 97 Honrs, 20 Miimtes, 

AND A TRIP AROUND IT. 


EIGHTY FULL- PAGE ILLUSTRATION 8, 


One vol., 12mo, bevelled boards, $ 3.00. 


This is one of the most stirring and exciting of Jules Verne’s famous 
and popular stories. Three adventurers take passage for the moon in 
a hollow, conical shell, weighing 20,000 lbs., and projected from a can¬ 
non 900 feet long by the explosion of 400,000 lbs. of gun-cotton. The 
tremendous results of this explosion; the rush through space of the 
shell and its passengers; the extent to which they were able to con¬ 
quer the laws of gravitation, and the results of their extraordinary 
exploit, make up as thrilling a series of adventures as the fancy of this 
very imaginative French author is capable of painting. Numerous facts 
m philosophy, astronomy, and other sciences, are woven into the story 
which is spiced with not a little good-humored satire upon American 
peculiarities, for the scene of the narrative is laid to a great extent in 
the United States. 

Sent post-paid on receipt of price, by the Publishers, 

SCRIBNER, ARMSTRONG- & CO., 

601 Broadway , New York . 






.. ‘The very best, the most sensible, tl\e most practical. 
tl\e most honest book or\ tl\is matter of getting up good 
dinners, and livipg ii\ a deceit Christian way, that has yet 
foupd its way ir\ our household.”— Watchman and Reflector. 


COMMON SENSE 


In the Household. 

A Manual of Practical Housewifery, 

By MARION HARLAND, 

Author of “Alone,” “Hidden Path,” “Nemesis,” Ac., Ao* 
One vol. i2mo, doth. Price.ft, 7( 


SEE WHATTHE CRITICS, AND PRACTICAL HOUSEKEEPERS, say of it: 

And now we have from another popular novelist a cookery book, whereof our house¬ 
keeper (this literary recorder is not a bachelor) speaks most enthusiastically. She says 
that simplicity and clearness of expression, accuracy of detail, a regard to economy oi 
material, and certainty of good results, are requisites in a useful receipt-book for the 
kitchen, and Marion Harland has comprehended all these. That she has by experience 
proved the unsatisfactoriness of housekeepers’ helps in general is shown by the arrange¬ 
ment of her book. She has appended a star to such recipes as, after having tned them 
herself, she can recommend as safe and generally simple. Such a directory will be a 
great help to one who goes to the book for aid in preparing a pleasant and savory meal 
without much experience in cooking. The language is so simple, and the directions so 
plain, that a reasonably intelligent cook might avail herself of it to vary her manner of 
preparing even ordinary dishes. The introduction to the book should be printed as a 
tract and put in every house. The simple advice for the management of servants, the 
general directions at the head of each department of cooking, and the excellent pages on 

the sick-room, make as complete an aid to housekeepers as can well be desired.”_ Har* 

ftps Monthly. 

“ In the hands of the author, whose name is well known in another department of 
literature, the subject has been treated with thoroughness and skill, showing that a little 
common sense may be as successful in the concoction of a toothsome viand as in the com¬ 
position of \ romance.”— N. Y. Daily Tribune. 

“ It inspires us with a great respect for the housewifery of a literary lady, and we 
cannot err in predicting for it a wide popularity.”— N. Y. Evening Post. 

“Unites the merits of a trustworthy receipt-book with the freshness of a familial 
talk on household affairs.”— Albany Evening Journal. 

“ The directions are clear, practical, and so good in their way that the only wonder is, 
how any one head could hold so many pots, ketdes, and pans, and such a world of ga»- 
tronomic good things.”— Hearth and Home. 

“ The recipes are clearly expressed, easy to follow, and not at all expensive. Th* 
suggestions about household affairs are chic. On a test comparison with three othet 
American cook-books, it comes out ahead upon every count. Beyond this exjerto credo 
nothing more need be said.”— Christian Union. 

Copies sent , post-paid, on receipt of the price, by 

SCRIBNER, ARMSTRONG & CO., 

6S4 Broadway, New York 






A New Novel Worth Reading. 


THE SECOND VOLUME OF THE “LIBRARY OF CHOICE FICTIOI 







OR, THE BEGGARS. 


|1HE FOUNDERS OF THE DUTCH REPUBLIC.) 


By J. B. DELIEFDE. 

Cno vol. 8vo, uniform with “At His Gates.” Cloth, $1.25 j Paper, 75 < 


This is a story of love and adventure in times which are full of the most romantic inter 
The characters are drawn with wonderful clearness; they attract the warmest sympathy £ 
the flrst, and every reader must follow their fortunes to the close with the deepest intern t. 


CRITICAL NOTICES. 


From the Philadelphia Daily Age. 

“What we especially commend is the sustained interest of the storv without (he 
CSSSIJW Unostentatious as it is interesting, the rea^mTTil JSlS 

From the Boston Commonwealth. 

a striki . ng and fascinating story. All historical students will be pleaded wit! 
while to the general reader it has the highest qualities of a successful novel.” 

From the Buffalo Express. 

“It is well written and displays much force and vigor.” 

From the Watchman and Reflector. 

From the Philadelphia Press. 

on fad” 6 St017 iS ° rigina1, Spirited ’ and ’ th °ugh imbued with romance, evidently b< 

From the Boston Post. 

“It is a spirited and interesting story.” 


“Extremely well written.” 


From the New York World. 


Sent free of charge on receipt of the price by 

SCRIBNER, ARMSTRONG & CO., 

554 Broadway, New Yorl 









Mrs. Oliphant’s Latest and Best No 


Seventh Thousand Now Beady. 


HIS G-ATES. 

By Mrs. OLIPHANT, 

Author of “Chronicles of Carlingford,” “Ombra,” “The Three Brothers,” &c. 

One vol. 8vo, with 31 Illustrations, - - . Cloth, $1.50; Paper, $1.00 


NOTICES OF THE PRESS. 

From the Louisville Courier-Journal. 

We can say emphatically of this novel that it is easily the best of her stories, and it is one 
of the most closely constructed, handsomely written and absorbingly interesting that we have 
read for a long time. It is a better novel, to our mind than any woman, “George Eliot” 
excepted, has given to the world since Charlotte Brontd laid down her pen. In her portraiture 
of Helen and Robert Drummond, Mrs. oliphant exhibits the most searching analysis of char¬ 
acter, the keenest insight of nature, and the clearest appreciation of all those tendencies, emo¬ 
tions, foibles and ambitions which go oO modify human action and life. The book is exciting 
but there is nothing morbid or sensational about it. It is good, healthy reading about such 
matters as any of us may be called to play our part in.” 

From the Detroit Daily Jnion. 

“In the present work are delineations of characters so true and pure as to prove that the 
author has a thorough knowledge of the better side of human nature; and while there are no 
‘ villains of the deepest dye , 1 there are also no types of perfection.” 

From the Rochester Democrat and Chronicle. 

“ Marked by excellences of high order. Whether we look for that subtle knowledge of the 
forces cf the human heart, or that masterly description of its hot leaps when failing blood 
incites to passionate action, we find this writer ready to satisfy this craving.” 

From the Buffalo Commercial Advertiser. 

“Revealing a remarkable knowledge of human nature and keen intellectual appreciation 
of the completeness of detail essential to a really good story.” 

From the Portland Transcript. 

“In this story the characters are strongly individualized, the interest is thoroughly human* 
and the plot is so ingeniously constructed that the interest is sustained to the end.” 

From the Albany Evening Journal. 

“One of the very best of the numerous excellent works which have been written by its 
accomplished author.” 

From the Missouri Republican. 

“ The novel is a very entertaining one.” 



N. B.—AT HIS GATES is the initial volume of a Library of Choice Fiction wAtch 
Messrs. S., A. dk Co. are to issue. Prospectuses sent on application. 


Sent free of chmrge upon receipt oj the price by the Publishers , 

SCRIBNER, ARMSTRONG & CO., 

654- Broadway, New York 







SAXE HOLM’S STORIES: 

INCLUDING 

“ Draxy Miller’s Dowry,” The Elder’s Wife,” 
“Whose Wife Was She?” “The One-Legged Dancers,” 
“How One Woman Kept Her Husband,” 

“ Esther Wynn’s Love Letters.” 

One vol. 12mo, cloth, full gilt, $1.75; plain, $1.50. 


THESE stories are unique in recent literature for their intensity, their fascina¬ 
tion, their thorough knowledge of the human heart, and the marvelous powers of 
description which they display. The gems of poetry scattered through their beautiful 
and subtile fabric constitute one of their most interesting and attractive characteristics, 
and warrant the verdict universally pronounced, as the stories have from time to time 
appeared in “ Scribner’s Monthly,” that SAXE HOLM is one of the most versatile 
and accomplished of American writers of fiction. 


| CRITICAL NOTICES. 

Who ‘ Saxe Holm ’ is we do not know, but no one of the magazine contributors of the 
present day writes better stories than she. Her characters are strongly drawn, and she goes 
right to the heart of human experience as one who knows the way. ... We heartily com¬ 
mend them as vigorous, wholesome, and sufficiently exciting stories.”— Advance. 

“ The sfcodes of Saxe Holm are among the very best of recent writing. They are simple 
narratives of homely occurrences, and win to the reading by a disregard of deeply laid sen¬ 
sations and startling denouement.”— Utica Herald. 

“ There are six of these stories. Not one of them can be called dull. Some of th»m are 
peculiarly entertaining, and all are written in a lively, animated style. They show both origin¬ 
ality and the art of successful narration along with considerable power in conceiving charac¬ 
ters.”— Churchman. 

‘•The collection will repay those who prefer short stories to more elaborate fiction, and 
affect all pleasantly .”—Philadelphia North American. 

‘ As we have often remarked in these columns, the writing of a good, short story is one 
of the most difficult of literary achievements. Not more than half a dozen American writers 
are equal to it; and when we find one who is not only equal, but, one might say, superior to it, 
it is a duty as well as a pleasure to make the public a sharer in our discovery. We do not 
hesitate to say that ‘ Draxy Miller’s Dowry’ is the best short story that any American writer 
has produced within half a dozen years at least .”—From the Literary World. 


*** For 8ale h v Booksellers generally. Will be sent , postpaid , upon 
receipt of the pnce by the publishers , 

SCRIBNER, ARMSTRONG & CO., 

654 Broadway, New York . 








THE NOVEL OF THE YEAR. 


- 

ARTHUR BONNICASTLE, 

By Dr. J. G-. HOLLAND, 

Author of “ Bitter-Sweet ,” “ Kathrina," “ Titcomb's Letters," dbc. 


WITH TWELVE FULL-PAGE ILLUSTRATIONS BY 

MARY A. HALLOCK. 


One Vol. 12mo, $1.75 

Arthur Bonnicastle is the most mature and finished prose work 
of its popular author. Autobiographic in form, it is partly so in material 
likewise; and while of thrilling interest as a story, it presents the ripe, 
results of a life of earnest action, and thought. The great lesson of the 
book is self-respect and self-reliance—the evil influence of dependence 
being exemplified in different characters and circumstances, by the youth 
of Arthur and the life of Peter Mullens. For character-drawing, purpose, 
pathos, style and savor of the soil, ARTHUR BONNICASTLE is remark¬ 
able among the novels of the time. 

-»4-«- 

DR. HOLLAND’S WORKS. 


Each in One Volume 12mo. 


•BITTER-SWEET ; a Poem . . §1 50 

•KATHRINA; a Poem . . . 1 50 

•LETTERS TO YOUNG PEOPLE, 1 50 

GOLD-FOIL, hammered from Pop¬ 
ular Proverbs . . . . 1 75 

♦LESSONS IN LIFE . . . 1 75 

•PLAIN TALKS on Familiar Sub¬ 
ject* .1 75 

LETTERS TO THE JONESES , 1 75 


MISS GILBERT’S CAREER . . $2 00 

BAY PATH.2 00 

THE MARBLE PROPHECY, and 
other Poems . . . . . 1 50 

GARNERED SHEAVES, Complete 
Poetical Works, “ Bitter-Sweet,” 

“ Kathrina,” “ Marble Phrophecy,” 
red line edition, beautifully illus¬ 
trated.4 00 


• These six volumes are Issued in Cabinet size (16mo), “Brightwood Edition,” at 
ume prices as above. 








M Infinite Ricl\es ir\ a Little Rooi^.”— Marlowe. 


THE 



.A-B BAC 



Personal reminiscences of famous 
poets, novelists, wits and humorists, artists, actors, 
musicians, and the like. 

Edited by RICHARD HENRY STODDARD. 


NOW READY THE INITIAL VOLUME: 




CHORLEY, PLANCHE, and YOUNG. 

One volume, square 12mo. beautifully bound in extra cloth, 
black and gilt, price $1.50. 


Seldom has so much amusement been crowded between a single set of not large covers 
as may be found in the first volume of the BRIC-A-BRAC SERIES. Owing to Mr. Stoddard’s 
areful and judicious editing, we have here in a nutshell all the best things from the th- ee 
ecentiy issued books of biography and reminiscence, by or about Chorley, the Athemeum’s 
musical critic Planche, the popular dramatist, and Young the eminent actor. The pa-es 

actors ^ Wlth d ® scriptlone ' <l ui P 8 and anecdotes anent famous philosophers, poets wits 
actors. Singers, politicians-men and women now out of the world in which thev were 
once so busy and conspicuous. It would require the repetition of the entire index [o give 
III Jftwh „ nUmber of inte resting people discussed and described here. Napoleon 

ZCTjr h ° DdeaSl : >iUBt b6f0re h6 SP ° rtCd th6 fam ° US real one at Boulogne- 
’ n querulous ways; delightful Malibran; our own Hawthorne- Bvron 
the reckless ; Count D’Orsay, still princely in his poverty; Thackeray the rollicksome • Bui 

is not room 7 BIeSS1Dgt ° n ' Tom Hood ’ and 8COresof others,for whose names even there 

CRITICAL NOTICES. 

" N ° m ° re be carried into the country or to the sea-shore to 

fill up the inches of time which intervene between the pleasures of the summer holidays 

"If this first volume is a fair specimen of his [the editor’s) judgment and skill, the 

senes will prove first-class and popular, among lovers of pure literature.’ ’-ProH^ 
Press. 

"A well-dressed book, In a light May suit, with a spring overcoat .... None more 
entertaining for the odd hours of leisure, and especially for the after-dinner breathing-time 
of day has for along time been published. ... We commend the book to the summer 

tourist who can be content with anything better than a novel, and will condescend to be 
amused.” —Worcester Gazette. 

I tb M K S ‘°? a * rd ' 8 WOrk appe “ rs *° be done well-nigh perfectly. There is not a dull page 
in the book. — N. Y. Evemivg Poet. ^ 

• 4 * a* 




















■ v * 






- 





o u// \vyr ^ ^ ^ * *vV </> o 

- .MX'* ,v ^ * V"^*f * ' x >\ - 

\ . ry t «S S> -i ti' ✓ s & t, 

'>'.v” "Jj , V 0 *' V\ ^■,>* '•*'>' v *‘-*; V 0 * 1 



%. *,W-V a c . J- % 

j>- ,\w*, % v> v i •"'> .o'- N - ” 

r- ..I* A. <* .- ^ (2 5 » * _ . a^N 



.Y 


fjy 

a\ ’ , v i b * Y' 

■ A . v -y o 

\ ^ J? ' Y , * 





<V> 
oV V 

• l ' ^ 

* « s ,\ 

« <£> «V , * 

^ ^ aN 

^ 4 - V? 

\ 0 o. » ^ 

y A ♦">' 

\ V y * a , % * 8 1 1 * v^° O * * r °% * 3 •* 0 ' J - 

A ^ -n *<* w 




0 N 0 ♦ *<s> 


^ C'> 

<$>' <v - \. : 

** ^ ^ ^ 

Y ; » N, '<. '<*> '**' A> .VI. « Y 

0 V* %. * &S!72*Cf 3 C*' 1 *\r- ^ > 

lVNk ./* V J > V*tS ^ C ^ r^sSx^L. + 

oo. * * a . 

oS -V*, 

» I ' s s f On 0 ^ ^ 8 I \ * '0 

^ s O. V' > .O^* s s 



^^;V , ‘ >°.c ^ <• .;v ; :* 

O 0 X c y' ^ vl 4 " ^ 

^ C ^ -r 

C . '% '+ *€£&** A 

.>° A. .v—' v x\. 



V- %^‘ 

















o Li 


V x * 

X '5, y 0 


,sG « v 1 6 * '*o 

.*» . v -i D 




„cr t 0 N c * "V, 

G * _r<^N\ ^ ^ 

^ rSSWM ^ 



:«PK"* ’“O' ;«*-*■ 

A ^ 

,o° c c % A* *G *, - 

0 Al^v* C> \> O‘o, > a* s'* v >* ‘ C . 

% -*& "' s ->fc "Pa V- <? <5> <* - ,'Ji ' ' c#-' "?s *■ Sp 

* JJfllls ' % <$ * ' ' A a % <A * t ^ 

■- A ;B« A «•,* 


- aV 

^ ' / °*^ ^G' 

0 N 0- 


v -*> 

^ ^ ^ \ ,-y 

°j ,o* ,° N c ♦ A ' ** s ,-'■*• 

- W .\<^|V- ^ •*' 


<P $ 


,v 


« °0. „* 

A vV 

> A ^ ^ 

A' A *■ ' 

\v ^ if 




•> J - . „ 

C^> tf <i ^ ^ o N 

V- 0 * *• * aP o « 

* <y c 

% ° (P S 

*0 o' : ^ 

A 

A^L. <>■ 

r> <~ 




Ci_ ^ N - - 

^/- * 0 V 0 ■> A 

\ > * Y * 0 /• 



/V 

%r A 

Ly -- /. 

c xA' V>„ ° 4 ■ '\\G >T A Gv. - ;p'i 

* 'V ^ , K vkSF * A/ <<■ * 

. ^ ^ \ a & ■■> ^ ^ A.'f s . 

.A ^ y o , . * -,G 'y , .s s A 

* * a\ _ V l 6 



o ' * k " A A- : 

A 4'N° ,\ V X <r 

-v V ’• 



X. cf. V- / 

c^v ^ '' - O ,G) c* ✓ 

0/' V > 8 1 '* ^ S^ ? / X/ V c . ' 3 N 

i ^ ^ % 

<f> «' 


o (O 


s* "* feS ' -4 a v ■ > 

°- ^O^x " 4 ^G <* ^/ l v. i S S A 

r 0‘ , °- Nf; # ^ v <* v l 

r 0 * ^ z 1 ^ 

• <S ^ ^ ^ a\ 

o 0 X j>-*« , A r » t t 



"o o' , ^ 


^ % *■ * 

v' «.'*"/■ > 

<i> <\" <v f 

* A\ *>-? A 0 '<C 



^ A >.° = y -u ' ^ 

'' A 0 o .' A' *- * 

■ 0 ^ b r\ ^ \'?' V Cp* > 

'“ .O* *'”'*% " K v> 

•* - **^'*\> V v ;.(VG •%. 

'-'/. .<\ X a i\',»,/A. O -$"a 




•X^ V 


® -$ A- 

1 *'X' # “V°"" ';■ 'aV^VV' 1 

•f ^ v ,-.' --A /■ •>, A 'i' 

aV = ' *L- y „~ 



"o o 


c 



•> ^ 0 ' ' % / ’ y . 0 %- ' "-A* % >° s , , ; •> 

\* ^ Y 0 ^ > * 0 n v ' * cv, 

t *o x ^*/ ^ 


V 


'vP_ 

<p 



























' 

(:} 


LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 


0QD227642 c )fi 


e i n 

- ■ 4 f 


%» i i 
iff t - 


; * 3 Milt ^ 
H)‘: !< : j 

,.‘-,2 J 

; 

I* 1 • . l - • II I 

'i • • 

‘ >'' ' . . * 

* .- < t 

• t * w t, , 

V « ■. f ] . • 

I' * I . I « 

■ : 

osHHH 

5 |* iMt'J 

l - » . t • • l 

♦ l r > v • • 

,> *: ► ; » • T » 

■ • . . ■ . i - 1 •. 

» I ' 

’* ’•f £ 

j • * • *-.«• 

» 7 ■ i 


‘T -;5 !* u' ?' 1 ‘!j • ;. 

• >. •' 1 ' . ■; >- - 1 . : • 
/ j *'= “i '*f ■ f 1 ? * 

»*; ' *•; 1 » i • ■ 0 J f i» >• - V' S i 1 I V I ,• 




\. * 1 A, 

» 4 a idT» r '-rA* * ‘ 


; • '* • • •• 

■ ■ • 

• • r; *•*; . 

■ } W. ’ >•'»' v> 

1 « /T 

A' If, i 5 ’i ...» V: ■ if c *i*■ f *v 

, * . ■ ■ 

' ’ . 


*v < v*x r.U i'. .// • 

/ •. /V* ;•:« > ' ; J 1 / •• 4 1 1 . 1 i.. 

.1 • i r . 2 *i . .1 ' * ' i • . - 

*4f < ~X 1 • > > ;■ ;• .1 V : Xf ' ?; = 
^ - ■ 

• 'S'- i . . - . ;-•%•' « • • 

> r 1 1 \ * 1 « .» . ■ • . 

» 

?u<i 1 r,r\ 


• l 4 . t' . * • . , .♦ IT i •• - 

. * 1 # it . , d , A * AV j * ; ' - is . ,• 

f ■ t* »*J e • 4 ’ { , ■ t* l 

^ »«» / -» ,/ ;*: 

i I f : t 1 ' : . • ■ ' * 


•' I t : » : • 

■ 




‘ >' »:• 6 ; ; • ,j f ■ * 

' f >n\r* j 

' * ’ J ■ 1 v , 1 ; /•. 1 C ,A 

; / f if imi , r . • v r' 

- J • 1 '• / > , 

* l , , . • r * * S • • 1 r , 1 1 / * .• . 

* « - r . . V/ . 1 J 1 r ^ • • 1 * . 

v. ij ? i' VV •' 

i » i r*‘ 1. t ,* ^ i! tJ • •- / 1 «i 


2“ 1 * > 

I X* 


;.v(j:' 'iyjirth- 

, .ItIT'If i 

I K 


J \t[± 


*./ :» ufitUu 

1 '. * r- • 4 . 

2 4 J ^ 2'^ \Jr}f ' *• • •? ■ / 

t f A' >' l ■ ’ • *•; 1 c 

jL* .f * J r 11 -l.t : 1 


• .* t 


[cftT 

j A *;, 


2 V *.i 


•? . * . A\ / i: 

















































































